A16b 1310 0010 01 Power Unit Fanuc Manual PDF

DATASHEET
FANUC
A16B-1310-0010-01
OTHER SYMBOLS:
RGB ELEKTRONIKA AGACIAK CIACIEK

SPÓŁKA JAWNA
Jana Dlugosza 2-6 Street

51-162 Wrocław www.rgbelektronika.pl
Poland
[email protected]
+48 71 325 15 05
www.rgbautomatyka.pl
www.rgbautomatyka.pl
www.rgbelektronika.pl
YOUR
PARTNER IN
MAINTENANCE
Repair this product with RGB ELEKTRONIKA ORDER A DIAGNOSIS ∠
LINEAR
ENCODERS PLC
SYSTEMS
INDUSTRIAL
COMPUTERS
ENCODERS CNC
CONTROLS
SERVO AMPLIFIERS
MOTORS
CNC
MACHINES
OUR SERVICES
POWER
SUPPLIERS
OPERATOR
SERVO
PANELS
DRIVERS
At our premises in Wrocław, we have a fully equipped servicing facility. Here we perform all the repair
works and test each later sold unit. Our trained employees, equipped with a wide variety of tools and
having several testing stands at their disposal, are a guarantee of the highest quality service.
Buy this product at RGB AUTOMATYKA BUY ∠

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Series 0 / 00 / 0-Mate
Connection Manual (Hardware)
GFZ-61393E/06 September 1998

GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
©Copyright 1998 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
B–61393E/05 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s–1
B–61393E/06 Table of Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S–1
1. PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1 EXTERNAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OF CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2 INSTALLATION CONDITION OF CNC AND SERVO UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.3 POWER CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.4 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF THE MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC
CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.5 THERMAL DESIGN OF THE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.5.1 Temperature Rise within the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.5.2 Cooling by Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.5.3 Heat Loss of Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.6 INSTALLING THE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.6.1 Cooling Fin A/B/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.6.2 Heat Exchanger for 14, CRT/MDI Unit (Series 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.6.3 The Heat Pipe Type Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.6.3.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.7 ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.7.1 Separating Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.7.2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.7.3 Connecting the Signal Ground (SG) of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.7.4 Noise Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.7.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.8 CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.8.1 Configuration of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.8.2 Battery for Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.8.3 Cable Lead–in Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4. COMPLETE CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

4.1 PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

5.1 POWER SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.2 CONNECTION OF THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT A, B1, C (INPUT UNIT SEPARATE TYPE) . . 57
5.2.1 Connection of the Power Unit without Using Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.2.2 Connection of Power Supply Unit when the Input Unit is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5.3 CONNECTION OF INPUT UNIT BUILT–IN TYPE POWER UNIT (POWER SUPPLY UNIT AI) 66
5.4 CONNECTION OF THE INPUT UNIT BUILT–IN POWER SUPPLY UNIT AI
(QUALIFYING FOR CE MARKING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
6. CONNECTION OF MACHINE INTERFACE I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

6.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.2 CONNECTION OF THE INTERNAL I/O CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.2.1 Machine Interface Signal Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.2.2 System without PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
c–1
Table of Contents B–61393E/06
6.2.3 Descriptions on Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

6.2.4 Signal Connection with Power Magnetic Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
6.2.5 System Using the PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.3 ADDING I/O POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.3.1 System without FANUC I/O Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.3.2 System Using FANUC I/O Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.3.2.1 Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.3.2.2 Turning the power on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.3.2.3 DI/DO addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.3.2.4 I/O module data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.3.2.5 Optical I/O Link adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
7. CONNECTION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

7.1 CONNECTING THE DISPLAY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.1.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.1.2 Video Signal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7.1.3 Connecting the Display Unit Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
7.1.4 Connecting the Soft Key Cable of a Separate Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7.1.5 ON/OFF Switch on the Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7.1.6 Adjusting the LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
7.2 CONNECTING THE MDI UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
7.2.1 MDI Unit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
7.3 CONNECTING AN I/O DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.3.1 Reader/Punch Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.3.2 ASR33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.3.3 PPR Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.3.4 Portable Tape Reader Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.3.5 FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
7.3.6 Connection of Tape Reader without Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7.3.7 Connection of Tape Reader with Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
7.3.8 RS–232–C Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
7.3.9 Parameters Related to the Reader/Punch Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
7.4 MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
7.5 HIGH–SPEED DI SIGNAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8. CONNECTIONS FOR SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

8.1 SERIAL SPINDLE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.2 ANALOG SPINDLE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.3 POSITION CODER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

9.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
9.2 SERVO AMPLIFIER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
9.2.1 S Series Servo Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
9.2.2 C Series Servo Amplifier and a Servo Amplifier Module (Type A Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
9.2.3 a Servo Amplifier Module (Type B Interface) and b Servo Amplifier Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
9.3 A/B PHASE PULSE CODER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
9.3.1 Low–Resolution A/B Phase Pulse Coder (2000P to 3000P) (Built–in Incremental Pulse Coder) . . . . 186
9.3.2 Low–Speed, High–Resolution A/B Phase Pulse Coder (10000P to 25000P, 12 m/min)
(Built–in Incremental Pulse Coder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
c–2
B–61393E/06

9.3.3 High–Speed, High–Resolution A/B Phase Pulse Coder (20000P to 30000P, 24 m/min)
(Built–in Incremental Pulse Coder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
9.3.4 A/B Phase Pulse Coder (Built–in Absolute Pulse Coder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
9.3.5 Low–Resolution A/B Phase Separate Pulse Coder (2000P to 3000P)
(Separate Incremental Pulse Coder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
9.3.6 High–Speed, High–Resolution A/B Phase Separate Pulse Coder (20000P to 30000P, 24 m/min)
(Separate Incremental Pulse Coder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
9.3.7 A/B Phase Separate Pulse Coder (Separate Absolute Pulse Coder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
9.4 SERIAL PULSE CODER INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
9.4.1 Serial Pulse Coder A or B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
9.4.2 Serial Pulse Coder C (Model 0S or Above) a Series Motor (a3/3000 to a150/2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
9.4.3 Serial Pulse Coder C (Model 1–0S to 0–0SP) a Series Motor (a1/3000, a2/2000, or a2/3000) . . . . . . 205
9.5 CONNECTION OF THE BATTERY UNIT FOR AN ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
9.5.1 Connection Using the Relay Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
9.5.2 Connection without a Relay Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
9.6 HANDLING OF UNUSED AXES (CLAMPING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
9.6.1 Handling of the Command Connectors of Unused Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
9.6.2 Handling of the Feedback Connectors of Unused Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
9.7 COMBINATION OF AXIS CARDS FOR SERIAL PULSE CODERS AND DIGITAL
SERVO FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
10.ANALOG INTERFACE CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

10.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
10.2 ANALOG INPUT SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
10.3 INSTALLATION POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
10.4 CONNECTION BETWEEN MACHINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
11.REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (INCLUDING FANUC DNC2 INTERFACE) . . . 218

11.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
11.2 INSTALLING TO THE P.C. BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
11.2.1 Installing to the P.C. Board in Case of Control Unit A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
11.2.2 Installing to the P.C. Board in Case of Control Unit B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
11.3 OUTLINE DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
11.3.1 Outline Drawing in Case of Control Unit A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
11.3.2 Outline Drawing in Case of Control Unit B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
11.4 REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS–232–C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
11.5 REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS–422) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
11.6 CONNECTION TO BATTERY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
12.DNC1 INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

12.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
12.2 ORDER SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
12.3 EXTERNAL CONFIGURATION OF MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
12.3.1 External Configuration of Mounting for Control Section A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
12.3.2 External Configuration of Mounting for Control Section B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
12.4 PRINTED BOARD MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
12.4.1 Printed Circuit Board Mounting for Control Section A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
12.4.2 Printed Circuit Board Mounting for Control Section B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
12.5 CONNECTION DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
12.5.1 Overall Connection Example for Mode 1 (Multi–point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
12.5.2 Detailed Drawing of Connector for Mode 1 (Multi–point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
c–3
12.5.3 Detailed Drawing of Connection Cable for Mode 1 (Multi–point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

12.5.4 Overall Connection Example for Mode 2 (Point–to–point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
12.5.5 Detailed Drawing of Connector for Mode 2 (Point–to–point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
12.5.6 Detailed Drawing of Connection Cable for Mode 2 (Point–to–point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
12.6 EXTERNAL CONFIGURATION OF TAP AND TERMINAL RESISTOR UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
13.SERIES 0–TTC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

13.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
13.2 RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
13.3 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
14.EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF VARIOUS UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
A.1 UNITS OF CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
A.2 CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
B. CONNECTING CABLES AND CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

B.1 TABLE OF CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
B.2 INTERFACE CABLE (OUR SUPPLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
B.3 CONNECTOR FOR INTERFACE (ATTACHED TO CABLES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
B.4 CABLE FOR STANDARD INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
C. HALF PITCH 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . 354
D. MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

D.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
D.2 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
D.2.1 General Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
D.2.2 Key Switch Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
D.2.3 LED Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
D.2.4 Emergency, Over–ride, Protect Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
D.3 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
D.4 OPERATOR’S PANEL CONNECTION SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
D.4.1 :ESP (X21.4) Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
D.4.2 :KEY (X21.7) Program Protect Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
D.4.3 :OV1–:OV8 (X21.0–21.3) Override Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
D.4.4 KD0–KD7 (X20.0–20.7) KA0–KA3 (X22.0–22.3), KST (X22.7) LD0–LD7 (Y51.0–51.7)
RSV1–RSV3 (X21.5, X22.4–22.5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
D.4.5 F292–F299, G242–G249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
D.5 SELF–DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
D.5.1 Status Display LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
D.5.2 Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
D.5.3 Key Board Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
D.6 SETTING OF OPERATOR’S PANEL AVAILABILITY IN REGISTERING PMC LADDER
PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
D.7 EXPLANATIONS FOR OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
c–4
B–61393E/06

D.7.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

D.8 MOUNTING OF READER/PUNCHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
D.9 PCB FOR MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
E. PRINTED BOARD FOR OPERATOR’S PANEL CONTROLLER

(FOR FANUC I/O LINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
E.1 CONNECTION OF MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
E.1.1 Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
E.1.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
E.1.3 Signal Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
E.1.4 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
E.1.5 PMC Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
E.1.6 Major Connection Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
E.1.7 State of the LEDs on the Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
E.1.8 Connector (on the Cable Side) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
E.1.9 Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit Dimension Diagram (Including Connector Locations) . . . . 417
E.1.10 Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit Mounting Dimension Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
E.1.11 Fuse Mounting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
E.1.12 Option Card 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
F. SERIES 0–C OPERATOR’S PANEL CONNECTION UNIT C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

F.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
F.2 SETTING OF I/O SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
F.3 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
F.3.1 Connection of the Control Unit and Operator’s Panel Connection Unit C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
F.3.2 Signal Connection between Operator’s Panel Connection Unit C1 and Machine Side . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
F.4 EXTERNAL DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
G. ADDITIONAL I/O–B3, F3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

G.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
G.2 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
G.3 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
G.4 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT ON FANUC I/O LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
G.5 DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
H. DESCRIPTION OF I/O MODULE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

H.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
H.2 CONFIGURATION OF THE I/O UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
H.2.1 Configuration of the I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
H.2.2 Types of I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
H.2.3 Module Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
H.2.4 Digital Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
H.2.5 Digital Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
H.2.6 Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
H.2.7 Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
H.3 NC AND I/O UNIT CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
H.3.1 I/O Unit Signal Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
H.3.2 I/O Unit Power Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
H.3.3 Interface Module Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
c–5
I. I/O UNIT–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

I.1 CONNECTION OF THE FANUC I/O UNIT–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
I.1.1 Structure of FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
I.1.2 Outer Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
I.1.3 Mounting and Dismounting Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
I.1.4 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
I.1.5 Connecting Input Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
I.1.6 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
I.1.7 Connecting Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
I.1.8 Connecting with I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
I.1.9 Digital Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
I.1.10 Correspondence between I/O Signals and Addresses in a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
I.1.11 Number of Points for I/O Unit–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
J. CONNECTION OF CRT/MDI UNIT FOR SERIES 00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

J.1 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
J.2 CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
J.2.1 General Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
J.2.2 Connector Layout Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
J.2.3 Connection of the CNC and the CRT/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
J.2.4 Connection of the CRT/MDI and Manual Pulse Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
J.2.5 Connection of the CRT/MDI and the Battery Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
J.3 OUTER VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
J.3.1 Outer View of CRT/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
K. CRT/MDI SWITCHING CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

K.1 CRT/MDI SWITCHING CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
K.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
K.1.2 When Connecting Two Control Unit with One CRT/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
K.1.3 When Connecting One Series 0–C with Two CRT/MDI Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
K.2 PDP/MDI SWITCHING CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
K.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
K.2.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
K.2.2.1 Installation diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
K.2.2.2 Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
K.2.2.3 Diagram of cable details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
K.2.3 Selection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
K.2.4 Connector Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
K.2.5 Adjustment Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
K.2.6 External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
K.2.6.1 MDI : small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
K.2.6.2 MDI : full key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
K.2.7 Order Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
L. DETACHABLE CRT/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

L.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
L.2 ARRANGEMENT SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
L.3 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
L.4 CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
L.5 DIAGRAM OF CABLE DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
L.6 DIAGRAM OF MATERIAL DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
c–6
B–61393E/06

M. POSITION CODER SWITCHING CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

M.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
M.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
M.3 CONNECTION EXPLANATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
M.3.1 Connection Signal Arrangement of Position Coder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
M.3.2 Switching Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
M.3.3 Connection between Position Coder and Switching Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
M.3.4 Connection between Switching Circuit and CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
M.4 EXTERNAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
M.5 PRECAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
M.5.1 Power Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
M.5.2 Cable Power Supply Voltage Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
M.5.3 Noise Countermeasure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
N. MDI DESIGN FOR SERIES 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

N.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
N.2 CHARACTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
N.3 COLORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
O. INSTALLING CRT PROTECTION COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
c–7
B–61393E/06 1. PREFACE
1
This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications required

for connecting the FANUC Series 0/00/0–Mate to a machine tool. The
manual outlines the components commonly used for FANUC CNC
control units, as shown in the configuration diagram in Chapter 2, and
supplies additional information on using these components with the
Series 0/00/0–Mate. Refer to individual manuals for the detailed
specifications of each model.
There are different models of the Series 0/00/0–Mate appropriate for
different types of machine tools (lathe, machining center, etc.). This
manual describes those specifications in common among all Series
0/00/0–Mate models. Whenever one or more models have different
specifications, they are noted.
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are :
Product Name Abbreviations
FANUC Series 0–TC 0–TC

FANUC Series 0–TF 0–TF
FANUC Series 0–TTC 0–TTC
FANUC Series 0–MC 0–MC Series 0
FANUC Series 0–MF 0–MF
FANUC Series 0–GCC 0–GCC
FANUC Series 0–GSC 0–GSC
FANUC Series 0–TD 0–TD
FANUC Series 0–MD 0–MD
Series 0–D
FANUC Series 0–GCD 0–GCD
FANUC Series 0–GSD 0–GSD
FANUC Series 0–TDII 0–TDII
FANUC Series 0–MDII 0–MDII
Series 0–DII
FANUC Series 0–GCDII 0–GCDII
FANUC Series 0–GSDII 0–GSDII
FANUC Series 00–TC 00–TC
FANUC Series 00–MC 00–MC Series 00
FANUC Series 00–GCC 00–GCC
FANUC Series 0–Mate TC 0–Mate TC
FANUC Series 0–Mate MC 0–Mate MC Series 0–Mate
FANUC Series 0–Mate MF 0–Mate MF
1
1. PREFACE B–61393E/06
Related manuals The table below lists manuals related to the FANUC Series 0/00/0–Mate.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).
D Series 0/00/0–Mate C
Table 1 Manuals related to the Series 0/00/0–Mate C
Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC Series 0/00/0–Mate DESCRIPTIONS B–61392E

FANUC Series 0/00/0–Mate DESCRIPTIONS (Suppelement for Remote buffer) B–61392EN–1
FANUC Series 0/00/0–Mate CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B–61393E *
FANUC Series 0/00/0–Mate CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B–61393E–2
FANUC Series 0/00/0–Mate FOR LATHE OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–61394E
FANUC Series 0/00/0–Mate FOR MACHINING CENTER OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–61404E
FANUC Series 0/00/0–Mate MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–61395E
FANUC Series 0/00/0–Mate OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK B–6139
FANUC Series 0/00/0–Mate FOR LATHE PARAMETER MANUAL B–61400E
FANUC Series 0/00/0–Mate FOR MACHINING CENTER PARAMETER MANUAL B–61410E
GRAPHIC CONVERSATION FOR MACHINING CENTER
B–61434E
(Series 0–MC, Series 0–MF, Series 0–Mate MF) OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FANUC PMC–MODEL K/L/M PROGRAMMING MANUAL (LADDER LANGUAGE) B–55193E
FANUC Series 0/0–Mate
B–61393E–1
PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Macro Compiler / Macro Executer)
D Series 0–D
Table 1 Manuals related to the Series 0–D
Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC Series 0–TD/MD DESCRIPTIONS B–62542EN

FANUC Series 0–TD/MD/GCD/GSD CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B–62543EN–1
FANUC Series 0–PD CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B–62973EN
FANUC Series 0–PD OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62974EN
FANUC Series 0–PD MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–62975EN
2
B–61393E/06 1. PREFACE
D Series 0–DII
Table 1 Manuals related to the Series 0–DII
Specification
Manual name
number

FANUC Series 0/00/0–Mate CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B–61393E–2
3
2. CONFIGURATION B–61393E/06
2 CONFIGURATION
The following figure shows the configuration of the electrical system of

the machine tool with which the Series 0/00/0–Mate is used.
This manual describes how to connect the units illustrated in this diagram.
The machine tool body, machine operator’s panel, power magnetic
circuit, and sensor/actuator are specific to the machine tool and are the
builder’s responsibility. This manual does not cover the internal
connection of these units to the machine tool. The numbers in parentheses
shown in the diagram are section references for this manual.
4
B–61393E/06 2. CONFIGURATION
Machine tool magnetic cabinet
Heat CRT/MDI
exchanger unit (7.1.7.2)
(3.6)
Operator’s Machine opera-

panel interface tor’s panel (AP-
(APPENDIX F) PENDIX D, E) I/O device
Relay connector (7.3)

Manual pulse generator
(7.4)
Control unit Power Sensor /

(3.8) I/O unit magnetic actuator
circuit
(Note1)
(5) (6)
(Note 2) Servo
Servo
Multi–tap amplifier motor
transformer for (9)
the control unit
Spindle
amplifier (Note 3) Spindle
(8) motor
Power
supply
(11, 12) Host computer
Distribution
board
NOTE
1 Refer to the “FANUC I/O Unit Model A Connecting Maintenance Manual (B-61813E)”.
2 Refer to the “FANUC AC Servo Motor Series Descriptions (B-65002E)” or “FANUC SERVO
AMPLIFIER series DESCRIPTION (B–65162E)”.
3 Refer to the “FANUC AC Spindle Motor Series (Serial interface) Descriptions (B-65042E)”.
5
3. INSTALLATION B–61393E/05
3 INSTALLATION
6
B–61393E/05 3. INSTALLATION
3.1 The peripheral units, such as the control unit and CRT/MDI, have been
designed on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In
EXTERNAL this manual “cabinet” refers to the following:
ENVIRONMENTAL D Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the
REQUIREMENTS OF control unit or peripheral units;
CABINET D Cabinet for housing the flexible turnkey system provided by FANUC;
D Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, for
housing the CRT/MDI unit or operator’s panel.
D Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall
conform to the following table. Section 3.4 describes the installation and
design conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.
In operation 0_ to 45_
Room temperature
temperat re
In storage or transportation –20_ to 60_
Change in
1.1°C/minute max.
temperature
Normal 75% or less
Relative humidity
h midity
Temporary (within 1 month) 95% or less
Vibration In operation: 0.5G or less
Normal machine shop environment
(The environment must be considered if the cabinets
Environment
are in a location where the density of dust, coolant,
and/or organic solvent is relatively high.)
3.2 Room temperature

temperat re
In operation 0°C to +55°C
INSTALLATION In storage or transportation –20°C to +60°C

Relative humidity 95% RH or less (no condensation)
CONDITION OF CNC
Vibration 0.5 G or less
AND SERVO UNIT
The unit shall not be exposed direct to cutting oil, lu-
Environment
bricant or cutting chips.
3.3 The power capacity of the CNC control unit, which in this section means
the specification required for the power supply, is obtained by adding the
POWER CAPACITY power capacity of the control section and the power capacity of the servo
section.
The power capacity of the control section includes the power capacity of
the control unit, CRT/MDI, I/O unit, and operator’s panel interface.
Power capacity of 0.4 kVA
the control section
Power capacity of Depends on servo motor type.

the servo section Refer to each DESCRIPTIONS.
7
3.4 When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditions

described in Section 3.1. In addition, the magnetic interference on the
DESIGN AND CRT screen, noise resistance, and maintenance requirements must be
INSTALLATION considered. The cabinet design must meet the following conditions :
CONDITIONS OF THE D The cabinet must be fully closed.
MACHINE TOOL The cabinet must be designed to prevent the entry of airborne dust,
MAGNETIC CABINET coolant, and organic solvent.
Cabinets that let in air may be designed for the servo amplifier and
servo transformer provided that they :
- Use an air filter on the air inlet ;
- Place the ventilating fan so that it does not blow air directly toward
the unit;
- Control the air flow so that no dust or coolant enters the air outlet
D The cabinet must be designed to maintain a difference in temperature
of 10°C or less between the air in the cabinet and the outside air when
the temperature in the cabinet increases.
See Section 3.5 for the details on thermal design of the cabinet.
D A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the air
within.
The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves at 0.5 m/sec along the
surface of each installed unit.
CAUTION
If the air blows directly from the fan to the unit, dust easily
adheres to the unit. This may cause the unit to fail.
D For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required between

each unit and the wall of the cabinet.
D Packing materials must be used for the cable port and the door in order
to seal the cabinet.
Because the CRT unit uses a voltage of approximately 11 kV, airborne
dust gathers easily. If the cabinet is insufficiently sealed, dust passes
through the gap and adheres to the unit. This may cause the insulation
of the unit to deteriorate.
Acceptable packing materials :
- Epton sealer No. 686, NITTO INDUSTRY CO., LTD.
- Polyurethane foam (ester) covered with vinyl chloride, FUJI
POLYMERTECH., LTD.
D The CRT/MDI unit must be installed in a location where coolant
cannot be poured directly on it. The unit does have a dust–proof front
panel.
D Noise must be minimized.
As the machine and the CNC unit are reduced in size, the parts that
generate noise may be placed near noise–sensitive parts in the
magnetics cabinet.
The CNC unit is built to protect it from external noise. Cabinet design
to minimize noise generation and to prevent it from being transmitted
to the CNC unit is necessary. See section 3.7 for details of noise
elimination/management.
8
D The units must be installed or arranged in the cabinet so that they are
easy to inspect and maintain.
D The CRT screen can be distorted by magnetic interference.
Arranging magnetic sources must be done with care.
If magnetic sources (such as transformers, fan motors,
electromagnetic contactors, solenoids, and relays) are located near the
CRT display, they frequently distort the display screen. To prevent
this, the CRT display and the magnetic sources generally must be kept
300 mm apart. If the CRT display and the magnetic sources are not
300 mm apart, the screen distortion may be suppressed by changing
the direction in which the magnetic sources are installed.
The magnetic intensity is not constant, and it is often increased by
magnetic interference from multiple magnetic sources interacting
with each other. As a result, simply keeping the CRT and the magnetic
sources 300 mm apart may not be enough to prevent the distortion.
If they cannot be kept apart, or if the CRT screen remains distorted
despite the distance, cover the screen with a magnetic shield.
D The installation conditions of the I/O unit must be satisfied.
To obtain good ventilation in the module, the I/O unit must be installed
in the direction shown in the following figure. Clearances of 100 mm
or more both above and below the I/O unit are required for wiring and
ventilation.
Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unit.
Top
I/O base unit
(No screws or protrusions shall
extend from the bottom of this
unit.)
Bottom
9
3.5 The purpose of the thermal design of the cabinet is to limit the difference
in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air to 10°C
THERMAL DESIGN OF or less when the temperature in the cabinet increases.
THE CABINET The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units and
parts installed in the cabinet generate heat. Since the generated heat is
radiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the air in the
cabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels. If the amount
of heat generated is constant, the larger the surface area of the cabinet, the
less the internal temperature rises. The thermal design of the cabinet
refers to calculating the heat generated in the cabinet, evaluating the
surface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that surface area by installing
heat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary. Such a design method is
described in the following subsections.
3.5.1 The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/°C
Temperature Rise per 1m2 surface area, that is, when the 6W heat source is contained in a
cabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air in the
within the Cabinet cabinet rises by 1°C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers to
the area useful in cooling , that is, the area obtained by subtracting the area
of the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface area of the cabinet.
There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited by
the fun, and the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almost
constant.The following expression must then be satisfied to limit the
difference in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air
to 10°C or less when the temperature in the cabinet rises:
Internal heat loss P [W]
6[W/m2 °C] surface area S[m2] 10[°C] of rise in temperature
For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4m2 has a cooling capacity
of 24W/°C. To limit the internal temperature increase to 10°C under these
conditions, the internal heat must not exceed 240W. If the actual internal
heat is 320W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by 13°C or
more. When this happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinet must be
improved using the heat exchanger described next.
3.5.2 If the temperature rise cannot be limited to 10°C by the cooling capacity
Cooling by Heat of the cabinet, a heat exchanger must be added. The heat exchanger
forcibly applies the air from both the inside and outside of the cabinet to
Exchanger the cooling fin to obtain effective cooling. The heat exchanger enlarges
the surface area. Section 3.7 explains five heat exchangers supplied by
FANUC. Select one of these according to the application.
If cooling fin A is used for the cabinet, the total cooling capacity of a
cabinet having a surface area of 4 m2 in the example above is improved
as follows :
6W/m2 °C 4m2 + 9.1W/°C= 33.1W/°C
The calculated value verifies that even if the internal heat is 320 W, the
temperature rise can be limited to less than 10°C.
See Section 3.6 for installing the heat exchanger.
10
3.5.3
Heat Loss of Each Unit Heat
Name Remarks
loss
Basic unit 80W Included each printed

board of master, memory,
I/O, axis control and Pow-
er supply unit
Graphic 14W Included manual pulse 2

or 3 pieces controllers
PMC–M 14W
C t l
Control
unit Increased I/O–B, F 17W
SUB CPU 14W
5/6 axis control 16W
7/8 axis control 15W
Analog interface 9W
Remote buffer 14W Same as DNC 2 card
9″ monochrome CRT/MDI 14W These are not relative to

the variation of MDI keys
9″ color CRT/MDI 40W
9″ monochrome EL/MDI 20W
Display 9″ monochrome PDP/MDI 20W
7.2″ monochrome LCD/MDI 10W
8.4″ color LCD/MDI 15W
14″ color CRT/MDI 70W
Machine operator’s panel 8W Same as the printed board

for machine operator’s
Operator’s panel controller
anel
panel
Machine operator’s panel 24W 6% of DI/DO for I/O Link is
ON
Heat loss of each devices for Series 00 are as follows.

Heat
Name Remarks
loss
Control PMC–M 12W

unit
MMC interface 11W
Display 14″ color CRT/MDI 170W Included in MMC1 con-

trolled printed board also
11
3.6 Table 3.6 lists the heat exchangers. Cooling fins A, B and C are not
provided with a fan. Note that a fan motor is required for any of these
INSTALLING THE cooling fins when it is used as a heat exchanger.
HEAT EXCHANGER
Table 3.6 List of Heat Exchangers
Ordering Cooling
Name Size
specification capacity
Cooling fin A A02B–0053–K303 9.1W/°C 196901000mm
Cooling fin B A02B–0053–K304 10.1W/°C 44490650mm
Cooling fin C A02B–0053–K305 25.2W/°C 56090970mm
Heat pipe type

A02B–0094–C901 9.0W/°C 226132415mm
heat exchanger
Cooling fin for 14″

CRT/MDI unit A02B–0087–K220 6.5W/°C 45085506mm
(Series 00)
Cooling fin of inner A02B–0087–K225 14060290mm

circulation for 14″
CRT/MDI
(Series 00)
3.6.1 The cooling fin is shown in Fig. 3.6.1(a).

Cooling Fin A/B/C
Viewed from cabinet mounting side
Fig. 3.6.1(a) External view of cooling fin
12
It is installed in a cabinet made by the machine tool builder.

Cabinet
Cooling fin
Inside air
flow
Outside
air flow
Fig. 3.6.1(b) Internal view of cooling fin
The cooling fin can be installed in two ways, as shown in Fig.3.6.1(b).

The following lists the general precautions to be observed when using the
cooling fins :
D The fans are not included with the cooling fin. They should be
provided by the machine tool builder.
D Bring in the outside air from the bottom and exhaust the hot air from
the top.
D The inside air may flow from top to bottom or bottom to top. However,
generally decide the direction as follows :
- Bring in the air near high heat loss components.
- Exhaust the air toward the most important components to be
cooled.
D For the cooling fin to display the specified cooling capacity, the air
inside the cooling fins must flow at a velocity of 2.5 m/sec or greater.
(velocity of air flow measurement)
Set the slit to the intake side and

measure the velocity at the slit.
D Generally, install the cooling fins to the door. But be sure that the door
does not bend when installing the cooling fin. The cooling fins are
equipped with packing.
13
External dimensions
196 183
90 Fan mounting
100 plate Mounting metal for
cooling fins (sheet met-
Terminal block for al about 3mm thick).
fan motor G–04
70
1000
570
(Attached to the
cooling fins. Its Cooling fins
4–M4
685
mounting height is 20mm)

Mounting metal
10260
screw for
220
Fan motor for cooling fins

cooling fins
70
24.
75 150
45
Door
4–M4 24.75 Mounting plate
mounting screw 168 40 for fan motor
180
188
for fan mounting C15

plate
Mounting diagram (example)
570
770
260
Panel cut drawing

70
45
164
Fig. 3.6.1(c) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin (A02B–0053–K303)
NOTE
1 Fan motor, mounting plate for fan motor and mounting metal for cooling fins are not attached
to the cooling fins.
So, prepare them at the machine tool builder.
2 Use two fan motors with about 50W power.
3 Weight : 6.5kg
14
External dimensions Mounting stud for cooling fins

(2 studs are attached for the top and the bottom)
444
72
90 Mounting plate
25
for fan motor
60
300
435
300
Cooling fins
650
124
Fan motor
116
25
72
14 6–6 dia
Mounting
10
10 432 6 Mounting hole
hole for 24 Mounting plate
fan motor 10 6 for fan motor
4–M4 24 Terminal block for fan motor G–04 Door
(Attached to the cooling fins.
370
4–M4 Its height is 20mm)
350 Mounting diagram (example)
(Mounting hole for
124
116
fan motor) Hole External shape

of cooling fins
300
358
400
30
300
135 60
Hole
6–6 dia. hole or

25
M5 stud bolt 432
Stud hole 5 dia

(Make a hole 5 dia. for
fan motor)
Panel cut drawing
Fig. 3.6.1(d) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin B (A02B–0053–K304)
NOTE
1 Fan motor and mounting plate are not attached to the cooling fins. So, prepare them, at the
machine tool builder.
2 Use four fan motors with about 20W power.
3 Weight : 7.5kg
15
Mounting stud for cooling fins

External dimensions
(Attached to the cooling fins)
560
23
90 Mounting plate
for fan motor
115
335
60
695
315
266 266
970
Cooling fins
Terminal block
210
287
60
for fan motor Fan motor
G–04
6–M4 10 (Attached to the 8–6 dia.
37
10
Mounting
35
233 cooling fins. Its mounting hole

213 548 6
hole for fan 520 6 height is 20mm)
motor 37 Mounting
6
6 548 plate for
5M–4 440 fan motor
(Mounting hole for Door 40
fan motor)
170
155
335
430 External shape of Mounting diagram (example)

cooling fins
5 dia
315
(This hole
775
combines
6–6 dia. hole or M5 mounting hole
287
stud bolt and stud hole.)

60
10
514
25
Panel cut drawing
Fig. 3.6.1(e) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin C (A02B–0053–K305)
NOTE
1 Fan motor and mounting plate for fan motor are not attached to the cooling fins. Prepare them
at the machine tool builder.
2 Use two fan motors with about 40W power.
3 Weight : 13.5kg
16
3.6.2
Heat Exchanger for 14″
CRT/MDI Unit
(Series 00)
Weight 0.65
Outerdimension of
external cooling fan

Outer dimensio of
finger guard
FLOW
hole
M4 screw AIR
AC 200V
termina
Power
input
Air
Fig. 3.6.2(a) Outer dimension of fin and external cooling fan for 14″ CRT/MDI for Series 00
(Specification number A02B–0087–K220 2 sets of cooling fin and external cooling fan are provided.)
NOTE
2 sets of external cooling fan and finger guard are provided.
17
6– 3.6
Main body
of cooling
unit
External cooling fan (Attached)
Reference mounting plate for

external cooling fan.
Finger guard (Attached)
Prepare mounting panel
8– 3.6
and mounting screw
Inside
Outside
Air outlet
Air inlet
Air outlet
hole
6–mounting
hole
Fig. 3.6.2(b) Mounting methods of cooling unit for CRT/MDI for Series 00
NOTE
(1) Use M5 screws to mount the cooling unit.
(2) Be careful with air flow when securing the external cooling fan.
(3) Prepare a mounting panel for external cooling fan and install the panel where it can be
exchanged externally.
(4) Drill mounting holes for external cooling fan and air outlet on cooling unit mounting panel.
18
Horizontal type CRT/MDI and

Horizontal type CRT/MDI only machine operator’s panel
Inside Outside
Side view
CRT/MDI
Heat exchanger
Min Min
370 35 370 35
Top view
Refer to these figures for allocation of CRT/MDI and heat exchanger
Fig. 3.6.2(c) Allocation of 14″color CRT/MDI and heat exchanger
19
3. INSTALLATION
Power input
terminal
20
M4 screw
AC200V
The fan unit should be installed at the upper position of

PCB in 14” CRT/MDI unit shouwn in the figure below.
(Specification number A02B–0087–K225)

Air flow
Fan unit
5 to 10 mm
Fig. 3.6.2(d) Outer dimension of fan unit (for inner circulation) of 14″ CRT/MDI for Series 00
See from back side of CRT/MDI Air flow
B–61393E/05
3.6.3
The Heat Pipe Type Heat
Exchanger
3.6.3.1 The heat pipe type heat exchanger is used for cooling the airtight cabinet
Installation of small sized electronic devices. It is a compact, lightweight, and
heat–efficient unit. Because the fan is built–in, it is used simply by
installing it, performing the “panel cut” operation.
Specifications
Installation format Installation type in board
Fan Cooling ability (W/°C) 9 (50Hz when operating)

sspecifications
ecifications
Voltage (V) 200VAC
Frequency (Hz) 50 60
Rating current (A) 0.28 0.24
Rating input (W) 28 26
Weight (kg) 4
Color Munsell signal N 1.5
Order specifications Heat exchanger A02B–0094–C901

Remarks
D A filter is installed on the outside air inhalation side.
D The installation board thickness is the standard 1.6 t.
D When a fan motor and filter are necessary for maintenance, prepare
them separately.
Fan motor specifications
A90L–0001–0219#A
Filter specifications
A250–0689–X004
D If the heat exchanger is installed near the CRT, screen distortion may
occur due to magnetic flux leakage from the fan motor.
21
External dimensions
17.5
Power
source AIR
terminal M4 FLOW
9–9 dia.
190
Earth
terminal
M4
External
fan unit
415
Internal
fan unit
190
AIR
FLOW
17.5
6 216 6 22.4 85
22.4
226
1.6
(Installation board thickness)

3
85
199
22
Panel cut dimensions
180
2.5
187.5
190
HOLE
6
175
190
3–5 dia.
6–6 dia. or stud welder (M4)
214
23
Installation method Please install the heat exchanger by the following sequence:
1 Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit. (Fig.
1)
Detach the external fan unit installation screws A (2 pieces), take out
the unit from the main unit by sliding it down, and detach the earth
cable and the power cable to the fan. Also detach the installation screw
B (1 piece).
2 Install the heat exchanger main unit in the installation section which
has been panel cut. (Fig. 2)
When fastening down the heat exchanger main unit with the screws,
first, temporarily secure the panel and the heat exchanger main unit
with the installation screw B, which was taken out in 1). After that,
secure the main unit by the installation screws. In this case, the
external fan unit installation screw holes should be aligned with the
main unit screw holes. (Please provide the installation screws for the
heat exchanger main unit.)
Because this product is composed of plastic, set the value shown
below for the screw tightening torque.
Heat exchanger main unit (M4 screw) : 11 kgf.cm
External fan unit (M3 screw) : 5 kgf.cm
3 Connect the power cable and the earth cable to the external fan unit (the
unit detached in 1), and secure the installation screw A to the main unit
from the outside.
The installation is now complete.
Heat exchanger
main unit
Fan power cable

(detach the connector)
External fan unit
Installation screw B (1) Installation screws A (2)

Earth cable (if the installation screw on the
fan side is detached, it can be taken out.) Installation
screw Installation screw B (1)
Installation panel
Fig. 1 Take out the external fan unit from the Fig. 2 Install the heat exchanger main unit and
heat exchanger main unit the external fan unit
24
3.7 The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surface–mount and
custom LSI technologies for electronic components. The CNC also is
ACTION AGAINST designed to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult to
NOISE measure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise has
many uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from being
generated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. This
precaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system.
The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generating
noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into the
CNC are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and ground
loops.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the
machine as described in the following section.
3.7.1 The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the
Separating Signal following table:
Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Lines
Group Signal line Action
Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A sepa-
Secondary AC power line rately (Note 1) from groups B
and C,
C or cover grou
group A with an
AC/DC power lines (containing electromagnetic shield (Note 2).
A the power lines for the servo and
spindle motors) See Section 3.7.4 and connect
sspark
ark killers or diodes with the
AC/DC solenoid solenoid and relay.y
AC/DC relay
DC solenoid (24VDC) Connect diodes with DC sole-
noid and relay.
DC relay (24VDC) Bind the cables in group B sepa-
rately from group A, or cover
DI/DO cable between the CNC gro p B with
group ith an electromagnetic
B shield.
and power magnetics cabinet
Separate group B as far from
DI/DO cable between the CNC G
Group C as possible.
ibl
and machine It is more desirable to cover
group B with the shield.
Cable between the CNC and ser- Bind the cables in group C sepa-
vo amplifier rately from group A, or cover
Cable for position and velocity gro p C with
group ith an electromagnetic
feedback shield.
Cable between the CNC and Separate group

gro p C as far from
spindle amplifier Group B as possible.
Cable for the position coder Be sure to

B t perform
f shield
hi ld pro-
cessing in Section 3.7.5.
375
Cable for the manual pulse gen-
C
erator
Cable between the CNC and the
CRT/MDI
RS–232–C and RS–422 interface
cable
Cable for the battery
Other cables to be covered with
the shield
25
NOTE
1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.
2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.
Cabinet
Spindle Servo Control

amp. amp. unit
Cable of group B, C
Duct
To operator’s
panel,
motor, etc.
Cable of group A Section
Group A Group B, C
Cover
26
3.7.2 The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machine tool:
Ground D Signal ground system (SG)
The signal ground (SG) supplies the reference voltage (0V) of the
electrical signal system.
D Frame ground system (FG)
The frame ground system (FG) is used for safety, and suppressing
external and internal noises. In the frame ground system, the frames,
cases of the units, panels, and shields for the interface cables between
the units are connected.
D System ground system
The system ground system is used to connect the frame ground
systems connected between devices or units with the ground.
Signal ground system

Frame ground system
Power Servo CNC System ground system
magnet- amplifier control
ics unit Operator’s
unit panel
Machine
tool
Power
magnetics
cabinet
Distribution board
Notes on connecting the D Connect the signal ground with the frame ground (FG) at only one
ground systems place in the CNC control unit.
D The grounding resistance of the system ground shall be 100 ohms or
less (class 3 grounding).
D The system ground cable must have enough cross–sectional area to
safely carry the accidental current flow into the system ground when
an accident such as a short circuit occurs.
(Generally, it must have the cross–sectional area of the AC power cable
or more.)
D Use the cable containing the AC power wire and the system ground
wire so that power is supplied with the ground wire connected.
27
3.7.3 Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the
Connecting the Signal ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground (SG) terminal.
The SG terminal is located on the printed circuit board at the rear of the
Ground (SG) of the control unit.
Control Unit
Control unit (control unit A)
M4 screw for
grounding
Ground cable using

a wire of 2 mm2 or
greate
Frame ground Ground strap on System ground

the cabinet
NOTE
This figure shows the grounding of control unit A. The
position of the protective grounding of control unit B is
different. When connecting control unit B to the ground
strap, see the outline drawing of control unit B.
28
3.7.4 The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.
Noise Suppressor A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are
turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits
to be disturbed.
Notes on selecting the D Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. This
spark killer type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.(Use it under AC)
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,
but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
D The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil:
1) Resistance (R) : Equivalent DC resistance of the coil
I2 I2
2) Capacitance (C) : (mF)
10 20
I : Current at stationary state of the coil
R C
Equivalent circuit of the spark killer
Resistance Condenser
AC Spark killer
relay
Motor
Spark killer
Mount the noise eliminator near a motor or a relay coil.
NOTE
Use a CR–type noise eliminator. Varistor–type noise
eliminators clamp the peak pulse voltage but cannot
suppress a sharp rising edge.
Diode (used for direct–current circuits)

– +
Diode
Use a diode which can withstand a
voltage up to two times the applied
DC relay voltage and a current up to two times
the applied current.
29
3.7.5 The CNC cables that require shielding should be clamped by the method
Cable Clamp and shown below. This cable clamp treatment is for both cable support and
proper grounding of the shield. To insure stable CNC system operation,
Shield Processing follow this cable clamp method.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by
the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground plate must be
made by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :
Ground plate
Cable
Metal fittings
for clamp
40mm 80mm
Fig. 3.7.5(a) Cable clamp (1)
30
ÇÇ
Machine side
installation
ÇÇ board
ÇÇ
Control unit
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ground plate
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Metal fittings
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
for clamp
Shield cover
Fig. 3.7.5(b) Cable clamp (2)
Prepare ground plate like the following figure.
Ground terminal
(grounded)
Hole for securing metal fitting clamp
Mount screw hole
Fig. 3.7.5(c) Ground plate
For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surface
is plated with nickel.
31
Ground
8mm plate
12mm
20mm
Fig. 3.7.5(d) Ground plate holes
(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.
Max. 55mm
28mm
6mm
17mm
Fig. 3.7.5(e) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp
Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp

A02B–0083–K301 (5 pieces)
32
3.8
CONTROL UNIT
3.8.1 Each control P.C.B. of Series 0 is mounted in the slot as follows.

Configuration of the
Control Unit
NOTE
Connection position of this figure are depended on each printed board.
33
3.8.2 Part programs, offset data, and system parameters are stored in CMOS
Battery for Memory memory in the control unit.
Backup The program stored in the memory of the control unit is kept after power
is cut off. Alcalic electric cells (single 3 cells) are used for this
function. The unit accommodating the dry cells is the battery unit. The
cells must be periodically exchanged to new cells once a year at the user’s.
When exchanging the cells, the power must be always on. (If the cells are
removed when the power is off, the parameters and programs stored in the
memory goes out.)
The NC is delivered to the machine tool builder with the battery unit set
temporarily, so that it should be reset in the cabinet designed at the
machine tools builder. Take notes on the following, and reset the battery
unit at the cabinet surface. If the machine is delivered to the users with
the battery unit still temporarily set, the battery will not be able to be
exchanged at the user’s, resulting in a fatal maintenance problem.
1) The battery must be able to changed easily with the power on, at the
user’s side.
2) The battery unit must be away from coolant and chips.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message “BAT”
blinks on the CRT display and the battery alarm signal is output to the
PMC. When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as
possible. In general, the battery can be replaced within one or two weeks,
however, this depends on the system configuration.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no longer
be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this state causes
system alarm 910 (SRAM parity alarm) to occur because the contents of
memory are lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing
the battery.
The power to the control unit must be turned on when the battery is
replaced. If the battery is disconnected when the power is turned off, the
contents of memory are lost.
34
Mounting the battery Each control unit is factory–equipped with a battery so that the unit can
case retain the factory–set parameters. Never disconnect the battery while the
unit is turned off, therefore. Mount the battery case containing the battery
on the cabinet, by means of the following procedure:
(1) Turn on the control unit.
(2) Leaving the control unit turned on, perform steps 1 to 5:
1 Remove the battery connector from the memory PC board. If a sub
CPU PC board is mounted, remove the battery connector from the
sub CPU PC board. If a remote buffer PC board is mounted,
remove the battery connector from the remote buffer PC board
(which may be mounted in the same slot as that used for a sub CPU
PC board).
2 Remove the battery case and cable from the yellow carton.
(Discard the carton.)
3 Remove the lid from the battery case, being careful to keep it
horizontal so that the screws do not full out.
4 Screw the battery case onto the cabinet at the predetermined

mounting position. Replace the lid removed in step 3 and tighten
the screws.
5 Reconnect the connector removed in step 1.
35
Replacing the battery
Procedure for replacing the battery
1 Have commercially available D–size alkaline cells ready for

replacement.
2 Turn on the control unit. Leave the control unit turned on until step 5
is completed.
3 Remove the lid from the battery case.
4 Replace the cells, observing the correct orientation.
5 Replace the lid on the battery case.
6 Turn off the control unit.
Dry cell
Connection
terminals are Lid
at the rear Mount hole 4
Case
36
3.8.3 Following diagram shows the grid of connector location.

Cable Lead–in Diagram Control board may not have all connectors as shown above.
For actual connector layout of each board, please see the connector layout
diagrams next page or later.
(Power supply unit AI)
Screw M4 connected earth
Fig. 3.8.3 (a) Cable lead–in diagram (Control unit: A)
37
(Power supply unit A, BI, C)
Screw M4 connected earth
Fig. 3.8.3 (b) Cable lead–in diagram (Control unit: B)
38
Fig. 3.8.3 (c) Cable lead–in diagram (Type–B axis card, power supply unit AI for CE marking is mounting)
39
Connector layout of
power supply unit for CE
marking
35
CP1
F1
80
CP2 CP3
330
115
CP4
35
CP5 CP6
F3 F4
65
Unit: mm
40
B–61393E/06 4. COMPLETE CONNECTION DIAGRAM
4 COMPLETE CONNECTION DIAGRAM
41
4. COMPLETE CONNECTION DIAGRAM B–61393E/06
4.1 The complete connection diagram shows examples of connecting all PC

boards that can fit into the slots of the master PC board. Some slots can
PRECAUTIONS accept two or more PC boards which are connected to different devices.
This drawing shows two or more identical slot names, but actual
individual slots on the master PC board have different names. See the
connection of each slot according to the PC board to be fitted into the slot.
The diagram shows the connection of all PC boards that can be fitted into
the slots. In the actual unit, the PC boards to be mounted are determined
by the model and optional functions. Note that all the PC boards shown
in the diagram are not always mounted.
Symbols of connectors for the following figures

Symbol Manufacturer Specification
BK3.F Japan FCI 3–pin, Black, Female
BWG3.F Japan FCI 3–pin, White (gilding), Female
BWG6.F Japan FCI 6–pin, White (gilding), Female
BN3.F Japan FCI 3–pin, Brown, Female
BN6.F Japan FCI 6–pin, Brown, Female
BK6.F Japan FCI 6–pin, Black, Female
AHX3.F AMP JAPAN, LTD. 3–pin, Black, For high–voltage, Type X, Female
ALY6.F AMP JAPAN, LTD. 6–pin, Black, For low–voltage, Type Y, Female
ALX3.F AMP JAPAN, LTD. 3–pin, Black, For low–voltage, Type X, Female
ALY3.F AMP JAPAN, LTD 3–pin, Black, For low–voltage, Type Y, Female
H20.M HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD. 20–pin, MR connector 20–pin, Male
H20.F HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD. 20–pin, MR connector 20–pin, Female
H50.M HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD. 50–pin, MR connector 50–pin, Male
H50.F HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD. 50–pin, MR connector 50–pin, Female
D25.F D–sub connector, Female
OPT Optical connector
42
Common to control units A and B
Power supply
CAP unit AI BK3.F
CP1 Single–phase 200–VAC
input
BK3.F Servo magnetic
CP2
contactor
MasterPC board
BK3.F
CP2 200–VAC output
(fan or display unit using 200VAC)
BWG6.F
CP3 ON/OFF switch
BN3.F
CP14 24–VDC output
(I/O–B2, I/O–B3)
BN6.F
(display unit using 24 VDC)
Power supply Input unit Single–phase 200–VAC

unit A, B1, C TP1 input
CAP
BK6.F BK6.F TP2 ON/OFF switch
CP1
BK3.F
CP2 CP4 200–VAC output
(fan or display unit using 200VAC)
BN3.F
(I/O–B2, I/O–B3)
BN6.F
CE Marking
CAP Power AHX3.F
supply CP1 Single–phase 200–VAC
unit AI input
AHX3.F Servo magnetic
CP3
contactor
AHX3.F
CP2 200–VAC output
(Spare)
ALY6.F
CP4 ON/OFF switch
ALX3.F
CP6 24–VDC output
(Spare)
ALY3.F
CP5 24–VDC output
Custom–engi-
PAS neered macro
cassette
(Continued)
43
(Continued)
I/O C5–C7 Machine operator’s panel

H50.F H50.M H50.F H50.M
I/O
Power magnetics cabinet

M1 M1A M1B
H50.F H50.M H50.F H50.M
C5 M2 M2A M2B
H50.F H50.M
M18
H20.F H20.M
C6 M19
H50.F H50.M
C7 M20
I/O E1–E3 Machine operator’s panel (CE Marking)

H50.F H50.M H50.F H50.M
I/O

M201 M1A M1B
H50.F H50.M H50.F H50.M
E1 M202 MB2A MB2B
H50.F H50.M
M218
H20.F H20.M
E2 M219
H50.F H50.M
E3 M220
Memory card
H20.F H20.F * When no graphics
MEM CCX5 CN1 Display (CRT, PDP, EL) card is used
For an LCD or a 14″ CRT qualifying for CE
marking, a different connector is used.
H20.F H20.M
M3 KM1 MDI unit
(Continued)
44
(Continued)
Memory card
Relay connector
H20.M D25.F
M5 RS–232–C I/O unit (channel 0, channel 1)
H20.M H20.F
M74 Tape reader RS–232–C I/O unit (channel 2)
H20.F Manual pulse generator

M12 (first unit)
S analog output (analog spindle)
H20.M H20.F Spindle control

M26 circuit Spindle motor
(analog control)
Spindle
H20.F Position
M27 coder
S serial output (serial spindle)
OPT OPT
COP5 CN11A Spindle control Spindle motor
OPT circuit (Digital control)
CN11B First unit
Spindle
Position
coder
OPT
CN11A Spindle control Spindle motor
circuit (Digital control)
CN11B Second unit
Spindle
Position
coder
BWG3.F Battery for memory

CPA7 (For memory PC board)
backup
45
(Continued)
1st to 4th axis (Axis control PC board supporting A/B–phase pulse coder)
control
AXE (Servo system of semi–closed loop)
H20.M H20.F
M34 CN1 Servo amplifier
(Command) (Digital control)
First axis
H20.F AC
M35
(Velocity/position feedback) A/B–phase pulse coder servo motor
Servo system of closed loop
H20.M H20.F
First axis
H20.F Linear scale,

M35 separate pulse coder AC
(Position feedback) servo motor
H20.F A/B–phase pulse coder

M36
(Velocity feedback)
H20.M
M37 Second–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse
H20.F coder, scale
M38 (Same as the connection of the first axis)
H20.F
M39
H20.M
M44 Third–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse coder,
H20.F scale
H20.F
M46
H20.M
M47 Fourth–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse coder,
H20.F scale
H20.F
M49
BWG3.F Battery for absolute pulse coder

CPA9
(for first to fourth axes)
(Continued)
46
(Continued)
1st to 4th axis (Axis control PC board supporting serial pulse coder)
control
H20.M H20.F
First axis
H20.F AC
M185
(Velocity/position feedback) Serial pulse coder servo motor
A/B–phase pulse coder
H20.M H20.F
First axis
H20.F
M185 AC
(Velocity feedback) servo motor
Serial pulse coder

H20.F Linear scale, A/B–phase pulse coder
M186 separate pulse coder
(Position feedback)
H20.M
M187 Second–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse
H20.F coder, scale
H20.F
M189
H20.M
M194 Third–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse coder,
H20.F scale
H20.F
M196
H20.M
M197 Fourth–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse coder,
H20.F scale
H20.F
M199
BWG3.F
CPA9 Battery for absolute pulse coder (for first to
fourth axes)
(Continued)
47
(Continued)
1st to 4th axis (Axis control PC board for type B interface)

control
HF20.F HF20.F
JS1A JS1B series servo
(Command) amplifier (Digital
control) First axis
JF1
HF20.F
(Velocity/position
feedback) AC
servo motor
Serial pulse coder
H20.M H20.F
JS1A JS1B Servo amplifier
First axis
JF1
HF20.F
(Velocity feedback)
AC
servo motor
Serial pulse coder

H20.F Linear scale, A/B–phase pulse coder
M186 separate pulse coder
(Position feedback)
HF20.F
JS2A Second–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse
coder, scale
(Same as the connection of the first axis)
H20.F
M189
HF20.F
JS3A Third–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse coder,
scale
H20.F
M196
HF20.F
JS4A Fourth–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse coder,
scale
H20.F
M199
BWG3.F
CPA9 Battery for separate type absolute pulse coder
(for first to fourth axes)
(Continued)
48
(Continued)
(PC board not supporting I/O–Link)
PMC–M
Expansion I/O–B2, F1
PMC H50.F H50.M

H20.M H20.F M61
M24 M60 (M261) H50.F H50.M
M62
(M262) H50.F H50.M
24–VDC
input CP51 M78
(from power supply unit) (M278) H20.F H20.M
The connector M79
names for F1 (M279) H50.F H50.M
are parenthe- M80
sized. (M280)
I/O module
OPT OPT
M25 COP4
Manual pulse generator
CRT/MDI MMC–1 unit 1 2 3

adapter (14″CRT/MDI) H20.F
H20.F H20.M CA3
CD13 CD13
BK6.F
CA7 Battery unit
(PC board supporting *Cannot be used for Series 00

PMC–M I/O–Link)
Expansion I/O–B3, F3
PMC H50.F H50.M

(SLAVE) M61
24–VDC
input CP51 H50.F H50.M
(from power supply unit) The connector M62
names for F3 (MB62)
are parenthe- H50.F H50.M
M78
JD1A1 HF20.F HF20.F sized.
JD1B M79 H20.F H20.M
(MASTER)
(MB79)
HF20.F H50.F H50.M
JD1A M80
(MB80)
I/O Unit
HF20.F (SLAVE)
JD1B
HF20.F
JD1A
F–D Mate
JD1B2 HF20.F HF20.F (MASTER)
(SLAVE) JD1A
Other I/O–Link unit

HF20.F HF20.F (SLAVE)
JD1A2 JD1B
(SLAVE)
(Continued)
49
(Continued)
(or circuit for controlling two manual pulse generators)
Graphic
GR H20.F * For graphic display, not

CCX4 Display (CRT, PDP) connected to CCX5 of
H20.F memory card
H20.F Manual pulse generator

M21 (second or third unit)
Cannot be used with the Series 00
Connected to M80 of the MMC1 unit
Optional configuration of control

unit A only
Remote buffer
DNC2 for
control unit A
H20.F External I/O unit
JA1 JB1 M73 (Channel 3)
(Program File Mate, personal computer)
RS–422(Using external clock)

JA2 JB2 M77 (Channel 3)
RS–232–C, RS–422 (Not using external clock)
DNC1 for
control unit A
Tap Tap F–D Mate
JA1 JB1 (Primary unit)
CD3 H20.F
(M73) 1 2 1 2 CD3
3 3
JA2 JB2
← Terminating →
resistor
50
(Continued)
5th/6th axis (Axis control PC board supporting A/B–phase pulse coder)

control
AXS H20.M
M64 Fifth–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse coder,
scale
H20.F
M65 (Same as the connection of the first axis of
the 1st–4th axis control PC board supporting
H20.F A/B–phase pulse coder)
M66
H20.M
M67 Sixth–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse coder,
scale
H20.F
H20.F A/B–phase pulse coder)
M69
BWG3.F Battery for absolute pulse coder (for fifth and

CPA10 sixth axes)
S analog output (analog spindle) tool post 2

(analog control)
Spindle
H20.F Position
M29 coder
S serial output (serial spindle) tool post 2
OPT OPT CN11A Spindle control

COP6 Spindle motor
circuit
OPT (Digital control)
CN11B First unit
Spindle
Position
coder
OPT CN11A Spindle control

circuit Spindle motor
(Digital control)
CN11B Second unit
Spindle
Position
coder
(Continued)
51
(Continued)
5th/6th axis (Axis control PC board supporting serial pulse coder)

control
AXS H20.M
M204 Fifth–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse coder,
H20.F scale
M205 (Same as the connection of the first axis of the
1st–4th axis control PC board supporting a
H20.F
M206 serial pulse coder)
H20.M
M207 Sixth–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse coder,
H20.F scale
M208 (Same as the connection of the first axis of the
1st–4th axis control PC board supporting a
H20.F
BWG3.F Battery for absolute pulse coder (for fifth and

CPA10 sixth axes)
S analog output (analog spindle) tool post 2

(Analog control)
Spindle
H20.F Position
M29 coder
S serial output (serial spindle) tool post 2
OPT OPT CN11A Spindle control

COP6 Spindle motor
circuit
OPT (Digital control)
CN11B First unit
Spindle
Position
coder
OPT CN11A Spindle control

circuit Spindle motor
(Digital control)
CN11B Second unit
Spindle
Position
coder
(Continued)
52
(Continued)
Optional configuration of control unit B only
Remote buffer
DNC2 for
control unit B
SP M73 (Channel 3)
RS–422 (Using external clock)

M77 (Channel 3)
DNC1 for
control unit B
Tap Tap F–D Mate
(Primary unit)
SP
H20.F
CD3
(M73) 1 2 1 2 CD3
3 3
← Terminating →
resistor
SUB CPU

SUB M73 (Channel 3)
RS–422 (Using external clock)

M77 (Channel 3)
BWG3.F
CPA8 Battery for memory backup (for sub CPU)
(Continued)
53
(Continued)
7th/8th axis (Axis control PC board supporting A/B–phase pulse coder)

control
AXA H20.M
M134 Seventh–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse
H20.F coder, scale
H20.F
M136 A/B–phase pulse coder)
H20.M
M137 Eighth–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse
H20.F coder, scale
H20.F
M139 A/B–phase pulse coder)
BWG3.F Battery for absolute pulse coder (for seventh

CPA11 and eighth axes)
7th/8th axis (Axis control PC board supporting serial pulse coder)

control
AXA H20.M
M224 Seventh–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse
H20.F coder, scale
H20.F
H20.M
M227 Eighth–axis servo amplifier, motor, pulse
H20.F coder, scale
H20.F
BWG3.F Battery for absolute pulse coder (for seventh

CPA11 and eighth axes)
Analog
interface
H20.M H20.F Spindle control circuit
L/A M121
(analog control)
H20.M H20.F Spindle control circuit

M122
(analog control)
H20.M
M123 Analog input
CPA6 CPB1
H20.F
M124 Position coder
54
B–61393E/06 5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT
5 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
55
5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT B–61393E/06
5.1 Select the type of power source with reference to the list below. When the
apparatus to be used does not apply to examples 1 to 5, total up the points
POWER SOURCE on the right and select the type of power from that figure.
Printed circuit board Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Example 4 Example 5 Points
Master (16Bit) Ę 3.1
Master (32Bit) Ę Ę Ę Ę 1.3
Graphic card Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę 2.4
PMC–M card Ę Ę Ę Ę 2.8
PMC–M card with I/O link 1.0
Sub CPU card Ę Ę 2.3
5/6 axis card Ę Ę 2.1
7/8 axis card Ę Ę 2.0
DNC1 card Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę 1.0
Remote buffer card 1.0
Analog interface card Ę Ę 1.3
Laser interface card 1.5
Manual pulse generator 3 3 3 3 3 0.1 number of

generators
Pulse coder, position coder 5 5 7 8 10 0.35 number of

generators
Total points 9.55 8.55 13.55 15.00 19.00
Type of power source Power Power Power Power Power

source A or source A or source B2 source B2 source C
Power Power
source AI source AI
Total points Total below 10 Total below 15 Over 15
Type of power source Power source A or Power source B2 Power source C

Power source AI
NOTE
The Ę mark in the table above signifies that a printed circuit board should be assembled on
that apparatus. Memory cards, I/O cards, 1–4 axis cards can be disregarded.
56
5.2
CONNECTION OF THE
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
A, B1, C (INPUT UNIT
SEPARATE TYPE)
5.2.1
Connection of the
Power Unit without
Using Input Unit
JAPAN FCI 6–pin connector, black

CNC (SMS6P–1 : Housing)
1 2 3
R S G Input unit or power ON/OFF circuit

4 5 6
CP11
PA PB
CP11-1 R
CNC AC200V, 1, 50Hz
CP11-2 S AC200/220V, 1, 60Hz
CP11-3 G
To Ground
CP11-5 PA
Contact capacity
250 VAC, 3A or CP11-6 Power ready signal output
PB
30 VDC, 5A
57
Connect power ON/OFF circuit as shown below.

Optional input unit may be used instead of this circuit. (See 5.2.2)
ON button
OFF delay timer (500 ms)
TM
SK
Magnetic contactor
tm (Timer contact)
MCC
OFF button MCC
SK
PA PB
(MCC contact)
Contact in control unit
Magnetic contactor
Fuse
Control
AC200V unit
Use OFF delay timer as shown above so that Magnetic Contactor (MCC)
for control unit cannot be turned OFF unit the PA/PB holding circuit
operates.
58
5.2.2 (1) The figure below shows the connection when the input unit is used.
Connection of Power
Supply Unit when the
Input Unit is Used
Control unit Input unit
CP11 Connector CP2
1 2 3 1 2 3
R S G R S G
4 5 6 4 5 6
PA PB PA PB
TP1 M4 screw
terminal
R S
Ground
R S G
Ã Ã ÃÃ 200 VAC, 1, 50

Hz or 200/220
VAC, 1, 60 Hz
Ground of class 3
TP2 M screw terminal Fuse or higher
EON EOF COM
EON EOF COM
Ã Ã ÃÃ
Ã Ã ÃÃ ON/OFF button
59
(2) Input unit

The input unit receives input AC power and the ON/OFF button signal
and supplies the ON/OFF–controlled AC power to the control unit and
peripheral equipment.
(a) Connection diagram
Fuse
U, V , W
3 servo input Magnetic contactor
ON/OFF–controlled
200/220 VAC 200/200 VAC, 1
input, 1
ÃÃÃ ÃÃ
Not 0.3A
Ground used To servo amplifier or
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃ TP1
ÃÃÃÃ
servo transformer
EMG OUT1
EMG OUT2
S
EXR
R
EXS
Fuse
10A
Power supply unit

ÃÃ
ÃÃ
CP11
ON button
CP2
EON (6P, Black) Control Series 0
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
OFF button unit
EOF CP3
ÃÃ
COM (3P, Black)
ÃÃ
FA CP4
Fuse alarm
FB (3P, Black)
ÃÃ
signal CN2
TP2 CP5 14″ color CRT/
(3P, Black) MDI unit
CP6
(3P, White)
CP41
ÃÃÃ
Separate tape
or
ÃÃÃ
reader
CP31
ÃÃÃ
Input unit in the dotted box ON/OFF–controlled I/O module
Alarm signal
Ã
200/200 VAC, 1
TP1, TP2 . . . M4 screw terminal M3 screw terminal
(b) Pin configurations of power–supply connectors

(i) CP2, CP11, CP31: JAPAN FCI 6–pin connector, black
PA and PB: Power ready signals
1 2 3
R S G
4 5 6
PA PB
60
(ii) CP3, CP4, CP5, CN2, CP41: JAPAN FCI 3–pin connector,
black
1 2 3
R S G
(iii) CP6: JAPAN FCI 3–pin connector, white

ALA and ALB are provided to receive an alarm signal from an
I/O module and to turn off the system. Input a contact signal
that will close the contact when an alarm state is detected.
1 2 3
ALA ALB
(c) ON/OFF control of the input power to the servo amplifier or servo
transformer
As shown in the connection diagram, ON/OFF–controlled 200 or
220 VAC single–phase power can be drawn from the EXR/EXS pin
of terminal block TP1. If a magnetic contactor provided by a
machine tool builder is connected to this pin, the servo system can
be turned on or off in synchronization with the NC. The current
should not exceed 0.3 A.
(d) Connection between units
(i) Connection between the input unit and power supply unit
Input unit Power supply unit
CP2-1 R CP11-1
CP2-2 S CP11-2 AC200/220V,
1
CP2-3 G CP11-3
CP2-5 PA CP11-5
Power
CP2-6 PB CP11-6 ready
signal
61
(ii) Connection between the input unit and I/O module
Input unit
I/O module
CP5-1 R CP31-1
AC200/220V,
CP5-2 S CP31-2 1
CP5-3 G CP31-3
CP31-5
PA
Not used CP31-6
PB
Terminal block T1
CP6-1 ALA
CP6-2 ALB
(iii) Connection between the input unit and 14″ color CRT or
separate tape reader
Input unit 14″ color CRT or

tape reader
1 R 1
2 S 2
3 G 3
(e) External power ON/OFF pins (EON, EOF, COM)

The external power ON/OFF pin is used to enable the power to be
turned on or off from outside the control unit. The pins must be
connected as illustrated below:
Input unit EON Ã POWER
Ã
ON
EOF
POWER
Ã
OFF
COM
Remove the jumper con-

necting these pins, which is
usually provided.
External Power ON/OFF Signal
The figure below shows the power ON/OFF timing.
62
T off on
Between EON
and COM
Between EOF
and COM
T on T off
(Power on) (Power off)
T on 500msec
T off 500msec
T off on 5sec
ON/OFF Timing Diagram
The external power ON/OFF contact should satisfy the following

requirements:
Withstand voltage: 50 VDC or higher (between contacts)
Current: 100 mA or higher (minimum load of up to 2 mA)
(f) Fuse alarm signals FA and FB
FA and FB are short–circuited when a fuse in the power supply unit
of the NC blows or when an error such as excessive voltage or
current occurs in the DC output of the power supply unit. If an
alarm signal is input from CP6, FA and FB are short–circuited as
well. This signal is held until the input power (to the NC) is turned
off or until the OFF button is pressed.
When this signal is output, the NC is turned off, disabling the
power ON button and external power ON function. The figure
below shows the connection.
Input unit
Contact ratings

ÃÃ Up to 50 VDC
Up to 0.5 A
Up to 50 VAC
Up to 5 A
Fuse Alarm Signal
63
(3) How to use input unit
Input unit Power supply

AC power AC power unit
supply 1 supply 2 DC
Output voltage output
EON EOF COM monitor circuit
Alarm signal
OFF switch
ON switch
(Reference)
A power supply unit incorporating an input unit is
also available. This is a combined unit that incor-
porates those sections enclosed in broken lines in
the above figure.
1. The power supply unit is provided with the output voltage monitor
circuit. When the output voltage is found to be improper, an alarm
signal is sent to the input unit.
2. In the input unit, this alarm signal is held and the AC power supply 2
which supplies power to the power unit is cut off. (This is the routine
to ensure safety since normal operation cannot be assured in abnormal
output voltage.)
Reset the alarm by pressing the OFF switch or cutting off the AC
power supply 1 which supplies power to the input unit and then press
the ON switch to turn on the power again from the status above.
3. When the temporary power interruption occurs at the AC power
supply 1 and as a result the voltage drops, the voltage hold time of
input unit is set to a value which is longer than that of power unit to
perform detection by the output voltage monitor circuit and to hold an
alarm in the input unit. The same operation is also performed in the
input unit built–in type power supply unit.
4. There is no problem if the power ON/OFF is performed by the
ON/OFF switch. But, when the AC power supply is turned on/off
while the EON–CON and EOF–COM remain short–circuited, the
status where the power is cut off is the same as that where power
interruption occurs (because the power is cut off without pressing the
OFF switch) and an alarm is held in the input unit.
This alarm is canceled after passing the voltage hold time of input unit
so that an alarm is held when the AC power supply 1 is turned on again
before the pass of voltage hold time of input unit.
Thus, it is required that the time interval of power–on/off should be set
to a value which is longer than the voltage hold time of input unit for
proper power–on/off in the above use.
5. It is recommended that the power should be turned on/off using the
ON/OFF switch.
It is required to follow this since there are restrictions as described in
4 in other methods.
The conditions in terms of time for power–on/off are described below:
64
(1) When the ON/OFF switch is used:
T off on
EON-COM T on T on y 500msec
T off y 500msec
T off
EOF-COM
T off on y 5sec
Power supply
(2) When the AC power supply 1 is turned on/off while the

EON–COM and EOF–COM remain short–circuited:
T off on T off w 2.5sec

AC power supply (Equal to or more than
the voltage hold time of
Power supply input unit)
65
5.3
CONNECTION OF
INPUT UNIT BUILT–IN
TYPE POWER UNIT
(POWER SUPPLY
UNIT AI)

JAPAN FCI 3–pin (black)
(A02B-0072-K892)
CP2 (SMS3RK-3TK2)
1 2 3
200V AC of display device (output)
200R 200S G To EL/MMDI unit
(A02B-0072-K892)
CP2 (SMS3RK-3TK2)
1 2 3
AC 200V of fan (2.5A max.) (output)
200R 200S G
JAPAN FCI 6–pin (white and gold plated)
(A02B-0096-K892)
CP3 (SMS6RW-4D28)
1 2 3 4 5 6 To power ON/OFF circuit
(The functions of input unit are
ON OFF COM AL FA FB included in this power supply.)
(A02B-0072-K892)
CP1 (SMS3RK-3TK2)
1 2 3
AC 200/200V+10%, –15% (Input)
R S G 50/60Hz
JAPAN FCI 3–pin (brown) Single phase
(A02B-0072-K893)
CP14
1 2 3
24V DC of additional I/O etc (output)
+24E 0V
JAPAN FCI 6–pin (brown)
(A02B-0081-K203)
CP15
1 2 3 4 5 6 24V DC of display device (output)
0V 0V +24V +24V
66
1) Interface
CP3 : SMS6RW-4D28
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON OFF COM AL FA FB
ON
OFF Power ON/OFF contact signal input
COM
AL External alarm contact signal input

When an alarm occurs in any place other than this power supply unit,
the contact signal from outside allows this power supply to be turned
off.
When the contact EAL is closed in the circuit described in 2) the pow-
er output is turned off and the red ALM lamp located at the front panel
of power supply unit lights up.
In this status, no power supply can be turned on by closing the con-
tact PON .Open the contact POFF and cancel the alarm.
The external alarm contact signal input should be open in normal
status.
FA Power supply alarm contact signal output
When a fuse is blown and an alarm occurs, these contact signal
FB outputs are closed. On the other hand, they are open in normal sta-
tus. The alarm display and cancel method are the same as those of
external alarm contact signal input above.
2) Connection example
Power supply unit
240V AC 1A FB

RY
FA
AL
EAL
COM
POFF PON
OFF
ON
PON : Power–on switch.

POFF: Power–off switch.
EAL : External alarm contact thermostat, power alarm of external unit
RY : It is operated by the NC power alarm.
NOTE
1 Neither EAL nor RY is used in general system.
2 The contact capacity of PON, POFF, and EAL is as shown
below:
50V DC 0.1A
67
5.4
CONNECTION OF THE
INPUT UNIT BUILT–IN
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
AI (QUALIFYING FOR
CE MARKING)
D Signal assignment
CP1 (200 to 240 VAC input)
3 G
2 S
F1 (AC input fuse)
1 R
CP2 (AC output) CP3 (AC output)
3 G 3 G
2 200B 2 200B
1 200A 1 200A
Key assignment
PIL (Pilot lamp)

ALM (Alarm lamp)
CP4 (Power control)
6–pin connector
B3 FB A3 COM
B2 FA A2 OFF
B1 AL A1 ON
CP5 (+24V output)
3 CP6 (+24E output)

2 0V
3
1 +24V
2 0V
1 +24E
F3(+24V fuse, 5 A) F4 (+24E fuse, 5 A)
68
D Connection diagram
Power supply unit

Japan AMP
1–178128–3 (Housing)
CP1(200 to 240 VAC input) 1–175218–5 (Contact)
3 G
200 to 240 VAC
2 S 1, 50 Hz/60Hz
1 R
Power OFF button
ON Power ON button
Japan AMP OFF
2–178129–6 (Housing)
CP4 (Power control) 1–175218–2 (Contact)
COM
B3 FB A3 COM Alarm input
B2 FA A2 OFF AL
B1 AL A1 ON FA Alarm output
Japan AMP FB
1–178128–3 (Housing)
CP2 (AC output) 1–175218–5 (Contact)
3 G
2 200B 200 VAC to 14″
color CRT
1 200A Japan AMP
1–178128–3 (Housing)
CP3 (AC output) 1–175218–5 (Contact)
3 G
Example) Servo main current control
2 200B
1 200A
ÃÃÃÃÃ U 1
ÃÃÃÃÃ V 2 Servo amplifier
ÃÃÃÃÃ
Regulator W A
ÃÃÃÃÃ Japan AMP

MCC
*The total rating of CP2 and CP3 is up to 2.5 A.
2–178288–3 (Housing)
CP5(+24V output) 1–175218–5 (Contact)
3 24 VDC output to 9″ monochrome

CRT, 9″ PDP unit, 7.2″ mono-
2 0V
chrome LCD, 8.4″ color LCD, etc.
1 +24V *The maximum rating is 2 A.
Japan AMP
1–178288–3 (Housing)
CP6(+24E output) 1–175218–5 (Contact)
3 24 VDC output to operator’s

2 0V panel connection unit, etc.
1 +24E *The maximum rating is 2 A.
69
D Notes on using a power The power supply unit indicated below is certified as conforming to DIN
supply unit certified as VDE 0160 (German safety standard for power supplies) by TÜV
conforming to safety Rhineland.
standards D Certified power supply unit
A16B–1212–0950 (Order number: A02B–0098–H014)
D Operating requirements
1) The cabinet to house the power supply unit must be of protection
class IP54 or higher.
2) An isolating transformer or surge absorber must be configured in
the previous stage of the input power of the power supply unit.
Without the isolating transformer or surge absorber, the power
supply unit must not be connected to a factory power line.
3) The power supply unit must be housed in a metal cabinet. A power
supply unit or CNC control unit which is not sufficiently shielded
by a metal cabinet may cause electromagnetic interference (EMI).
This certification does not include certification of conformity to
EMI standards.
70
B–61393E/06 6. CONNECTION OF MACHINE INTERFACE I/O
6 CONNECTION OF MACHINE INTERFACE I/O
71
6. CONNECTION OF MACHINE INTERFACE I/O B–61393E/06
6.1 The Series 0 is provided with an I/O card as the standard machine interface
I/O. The internal I/O card is available in six types, which provide different
OVERVIEW types of output signals and different numbers of I/O signals.
When the required I/O signals outnumber the I/O signals provided by the
internal I/O card, an external I/O unit is connected as a supplement. To
add I/O signals, an expansion I/O card or other unit is connected via a
serial communication interface. This connection requires the use of a
PMC–M card.
One serial communication interface is the FANUC I/O Link. The

FANUC I/O Link is a serial interface enabling fast I/O signal (bit data)
transfer between the CNC, cell controller, I/O Unit–A, Power Mate, and
other units. When two or more units are connected to the FANUC I/O
Link, one unit functions as a master unit while the other units function as
slaves. The input signal statuses of the slave units are transferred to the
master unit at regular intervals. The output signal from the master unit
is transferred to the slave units. Multiple units can be connected to the
FANUC I/O Link. This manual describes those units that can be used with
the Series 0. For details of the other units, see the corresponding manual.
72
6.2 The internal I/O card is available in six types, which have different output
signals and different numbers of I/O signals.
CONNECTION OF THE
INTERNAL I/O CARD
Table 6.2 Internal I/O cards
Number of input Number of output
Output signal Connector that can be used
signals signals
I/O C5 40 40 M1, M2
I/O C6 Sink output 80 56 M1, M2, M18, M19
I/O C7 104 72 M1, M2, M18, M19, M20
I/O E1 40 40 M201, M202
I/O E2 DO common output 80 56 M201, M202, M218, M219
I/O E3 104 72 M201, M202, M218, M219, M220
NOTE
When using the third or fourth controlled axis, an M–series system requires an I/O–C7 or
I/O–E3 card. In the case of a T–series system, an I/O–C5 or I/O–E1 card can also be used if
the address of the third–axis/fourth–axis reference position return deceleration signal *DEC3
or *DEC4 is changed by specifying the corresponding parameter.
6.2.1
Machine Interface
Signal Standard
D Input signal standard (1) Direct current input signal A
The direct current input signal A is the signals transmitted form the
machine tool to the CNC; the signals from the buttons, limit switches,
relay contracts, or the proximity switches.
(a) The contracts of the machine tools side must satisfy the following
conditions.
Capacity of the contracts:
30 VDC, 16mA or more
Leak current between contacts when circuit is open:
1 mA or less (26.4 V voltage)
Voltage fall between contacts when circuit is closed:
2 V or less (8.5 mA current) (including voltage fall of cables)
If the contact cannot obtain a sufficient voltage drop of less than 2V
between contacts when closed by such as a 2–line type adjacent
switch, if the delay time of the input signal stipulated in Fig.
6.2.1(b) is allowed to extend to a maximum of 30 ms, a voltage
drop of less than 3.5V between contacts when closed (current less
than 8.5 mA, 1 including voltage drop of cable) can also be used.
However, a unit in which operation is guaranteed at a current of 4
mA must be used.
73
(b) The receiver circuit of this signal is as Fig. 6.2.1 (a).

The time standard of this signal is of Fig. 6.2.1 (b).
Machine tool CNC

+24V
Direct current input signal
Receiver output
signal
Filter and level
converter circuit Contact open:
Switch Resistor Logic 0
Contact closed:
Logic 1
Receiver circuit
Fig. 6.2.1 (a) Receiver circuit
Direct current input Signal Signal

signal
Logic 1
ON (High)
OFF (Low)
Logic 0
Chattering of 5
ms or less is ignored
Receiver output signal

5–22ms 5–22ms
Fig. 6.2.1 (b) Width of input signals and delay time
(2) Direct current input signal B

The direct current input signal B is the signals transmitted from the
machine tool to the NC in high speed.
(a) The contracts of the machine tool side must satisfy the following
conditions.
Capacity of the contracts:
30VDC, 16mA or more
Leak current between contacts when circuit is open:
1 mA or less (26.4 V voltage)
Voltage fall between contacts when circuit is closed:
2 V or less (8.5 mA current)
(including voltage fall of cables)
(b) The receiver circuit of this signal is as Fig. 6.2.1 (c).
74
Machine tool CNC

+24V
Receiver output
signal
Filter and level
converter circuit Contact open:
Resistor Logic 0
Contact closed:
Logic 1
Receiver circuit
Fig. 6.2.1 (c) Receiver circuit

Logic 1
ON
Logic 0
OFF
Receiver output signal
2ms max 2ms max
Fig. 6.2.1 (d) Width of input signals and delay time
(3) Selection of common line

There are two types of direct current input signal. Fig. 6.2.1 (e) shows
a sample connection for the first type: an input signal fixed to the sink
input. Fig. 6.2.1 (f) shows a sample connection for the second type:
an input signal which can be set to either sink input or source input
according to the wiring in the machine.
75
Sample DI connection of expansion I/O card

Control unit
Sink input
+24E
+24E
Filter and level
Contact converter circuit
Input signal DI
Open: Logic 0
Close: Logic 1 Resistor
COMn
0V
Fig. 6.2.1 (e)
Source input Control unit
+24E
+24E
COMn
Resistor
Filter and level
Contact Input signal DI converter circuit
Open: Logic 1 0V
Close: Logic 0
Fig. 6.2.1 (f)
WARNING
The COMn signal must always be connected to 0 V or 24 V. Do not leave it open.
D Output signal standard A direct current output signal is used to drive a light emitting diode (LED)
indicator or a relay of a machine. For the direct current output signal, a
non–insulation interface (direct current output signal A) and a DO
common output interface (direct current output signal B) are supported.
The non–insulation interface uses an NPN transistor as a driver, while the
DO common output interface uses a semiconductor contact.
(1) Direct current output signal A
(a) Rating of the output transistor
(i) Maximum load current when the output is on
Up to 200 mA, including an instantaneous value
76
(ii)Saturation voltage when the output is on

1.6 Vmax, 1.0 Vtyp at a load current of 200 mA
(iii)Withstand voltage when the output is off
Up to 24 V +20%, including an instantaneous value
(iv)Leakage current when the output is off
Up to 100 µA
(b) Output circuit
Regulated power supply (DC)

Control unit (I/O–C5, C6, C7)
0V
0V +24V
Sink driver Output Protection resistor
signal Lamp
Sink driver Output

signal Resistor LED
Sink driver Output

signal Relay
Connect 0V of the machine’s regulated power supply and 0V

of the control unit to a common point. Do not ground 0V of the
regulated power supply separately in the machine.
This sample circuit uses sink I/O cards C5, C6, and C7.
Fig. 6.2.1 (g)
(c) When connecting inductive loads like relays in the machine tool
side, a spark killer must be inserted. The spark killer must also be
inserted as near as possible (within 20 cm) to the load. When
connecting capacitance load in the machine tool side, a resistance
for current limit must be inserted in series, and it must be used
within the rated current and voltage, including instantaneous
current and voltage.
(d) When lighting a lamp directly with a solid state relay output, a rush
current may flow to damage the driver. A protection circuit as Fig.
6.2.1 (n) must be inserted and it must be used within the rated
voltage and current, including instantaneous current and voltage.
77
(2) Direct current output signal B

(a)Driver ratings
(i) Maximum load current when the output is on
Up to 250 mA, including an instantaneous value
(ii)Maximum voltage drop when the output is on
6 IL (volt)
where IL is a load current
(Example) When IL is 250 mA, 6 IL = 6 0.25 = 1.5 (V)
(iii)Withstand voltage when the output is off
Up to 50 V, including an instantaneous value
(iv)Leakage current when the output is off
Up to 100 µA
Control unit (I/O–E1, E2, E3)

Neutral and static insulation sink driver COMn
+24V 0V
ISO–
LATER Output Protection resistor
signal
Driver
Lamp
ISO–
LATER Output
signal
Resistor
Driver
ISO–
LATER Output
signal
Relay
Driver
This sample circuit uses I/O cards E1, E2, and E3 as a source DO. The voltage of the regulated
power supply can be adjusted from 24 to 48 VDC. The polarity of the regulated power supply is in-
verted when the I/O card is used as a sink DO. In this case, the orientation of the LED and surge
suppression diode must be inverted.
Fig. 6.2.1 (h)
78
NOTE
1 When connecting inductive loads like relays in the machine tool side, a spark killer must be
inserted. The spark killer must also be inserted as near as possible (within 20 cm) to the load.
When connecting capacitance load in the machine tool side, a resistance for current limit must
be inserted in series, and it must be used within the rated current and voltage, including
instantaneous current and voltage.
2 When lighting a lamp directly with a solid state relay output, a rush current may flow to damage
the driver. A protection circuit as below must be inserted and it must be used within the rated
voltage and current, including instantaneous current and voltage.
79
6.2.2
System without PMC
D Signal assignment of the The figure below shows the signal assignment of the internal I/O card.
internal I/O card The CNC for machining center (M series) systems and that for lathe (T
series) systems use different signals.
NOTE
Series 0–PD is in need of PMC. See Subsec. 6.2.5 for
machine interface I/O of Series 0–PD.
(1) M–series signals

(a) Signals input from the machine to the CNC (system without PMC)
PMC DGN BIT NUMBER M Series
ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 000
M18–36 M18–21 M18–5 M18–35 M18–20 M18–34 M18–19 M18–33
X002 002
M18–24 M18–8 M18–38 M18–23 M18–7 M18–37 M18–22 M18–6
X004 004 4NG

M18–11 M18–41 M18–26 M18–10 M18–40 M18–25 M18–9 M18–39
X006 006
M18–45 M18–14 M18–44 M18–13 M18–43 M18–12 M18–42 M18–27
X008 008 SKIP *RILK ZAE YAE XAE

M18–49 M18–18 M18–48 M18–17 M18–47 M18–16 M18–46 M18–15
X010 010
M20–11 M20–41 M20–26 M20–10
X012 012
M20–45 M20–14 M20–44 M20–13 M20–43 M20–12 M20–42 M20–27
X014 014
M20–49 M20–18 M20–48 M20–17 M20–47 M20–16 M20–46 M20–15
X016 016 HX/ROV1 *DECX –X +X SBK BDT

M1–6 M1–38 M1–20 M1–21 M1–11 M1–12
X017 017 HY/ROV2 *DECY –Y +Y MLK *ILK

M1–7 M1–39 M1–22 M1–23 M1–9 M1–10
X018 018 HZ/DRN *DECZ –Z +Z

M1–8 M1–40 M1–24 M1–25
X019 019 H4 *DEC4 –4 +4

M20–40 M20–25 M20–9 M20–39
X020 020 ZRN *SSTP SOR SAR FIN ST MP2 MP1/MINP
M1–13 M1–37 M1–5 M1–14 M1–15 M1–16 M1–17 M1–18
X021 021 ERS RT *SP *ESP *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1

M1–41 M1–26 M1–27 M1–19 M1–33 M1–34 M1–35 M1–36
X022 0022 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1
M1–42 M1–43 M1–44 M1–45 M1–46 M1–47 M1–48 M1–49
80
(b) Signals output from the CNC to the machine (system without
PMC)
PMC DGN BIT NUMBER M Series

ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y048 048 OP SA STL SPL ZPZ/EF ZPY ZPX
M2–5 M2–6 M2–7 M2–8 M2–27 M2–26 M2–25
Y049 049 MA ENB DEN RST AL

M2–9 M2–41 M2–22 M2–23 M2–24
Y050 050 DST TF SF MF

M2–10 M2–20 M2–19 M2–21
Y051 051 M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 M11
M2–33 M2–34 M2–35 M2–36 M2–37 M2–38 M2–39 M2–40
Y052 052 S28 S24 S22 S21 S18 S14/GR30 S12/GR20 S11/GR10
M2–11 M2–12 M2–13 M2–14 M2–15 M2–16 M2–17 M2–18
Y053 053 T28 T24 T22 T21 T18 T14 T12 T11
M2–42 M2–43 M2–44 M2–45 M2–46 M2–47 M2–48 M2–49
Y080 080
M19–8 M19–7 M19–6 M19–5 M19–4 M19–3 M19–2 M19–1
Y082 082
M19–16 M19–15 M19–14 M19–13 M19–12 M19–11 M19–10 M19–9
Y084 084 ZP4

M20–36 M20–21 M20–5 M20–35 M20–20 M20–34 M20–19 M20–33
Y086 086
M20–24 M20–8 M20–38 M20–23 M20–7 M20–37 M20–22 M20–6
(2) T–series signals

(a) Signals input from the machine to the CNC (system without PMC)
PMC DGN BIT NUMBER T Series

ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 000
M18–36 M18–21 M18–5 M18–35 M18–20 M18–34 M18–19 M18–33
X002 002
M18–24 M18–8 M18–38 M18–23 M18–7 M18–37 M18–22 M18–6
X004 004
M18–11 M18–41 M18–26 M18–10 M18–40 M18–25 M18–9 M18–39
X006 006
M18–45 M18–14 M18–44 M18–13 M18–43 M18–12 M18–42 M18–27
SKIP ZAE XAE

X008 008 SKIP SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 ZAE XAE 0–GCC
M18–49 M18–18 M18–48 M18–17 M18–47 M18–16 M18–46 M18–15
X010 010
M20–11 M20–41 M20–26 M20–10
81
X012 012
M20–45 M20–14 M20–44 M20–13 M20–43 M20–12 M20–42 M20–27
X014 014
M20–49 M20–18 M20–48 M20–17 M20–47 M20–16 M20–42 M20–15
X016 016 HX/ROV1 *DECX –X +X SBK BDT

M1–6 M1–38 M1–20 M1–21 M1–11 M1–12
X017 017 HZ/ROV2 *DECZ –Z +Z MLK MPI/MINP
M1–7 M1–39 M1–22 M1–23 M1–9 M1–10
X018 018 DRN *+LZ GR2 GR1

M1–8 M1–40 M1–24 M1–25
X019 019 *DEC3 *DEC4

M20–40 M20–25 M20–9 M20–39
X020 020 ZRN *SSTP SOR SAR FIN ST STLK MIX

M1–13 M1–37 M1–5 M1–14 M1–15 M1–16 M1–17 M1–18
X021 021 ERS RT *SP *ESP *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1

M1–41 M1–26 M1–27 M1–19 M1–33 M1–34 M1–35 M1–36
X022 022 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1
M1–42 M1–43 M1–44 M1–45 M1–46 M1–47 M1–48 M1–49
(b) Signals output from the CNC to the machine (system without
PMC)
PMC DGN BIT NUMBER T Series

ADDRESS NO. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y048 048 OP SA STL SPL ZPZ ZPX
M2–5 M2–6 M2–7 M2–8 M2–27 M2–26 M2–25
Y049 049 MA ENB DEN RST AL

M2–9 M2–41 M2–22 M2–23 M2–24
Y050 050 DST TF SF MF

M2–10 M2–20 M2–19 M2–21
Y051 051 M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 M11
M2–33 M2–34 M2–35 M2–36 M2–37 M2–38 M2–39 M2–40
Y052 052 S28 S24 S22 S21 S18 S14 S12 S11
M2–11 M2–12 M2–13 M2–14 M2–15 M2–16 M2–17 M2–18
Y053 053 T28 T24 T22 T21 T18 T14 T12 T11
M2–42 M2–43 M2–44 M2–45 M2–46 M2–47 M2–48 M2–49
Y080 080
M19–8 M19–7 M19–6 M19–5 M19–4 M19–3 M19–2 M19–1
Y082 082
M19–16 M19–15 M19–14 M19–13 M19–12 M19–11 M19–10 M19–9
Y084 084 AP4

M20–36 M20–21 M20–5 M20–35 M20–20 M20–34 M20–19 M20–33
Y086 086
M20–24 M20–8 M20–38 M20–23 M20–7 M20–37 M20–22 M20–6
82
6.2.3 Refer to another function version for the descriptions on signals.

Descriptions on
Signals
6.2.4 Following are signal connection with power magnetic cabinet.

Signal Connection with
Power Magnetic
Cabinet
M series power magnetic interface
Control unit
M1(MR–50RMD)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
HX HY HZ MP1
0V 0V 0V 0V SOR ROV1 ROV2 DRN MLK *ILK SBK BDT ZRN SAR FIN ST MP2 MINP
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 J1
*ESP –X +X –Y +Y –Z +Z RZ *SP +24E +24E +24E +24E
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
*OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1 *SSTP *DECX *DECY *DECZ ERS PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1
M2(MR–50RMD)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
S14 S12 S11
0V 0V 0V 0V OP SA STL SPL MA DST S28 S24 S22 S21 S18 GR30 GR20 GR10
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 J2
ZPZ
SF TF MF DEN RST AL ZPX ZPY EF
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 M11 ENB T28 T24 T22 T21 T18 T14 T12 T11
Machine opera-
tor’s panel and
M18(MR–50RMD)
magnetic cabinet
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
4NG XAE ZAE
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 J30
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
YAE *RILK SKIP
M20(MR–50RMD)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
–4
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 J32
ZP4 *DEC4 CONG
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
+4 H4 SKIP
NOTE
Use unified shield cable for signal connection of J1 and J2.
Recommended cable specification A66L–0001–0042 (7/0.18 50 cores)
83
T series power magnetic interface
Control unit
M1(MR–50RMD)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
HX HZ MP1
0V 0V 0V 0V SOR DRN MLK SBK BDT ZRN SAR FIN ST STLK MIX
ROV1 ROV2 MINP
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 J1
*ESP –X +X –Z +Z GR2 GR1 RT *SP +24E +24E +24E +24E
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
*OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1 *SSTP *DECK *DECZ *+LZ ERS PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1 KEY MD4 MD2 MD1
M2(MR–50RMD)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
0V 0V 0V 0V OP SA STL SPL MA DST S28 S24 S22 S21 S18 S14 S12 S11
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 J2
SF TF MF DEN RST AL ZPX ZPZ

Machine opera-
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
tor’s panel and
M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 M11 ENB T28 T24 T22 T21 T18 T14 T12 T11 magnetic cabinet
M18(MR–50RMD)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
XAE
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 J30
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
ZAE SKIP
NOTE
Use unified shield cable for signal connection of J1 and J2.
Recommended cable specification A66L–0001–0042 (7/0.18 50 cores)
84
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Filter and level
Automatic operation start signal converter circuit
Resistor
Automatic operation stop signal
Mode selection
signal
Jog/step feed direction selection signal
Manual rapid traverse signal
The circuit indicated above uses sink direct current input

signal A and I/O cards C5, C6, and C7. For I/O cards E1,
E2, and E3, connector M201 is used.
CAUTION
The mode selection signal uses a gray code. To ensure the correct operation of the NC at mode
switching, use a rotary switch with make–before–break contacts.
NOTE
(M) . . . . . . . . M series
(T) . . . . . . . . . T series
85
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Filter and level
Machine lock signal converter circuit
Resistor
Emergency stop signal
Feedrate override signal and jog

feedrate signal
Jog feedrate (inch/min)

Jog feedrate (mm/min)
Override value (%)
Type–A or Type–B setting can be made by specifying the
corresponding parameter.
The circuit indicated above uses sink direct current input signal A and I/O cards C5, C6,
and C7. For I/O cards E1, E2, and E3, connector M201 is used.
86
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Filter and level
Speed reached signal converter circuit
Resistor
Spindle stop signal
Spindle orientation in progress signal
Workpiece number selection signal
Workpiece number
87
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Filter and level
Single block signal converter circuit
Resistor
Optional block skip signal
Reference position return signal
Reference position return

deceleration signal

deceleration signal

deceleration signal
Miscellaneous function
completion signal
External reset signal
Memory protection signal

(For memory protection)
(Program memory can be rewritten
while the contact is closed.)
Z+ direction overtravel signal
Gear selection signal

(constant surface speed control)
Gear selection signal
(constant surface speed control)
Gear number
88
Control unit
Pin number
Manual handle feed axis selection/override signal
Bit number
Address number
Mode selection Filter and level

switch converter circuit
Resistor
Manual handle feed axis

Axis selection selection/dry run
switch
Diode ratings
Forward current:
10 mA or higher
Withstand reverse voltage:
30 V or higher
Dry run switch Saturation voltage: Up to
1 V (IF = 10 mA)
Rapid traverse override switch

Either of two settings can be selected by specify-
ing the corresponding parameter.
Data input external start signal
Incremental feed/data input

external start signal
Incremental feed signal
All the signals indicated above are M–series signals. The circuit indicated above uses
sink direct current input signal A and I/O cards C5, C6, and C7. For I/O cards E1, E2,
and E3, connector M201 is used.
89
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Filter and level
converter circuit
Interlock signal
Resistor
Control unit (expansion I/O cards C6/C7/E6/E7)

Automatic tool compensation signal
(X–axis)

(Y–axis)

(Z–axis)
Interlock signal
Skip signal
Fourth–axis ignore signal
All the signals indicated above are M–series signals. *ILK and 4NG are sink direct current input signals
A, and XAE, YAE, ZAE, *RILK, and SKIP are sink direct current input signals B. The circuit indicated
above uses I/O cards C5, C6, and C7. For I/O cards E1, E2, and E3, connectors M1 and M18 should be
replaced with M201 and M218, respectively.
90
Dry run switch Control unit

Pin number
Manual handle feed axis selection/override signal
Bit number
Address number
Mode selection Filter and level
switch converter circuit
Resistor
ÃÃÃÃÃ
Axis selection switch
Diode ratings
Forward current:
10 mA or higher
Withstand reverse voltage:
30 V or higher
Saturation voltage:
Up to 1 V (IF = 10 mA)
Rapid traverse override switch

Either of two settings can be selected by
specifying the corresponding parameter.
Dry run signal
Data input external start signal
Incremental feed/data input

external start signal
Incremental feed signal
All the signals indicated above are T–series signals. The circuit indicated above uses
sink direct current input signal A and I/O cards C5, C6, and C7. For I/O cards E1, E2,
and E3, connector M201 is used.
91
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Filter and level
Interlock signal converter circuit
Resistor
Mirror image signal
Control unit (expansion I/O cards C6/C7/E6/E7)

(X–axis)

(Z–axis)
Skip signal
Skip signal
Skip signal
Skip signal
All the signals indicated above are T–series signals. STLK and MIX are sink direct current input signals
A, and XAE, ZAE, SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4, and SKIP are sink direct current input signals B. The circuit
indicated above uses I/O cards C5, C6, and C7. For I/O cards E1, E2, and E3, connectors M1 and M18
should be replaced with M201 and M218, respectively.
92
Control unit (I/O–C5, C6, C7) Pin number Regulated power supply
Address number
Bit number
Sink driver
Resistor
Automatic operation activation in progress
signal
Resistor
Automatic operation stop signal
Resistor
X–axis reference position return completion
signal
Resistor
Y/Z–axis reference position return comple-
tion signal
Resistor
Z–axis reference position return completion
signal/external operation function command
signal
Distribution completion signal
Alarm signal
Reset signal
Ready signal
Servo ready signal
Manual data input start signal
Automatic operation in progress signal
The circuit indicated above uses sink I/O cards C5, C6, and C7.
93
Control unit (I/O–C5, C6, C7) Pin number Regulated power supply
Address number
Bit number
Sink driver
Relay Miscellaneous function code signal
Miscellaneous function code signal
Spindle–speed function code signal/

gear selection signal


Spindle–speed function code signal
94
Control unit (I/O–C5, C6, C7) Pin number Regulated power supply (DC)
Address number
Bit number
Sink driver
Relay Spindle–speed function code signal
Relay Spindle–speed function code signal
Tool function code signal
95
Control unit (I/O–C5, C6–C7) Pin number Regulated power supply

Address number
Bit number
Sink driver
Relay Miscellaneous function code read signal
Relay Spindle–speed function code read signal
Tool function code read signal
Spindle enable signal
96

Address number
Pin number
Bit number
Neutral and static insulation sink driver Regulated power supply (DC)
Resistor
Automatic operation activation in progress
Driver signal
Resistor
Driver Automatic operation stop signal
Resistor
Driver X–axis reference position return completion
signal
Resistor
Driver Y/Z–axis reference position return completion
signal
Resistor
Driver Z–axis reference position return completion
signal/External operation function command
signal
Driver Relay Servo ready signal
Driver Automatic operation in progress signal
Driver Spindle enable signal
The circuit indicated above uses I/O cards E1, E2, and E3 as a source DO.
The voltage of the regulated power supply can be adjusted from 24 to 48
VDC. The polarity of the regulated power supply is inverted when the I/O
card is used as a sink DO. In this case, the orientation of the LEDs and
surge suppression diodes must be inverted.
97

Address number Pin number
Bit number
Relay Alarm signal

Driver
Driver Relay Reset signal
Driver Relay Distribution completion signal
Driver Relay Ready signal
Driver Relay Miscellaneous function code read signal
Driver Relay Spindle–speed function code read signal
Driver Relay Tool function code read signal
Driver Relay Manual data input activation signal
The circuit indicated above uses I/O cards E1, E2, and E3 as a source DO. The voltage of
the regulated power supply can be adjusted from 24 to 48 VDC. The polarity of the regulated
power supply is inverted when the I/O card is used as a sink DO. In this case, the orientation
of the LEDs and surge suppression diodes must be inverted.
98

Bit number

Driver
Driver Relay Miscellaneous function code signal
The circuit indicated above uses I/O cards E1, E2, and E3 as a source DO. The voltage of the
regulated power supply can be adjusted from 24 to 48 VDC. The polarity of the regulated power
supply is inverted when the I/O card is used as a sink DO. In this case, the orientation of the
LEDs and surge suppression diodes must be inverted.
99

Bit number
Relay Spindle–speed function code signal/gear

Driver selection signal
Driver Relay Spindle–speed function code signal/gear

selection signal
Driver Relay Spindle–speed function code signal
supply is inverted when the I/O card is used as a sink DO. In this case, the orientation of the
LEDs and surge suppression diodes must be inverted.
100

Bit number
Relay Tool function code signal

Driver
Driver Relay Tool function code signal
supply is inverted when the I/O card is used as a sink DO. In this case, the orientation of the LEDs
and surge suppression diodes must be inverted.
101
6.2.5 Two PMCs are available for the Series 0: the PMC–MODEL L and
System Using the PMC PMC–MODEL M.
When a PMC is used, a signal input from the machine is input to the PMC,
which outputs a signal to the CNC according to the input signal and
sequence program. A signal output from the CNC is sent through the
PMC to the machine.
The pins of the internal I/O card can be more flexibly assigned to I/O
signals than those of a system without a PMC. Some input signals are,
however, monitored directly by the CNC without passing through the
PMC.
D Signals that are directly

monitored by the CNC
Control unit
Pin number
Bit number
Address number
Emergency stop signal Resistor Filter and level

converter circuit
Reference position return deceleration

signal

signal

signal
The circuit indicated above uses sink direct current input signal A and I/O cards
C5, C6, and C7. For I/O cards E1, E2, and E3, connector M201 is used.
102
D Connector table of
built–in I/O C5 to C7
Control unit
M1 (MR–50RMD) M18 (MR–50RMD)
1 0V 33 X21.3 1 0V 33 X00.0
2 0V X21.4 34 X21.2 2 0V 34 X00.2
19 19 X00.1
3 0V 35 X21.1 3 0V 35 X00.4
20 X16.3 20 X00.3
4 0V 36 X21.0 4 COM1 36 X00.7
21 X16.2 21 X00.6
5 X20.5 37 X20.6 5 X00.5 37 X02.2 J1
22 X17.3 22 X02.1 M1
6 X16.7 38 X16.5 6 X02.0 38 X02.5
23 X17.2 23 X02.4
7 X17.7 39 X17.5 7 X02.3 39 X04.0
24 X18.3 24 X02.7
8 X18.7 40 X18.5 8 X02.6 40 X04.3
25 X18.2 25 X04.2
9 X17.1 41 X21.7 9 X04.1 41 X04.6
26 X21.6 26 X04.5 J30
10 X17.0 42 X22.7 10 X04.4 42 X06.1
27 X21.5 27 X06.0 M18
X04.7
11 X16.1 43 X22.6 11 4NG 43 X06.3
28 28 COM2
12 X16.0 44 X22.5 12 X06.2 44 X06.5
29 +24E 29 COM3
13 X20.7 45 X22.4 13 X06.4 45 X06.7
30 +24E 30
14 X20.4 46 X22.3 14 X06.6 46 X08.1
31 +24E 31
15 X20.3 47 X22.2 15 X08.0 47 X08.3
32 +24E 32
16 X20.2 48 X22.1 16 X08.2 48 X08.5
17 X20.1 49 X22.0 17 X08.4 49 X08.7
18 X20.0 50 0V 18 X08.6 50 0V
M2 (MR–50RMD) M20 (MR–50RMD)

1 0V 33 Y51.7 1 0V 33 Y84.0
2 0V 34 Y51.6 2 0V 34 Y84.2
19 Y50.2 19 Y84.1 Magnetic
3 0V 35 Y51.5 3 0V 35 Y84.4 cabinet and
20 Y50.3 20 Y84.3
4 0V 36 Y51.4 4 0V 36 Y84.7 operator’s
21 Y50.0 21 Y84.6 panel or
5 Y48.7 37 Y51.3 5 Y84.5 37 Y86.2 J2
22 Y49.3 22 Y86.1 M2 machine side
6 Y48.6 38 Y51.2 6 Y86.0 38 Y86.5
23 Y49.1 23 Y86.4
7 Y48.5 39 Y51.1 7 Y86.3 39 X19.2
24 Y49.0 24 Y86.7
8 Y48.4 40 Y51.0 8 Y86.6 40 X19.7
25 Y48.0 25 X19.5
9 Y49.7 41 Y49.4 9 X19.3 41 X10.6
26 Y48.1 26 X10.5
10 Y50.5 42 Y53.7 10 X10.4 42 X12.1
27 Y48.2 27 X12.0
11 Y52.7 43 Y53.6 11 X10.7 43 X12.3
28 28 COM4
12 Y52.6 44 Y53.5 12 X12.2 44 X12.5 J32
29 29 COM5 M20
13 Y52.5 45 Y53.4 13 X12.4 45 X12.7
30 30
14 Y52.4 46 Y53.3 14 X12.6 46 X14.1
31 31
15 Y52.3 47 Y53.2 15 X14.0 47 X14.3
32 32
16 Y52.2 48 Y53.1 16 X14.2 48 X14.5
17 Y52.1 49 Y53.0 17 X14.4 49 X14.7
18 Y52.0 50 0V 18 X14.6 50 0V
M19 (MR–20RMD)
1 Y80.0 14 Y82.5
8 Y80.7
2 Y80.1 15 Y82.6
9 Y82.0 J31
3 Y80.2 16 Y82.7
10 Y82.1 M19
4 Y80.3 17
11 Y82.2
5 Y80.4 18 0V
12 Y82.3
6 Y80.5 0V
13 Y82.4
7 Y80.6 0V
NOTE
Use unified shielded cable forJ1, J2, J30, J31 and J32.
Recommended cable : A66L–0001–0042 (7/0.18 50 cores)
A66L–0001–0041 (7/0.18 20 cores)
103
D Connector table of
built–in I/O E1 to E3
Control unit
M201 (MR–50RMD) M218 (MR–50RMD)
1 0V 33 X21.3 1 0V 33 X00.0
2 0V 34 X21.2 2 0V 34 X00.2
19 X21.4 19 X00.1
3 0V 35 X21.1 3 0V 35 X00.4
20 X16.3 20 X00.3
4 0V 36 X21.0 4 COMI 1 36 X00.7
21 X16.2 21 X00.6
5 X20.5 37 X20.6 5 X00.5 37 X02.2 J1
22 X17.3 22 X02.1 M201
6 X16.7 38 X16.5 6 X02.0 38 X02.5
23 X17.2 23 X02.4
7 X17.7 39 X17.5 7 X02.3 39 X04.0
24 X18.3 24 X02.7
8 X18.7 40 X18.5 8 X02.6 40 X04.3
25 X18.2 25 X04.2
9 X17.1 41 X21.7 9 X04.1 41 X04.6
26 X21.6 26 X04.5 J30
10 X17.0 42 X22.7 10 X04.4 42 X06.1
27 X21.5 27 X06.0 M218
X04.7 43
11 X16.1 43 X22.6 11 4NG X06.3
28 28 COMI 2
12 X16.0 44 X22.5 12 X06.2 44 X06.5
29 +24E 29 COMI 3
13 X20.7 45 X22.4 13 X06.4 45 X06.7
30 +24E 30
14 X20.4 46 X22.3 14 X06.6 46 X08.1
31 +24E 31
15 X20.3 47 X22.2 15 X08.0 47 X08.3
32 +24E 32
16 X20.2 48 X22.1 16 X08.2 48 X08.5
17 X20.1 49 X22.0 17 X08.4 49 X08.7
18 X20.0 50 0V 18 X08.6 50 0V
M202 (MR–50RMD) M220 (MR–50RMD)

1 COMO 3 33 Y51.7 1 0V 33 Y84.0
2 COMO 2 34 Y51.6 2 0V 34 Y84.2 Magnetic
19 Y50.2 19 Y84.1
COMO 1 35 COMO 8 35 cabinet and
3 Y51.5 3 Y84.4
20 Y50.3 20 Y84.3 operator’s
4 COMO 0 36 Y51.4 4 COMO 7 36 Y84.7 panel or
21 Y50.0 21 Y84.6
5 Y48.7 37 Y51.3 5 Y84.5 37 Y86.2 J2 machine
22 Y49.3 22 Y86.1 M202 side
6 Y48.6 38 Y51.2 6 Y86.0 38 Y86.5
23 Y49.1 23 Y86.4
7 Y48.5 39 Y51.1 7 Y86.3 39 X19.2
24 Y49.0 24 Y86.7
8 Y48.4 40 Y51.0 8 Y86.6 40 X19.7
25 Y48.0 25 X19.5
9 Y49.7 41 Y49.4 9 X19.3 41 X10.6
26 Y48.1 26 X10.5
10 Y50.5 42 Y53.7 10 X10.4 42 X12.1
27 Y48.2 27 X12.0
11 Y52.7 43 Y53.6 11 X10.7 43 X12.3
28 28 COMI 4
12 Y52.6 44 Y53.5 12 X12.2 44 X12.5 J32
29 29 COMI 5 M220
13 Y52.5 45 Y53.4 13 X12.4 45 X12.7
30 30
14 Y52.4 46 Y53.3 14 X12.6 46 X14.1
31 31
15 Y52.3 47 Y53.2 15 X14.0 47 X14.3
32 32
16 Y52.2 48 Y53.1 16 X14.2 48 X14.5
17 Y52.1 49 Y53.0 17 X14.4 49 X14.7
18 Y52.0 50 COMO 4 18 X14.6 50 0V
M219 (MR–20RMD)
1 Y80.0 14 Y82.5
8 Y80.7
2 Y80.1 15 Y82.6
9 Y82.0 J31
3 Y80.2 16 Y82.7
10 Y82.1 M219
4 Y80.3 17
11 Y82.2
5 Y80.4 18 0V
12 Y82.3
6 Y80.5 19 COMO 6
13 Y82.4
7 Y80.6 20 COMO 5
NOTE
Use unified shielded cable forJ1, J2, J30, J31 and J32.
Recommended cable : A66L–0001–0042 (7/0.18 50 cores)
A66L–0001–0041 (7/0.18 20 cores)
104
D Signal pin assignment of

internal I/O
Table 6.2.5 (a) Signal pin assignment and common signal pin assignment for input signals
Common signal pin
Signal pin assignment
assignment Signal that is directly monitored
Signal
g address
by the CNC
I/O–C I/O–E No. I/O–C I/O–E No.
X00#0 M18 M218 33 M18 M218 04 *+LX (0–PD)
X00#1 M18 M218 19 *–LX (0–PD)
X00#2 M18 M218 34
X00#3 M18 M218 20
X00#4 M18 M218 35
X00#5 M18 M218 05 *DECX (0–PD)
X00#6 M18 M218 21

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
+24E: Pins 29, 30, 31,
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X00#7 M18 M218 36 and 32 of M1/M201
0V: Pins 01, 02, and 03
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X02#0 M18 M218 06 of M18/M218 *+LY (0–PD)
X02#1 M18 M218 22 *–LY (0–PD)
X02#2 M18 M218 37
X02#3 M18 M218 07
X02#4 M18 M218 23
X02#5 M18 M218 38 *DECY (0–PD)
X02#6 M18 M218 08
X02#7 M18 M218 24
X04#0 M18 M218 39 M18 M218 28 *+L3 (0–PD)
X04#1 M18 M218 09 *–L3 (0–PD)
X04#2 M18 M218 25
X04#3 M18 M218 40
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X04#4 M18 M218 10
X04#5 M18 M218 26

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
+24E: Pins 29, 30, 31, *DEC3 (0–PD)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
and 32 of M1/M201
X04#6 M18 M218 41
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
0V: Pins 01, 02, and 03
of M18/M218
X04#7 M18 M218 11 (4NG M series)
X06#0 M18 M218 27 *+L4 (0–PD)
X06#1 M18 M218 42 *–L4 (0–PD)
X06#2 M18 M218 12
105
Common signal pin

Signal
g address
by the CNC
X06#3 M18 M218 43 M18 M218 28
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X06#4 M18 M218 13
+24E: Pins 29, 30, 31,
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
and 32 of M1/M201
X06#5 M18 M218 44 *DEC4 (0–PD)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
0V: Pins 01, 02, and 03
X06#6 M18 M218 14 of M18/M218 4NG (0–PD)
X06#7 M18 M218 45
X08#0 M18 M218 15 M18 M218 29 XAE (T, M), *RILK (0–PD)
X08#1 M18 M218 46 YAE (M) /ZAE (T)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X08#2 M18 M218 16 ZAE (M)
X08#3 M18 M218 47

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
+24E: Pins 29, 30, 31,
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
and 32 of M1/M201
X08#4 M18 M218 17 PFWB (0–PD)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
0V: Pins 01, 02, and 03
of M18/M218
X08#5 M18 M218 48 *RILK (M), *PFIN (0–PD)
X08#6 M18 M218 18 *NFIN (0–PD)
X08#7 M18 M218 49 SKIP (M, T), PE (0–PD)
X10#4 M20 M220 10 M20 M220 28
X10#5 M20 M220 26
X10#6 M20 M220 41
X10#7 M20 M220 11
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X12#0 M20 M220 27
X12#1 M20 M220 42

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
+24E: Pins 29, 30, 31,
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
and 32 of M1/M201
X12#2 M20 M220 12
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
0V: Pins 01, 02, 03,
and 04 of
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X12#3 M20 M220 43 M20/M220
X12#4 M20 M220 13
X12#5 M20 M220 44
X12#6 M20 M220 14
X12#7 M20 M220 45
X08#0 to X08#7 are direct current input signals B (for fast signal input).
106
Common signal pin

Signal
g address
by the CNC
X14#0 M20 M220 15 M20 M220 29
X14#1 M20 M220 46
X14#2 M20 M220 16
X14#3 M20 M220 47

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X14#4 M20 M220 17 +24E: Pins 29, 30, 31, and *ESP (0–PD)
32 of M1/M201
X14#5 M20 M220 48
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
0V: Pins 01, 02, 03, and
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
04 of M20/M220
X14#6 M20 M220 18
X14#7 M20 M220 49
X19#2 M20 M220 39
X19#3 M20 M220 09
X19#5 M20 M220 25
X19#7 M20 M220 40
X16#0 M1 M201 12 Always sink input *+EDCX (0–PD)
X16#1 M1 M201 11 *+EDCY (0–PD)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X16#2 M1 M201 21 *+EDC3 (0–PD)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
+24E: Pins 29, 30, 31, and
X16#3 M1 M201 20 32 of M1/M201 *+EDC4 (0–PD)
X16#5 M1 M201 38 *DECX
X16#7 M1 M201 06 *–EDCX (0–PD)
X17#0 M1 M201 10 *–EDCY (0–PD)
X17#1 M1 M201 09 *–EDC3 (0–PD)
X17#2 M1 M201 23 *–EDC4 (0–PD)
X17#3 M1 M201 22
X17#5 M1 M201 39 *DECY (M) /*DECZ (T)
X17#7 M1 M201 07
X18#2 M1 M201 25
X18#3 M1 M201 24
X18#5 M1 M201 40 *DECZ (M) /+LZ (T)
X18#7 M1 M201 08
X20#0 M1 M201 18
107
Common signal pin

Signal
g address
by the CNC
X20#1 M1 M201 17 Always sink input
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X20#2 M1 M201 16
X20#3 M1 M201 15
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
+24E: Pins 29, 30, 31,
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
and 32 of
X20#4 M1 M201 14 M1/M201
X20#5 M1 M201 05
X20#6 M1 M201 37
X20#7 M1 M201 13
X21#0 M1 M201 36
X21#1 M1 M201 35
X21#2 M1 M201 34
X21#3 M1 M201 33
X21#4 M1 M201 19 *ESP (T, M)
X21#5 M1 M201 27
X21#6 M1 M201 26
X21#7 M1 M201 41
X22#0 M1 M201 49
X22#1 M1 M201 48
X22#2 M1 M201 47
X22#3 M1 M201 46
X22#4 M1 M201 45
X22#5 M1 M201 44
X22#6 M1 M201 43
X22#7 M1 M201 42
108
Table 6.2.5 (b) Signal pin assignment and common signal pin assignment for output signals
Expansion I/O cards C5, C6 and C7 are fixed to sink output. Expansion I/O cards E5, E6, and
E7 can be set to sink output or source output, by setting the common signal accordingly.
Signal pin Signal pin Common signal pin
Signal address
I/O–C No. I/O–E No. Common I/O–E No.
Y48#0 M2 25 M202 25
Y48#1 M2 26 M202 26
Y48#2 M2 27 M202 27
Y48#4 M2 08 M202 08
COMO1 M202 03
Y48#5 M2 07 M202 07
Y48#6 M2 06 M202 06
Y48#7 M2 05 M202 05
Y49#4 M2 41 M202 41
Y49#0 M2 24 M202 24
Y49#1 M2 23 M202 23
Y49#3 M2 22 M202 22
Y49#7 M2 09 M202 09
COMO0 M202 04
Y50#0 M2 21 M202 21
Y50#2 M2 19 M202 19
Y50#3 M2 20 M202 20
Y50#5 M2 10 M202 10
Y51#0 M2 40 M202 40
Y51#1 M2 39 M202 39
Y51#2 M2 38 M202 38
Y51#3 M2 37 M202 37
COMO3 M202 01
Y51#4 M2 36 M202 36
Y51#5 M2 35 M202 35
Y51#6 M2 34 M202 34
Y51#7 M2 33 M202 33
109

Signal address
Y52#0 M2 18 M202 18
Y52#1 M2 17 M202 17
Y52#2 M2 16 M202 16
Y52#3 M2 15 M202 15
COMO2 M202 02
Y52#4 M2 14 M202 14
Y52#5 M2 13 M202 13
Y52#6 M2 12 M202 12
Y52#7 M2 11 M202 11
Y53#0 M2 49 M202 49
Y53#1 M2 48 M202 48
Y53#2 M2 47 M202 47
Y53#3 M2 46 M202 46
COMO4 M202 50
Y53#4 M2 45 M202 45
Y53#5 M2 44 M202 44
Y53#6 M2 43 M202 43
Y53#7 M2 42 M202 42
Y80#0 M19 01 M219 01
Y80#1 M19 02 M219 02
Y80#2 M19 03 M219 03
Y80#3 M19 04 M219 04

COMO5 M219 20
Y80#4 M19 05 M219 05
Y80#5 M19 06 M219 06
Y80#6 M19 07 M219 07
Y80#7 M19 08 M219 08
110

Signal address
Y82#0 M19 09 M219 09
Y82#1 M19 10 M219 10
Y82#2 M19 11 M219 11
Y82#3 M19 12 M219 12

COMO6 M219 19
Y82#4 M19 13 M219 13
Y82#5 M19 14 M219 14
Y82#6 M19 15 M219 15
Y82#7 M19 16 M219 16
Y84#0 M20 33 M220 33
Y84#1 M20 19 M220 19
Y84#2 M20 34 M220 34
Y84#3 M20 20 M220 20

COMO7 M220 04
Y84#4 M20 35 M220 35
Y84#5 M20 05 M220 05
Y84#6 M20 21 M220 21
Y84#7 M20 36 M220 36
Y86#0 M20 06 M220 06
Y86#1 M20 22 M220 22
Y86#2 M20 37 M220 37
Y86#3 M20 07 M220 07

COMO8 M220 03
Y86#4 M20 23 M220 23
Y86#5 M20 38 M220 38
Y86#6 M20 08 M220 08
Y86#7 M20 24 M220 24
111
6.3 When the required I/O signals outnumber the maximum number of I/O
signals that can be supported by the internal I/O card, an external I/O unit
ADDING I/O POINTS is connected. Connection can be made with or without FANUC I/O Link.
6.3.1 To add I/O points without FANUC I/O Link, an optional PMC–M PC
System without FANUC board must be used. The PMC–M PC board is mounted in the PMC slot
(connector name CS3) of the control unit. The PMC–M PC board is
I/O Link connected to the external I/O unit through a serial communication
interface. With the serial communication interface, expansion I/O card
B2, expansion I/O card F1, or an I/O module can be connected. For details
of the I/O module, see the appendix.
D Connecting expansion Like the internal I/O card, the expansion I/O card is available in two types:
I/O card B2 or expansion sink output, I/O card B2, and DO common output, I/O card F1.
I/O card F1
Table 6.3.1 (a) Expansion I/O cards
Number of input Number of output

Output signal
signals signals
I/O B2 Sink output 104 72
I/O F1 DO common output 104 72
D Connection For J36, use a power cable with 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) conductors or greater.
The voltage drop on the cable should be 1 V or less.
112
Control unit
PMC–MODEL M P.C.B Additional I/O B2, F1
M24 (MR–20RFA) M60 (MR–20RMD)

1 SOUT 14 SIN 1 SOUT 14 SIN
8 8
2 *SOUT 15 *SIN 2 *SOUT 15 *SIN
9 9
3 16 J39 3 16
10 10
4 17 M24 M60 4 17
11 11
5 18 5 18
12 12
6 19 6 19
13 13
7 20 7 20
Power supply unit
CP14 CP51
1 2 3 J36 1 2 3
CP14 CP51
+24 0V +24 0V
Connector
SMS 3 PNS–5
Connector of J39
M24(01) M60(01)
SOUT SOUT
M24(02) M60(02)
*SOUT *SOUT
M24(14) M60(14)
SIN SIN
M24(15) M60(15)
*SIN *SIN
Wire : Twisted pair unified shielded cable and contact at least 7 lines thicker than 0.18mm2
Recommended cable : A66L–0001–0041
113
D Connector table
additional I/O B2
Control unit
M61 M78
1 0V 33 X1008.3 1 0V 33 X1000.0
2 0V 34 X1008.2 2 0V 34 X1000.2
19 X1008.4 19 X1000.1
3 0V 35 X1008.1 3 0V 35 X1000.4
20 X1005.3 20 X1000.3
4 0V 36 X1008.0 4 COMI1 36 X1000.7
21 X1005.2 21 X1000.6
5 X1007.5 37 X1007.6 5 X1000.5 37 X1001.2 J40
22 X1005.1 22 X1001.1 M61
6 X1005.7 38 X1005.5 6 X1001.0 38 X1001.5
23 X1005.0 23 X1001.4
7 X1005.6 39 X1005.4 7 X1001.3 39 X1002.0
24 X1006.3 24 X1001.7
8 X1006.7 40 X1006.5 8 X1001.6 40 X1002.3
25 X1006.2 25 X1002.2
9 X1006.6 41 X1008.7 9 X1002.1 41 X1002.6
26 X1008.6 26 X1002.5
10 X1006.4 42 X1009.7 10 X1002.4 42 X1003.1 J42
27 X1008.5 27 X1003.0 M78
11 X1006.1 43 X1009.6 11 X1002.7 43 X1003.3
28 28 COMI2
12 X1006.0 44 X1009.5 12 X1003.2 44 X1003.5
29 +24E 29 COMI3
13 X1007.7 45 X1009.4 13 X1003.4 45 X1003.7
30 +24E 30 +24E
14 X1007.4 46 X1009.3 14 X1003.6 46 X1004.1
31 +24E 31 +24E
15 X1007.3 47 X1009.2 15 X1004.0 47 X1004.3
32 +24E 32 +24E
16 X1007.2 48 X1009.1 16 X1004.2 48 X1004.5
17 X1007.1 49 X1009.0 17 X1004.4 49 X1004.7
18 X1007.0 50 0V 18 X1004.6 50 0V
M62 M80
1 0V 33 Y1022.7 1 0V 33 Y1027.0
2 0V 34 Y1022.6 2 0V 34 Y1027.2
Magnetic
19 Y1021.5 19 Y1027.1
3 0V 35 Y1022.5 3 0V 35 Y1027.4 cabinet and
20 Y1021.4 20 Y1027.3 operator’s
4 0V 36 Y1022.4 4 0V 36 Y1027.7
21 Y1021.3 21 Y1027.6 panel or
5 Y1020.7 37 Y1022.3 5 Y1027.5 37 Y1028.2 J41 machine side
22 Y1021.2 22 Y1028.1 M62
6 Y1020.6 38 Y1022.2 6 Y1028.0 38 Y1028.5
23 Y1021.1 23 Y1028.4
7 Y1020.5 39 Y1022.1 7 Y1028.3 39 X1010.0
24 Y1021.0 24 Y1028.7
8 Y1020.4 40 Y1022.0 8 Y1028.6 40 X1010.3
25 Y1020.0 25 X1010.2
9 Y1021.7 41 Y1020.3 9 X1010.1 41 X1010.6
26 Y1020.1 26 X1010.5
10 Y1021.6 42 Y1024.7 10 X1010.4 42 X1011.1
27 Y1020.2 27 X1011.0
11 Y1023.7 43 Y1024.6 11 X1010.7 43 X1011.3
28 28 COMI4
12 Y1023.6 44 Y1024.5 12 X1011.2 44 X1011.5 J44
29 29 COMI5
M80
13 Y1023.5 45 Y1024.4 13 X1011.4 45 X1011.7
30 30 +24E
14 Y1023.4 46 Y1024.3 14 X1011.6 46 X1012.1
31 31 +24E
15 Y1023.3 47 Y1024.2 15 X1012.0 47 X1012.3
32 32 +24E
16 Y1023.2 48 Y1024.1 16 X1012.2 48 X1012.5
17 Y1023.1 49 Y1024.0 17 X1012.4 49 X1012.7
18 Y1023.0 50 0V 18 X1012.6 50 0V
M79
1 Y1025.0 14 Y1026.5
8 Y1025.7
2 Y1025.1 15 Y1026.6
9 Y1026.0 J43
3 Y1025.2 16 Y1026.7
10 Y1026.1 M79
4 Y1025.3 17
11 Y1026.2
5 Y1025.4 18 0V
12 Y1026.3
6 Y1025.5 19 0V
13 Y1026.4
7 Y1025.6 20
NOTE
Use unified shielded cable for J40 to J44.
Recommended cable : A66L–0001–0042 (7/0.18, 50 cores)
A66L–0001–0041 (7/0.18 20 cores)
114
D Connector table
additional I/O F1
Control unit
M261 (MR–50RMD) M278 (MR–50RMD)
1 0V 33 X1008.3 1 0V 33 X1000.0
2 0V 34 X1008.2 2 0V 34 X1000.2
19 X1008.4 19 X1000.1
3 0V 35 X1008.1 3 0V 35 X1000.4
20 X1005.3 20 X1000.3
4 0V 36 X1008.0 4 COMI 1 36 X1000.7
21 X1005.2 21 X1000.6
5 X1007.5 37 X1007.6 5 X1000.5 37 X1001.2 J40
22 X1005.1 22 X1001.1 M261
6 X1005.7 38 X1005.5 6 X1001.0 38 X1001.5
23 X1005.0 23 X1001.4
7 X1005.6 39 X1005.4 7 X1001.3 39 X1002.0
24 X1006.3 24 X1001.7
8 X1006.7 40 X1006.5 8 X1001.6 40 X1002.3
25 X1006.2 25 X1002.2
9 X1006.6 41 X1008.7 9 X1002.1 41 X1002.6
26 X1008.6 26 X1002.5
10 X1006.4 42 X1009.7 10 X1002.4 42 X1003.1 J42
27 X1008.5 27 X1003.0 M278
11 X1006.1 43 X1009.6 11 X1002.7 43 X1003.3
28 28 COMI 2
12 X1006.0 44 X1009.5 12 X1003.2 44 X1003.5
29 +24E 29 COMI 3
13 X1007.7 45 X1009.4 13 X1003.4 45 X1003.7
30 +24E 30 +24E
14 X1007.4 46 X1009.3 14 X1003.6 46 X1004.1
31 +24E 31 +24E
15 X1007.3 47 X1009.2 15 X1004.0 47 X1004.3
32 +24E 32 +24E
16 X1007.2 48 X1009.1 16 X1004.2 48 X1004.5
17 X1007.1 49 X1009.0 17 X1004.4 49 X1004.7
18 X1007.0 50 0V 18 X1004.6 50 0V
M262 (MR–50RMD) M280 (MR–50RMD)

1 COMO 3 33 Y1022.7 1 0V 33 Y1027.0
2 COMO 2 34 Y1022.6 2 0V 34 Y1027.2
19 Y1021.5 19 Y1027.1 Magnetic
3 COMO 1 35 Y1022.5 3 COMO 8 35 Y1027.4 cabinet and
20 Y1021.4 20 Y1027.3 operator’s
4 COMO 0 36 Y1022.4 4 COMO 7 36 Y1027.7
21 Y1021.3 21 Y1027.6 panel or
5 Y1020.7 37 Y1022.3 5 Y1027.5 37 Y1028.2 J41 machine side
22 Y1021.2 22 Y1028.1 M262
6 Y1020.6 38 Y1022.2 6 Y1028.0 38 Y1028.5
23 Y1021.1 23 Y1028.4
7 Y1020.5 39 Y1022.1 7 Y1028.3 39 X1010.0
24 Y1021.0 24 Y1028.7
8 Y1020.4 40 Y1022.0 8 Y1028.6 40 X1010.3
25 Y1020.0 25 X1010.2
9 Y1021.7 41 Y1020.3 9 X1010.1 41 X1010.6
26 Y1020.1 26 X1010.5
10 Y1021.6 42 Y1024.7 10 X1010.4 42 X1011.1
27 Y1020.2 27 X1011.0
11 Y1023.7 43 Y1024.6 11 X1010.7 43 X1011.3
28 28 COMI 4
12 Y1023.6 44 Y1024.5 12 X1011.2 44 X1011.5 J44
29 29 COMI 5
M280
13 Y1023.5 45 Y1024.4 13 X1011.4 45 X1011.7
30 30 +24E
14 Y1023.4 46 Y1024.3 14 X1011.6 46 X1012.1
31 31 +24E
15 Y1023.3 47 Y1024.2 15 X1012.0 47 X1012.3
32 32 +24E
16 Y1023.2 48 Y1024.1 16 X1012.2 48 X1012.5
17 Y1023.1 49 Y1024.0 17 X1012.4 49 X1012.7
18 Y1023.0 50 COMO 4 18 X1012.6 50
M279 (MR–20RMD)
1 Y1025.0 14 Y1026.5
8 Y1025.7
2 Y1025.1 15 Y1026.6
9 Y1026.0 J43
3 Y1025.2 16 Y1026.7
10 Y1026.1 M279
4 Y1025.3 17
11 Y1026.2
5 Y1025.4 18 0V
12 Y1026.3
6 Y1025.5 19 COMO 6
13 Y1026.4
7 Y1025.6 20 COMO 5
NOTE
Use unified shielded cable for J40 to J44.
Recommended cable : A66L–0001–0042 (7/0.18, 50 cores)
A66L–0001–0041 (7/0.18 20 cores)
115
D Signal pin assignment of

expansion I/O card B2
and expansion I/O card
F1
Table 6.3.1 (b) Signal pin assignment and common signal pin assignment for input signals
Signal pin assignment Common signal pin assignment
Signal address
I/O–B2 I/O–F1 No. I/O–B2 I/O–F1 No.
X1000#0 M78 M278 33
X1000#1 M78 M278 19
X1000#2 M78 M278 34
X1000#3 M78 M278 20
X1000#4 M78 M278 35
X1000#5 M78 M278 05
X1000#6 M78 M278 21
X1000#7 M78 M278 36

M78 M278 04
X1001#0 M78 M278 06
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X1001#1 M78 M278 22
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
+24E: Pins 30, 31, and
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
32 of M78/M278
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X1001#2 M78 M278 37 0V: Pins 01, 02, and
03 of M78/M278
X1001#3 M78 M278 07
X1001#4 M78 M278 23
X1001#5 M78 M278 38
X1001#6 M78 M278 08
X1001#7 M78 M278 24
X1002#0 M78 M278 39
X1002#1 M78 M278 09
X1002#2 M78 M278 25
X1002#3 M78 M278 40
X1002#4 M78 M278 10
X1002#5 M78 M278 26 M78 M278 28
X1002#6 M78 M278 41

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X1002#7 M78 M278 11 +24E: Pins 30, 31, and
32 of M78/M278
X1003#0 M78 M278 27
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
0V: Pins 01, 02, and
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
03 of M78/M278
X1003#1 M78 M278 42
X1003#2 M78 M278 12
116

Signal address
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X1003#3 M78 M278 43
X1003#4 M78 M278 13

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
+24E: Pins 30, 31, and
X1003#5 M78 M278 44
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ 32 of M78/M278
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
0V: Pins 01, 02, and
03 of M78/M278
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X1003#6 M78 M278 14
X1003#7 M78 M278 45
X1004#0 M78 M278 15 M78 M278 29
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X1004#1 M78 M278 46
X1004#2 M78 M278 16

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
+24E: Pins 30, 31, and
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
32 of M78/M278
X1004#3 M78 M278 47 0V: Pins 01, 02, and
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
03 of M78/M278
X1004#4 M78 M278 17
X1004#5 M78 M278 48
X1004#6 M78 M278 18
X1004#7 M78 M278 49
X1005#1 M61 M261 22
X1005#2 M61 M261 21
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X1005#3 M61 M261 20
X1005#4 M61 M261 39

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
+24E: Pins 29, 30, 31, and
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
32 of M61/M261
X1005#5 M61 M261 38
X1005#6 M61 M261 07
X1005#7 M61 M261 06
X1004#0 to X1004#7 are direct current input signals B (for fast signal
input).
117

Signal address
X1006#0 M61 M261 12
X1006#1 M61 M261 11
X1006#2 M61 M261 25
X1006#3 M61 M261 24
X1006#4 M61 M261 10
X1006#5 M61 M261 40
X1006#6 M61 M261 09
X1006#7 M61 M261 08
X1007#0 M61 M261 18
X1007#1 M61 M261 17
X1007#2 M61 M261 16
X1007#3 M61 M261 15
X1007#4 M61 M261 14
X1007#5 M61 M261 05

Always sink in
input
ut
X1007#6 M61 M261 37
X1007#7 M61 M261 13

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
+24E: Pins 29, 30, 31, and
32 of M61/M261
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X1008#0 M61 M261 36
X1008#1 M61 M261 35
X1008#2 M61 M261 34
X1008#3 M61 M261 33
X1008#4 M61 M261 19
X1008#5 M61 M261 27
X1008#6 M61 M261 26
X1008#7 M61 M261 41
X1009#0 M61 M261 49
X1009#1 M61 M261 48
X1009#2 M61 M261 47
X1009#3 M61 M261 46
118

Signal address
X1009#5 M61 M261 44

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
+24E: Pins 29, 30, 31, and
X1009#6 M61 M261 43 32 of M61/M261
X1009#7 M61 M261 42 ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ

X1010#0 M80 M280 39
X1010#1 M80 M280 09
X1010#2 M80 M280 25
X1010#3 M80 M280 40
X1010#4 M80 M280 10
X1010#5 M80 M280 26
X1010#6 M80 M280 41
X1010#7 M80 M280 11
X1011#0 M80 M280 27
X1011#1 M80 M280 42
X1011#2 M80 M280 12
X1011#3 M80 M280 43

M80 M280 29
X1011#4 M80 M280 13
X1011#5 M80 M280 44
X1011#6 M80 M280 14

ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
X1011#7 M80 M280 45 +24E: Pins 30, 31, 32
of M80/M280
X1012#0 M80 M280 15
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
0V: Pins 01, 02 of
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
M80/M280
X1012#1 M80 M280 46
X1012#2 M80 M280 16
X1012#3 M80 M280 47
X1012#4 M80 M280 17
X1012#5 M80 M280 48
X1012#6 M80 M280 18
X1012#7 M80 M280 49
119
Table 6.3.1 (c) Signal pin assignment and common signal pin assignment for output signals
Expansion I/O card B2 is fixed to sink output.
Expansion I/O card F1 can be set to either sink output or source output by setting the common
signal accordingly.
Signal address
I/O–B2 No. I/O–F1 No. Common I/O–F1 No.
Y1020#0 M62 25 M262 25
Y1020#1 M62 26 M262 26
Y1020#2 M62 27 M262 27
Y1020#3 M62 41 M262 41

COMO0 M262 04
Y1020#4 M62 08 M262 08
Y1020#5 M62 07 M262 07
Y1020#6 M62 06 M262 06
Y1020#7 M62 05 M262 05
Y1021#0 M62 24 M262 24
Y1021#1 M62 23 M262 23
Y1021#2 M62 22 M262 22
Y1021#3 M62 21 M262 21

COMO1 M262 03
Y1021#4 M62 20 M262 20
Y1021#5 M62 19 M262 19
Y1021#6 M62 10 M262 10
Y1021#7 M62 09 M262 09
Y1022#0 M62 40 M262 40
Y1022#1 M62 39 M262 39
Y1022#2 M62 38 M262 38
Y1022#3 M62 37 M262 37

COMO2 M262 02
Y1022#4 M62 36 M262 36
Y1022#5 M62 35 M262 35
Y1022#6 M62 34 M262 34
Y1022#7 M62 33 M262 33
120

Signal address
Y1023#0 M62 18 M262 18
Y1023#1 M62 17 M262 17
Y1023#2 M62 16 M262 16
Y1023#3 M62 15 M262 15

COMO3 M262 01
Y1023#4 M62 14 M262 14
Y1023#5 M62 13 M262 13
Y1023#6 M62 12 M262 12
Y1023#7 M62 11 M262 11
Y1024#0 M62 49 M262 49
Y1024#1 M62 45 M262 45
Y1024#2 M62 47 M262 47
Y1024#3 M62 46 M262 46

COMO4 M262 50
Y1024#4 M62 48 M262 48
Y1024#5 M62 44 M262 44
Y1024#6 M62 43 M262 43
Y1024#7 M62 42 M262 42
Y1025#0 M79 01 M279 01
Y1025#1 M79 02 M279 02
Y1025#2 M79 03 M279 03
Y1025#3 M79 04 M279 04

COMO5 M279 20
Y1025#4 M79 05 M279 05
Y1025#5 M79 06 M279 06
Y1025#6 M79 07 M279 07
Y1025#7 M79 08 M279 08
121

Signal address
Y1026#0 M79 09 M279 09
Y1026#1 M79 10 M279 10
Y1026#2 M79 11 M279 11
Y1026#3 M79 12 M279 12

COMO6 M279 19
Y1026#4 M79 13 M279 13
Y1026#5 M79 14 M279 14
Y1026#6 M79 15 M279 15
Y1026#7 M79 16 M279 16
Y1027#0 M80 33 M280 33
Y1027#1 M80 19 M280 19
Y1027#2 M80 34 M280 34
Y1027#3 M80 20 M280 20

COMO7 M280 04
Y1027#4 M80 35 M280 35
Y1027#5 M80 05 M280 05
Y1027#6 M80 21 M280 21
Y1027#7 M80 36 M280 36
Y1028#0 M80 06 M280 06
Y1028#1 M80 22 M280 22
Y1028#2 M80 37 M280 37
Y1028#3 M80 07 M280 07

COMO8 M280 03
Y1028#4 M80 23 M280 23
Y1028#5 M80 38 M280 38
Y1028#6 M80 08 M280 08
Y1028#7 M80 24 M280 24
122
6.3.2 I/O signals can be added by using FANUC I/O Link. To use FANUC I/O
System Using FANUC Link, an optional PMC–M PC board with I/O Link is required. The PC
board is mounted in the PMC slot (connector name: CS3) of the control
I/O Link unit.
Observe the restrictions and precautions described below.

1) When the PMC–M with I/O Link is fitted it will no longer be possible
to use I/O units already linked to the PMC–M. Such units must
therefore be replaced with I/O units fitted with the I/O Link.
Table 6.3.2
Non–connectable
Name I/O unit with I/O Link
I/O unit
Expansion I/O Expansion I/O–B2 Expansion I/O–B3
I/O unit I/O unit I/O unit–MODEL A
2) It has been possible to combine an MMC interface with the PMC–M

without I/O Link in order to connect MMC units to provide a FANUC
Series 00 configuration. It is not possible, however, to use an MMC
interface in combination with a PMC–M with I/O Link. It is not
therefore possible to configure a FANUC Series 00 with I/O Link.
3) With the FANUC Series 0 MODEL–C, signals monitored directly by
the CNC such as ESP, DEC and SKIP should not be used as input
signals of I/O units connected by I/O Link. I/O–C (C5, C6, C7) must
be used instead.
4) The power supply for the expansion I/O–B3 or F3 can be taken from
the CP14 Series 0 power unit. This is only possible, however, in the
case of a single expansion and I/O–B3 or F3. If more than one unit is
to be added then a separate power supply will be required.
The power supply from the power supply unit cannot be used in the
case of I/O Unit–MODEL A. A separate power supply must always
be prepared.
5) When connecting the I/O Unit–MODEL A to Series 0 the number of
I/O Units connected must not exceed 2 per group.
6) Each unit connected to the I/O Link must be earthed with the same
potential in each case.
7) When other units are connected to the Series 0 via the I/O Link, it is
essential to take full account of all connection instructions in the
instruction manual of the unit concerned.
123
6.3.2.1 (1) Configuration of the I/O Link (Eg)

Connection diagram The figure below illustrates a typical I/O Link configuration.
External power
supply
(DC24V)
FS0–C
ESP, DEC, SKIP and other signals di-

I/O–C rectly controlled by the CNC
F–D CP14
Mate Power unit
J36 power cable
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
PMC–M
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
JD1A JD1B2
K1X I/O Link
ÃÃÃÃ
FANUC I/O Link
(MASTER) (SLAVE)
CP5
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
JD1A2 I/O–B3
I/O Link
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
K1X
JD1B
I/O Link
ÃÃÃÃ
(MASTER) (SLAVE)
JD1A1
ÃÃÃ ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
JD1A
The F–D mate is
ÃÃÃ ÃÃÃ
the master I/O link. GROUP #0 K1X
ÃÃÃ
K1X S CP32
S
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
S I/O–Unit
@ Maximum 16 units
@ DI/DO units for FS0–C:
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
JD1B
32/32 and 64/64 I/O Link
ÃÃ
(SLAVE)
ÃÃÃ
FS0–C
JD1A
ÃÃ ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
I/O–C K1X
ÃÃÃ Power Mate

Power unit
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
JD1B
I/O Link
(SLAVE)
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃ
PMC–M JD1A
ÃÃÃÃ
JD1B2
I/O Link
ÃÃÃÃ
The FS0–C is the master
(SLAVE) I/O Link
ÃÃÃÃ
JD1A2
@ Maximum 16 units
ÃÃÃÃÃ
@ DI/DO units for FS0–C:
I/O Link
ÃÃÃÃÃ
Maximum 1024/1024
(MASTER)
JD1A1
GROUP #n (nv16)
Fig. 6.3.2.1 (a) Typical I/O Link configuration
124
(2) Signal cable connections

Details of the K1X cable shown in the connection diagram are given
below.
a) When FD–Mate is master and FS0 is slave
FD–Mate FS0–C
(Master)
or Previous group PMC–M with
(Eg:FS0–C) I/O Link (Slave)
JD1A Connector HONDA
JD1B2
PCR–E20FS
01 SIN 11 0V 01 SIN 11 0V
02 *SIN 12 0V 02 *SIN 12 0V
03 SOUT 13 0V 03 SOUT 13 0V
04 *SOUT 14 0V K1X 04 *SOUT 14 0V
05 15 05 15
06 16 06 16
07 17 07 17
08 18 08 18
09 19 09 19
10 20 10 20
JD1A2
01 SIN 11 0V
02 *SIN 12 0V
03 SOUT 13 0V
04 *SOUT 14 0V
05 15
06 16
K1X
07 17
08 18
09 19
10 20
Go to next group
Fig. 6.3.2.1 (b)
b) When FS0 is master and I/O–B3, Power Mate and I/O unit are
slaves
FS0–C Expansion I/O–B3
PMC–M with Power Mate

I/O Link (Master) I/O UNIT (Slave)
JD1A1 Connector HONDA
JD1B
PCR–E20FS
01 SIN 11 0V 01 SIN 11 0V
02 *SIN 12 0V 02 *SIN 12 0V
03 SOUT 13 0V 03 SOUT 13 0V
04 *SOUT 14 0V K1X 04 *SOUT 14 0V
05 15 05 15
06 16 06 16
07 17 07 17
08 18 08 18
09 19 09 19
10 20 10 20
Fig. 6.3.2.1 (c)
125
c) Expansion I/O–B3 power cable connection (J36)

Control unit
I/O–B3
Power supply unit

CP14 Connector JAPAN FCI CP51
SMS3PNS–5
1 2 3 1 2 3
+24V 0V +24V 0V
J36
Fig. 6.3.2.1 (d)
NOTE
For a power supply unit that qualifies for CE marking, a
different connector is used. For details, see Section 5.4,
“Connection of the Input Unit Built–in Power Supply Unit AI
(Qualifying for CE Marking).”
d) I/O Unit–MODEL A power cable connection

Prepare a power supply other than the Series 0 power unit and use
the interface module (AIF01A) connector CP32 to make the
required connections.
I/O Unit–MODEL A
Separate power supply AIF01A

Connector JAPAN FCI CP32
SMS3PNS–5
DC24V 1 2 3
+24V 0V
Fig. 6.3.2.1 (e)
126
e) Cable K1X details
JD1A JD1B
SIN (1) (3) SOUT

*SIN (2) (4) *SOUT
SOUT (3) (1) SIN
*SOUT (4) (2) *SIN
0V (11) (11) 0V
0V (12) (12) 0V
0V (13) (13) 0V
0V (14) (14) 0V
Fig. 6.3.2.1 (f)
S The SIN, *SIN and SOUT, *SOUT signals must be connected

by twisted pair cable.
S Recommended cable: A66L–0001–0284#10P (single shield
twisted pair)
S The cable shield should be clamped with a cable clamp to the
cabinet earth plate on the JD1A side.
S Maximum cable length: 10m
6.3.2.2 (1) To turn the power on

Turning the power on In cases where the FANUC I/O Link slave power supply selected is
and off neither the 24V DC supply used with the Series 0 nor the 200V AC
Series 0 power supply input unit, then it is essential that the power be
switched on to all slave units before it is switched on to the Series 0.
In other words the Series 0, which is in this case the master, must come
last.
(2) To turn the power off
If the power supply to any one of the slave units connected by the
FANUC I/O Link is cut off then all units connected by the I/O Link,
including the Series 0 itself, will assume abnormal status. To restore
normal operating status all the units must be switched off and then
started up again one by one in the appropriate order.
127
6.3.2.3 The PMC–M addresses of DI/DO connected via the FANUC I/O Link are
DI/DO addresses as shown in the table below.
Since the expansion I/O–B3 can also be connected to the I/O Link, it also
uses the same addresses.
Care must be taken, on the other hand, with the expansion I/O–B2 since
this unit uses different addresses.
Table 6.3.2.3
DI/DO Address DGN. No.
DI
X3072X3199 50725199
(128BYTE=1024 points)
Master
DO
Y3200X3327 52005327
(128BYTE=1024 points)
DI
X1100X1107 31003107
(8BYTE=64 points)
Slave
DO
X1200X1207 32003207
(8BYTE=64 points)
The following parameters should be set when a diagnostic display is

required.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
64 IOMDGN
IOMDGN
1 : I/O Link DI/DO diagnostic display.
0 : No I/O Link DI/DO diagnostic display.
6.3.2.4 I/O module data is required to set in FANUC I/O Link. Refer to FANUC
I/O module data PMC–MODEL K/L/M/P PROGRAMMING MANUAL for details.
128
6.3.2.5 The K1X cable shown in the feneral connection diagram can be extended
Optical I/O Link adaptor by means of an optical I/O Link adaptor to a maximum of 200m using
optical fiber cable.
(1) Dimensions
66.0
40.0
connector for
connection to FANUC optical connector
45.0
unit COP1
JD1
7.0
18.0
Fig. 6.3.2.5 (a)
(2) Weight
Main unit: Approx. 100g
(3) Connection
(a) Connection diagram
Unit Unit
JD1A JD1B
Interunit Optical cable Interunit

connection (K4X) connection
cable (K3X) cable (K3K)
Optical I/O Optical I/O

Link adaptor Link adaptor
Fig. 6.3.2.5 (b)
129
(b) Interunit connection cable (K3X)
Unit side Adapter side

01 SIN 11 0V JD1A,JD1B JD1
02 *SIN 12 0V SIN (01) (03) SOUT
03 SOUT 13 0V *SIN (02) (04) *SOUT
04 *SOUT 14 0V SOUT (03) (01) SIN
05 15 0V *SOUT (04) (02) *SIN
06 16 0V
+5V (09) (09) +5V
07 17
+5V (18) (18) +5V
08 18 +5V
+5V (20) (20) +5V
09 +5V 19
10 20 +5V 0V (11) (11) 0V
0V (12) (12) 0V
0V (13) (13) 0V
0V (14) (14) 0V
0V (15) (15) 0V
0V (16) (16) 0V
Fig. 6.3.2.5 (c)
S Recommended cable connector : PCR–E20FS

(Honda Tsushin)
S Recommended cable (wire) : A66L–0001–0284#10P
S Length of cable : Max. 2m
(when using recommended
cable)
(c) Optical cable
S Specificatiol : A66L–6001–0009 (it is essential that this
cable specification be adhered to)
S Length of cable : Max. 200m
(4) Power supply
S Voltage : 4.75V–5.25V (at input terminal)
S Current consumption : 200mA
(5) Installation conditions
(a) The adaptor itself is not hermetically sealed and should therefore
be installed inside a hermetically sealed frame in the same way as
an NC.
(b) The adaptor’s casing screws must be used to ground the casing.
The adaptor earth must have the same electric potential as the
earthing of the unit with I/O Link to which it is connected.
(c) The adaptor is only light and does not therefore require screw
clamps to hold it in place. Care must be taken, however, to ensure
that there is no risk of shorting through contact with other electrical
circuits, for example.
If the adaptor is to be fitted to the frame itself then an L bracket and
casing screws (M3) should be used to secure it to the frame.
L bracket
130
(6) Other information

If this adaptor is used when configuring an I/O Link then the following
component parts will be required.
S Optical I/O Link adaptor : 2
S Interunit connecting cable : 2
S Optical cable : 1
131
7. CONNECTION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT B–61393E/06
7 CONNECTION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
132
B–61393E/06 7. CONNECTION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
7.1
CONNECTING THE
DISPLAY UNIT
7.1.1 The display unit of the CNC is used to display information such as CNC
Outline programs and parameters to the operator and to assist the operator in the
operation of the machine.
For the Series 0, CRT, PDP, EL, and LCD display units are available. This
section describes how to connect these display units to the control unit.
Outline drawings are given in the appendix.
Each display unit can be provided as a unit incorporating an MDI

keyboard, for example a CRT/MDI unit. The MDI section can be
connected in the same way as a separate MDI unit. For an explanation of
making this connection, see the subsequent chapter.
Some display units are available either as a standard type or as a type

conforming to European safety standards (qualifying for CE marking).
Since the type qualifying for CE marking uses a different power supply
unit, the connection of the CE marking type differs from that of the
standard type in some respects. The unit qualifying for CE marking with
the MDI keyboard has keys of different colors, and may use symbolic
keys.
The unit qualifying for CE marking has a stud or hole for grounding.
Ground the unit to a housing in the vicinity, using a line containing
conductors of 2 mm2 or greater.
Table 7.1.1 Display units qualifying for CE marking
CE marking
Unit Comparison with standard type
type
9″ monochrome Provided Connection is the same.

CRT
9″ color CRT Not provided
14″ color CRT Provided The input power connector is different.
PDP Provided Supply voltage is not 200 VAC but 24

VDC.
EL Not provided
LCD Provided Connection is the same.
133
7.1.2 For each display unit, either of the following two video signal interfaces
Video Signal Interface is used:
Type Display unit
A CRT unit, PDP unit, EL unit
B LCD unit, 14″ CRT unit qualifying for CE marking
D Type A
Control unit CRT, PDP, or EL unit
Memory card CCX5 CN1

Graphics card CCX4 (MR–20RM)
(MR–20RMD)
1 RVDO 14 1 RVDO 14
8 0V 8 0V
2 HSYN 15 2 HSYN 15
9 0V 9 0V
3 VSYN 16 H20.F H20.F 3 VSYN 16
10 0V 10 0V
4 GVDO 17 4 GVDO 17
11 0V 11 0V
5 BVDO 18 5 BVDO 18
12 0V 12 0V
6 19 6 19
13 13
7 20 7 20
When using the graphics card, connect the

card to CCX4.
Cable wiring
1 1
RVDO RVDO
8 8
0V 0V
4 4
GVDO GVDO
11 11
0V 0V
5 5
BVDO BVDO
12 12
0V 0V
2 2
HSYN HSYN
9 9
0V 0V
3 3
VSYN VSYN
10 10
0V 0V
Shield
Ground plate
Maximum cable length: 50 m
Recommended cable material : A66L–0001–0371 coaxial cable
Recommended cable order number: A02B–0098–K871 (7 m)
134
D Type B
Control unit LCD or 14″ CRT for CE Marking unit
Memory card CCX5 JA1

Graphics card CCX4
(MR–20RMD) Honda Tsushin Kogyo 20–pin (PCR–EV20MDT)

MR connector (female)
1 RVDO 14 1 RVDO 11
Â
8 0V
2 HSYN 15 2 0V 12 VSYN
9 0V
Â
3 VSYN 16 3 GVDO 13
10 0V
4 GVDO 17 4 0V 14 0V
11 0V
5 BVDO 18 5 BVDO 15
12 0V
6 19 Hirose Electric (JA1) 6 0V 16 0V
13 Housing: FI–20–CV5
7 20 7 17
Contact: FI40A–20S
8 18 HSYN
9 19
When using the graphics card, connect the
card to CCX4. 10 20
Cable wiring Hirose FI40A–20S (Connector)

Honda 20–pin MR connector (female) FI–20–CV5 (Housing)
1 1
RVDO RVDO
8 2
0V 0V
4 3
GVDO GVDO
11 4
0V 0V
5 5
BVDO BVDO
12(18) 6
0V 0V
2 18
HSYN HSYN
9 16
0V 0V
3 12
VSYN VSYN
10 14
0V 0V
Shield
Ground plate
Maximum cable length : 50 m

Recommended cable kit : A02B–0098–K870 (5m)
Recommended cable material : A66L–0001–0371 coaxial cable
Recommended cable order number : A02B–0120–K888 (200m)
The Hirose Electric connector can be provided together with the housing.
Connector kit order number : A02B–0120–K305 (Hirose code: FI40A–20S–CV5)
135
Cable specifications (A66L–0001–0371)

Item Unit Material, specifications
Code * A66L–0001–0371
Manufacturer * Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
Manufacturer cable code * C0–IREFV (0)–CX–75–SB5X0.14SQ
Number of coaxial cables Cables 5
Internal Size mm2 0.14

conductor
Configuration Conductors/mm 7/0.16
Material * Tinned soft copper wire
Approximate outside diameter mm 0.48
Insulation Material (color) * Crosslinked foamed polyolefin; white;

heat resistance: 80°C
Thickness mm 0.71
External Material * Tinned soft copper wire

conductor
(braided) Wire diameter mm 0.08
Density % 95 or higher
Thickness mm 0.2
Jacket Material * Vinyl; heat resistance: 80°C
Color * Red, green, blue, white, black
Thickness 0.15
Approximate outside diameter of bundled coaxial mm 7.1

cables
Tying tape thickness mm 0.05
Braided shield Wire diameter (material) mm 0.12 (Tinned soft copper wire)
Density % 80 or higher (typ.82%)
Thickness mm 0.3
Outside diameter mm 7.8
Sheath Material, color * Oil–resistant vinyl (A); black; heat resistance: 80°C
Standard thickness mm 0.7 ((Minimum thickness: 0.56)
Finished outside diameter mm 9.2"0.3
Conductor resistance at 20°C Ω/km Up to 143
Withstand voltage * Capable of withstanding 1000 VAC for one minute

(across internal and external conductors)
136
Cable specifications (A66L–0001–0371)

Item Unit Material, specifications
Insulation resistance at 20°C MΩ/km 1000 or higher

(between internal and external conductors)
Characteristic impedance (10 MHz) Ω 75"5
Standard capacitance (1 kHz) nF/km 56
Standard attenuation (10 MHz) dB/km 53
Estimated mass Kg/Km 105
Standard length m 200
Package * Bunch
(Cross section of cable) (Cross section of internal coaxial cable)
Internal coaxial cable

(jacket color indicated in the circle)
Red
ÅÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
Black Green Filler
ÅÅ
Tying tape
Internal conductor
White Blue
ÅÅ
Braided shield Insulation
External conductor (braided)
Sheath
Jacket
137
7.1.3 The required supply voltage varies with the display unit. Also, some
Connecting the Display display units, while requiring the same supply voltage, may use different
connectors.
Unit Power Supply
Use a power cable containing conductors of 30/0.18 (0.8 mm2) or greater.
(1) 9″ monochrome CRT
Power supply unit 9″ CRT unit

(monochrome)
Cable side connector (CP15)
Housing: JAPAN FCI SMS6PN–5
CP15 (SMS6RN–4) Contact: JAPAN FCI RC16M–23T3 or CN2 (SMS6RN–4)
RC16M–SCT3
1 1
2 J38 2
3 0V 3 0V
4 0V 4 0V
5 +24V 5 +24V
6 +24V 6 +24V
Recommended cable: A02B–0072–K814 (7 m)
Power supply unit 9″ CRT unit

(CE Marking) (monochrome)
CP5 Cable side connector (CP15) CN2 (SMS6RN–4)

Contact: JAPAN FCI RC16M–23T3 or
1 +24V RC16M–SCT3 1
2 0V 2
J38
3 3 0V
4 0V
5 +24V
Housing: AMP JAPAN, LTD. 2–178288–3 6 +24V
Contact: AMP JAPAN, LTD. 1–175218–5
NOTE
When the power supply unit qualifying for CE marking is
used, a different connector is used. For details, see Section
5.4, “Connection of the Input Unit Built–in Power Supply
Unit AI (Qualifying for CE Marking).”
138
(2) 9″ color CRT, 14″ color CRT (standard type), PDP (standard type), and
EL
Power supply unit AI Display unit

CP2 Cable side connector
(SMS3RK–STK2) Housing: JAPAN FCI SMS3PN–5
Input unit RC16M–SCT3
CN2
CP5 (SMS3RK–STK2)
1 200A 1 200A
2 200B 2 200B
3 G 3 G
(3) 14″ color CRT (CE marking type)
Power supply unit AI 14″ color CRT (qualify-

qualifying for CE ing for CE marking)
marking Cable–side connector
Housing: Japan AMP 1–178128–3
CP2 Contact: Japan AMP 1–175218–5 CN2
1 200A 1 200A
2 200B 2 200B
3 G 3 G
Recommended power input connector kit: A02B–0120–K321
139
(4) PDP (CE marking type)

The power supply unit AI qualifying for CE marking, or the power
supply unit B2 can be used. The power supply unit A and power
supply unit AI cannot be used because they do not provide 24 VDC.
Power supply unit

qualifying for CE Cable–side connector (CP5)
marking Housing: Japan AMP 2–178288–3
Contact: Japan AMP 1–175218–5
CP5 CN2
(B2P–VH)
1 +24V
1 +24V
2 0V
2 0V
3
Cable–side connector (CN2)

Housing: VHR–2N
Contact: SVH–21T–1.1
(Nihon Crimp Terminal)
Conventional power
supply unit B Cable–side connector (CP15)
CP15 (SMS6RN–4) RC–16M–SCT3
CN2
(B2P–VH)
1
1 +24V
2
2 0V
3 0V
4 (0V)
Cable–side connector (CN2)
5 +24V Housing: VHR–2N
6 (+24V) Contact: SVH–21T–1.1
(Nihon Crimp Terminal)
NOTE
For the cable connector (CN2) on the PDP–unit side, use
swaging tool YC–16 available from Nihon Crimp Terminal.
(5) LCD
Power supply unit

CP15 (SMS6RN–4) Contact: JAPAN FCI RC16M–23T3 or
RC16M–SCT3
1 CN5
2 1 +24V
3 0V 2 0V
4 0V 3
5 +24V
6 (+24V) Housing: Japan AMP 2–178288–3
140
7.1.4 Some separate display units have soft keys. These units have flat cables
Connecting the Soft for the soft keys. Connect the soft key cable to connector KM2 of a
separate MDI unit.
Key Cable of a
Separate Display Unit
Separate display unit Separate MDI unit
KM2
The flat cable is about 500 mm long.
7.1.5 The 9″ CRT/MDI unit, 9″ PDP/MDI unit, 7.2″ LCD/MDI unit of full–key
ON/OFF Switch on the type, and 14″ CRT/MDI unit all have an ON/OFF switch for turning the
control unit on and off. The control unit can be turned on or off by
Display Unit pressing the ON/OFF switch when the switch is connected to the input
unit or power supply unit AI (input unit built–in type).
(1) Connecting to the input unit
9″ CRT/MDI unit, 9″ PDP/MDI unit, 7.2″ LCD/MDI unit of full–key
type
ON/OFF switch
Input unit
TP2
Ã
(M4 screw terminal)
ON
OFF
ÃÃ 1
2
3
ON
OFF
COM
Soldering tab terminal (#110)
14″ CRT/MDI unit
ON/OFF switch
Input unit
TP2 TP2
ÃÃ Ã
(M4 screw terminal) (M4 screw terminal)
ÃÃ
1 ON1
EON ON
ÃÃ
2 ON2
EOF OFF
3 OFF1
COM COM
4 OFF2
When connecting the cable to the input unit, remove the metal
jumper connecting EOF and COM.
141
(2) Connecting to the power supply unit AI

type
ON/OFF switch
Power supply unit AI
Cable–side connector CP3

Contact: JAPAN FCI RC16M–23T3 or (SMS6RW–4D28)
RC16M–SCT3
ON
1 ON
OFF 2 OFF
3 COM
4 AL
COM 5 FA
6 FB

Recommended connector kit: A02B–0096–K892
14″ CRT/MDI unit
ON/OFF switch

Cable–side connector
TP2 Housing: JAPAN FCI SMS6PN–5 CP3
Ã
(M4 screw terminal) Contact: JAPAN FCI RC16M–23T3 or (SMS6RW–4D28)
RC16M–SCT3
ÃÃ
1 ON
1 ON1
2 OFF
2 ON2
3 COM
Ã
3 OFF1
4 AL
4 OFF2
5 FA
6 FB
Recommended connector kit: A02B–0096–K892
142
(3) Connecting to the power supply unit AI (CE marking type)

type
ON/OFF switch

(CE marking type)
CP4
ON
1 ON
OFF 2 OFF
3 COM
4 AL
COM Cable–side connector (CP4) 5 FA
Contact: Japan AMP 1–175218–2 6 FB
14″ CRT/MDI unit
ON/OFF switch

(CE marking type)
TP2 CP4
(M4 screw terminal)
Ã 1 ON
ÃÃ
1 ON1
2 OFF
2 ON2
3 COM
3 OFF1
4 AL
4 OFF2
5 FA
Cable side connector (CP4) 6 FB
143
7.1.6 The LCD has controllers for fine adjustment of the video signal.
Adjusting the LCD
The controllers are required for eliminating slight disagreements between
the NC unit and LCD. The controllers must be adjusted at installation or
when the display circuit hardware of the NC, display unit, or cable is
replaced to eliminate an error.
Never adjust any controllers other than those described below.

D Adjusting the 7.2″ LCD (1) Adjustment positions (viewed from the rear of the display)
VR1
VRP1
SW1
(2) Adjustment
(a) Setting the mode and the horizontal position
By adjusting SW1, the mode and the horizontal position can be
changed as indicated in the table below. In inverted mode, black
characters are displayed on a white background. The default
setting is 9.
Inverted Inverted
8–level 4–level
Mode 8–level 4–level
gray scale gray scale
gray scale gray scale
1 dot to the
0 4 8 C
right
Standard 1 5 9 D
Horizontal
position 1 dot to the
2 6 A E
left
2 dots to
3 7 B F
the left
(b) Setting the contrast

The contrast is adjusted by using VRP1.
When the ambient temperature is low, the brightness of the LCD
decreases. (In particular, the LCD screen immediately after
power–on is dark) This is not a failure but a property of the LCD.
As the ambient temperature rises, the LCD screen becomes
brighter.
(c) Eliminating flicker
Flicker eliminated by adjusting VR1. Do not adjust VR1 if no
flicker is apparent.
144
D Adjusting the 8.4″ LCD (1) Adjustment positions (viewed from the rear of the display)
TM1
SW1
(2) Adjustment
(a) Setting the horizontal position
S By adjusting SW1, the horizontal position can be changed as
described below:
When SW1 is turned to the next position in the + direction, the
screen shifts to the right by one dot.
When SW1 is turned to the next position in the – direction, the
screen shifts to the left by one dot.
S The entire screen can be displayed.
The entire screen display can be obtained by a single setting.
(b) Eliminating flicker
Flicker adjustment pin TM1 is used. Adjustment pin TM1 can be
set to either of positions A and B. Adjustment pin TM1 is
factory–set to the B position. If flicker is apparent, set adjustment
pin TM1 to the A position.
145
7.2
CONNECTING THE
MDI UNIT
7.2.1
MDI Unit Interface
Control unit MDI unit
Memory card M3 KM1

(MR–20RMD) (MR–20RFM)
1 *KCM08 14 *KCM04 1 *KCM08 14 *KCM04
8 *KCM02 8 *KCM02
2 *KCM00 15 *KCM05 2 *KCM00 15 *KCM05
9 *KCM03 9 *KCM03
3 *KCM01 16 *KCM06 H20.F H20.M 3 *KCM01 16 *KCM06
10 *SW07 10 *SW07
4 *SW06 17 *KCM07 4 *SW06 17 *KCM07
11 *SW05 11 *SW05
5 *SW04 18 5 *SW04 18
12 *SW03 12 *SW03
6 *SW02 19 6 *SW02 19
13 *SW01 13 *SW01
7 *SW00 20 7 *SW00 20
Cable wiring
(01) (01)
*KCM08 *KCM08
(02) (02)
*KCM00 *KCM00
(03) (03)
*KCM01 *KCM01
(04) (04)
*SW06 *SW06
(05) (05)
*SW04 *SW04
(06) (06)
*SW02 *SW02
(07) (07)
*SW00 *SW00
(08) (08)
*KCM02 *KCM02
(09) (09)
*KCM03 *KCM03
(10) (10)
*SW07 *SW07
(11) (11)
*SW05 *SW05
(12) (12)
*SW03 *SW03
(13) (13)
*SW01 *SW01
(14) (14)
*KCM04 *KCM04
(15) (15)
*KCM05 *KCM05
(16) (16)
*KCM06 *KCM06
(17) (17)
*KCM07 *KCM07
Shield
Use a unified shield cable of up to 50 m long.

Recommended cable : A02B–0050–K803 (7 m) or A02B–0098–K803 (7 m)
Recommended cable material : A66L–0001–0041 (7/0.18, 20 cores)
146
7.3
CONNECTING AN I/O
DEVICE
7.3.1 A program input/output unit, such as tape reader or FANUC FLOPPY

Reader/Punch Interface CASSETTE, can be connected to the M5 or M74 connector of the control
unit.
CNC Relay connector

(DBM–25S)
Control unit
M5, M74 (MR20FH) 1 FG
14
2 SD
1 (TTY1) 14 +24V 15
8 RD 3 RD
2 (TTY2) 15 16
9 SD 4 RS
3 16 CD 17
10 (0V) 5 CS
4 (TTY3) 17 SG 18
11 6 DR
5 ER 18 DR 19
12 7 SG
6 19 CS 20 ER
13 8 CD
7 20 RS 21
9
22
10
Signals in parenthesis are only for M5. 23
11
24
12
25 +24V
13
NOTE
The machine tool builder should provide the reader/punch
relay board and cable, or use a punch panel. A unified
shield cable must be used.
The following sections illustrate the connections to ASR33,
PPR, a portable tape reader, and the FANUC FLOPPY
CASSETTE.
147
7.3.2 (1) Connection between units

ASR33
CNC
M5 MR20FH
1 TTY1 14 (+24V)
8
2 TTY2 15
9
3 16 M5
10 0V
4 TTY3 17
11
5 18
12
6 19
13
7 20
NOTE
1 The connection cable is not available as an optional item of
the reader/punch interface. Use a unified shield cable.
2 When the ASR33 interface is used, set the reader/punch
interface parameters.
148
(2) Signals
CNC
+5V +15V
10K 560W
0.5W
Input command TTY1

information TTY3 SN75463
0V
Logic 1: 3.1 V or higher TTY2 Punch (print)

Logic 2: 2.0 V or lower information
Logic 0: 100 mA
Logic 1: 100 µA
Logic 1
Logic 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ÃÃÃÃÃ
Start bit
Bits 1 to 8 (single character) transferred Stop bit (2 bits)
Punch (print) of a single character 99msec%
9msec±1%
Logic 1: Space (not punched)
Logic 0: Mark (punched)
149
7.3.3
PPR Connection
Relaying connector signal layout

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ER +24V
Relaying connector Cable side connector

Connector : DBM-25S Connector : DBM-25P
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC (JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.) INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Lock metal : D20418-J2 Lock metal : DDB–C2–J9
CNC
Control unit
M5, M74 (MR-20RFD)
1 14 +24V
ÃÃ Ã
ÃÃ
8 RD PPR
2 15
9 SD
3 16 CD
10
4 17 SG FG
11
5 ER 18 DR
12 Accessory
6 19 CS Relaying for PPR
13
7 20 RS cable
Input power supply
85 to 125VAC
50/60Hz 3Hz, 0.2KVA
NOTE
1 Prepare the relaying connector, the relaying cable and the plug receptacle at the machine tool
builder.
2 Prepare the power supply for PPR at the machine tool builder.
3 Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0041
4 When connecting the PPR, set the corresponding parameter to use reader puncher interface
(baud rate is 4800 baud).
150
7.3.4
Portable Tape Reader
Connection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ER +24V
Relaying connector Cable side connector

Connector : DBM-25S Connector : DBM-25P
Lock metal : D20418-J2 Lock metal : DB–C2–J9
CNC
Control unit
M5, M74 (MR-20RFD)
Ã
1 14 +24V
8 RD Portable
Ã
2 15
9 SD tape
3 16 CD reader
10
4 17 SG FG
11 Accessory
5 ER 18 DR
12
Relaying for portable
6 19 CS
13 cable tape reader
7 20 RS
Cable side plug

WF7013 (MATSUSHITA
Input power supply
ELECTRIC WORKS CO., LTD.)
200VAC (+10%, –15%)
50/60Hz 1Hz, 110VA (Without real) Plug receptacle
50/60Hz 1Hz, 130VA (With real) WF3012E (MATSUSHITA
ELECTRIC WORKS CO., LTD.)
NOTE
1 Prepare the relaying connector, the relaying cable and the plug receptacle at the machine tool
builder.
2 Prepare the power supply for PPR at the machine tool builder.
4 When connecting the portable tape reader, set the corresponding parameter to use reader
puncher interface (baud rate is 4800 baud).
151
7.3.5
FANUC FLOPPY
CASSETTE Connection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ER +24
Cable side connector

Connector : DBM-25P
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Lock metal : DDB–C2–J9
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Relaying connector
Connector : DBM-25S
(JAPAN AVIATION
ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
CNC Lock metal : D20418-J2
(JAPAN AVIATION
ELECTRONIC
Control unit Relaying
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
cable
M5, M74 (MR-20RFD)
1 14 +24V
8 RD FANUC
2 15 FLOPPY
9 SD
3 16 CD CASSETTE
10 FG
4 17 SG
11
5 ER 18 DR
12
6 19 CS Accessory
13 for FLOPPY
7 20 RS
CASSETTE
NOTE
1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector and relay cable.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0041
3 Open all terminals other than illustrated.
4 Set a parameter to be able to use reader puncher interface when connecting FANUC cassette.
The baud rate is 4800 baud.
5 Connect the FANUC cassette to either M5 or M74.
Do not use both pins; the power capacity may exceed that of +24V and blow the fuse.
152
7.3.6
Connection of Tape
Reader without Reels
CNC Tape reader

DB-25S-T
(JAPAN AVIATION
ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Control unit
1 FG
M5, M74 (MR-20RFD) 14
2 SD
15
1 14 +24V 3 RD
8 RD 16
2 15 4
9 SD Connector : 17
3 16 CD DB-25P 5
10 18
4 17 SG Lock metal 6 DR
11 D110278 19
5 ER 18 DR 7 SG
12 (JAPAN AVIATION 20
6 19 CS 8
13 ELECTRONIC 21
7 20 RS INDUSTRY., LTD.) 9
22
10
23
11 RDY
24
12
25
JAPAN FCI 13
CP2 (Power Supply unit AI) SMS3PK–5
CP4 (Input unit) M3 screw terminal
1 2 3 200A 200B G
R S G 200A 200B G
Cable wiring
Control unit Tape reader

(9) (3)
SD RD
(8) (2)
RD SD
(5) (6)
ER DR
(20)
RS
(19)
CS
(18) (11)
DR RDY
(16)
CD
(17) (7)
SG SG
(0V)
FG (1)
FG
Use cable clamp
NOTE
1 Note that cables with the same names on the control unit and the tape reader cannot be
connected.
153
7.3.7
Connection of Tape
Reader with Reels
CNC Tape reader
Control unit CD8 (MR–20RM)
M5, M74 (MR-20RFD) 1 11

2 12
1 14 +24V
8 RD 3 13
2 15
9 SD 4 14
3 16 CD MR–20LFH
10 5 ER 15
4 17 SG
11 6 16
5 ER 18 DR
12 7 17 SG
6 19 CS
13 8 RD 18 DR
7 20 RS
9 SD 19 CS
CP2 (Power Supply unit AI) 10 20 RS

CP4 (Input unit)
CP41
1 2 3 1 2 3
R S G R S G
JAPAN FCI, LTD.

SMS3PK–5
Cable wiring
Control unit Tape reader

CD8
(9)
SD (9) RD
(8)
RD (8) SD
(19)
CS (5) CS
(20)
RS (20) RS
(18)
DR (19) DR
CD (18)
(5)
ER (16) ER
(17)
SG (17) SG
(0V)
FG
Use cable clamp.
NOTE
1 Note that cables with the same names on the control unit and the tape reader cannot be
connected.
154
7.3.8
RS–232–C Interface
Specification
RS–232–C Interface Generally signals as follows are used in RS–232–C interface.

signals
CNC
Output
SD (Send data)
Input
RD (Recieve data)
RS (Request to Send)
When CS is not used
short CS and RS.
CS (Enable to send)
ER (Ready) When DR is not used

short DR and ER.
DR (Data set ready)
CD (Check data) Always short ER and

CD.
SG (Signal ground)
FG (Frame ground)
Fig. 7.3.8 RS–232–C interface
155
Signal description of
RS–232–C interface
Signal RS–232–C
circuit
name number
I/O Description
SD 103 Output Sending

data Start bit Stop bit
ON
OFF
12345678
RD 104 Input Receiv-
ing data (When ISO code “0” is sent)
RS 105 Output Sending This signal is set to on when NC starts

request sending data and is turned off when
transmission ends.
CS 106 Input Sending When both this signal and the DR sig-
permitted nal are set, the NC can send data.
If external device processing is delayed
by a punching operation, etc., NC data
sending can be stopped by turning off
this signal after sending two characters,
including the data being sent currently.
If this signal will not be used, make
sure to strap this signal circuit to the RS
signal circuit.
DR 107 Input Data set When external device is ready to oper-

ready ate, this signal is set. This signal
should usually be connected to the sig-
nal indicating external device power
supply being on. (ER signal of external
device). See Note below.
The NC transfers data when this signal
is set. If the signals turned off during
data transfer, alarm 086 is issued. If the
DR signal will not be used, make sure
to strap this signal circuit to the ER sig-
nal circuit.
ER 108.2 Output NC ready This signal is set when the NC is ready

to to operate. External device should re-
operation gard the SD signal as being significant
when the ER signal is set.
CD 109 Input Signal Since this signal is not used in connec-

quality tions with external device, the signal
signal circuit must be strapped, inside the
connecting cable, to the ER signal cir-
cuit.
SG 102 Signal
grounding
FG 101 Frame
grounding
NOTE
Signal on/off state is defined as follows;
–3V or lower +3 or higher
Function OFF ON
Signal Condition Marking Spacing
156
Transmission Method of
RS–232–C interface
Start–stop Generally, two transmission methods are available at the serial interface.
Series 0 use the start–stop method. With this method, start and stop
signals are output before and after each data bit.
One character in start–stop
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
Start bit Data bit Stop bits

(8 bit including one parity bit) (2 bits)
Codes Transmission codes are as follows:
(i) EIA code and Control codes DC1 to DC4.
(ii) ISO code and Control codes DC1 to DC4 (Optional ISO code input
is necessary.)
The connected external device must be able to recognize the following
control codes, sent from NC.
Control code 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC1 Tape reader start
DC2 Tape punch designation
DC3 Tape reader stop
DC4 Tape punch release
NOTE
The listed control codes are used for both EIA and ISO.
In this interface, control codes DC to DC4 are used.

(a) NC can control external device by issuing codes DC1 to DC4.
(b) When external processing falls behind the pace of the NC signals
(When NC issues data)
(i) External device can temporarily stop NC data output by using the
NC’s CS signal. Data output stops within two characters including
a currently transmitting character when CS OFF signal is input to
NC. When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission start.
(ii) If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output within
ten characters. When control code DC1 is input to NC, NC starts
sending data again.
(c) When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter, the
external device must satisfy the specification shown in Table 7.3.8 (a).
157
Table7.3.8
ISO code EIA code
Meaning
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 • 0 • Numeral 0
A • a • Address A
B • b • ? Address B
C • c • Address C
D • d • ? Address D
E • e • ? Address E
F • f • Address F
G • g • Address G
H • h • Address H
I • i • Address I
J • j • ? Address J
K • k • Address K
L • l • ? Address L
M • m • Address M
N • n • Address N
O • o • Address O
P • p • Address P
Q • q • Address Q
R • r • Address R
S • s • Address S
T • t • Address T
U • u • Address U
V • v • ? Address V
W • w • Address W
X • x • Address X
Y • y • ? Address Y
Z • z • Address Z
DEL • Del • * Delete (cancel erroneous hole)
NUL • Blank • * No holes. Not used at significant
data zone is EIA code.
BS • BS • * Back space
HT • Tab • * Tabulator
LF or NL • CR or EOB • End of block
CR • • * Carriage return
SP • SP • * Space
% • ER • Absolute rewind stop
( • (2–4–5) • Control out (start of comment)
) • (2–4–7) • Control in (end of comment)
+ • + • * Plus sign
– • – • – Minus sign
: • Assumed as program number in
ISO code.
/ • / • Optional block skip
. • . • Decimal point
# • * Sharp
$ • * Dollar symbol
& • & • * Ampersand
’ • * Apostrophe
* • * Asterisk
, • , • * Comma
; • * Semicolon
< • * Left angle bracket
= • * Equal mark
> • * Right angle bracket
? • * Question mark
@ • * Commerical at mark
” • * Quotation mark
158
NOTE
1 When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA
converter, the following items must be noted in Table 7.3.8.
Control out (Comment field start)

Control out (Comment field end)
EIA code (.......................) CR o ....................
Condition1 Condition1 Condition2 Condition3
ISO code (.......................) LF : ....................
Condition1
Left parenthesis “(”of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 5
when used in the EIA code.
Right parenthesis “)”of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 7
when used in the EIA code.
Condition2
EIA code CR is LF in ISO code.
Condition3
EIA code O is : in ISO code.
NOTE
2 Control codes DC1 to DC4 are transmission codes output
from the NC. So they need not to be punched on the NC
tape.
(iii) Transmission rate (Baud rate)

The transmission rate (Baud rate) is the number of bits transferred per
second.
The following baud rates are available depending on the system
parameter.
50, 100, 110, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600.
(Example)
Baud rate : 110
When using one start bit and two stop bits (totalling 11 bits per
character):
110
Transmission characters/second= =10 characters/second
11
(Max.)
159
(iv) Cable length

The cable length depends on the external device type. Consult with
the device manufacturers for actual connecting cable lengths.
When cable A (A66L–0001–0041) is used, cable length is as
follows by the specification of NC.
for RS–232–C 100m or less ... 4800 bauds or less
60m or less ... 9600 bauds or less
Time chart when the NC (1) NC outputs DC1.
receives data (2) The external device starts sending data upon receiving DC1.
(Read into memory) (3) NC sends DC3 when NC processing is delayed.
(4) The external device stops sending data to NC after receiving DC3.
The device may send up to 10 characters after receiving DC3. If it
sends more than 10 characters, alarm 087 will occur.
(5) NC reissues DC1 upon completing delayed processing.
(6) The external device restarts data output upon receiving the DC1 code
(the data must be the next data to the preceding.)
(7) NC sends DC3 upon completing data read.
(8) The external device stops sending data.
10ms or longer 100ms or longer
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
DC1 CD3 DC1 DC3
SD(Output)
ER code
RD(Input)
DR(Input)
CS(Input)
Up to 10 characters
1ms or longer
160
Time chart when the NC (1) NC output DC2.

send data (Punch out) (2) NC outputs punch data in succession.
(3) When data processing is delayed at the external device.
(a) Data output stops within two characters including a currently
transmitting character when CS signal is turned off.
When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission starts. (See Fig. A)
(b) If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output within ten
characters. When control code DC1 is input to NC, NC starts sending
data again. (See Fig. B)
(4) The NC starts sending the next data if the CS signal is turned on after
the external device completes data processing.
(5) The NC issues DC4 upon completing data output.
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
DC2 DC4
SD(Output)
RD(Input)
CS(Input)
1ms or longer Within 2 characters
Fig. A
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
DC2 DC4
SD(Output)
DC3 DC1
RD(Input)
Within 10 characters
DR(Input)
CS(Input)
1ms or longer
Fig. B
161
Connection between
RS–232–C interface and
external device
CNC External device
SD SD side
RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
ER ER
DR DR
CD CD
SG SG
FG FG
162
D The cable for connecting the PG–Mate to the NC should be connected

as shown in the below diagram.
CNC External device

SD SD side
RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
ER ER
DR DR
CD CD
SG SG
FG FG
Prepare the cable with I/O device as follows :
Serial
interface
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
ER
DR
Cable : twist 10 pairs 0.18mm2, with shield
163
7.3.9
Parameters Related to
the Reader/Punch
Interface SETTING I/O : Select the I/O unit
Select an I/O unit to or from which a program is input or output through

the reader/punch interface.
0 : Uses the unit whose parameters are specified in No.0002 (NFED,
ASR33, STP2), No.0552 (BRATE0), and No.0038 (RSCMD1,
DEVFL1). (Memory card M5)
ASR33, STP2), No.0553 (BRATE1), and No.0038 (RSCMD1,
RSASC1, STP2), No.0250 (BRATE2), and No.0038 (RSCMD2,
etc.), No.0251 (BRATE3), and No.0038 (RSCMD3, DEVFL3).
(Remote buffer M77)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0002 NFED ASR33 STP2 (I/O=0)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 NFED ASR33 STP2 (I/O=1)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0050 NFED RSASCI STP2 (I/O=2)
NFED 1 : When a program is output, a feed command is not output before or

after the program. (Set this to 1 when a Fanuc disk is used.)
0 : When a program is output, a feed command is output before and after
the program.
ASR33 1 : Uses the 20–mA interface.
0 : Uses the Fanuc PPR, Fanuc disk, or portable tape reader.
STP2 1 : Uses two bits as the stop bits.
0 : Uses one bit as the stop bit.
RSASCI 1 : Uses ASCII codes for program input.
0 : Uses ISO/EIA codes for program input.
0552 BRATE0 (I/O=0)
0553 BRATE1 (I/O=1)
0250 BRATE2 (I/O=2)
BRATE0, BRATE1, BRATE2: Baud rate when reader/punch interface

is used.
164
Set value Baud rate
1 50
2 100
3 110
4 150
5 200
6 300
7 600
8 1200
9 2400
10 4800
11 9600
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0038 RSCMD1 DEVFL1 RSCMD2 DEVFL2 (I/O=0)
RSCMD1, DEVFL1 I/O unit on channel 1 of reader/punch interface

RSCMD2, DEVFL2 I/O unit on channel 2 of reader/punch interface
RSCMD1 DEVFL1
I/O unit to be used
(RSCMD2) (DEVFL2)
0 0 “Bubble Cassette”
0 1 “Floppy Cassete”
1 0 FANUC PPR, RS232C
1 1 New interface
165
7.4
MANUAL PULSE
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
Control unit
M12 HONDA MR–20RMD
Manual pulse generator (1st axis)
1 0V 14
8 HA1
2 0V 15
9 HB1 J24
3 0V 16 M3 screw terminal
10
4 +5V 17 3 4 5 6
11
5 +5V 18 +5V +0V HA1 HB1
12
6 +5V 19
13
7 20
HONDA
MR–20LFH
Graphic and manual pulse generator

Two control printed boards
(optional function)
M21 HONDA MR–20RMA
Manual pulse generator (2nd axis)
1 0V 14 0V
8 HA2
2 0V 15 0V J25 M3 screw terminal
9 HB2
3 0V 16 0V
10 3 4 5 6
4 +5V 17 +5V
11 +5V +0V HA2 HB2
5 +5V 18 +5V
12 HA3
6 +5V 19 +5V
13 HB3
7 20
Manual pulse generator (3rd axis)
M3 screw terminal
3 4 5 6
+5V +0V HA3 HB3
Cable spec. : 7/0.18 (0.2mm2) or more unified shielded cable

Recommended cable spec : A66L–0001–0041
A02B–0050–K802 (7m) can be used for J24.
NOTE
Connection of Series 00 is different from above connection.
See Appendix J.
166
Control unit
+5V Manual pulse generator

(1st axis)
M12(4)
M12(5)
M12(6) +5V 3
M12(1)
0V 4
M12(2)
M12(3) HA1 5
M12(8) HB1 6
HA1
M12(9)
HB1

(2nd axis)
M21(4)
M21(5)
M21(6) +5V 3
M21(1)
0V 4
M21(2)
M21(3) HA2 5
M21(8) HB2 6
HA2
M21(9)
HB2

(3rd axis)
M21(17)
M21(18)
M21(19) +5V 3
M21(14)
0V 4
M21(15)
M21(16) HA3 5
M21(12) HB3 6
HA3
M21(13)
HB3
167
Cable connection for the The power supply to the manual pulse generator is 5 VDC, same as for
manual pulse generator the pulse coder. It is therefore necessary to prevent cable resistance from
causing the supply voltage to drop more than 0.2V (total for both the 0
V and 5 V lines).
This is written as:
0.2 y 0.1 R
m
2L
0.1 : 0.1 A power supply current of the manual pulse generator

R: Resistance per unit length of the wire (Ω/m)
m: Number of wires connected in each 0 V and 5 V line
L: Wire length (m)
This can be converted to the following equation:
Lxm
R
168
7.5 The high–speed DI signal can be used as a high–speed skip signal. The
high–speed DI signal is connected as shown below:
HIGH–SPEED DI
SIGNAL INTERFACE
Control unit, memory card
M12 (MR–20RMD)
1 0V 14 HSKIP
8 (HA1)
2 0V 15
9 (HB1)
3 0V 16
10 (SVC)
4 (+5V) 17
11 (0V)
5 (+5V) 18
12
6 (+5V) 19
13
7 20
Fig. 7.5 (a)
Control unit
+5V
Proximity switch
ÃÃ
Machine power supply
3.3K
ÃÃ HSKIP M12(14)
ÃÃ RV
ÃÃ
0V M12(01 to 03)
Grounded by the
ground plate
Fig. 7.5 (b) Connection of the HSKIP signal
NOTE
1 The M12 connector is shared by the analog spindle
interface and manual pulse generator interface.
2 The function is optional.
169
8. CONNECTIONS FOR SPINDLE B–61393E/06
8 CONNECTIONS FOR SPINDLE
Serial spindle The following three configurations of the spindle interface are available
P/C
Optical I/O
Memory card Link adaptor
Serial
COP5 JA7B spindle Motor
JA7A amplifier
(α series) 1st spindle
P/C
Optical fiber
JY2 Serial
JA7B spindle Motor
Electric cable JA7A amplifier
(α series) 2nd spindle
Serial spindle +
Rotary tool
P/C
Optical I/O
Memory card Link adaptor
Serial
JA7B spindle Motor
COP5
JA7A amplifier
(α series) 1st spindle
P/C
Optical fiber
Serial
JA7B spindle Motor
Electric cable JA7A amplifier
(α series) 2nd spindle
M12 or M26 Analog signal

Inverter Motor
Rotary tool
NOTE
Optical I/O Link adapter in is required when serial
spindle amplifier is α series.
In other cases it can be connected directly with optical fiber
170
B–61393E/06 8. CONNECTIONS FOR SPINDLE
Analog spindle
Memory card
Position coder return signal (A/B/Z phase) P/C
M27
M12 or M26 Analog spindle

amplifier Motor
Analog signal
Spindle
171
8.1 Connection to the spindle amplifier through optical fiber cable.

When spindle amplifier is α series, electric cable is connected to amplifier
SERIAL SPINDLE through I/O Link adapter
INTERFACE (a) When the serial spindle amplifier is used
Memory card
COP5 Light To spindle motor
or Serial spindle
5th/6th axis amplifier
card
COP6
(b)When the α–series spindle amplifier module is used
Memory card Electric signal To α spindle motor

Light
COP5
or α–series spindle
5th/6th axis amplifier module
card
COP6 Optical link adapter
Connection when the α–series spindle amplifier module is used
FS0–C Optical link adapter JD1 α–series spindle amplifier module

JA7B
1 *SIN 11 0V Electric cable J39 1 SIN 11 0V

Memory card COP 2 SIN 12 0V (up to 2 m) 2 *SIN 12 0V
COP5
or 3 *SOUT 13 0V 3 SOUT 13 0V
5th/6th axis card 4 SOUT 14 0V 4 *SOUT 14 0V
COP6 Optical cable
K4X 5 15 0V 5 15 0V
6 16 0V 6 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 18 +5V 8 18 +5V
9 +5V 19 9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V 10 20 +5V
Connector : PCR–E20FA
(HONDA 20–pin, half pitch)
Housing : PCR–V20LA
Code of optical cable (K4X)
A66L–6001–0009#LVVVVV (with reinforced jacket)
Length designation
or A66L–6001–0008#L2R003 (2m) (Without reinforced jacket)
172
Electric cable connection
Õ ÕÕ
*SIN
SIN
(1)
(2) ÕÕ ÕÕ
ÕÕ
(4)
(3)
*SOUT
SOUT
ÕÕ ÕÕ
*SOUT (3) (2) *SIN
ÕÕ
SOUT (4) (1) SIN
ÕÕ ÕÕ
+5V (9) (9) +5V
ÕÕ
+5V (18) (18) +5V
ÕÕ ÕÕ
+5V (20) (20) +5V
ÕÕ
0V (11) (11) 0V
0V (12) (12) 0V
0V
0V
(13)
(14)
ÕÕ ÕÕ
ÕÕ
(13)
(14)
0V
0V
0V
0V
(15)
(16) ÕÕ ÕÕ
ÕÕ
(15)
(16)
0V
0V
Shield
Recommended cable material A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10)

Recommended cable specification A02B–0120–K844 (1m)
173
8.2 The speed of the analog spindle is specified by analog voltage output. The
analog output for the first spindle can be output from pin 10 of M12 or
ANALOG SPINDLE pin 7 of M26. Choose either pin.
INTERFACE
Control unit
M12 (MR–20RMD)
1 (0V) 14
8 (HA1)
2 (0V) 15
9 (HB1)
3 (0V) 16 To spindle control
10 SVC circuit
4 (+5V) 17
11 0V
5 (+5V) 18
12
6 (+5V) 19
13
7 20
M26 (MR–20RFD)
1 14
8
2 15
9
3 16 To spindle control
10 circuit
4 17
11
5 18
12
6 19
13
7 SVC 20 0V
Control unit
SVC
Õ
(Spindle speed command)
0V
ÕÕ
Ground plate
Cable material 12/0.18 (0.3mm2) Unified shield twisted–pair cable

Recommended cable A66L–0001–0041
NOTE
1 M12 is also used as the connector for the first manual pulse
generator.
2 In addition to the spindle speed analog voltage signal
(SVC), use the spindle enable signal (ENB). Use the same
cable as that indicted above.
174
8.3
POSITION CODER
INTERFACE
M27 MRE20–RMD
1 0V 14 SC Signal name Description

8
2 0V 15 *SC
9 SC, *SC Position coder phase–C signal
3 0V 16 PA
10 PA, *PA Position coder phase–A signal
4 +5V 17 *PA
11
5 +5V 18 PB PB, *PB Position coder phase–B signal
12
6 +5V 19 *PB
13
7 20
CNC
Connector pin number
0V (1)(2)(3)
ÕÕ ÕÕ (K)
0V
ÕÕ ÕÕ
(4)(5)(6) (H)
+5V +5V
PA (16) ÕÕ
ÕÕ ÕÕ
ÕÕ
(A)
Position coder
PA
ÕÕ ÕÕ
(17) (N)
*PA *PA
ÕÕ ÕÕ
Position (C)
(18)
coder input PB PB
ÕÕ ÕÕ
(19) (R)
*PB *PB
ÕÕ ÕÕ
(14) (B)
SC SC
(15) (P)
*SC *SC
Unified shield twisted–pair cable

Characteristic impedance: 100 Ω
NOTE
1 The current drain of the position coder is 0.35 A. Determine the number of 0V and +5V lines
to be connected so that the total voltage drop between the NC and position coder does not
exceed 0.2 V, total for both ways.
2 With the 0–TTC, a second position coder can be used. Use the M29 connector of the 5th/6th
axis card. The M29 connector has the same pin assignment as the M27 connector.
When the second position coder is not used, connect the first position coder to M27 and M29
in parallel.
175
9. SERVO CONNECTIONS B–61393E/06
9 SERVO CONNECTIONS
176
B–61393E/06 9. SERVO CONNECTIONS
9.1 This section describes the servo interface between the Series 0 and the
digital control AC servo amplifier and servo motor.
OUTLINE
For an explanation of each servo amplifier unit and servo motor, refer to
the relevant manual.
The Series 0 supports three types of axis control cards according to the
type of the pulse coder built into the servo motor or type of the servo
interface.
D Axis control card for A/B–phase pulse coders (Type A interface)
D Axis control card for serial pulse coders (Type A interface)
D Axis control card for type B interface
Axis control cards for serial pulse coders can also be connected to an
A/B–phase pulse coder.
NOTE
In a closed loop system using a separate pulse coder, the
axis control cards for the A/B–phase pulse coders and those
for serial pulse coders use different connectors for their
feedback cables.
D Connector names
Axis control card for A/B–phase pulse coders Axis control card for serial pulse coders
Semi– Semi–
closed Closed loop closed Closed loop
loop loop
Axis name Command Command
Position Velocity Position Velocity
Feedback Feedback
feedback feedback feedback feedback
1st axis M34 M35 M35 M36 M184 M185 M186 M185
2nd axis M37 M38 M38 M39 M187 M188 M189 M188
3rd axis M44 M45 M45 M46 M194 M195 M196 M195
4th axis M47 M48 M48 M49 M197 M198 M199 M198
5th axis M64 M65 M65 M66 M204 M205 M206 M205
6th axis M67 M68 M68 M69 M207 M208 M209 M208
7th axis M134 M135 M135 M136 M224 M225 M226 M225
8th axis M137 M138 M138 M139 M227 M228 M229 M228
For the 0–TTC, the first and second axes for tool post 2 correspond to the
fifth and sixth axes in the above table.
177
Axis control card for type B interface
Semi–closed loop Closed loop

Axis name Command
Feedback Position feedback Velocity feedback
1st axis JS1A JFn M186 JFn
2nd axis JS2A JFn M189 JFn
3rd axis JS3A JFn M196 JFn
4th axis JS4A JFn M199 JFn
5th axis
6th axis
Not used ty e B interface
type
7th axis
8th axis
When an axis control card for a type B interface is used, the JFn connector
on the servo amplifier side is used as the feedback or velocity feedback
connector. n varies with the servo amplifier being used. A type B
interface can be used for the first to fourth axes, but not for the fifth to
eighth axes.
D Semi–closed loop
system
Series 0 axis control Servo amplifier

card Power
Command
Feedback
Battery Pulse Servo

unit coder motor
The battery unit is not required when an incremental pulse coder is used.
178
D Semi–closed loop (when an absolute pulse coder and relay unit are used)
system

card Power
Command
Relay
Feedback
unit
Battery Pulse Servo

unit coder motor
D Semi–closed loop (when a high–speed, high–resolution A/B–phase pulse coder is used)

system

card Power
Command
Submicron
Feedback
detection board
Pulse Servo
coder motor
179
D Semi–closed loop (when a type B interface is used)

system
Axis control card for Servo amplifier

type B interface Power
Command/
feedback
Feedback
Battery Pulse Servo

unit coder motor
Use a servo amplifier that supports a type B interface. When a servo amplifier
which supports both types of interface is used, set it to use the type B interface.
D Closed loop system

card Power
Command
Velocity feedback
Position feedback
Separate Pulse Servo
pulse coder coder motor
Battery
unit
180
D Closed loop system (when an absolute pulse coder and relay unit are used)

card Power
Command
CN1
Velocity feedback
Relay
Position feedback
unit
Battery
unit
D Closed loop system (when a high–speed, high–resolution A/B–phase pulse coder is used)

card Power
Command
CN1
Submicron
Pulse Servo
detection
Velocity feedback coder motor
board
Position feedback
Separate
pulse coder
D Closed loop system (when a type B interface is used)
Axis control card for

Servo amplifier
type B interface Power
Command/
velocity feedback Velocity feedback
Position feedback
Battery
unit
The battery unit is not required when a separate type incremental pulse coder is used.
181
9.2 This section describes each servo amplifier interface, taking that for the
first axis as an example.
SERVO AMPLIFIER
INTERFACE
9.2.1
S Series Servo Amplifier
Series 0 (control unit) S series servo amplifier
M34 or M184 CN1

(MR–20RF) n:axis number (MR–20RM)
J21n
01 *PWMAn 14 *PWMDn 14 *PWMDn 01 *PWMAn
08 IRn 08 IRn
02 COMAn 15 COMDn 15 COMDn 02 COMAn
09 GDRn 09 GDRn
03 *PWMBn 16 *PWMEn 16 *PWMEn 03 *PWMBn
10 ISn 10 ISn
04 COMBn 17 COMEn 17 COMEn 04 COMBn
11 GDSn 11 GDSn
05 *PWMCn 18 *PWMFn 18 *PWMFn 05 *PWMCn
12 *MCONn 12 *MCONn
06 COMCn 19 COMFn 19 COMFn 06 COMCn
13 GNDn 13 GNDn
07 *DRDYn 20 20 07 *DRDYn
Connector: MR–20LMH (HONDA, 20–pin, male) Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female)
Cable connection 8 8
IRn IRn
9 9
GDRn GDRn
1 1
*PWMAn *PWMAn
2 2
COMAn COMAn
3 3
*PWMBn *PWMBn
4 4
COMBn COMBn
5 5
*PWMCn *PWMCn
6 6
COMCn COMCn
13 13
GNDn GNDn
12 12
*MCONn *MCONn
10 10
ISn ISn
11 11
GDSn GDSn
14 14
*PWMDn *PWMDn
15 15
COMDn COMDn
16 16
*PWMEn *PWMEn
17 17
COMEn COMEn
18 18
*PWMFn *PWMFn
19 19
COMFn COMFn
7 7
*DRDYn *DRDYn
Shield
Recommended cable material A66L–0001–0041
Recommended cable specification A02B–0074–K801 (5m) or A02B–0098–K821 (5m)
CAUTION
To protect the signals from external noise, assign the cable’s central pairs to each pair of current
feedback signal and ground signal (i.e., IRn and GDRn, and ISn and GDSn). Otherwise,
external noise may result in uneven feed or abnormal sound.
182
9.2.2
C Series Servo Amplifier
and α Servo Amplifier
Module (Type A Interface)
Series 0 (control unit) α servo amplifier module
M34 or M184 JV1B (L–axis), JV2B (M–axis)
(MR–20RF) C series servo amplifier
n: axis number CN1
01 *PWMAn 14 *PWMDn 01 IRn 11 ISn
08 IRn
02 COMAn 15 COMDn 02 GDRn 12 GDSn
09 GDRn
03 *PWMBn 16 *PWMEn 03 *PWMAn 13 *PWMDn
10 ISn
04 COMBn 17 COMEn 04 COMAn 14 COMDn
11 GDSn
05 *PWMCn 18 *PWMFn 05 *PWMBn 15 *PWMEn
12 *MCONn
06 COMCn 19 COMFn 06 COMBn 16 COMEn
13 GNDn
07 *DRDYn 20 07 *PWMCn 17 *PWMFn
08 COMCn 18 COMFn
09 19
10 *MCONn 20 *DRDYn
Connector: MR–20LMH (HONDA, 20–pin, male) Connector: PCR–E20FA (HONDA, 20–pin,

half–pitch) or equivalent
For a C series servo amplifier, connect the cable to M34 or M184.
For an α series servo amplifier, connect the cable to M184. It cannot be connected to M34.
Cable connection
8 1
IRn IRn
9 2
GDRn GDRn
1 3
*PWMAn *PWMAn
2 4
COMAn COMAn
3 5
*PWMBn *PWMBn
4 6
COMBn COMBn
5 7
*PWMCn *PWMCn
6 8
COMCn COMCn
12 10
*MCONn *MCONn
10 11
ISn ISn
11 12
GDSn GDSn
14 13
*PWMDn *PWMDn
15 14
COMDn COMDn
16 15
*PWMEn *PWMEn
17 16
COMEn COMEn
18 17
*PWMFn *PWMFn
19 18
COMFn COMFn
7 20
*DRDYn *DRDYn
Shield
Recommended cable material A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10pairs)
183
CAUTION
To protect the signals from external noise, assign the cable’s central pairs to each pair of current
feedback signal and ground signal (i.e., IRn and GDRn, and ISn and GDSn). Otherwise,
external noise may result in uneven feed or abnormal sound.
9.2.3
a Servo Amplifier Servo Amplifier
Module (Type B Axis control card for type B
JS1B (L axis)/JS2B (M axis)/
Interface) and b Servo interface
JS1A JS3B (N axis)
Amplifier Module (PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
01 IRn 11 ISn 01 IRn 11 ISn
02 GDRn 12 GDSn 02 GDRn 12 GDSn
03 :PWMAn 13 :ENBLn 03 :PWMAn 13 :ENBLn
04 0V 14 0V 04 0V 14 0V
05 :PWMCn 15 PDn 05 :PWMCn 15 PDn
06 0V 16 :PDn 06 0V 16 :PDn
07 :PWMEn 17 PREQn 07 :PWMEn 17 PREQn
08 0V 18 :PREQn 08 0V 18 :PREQn
09 :DRDYn 19 0V 09 :DRDYn 19 0V
10 :MCONn 20 0V 10 :MCONn 20 0V
Connector: PCR–E20FA, etc.

(HONDA, 20–pin, half pitch)
CABLE WIRING
1 1
IRn IRN
2 2
GDRn GDRN
3 3
:PWMAn :PWMAN
4 4
0V 0V
5 5
:PWMCn :PWMCN
6 6
0V 0V
7 7
:PWMEn :PWMEN
8 8
0V 0V
9 9
:DRDYn :DRDYN
10 10
:MCONn :MCONN
11 11
ISn ISN
12 12
GDSn GDSN
13 13
:ENBLn :ENBLN
14 14
0V 0V
15 15
PDn PDN
16 16
:PDn :PDN
17 17
PREQn PREQN
18 18
:PREQn :PREQN
19 19
0V 0V
20 20
0V 0V
Shield
Ground plate
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL
A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28WAG10 pair)
RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION
A02B–0120–K800(5m)
184
NOTE
1 The total length of the cable between the CNC and amplifier
and that between the amplifier and motor shall not exceed
50m.
2 As the current feedback lines (IRn and ISn), use the middle
twisted pair of the recommended cable. If any other pair is
used, abnormal noise or oscillation may occur.
3 Use a servo unit which supports the type–B interface. When
using a servo unit which supports both the type–A and
type–B interfaces, select the type–B interface. For details,
refer to the manual supplied with the servo unit. If the
interface setting is incorrect, a servo alarm (AL401 V
READY OFF) will be issued.
185
9.3
A/B PHASE PULSE
CODER INTERFACE
9.3.1
Low–Resolution A/B
Phase Pulse Coder
(2000P to 3000P)
(Built–in Incremental
Pulse Coder)
Series 0 (control unit) Low–resolution A/B–phase pulse coder
M35 or M185 (built–in incremental pulse coder)
(MR–20RM) n: axis number (MS3102A–20–29PW)
J22n
01 0V 14 PCZn A PCAn B PCBn C Cn1
08 OHnA
02 0V 15 *PCZn D *PCAn E *PCBn F PCZn
09 OHnB
03 0V 16 PCAn G *PCZn H SHLD J +5V
10 Cn8
04 +5V 17 *PCAn K +5V L Cn4 M Cn8
11 Cn4
05 +5V 18 PCBn N 0V P Cn2 R OHnA
12 Cn2
06 +5V 19 *PCBn S OHnB T 0V
13 Cn1
07 20
Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female) Connector: MS3106B20–29SW (straight)

MS3108B20–29SW (elbow)
Cable connection
(14) (F)
PCZn PCZn
(15) (G)
*PCZn *PCZn
(16) (A)
PCAn PCAn
(17) (D)
*PCAn *PCAn
(18) (B)
PCBn PCBn
(19) (E)
*PCBn *PCBn
(10) (M)
Cn8 Cn8
(11) (L)
Cn4 Cn4
(12) (P)
Cn2 Cn2
(13) (C)
Cn1 Cn1
(08) (R)
OHnA OHnA
(09) (S)
OHnB OHnB
(04, 05, 06) (J, K)
+5V +5V
(01, 02, 03) (N, T)
0V 0V
(H)
SHLD
Shield
Cable material : +5V, 0V For each, six or more vinyl–coated wires each having a cross–sectional area of 0.2 mm2
: Cn1 to Cn8 Vinyl–coated wires each having a cross–sectional area of at least 0.2 mm2
: Others Unified shield twisted pair wires each having a cross–sectional area of at least 0.1 mm2
Recommended cable specification Straight type A02B–0074–K802 (14m) or A02B–0098–K822 (14m)
Elbow type A02B–0074–K803 (14m) or A02B–0098–K823 (14m)
NOTE
The voltage resistance for +5 V must not exceed 0.5Ω, total for both ways.
186
9.3.2
Low–Speed,
High–Resolution A/B
Phase Pulse Coder
(10000P to 25000P, 12
m/min)
Pulse Coder)
Series 0 (control unit) Low–speed, high–resolution A/B–phase

M35 or M185 pulse coder(built–in incremental pulse coder)
(MR–20RM) n:axis number (MS3102A–22–14P)
J22n
01 0V 14 PCZn A PCAn B *PCAn C PCBn
08 OHnA
02 0V 15 *PCZn D *PCBn E PCZn F *PCZn
09 OHnB
03 0V 16 PCAn G Cn1 H Cn2 J Cn4
10 Cn8
04 +5V 17 *PCAn K Cn8 L +5V M 0V
11 Cn4
05 +5V 18 PCBn N SHLD P OHnA R OHnB
12 Cn2
06 +5V 19 *PCBn S T +5V U 0V
13 Cn1
07 20
Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female) Connector: MS3106B22–14S (straight)

MS3108B22–14S (elbow)
Cable connection
(14) (E)
PCZn PCZn
(15) (F)
*PCZn *PCZn
(16) (A)
PCAn PCAn
(17) (B)
*PCAn *PCAn
(18) (C)
PCBn PCBn
(19) (D)
*PCBn *PCBn
(10) (K)
Cn8 Cn8
(11) (J)
Cn4 Cn4
(12) (H)
Cn2 Cn2
(13) (G)
Cn1 Cn1
(08) (P)
OHnA OHnA
(09) (R)
OHnB OHnB
(04, 05, 06) (L, T)
+5V +5V
(01, 02, 03) (M, U)
0V 0V
(N)
SHLD
Shield
Recommended cable specification Straight typeA02B–0074–K807 (14m) or A02B–0098–K827 (14m)
Elbow type A02B–0074–K808 (14m) or A02B–0098–K828 (14m)
NOTE
187
9.3.3 Connect a high–speed, high–resolution A/B–phase pulse coder via a

High–Speed, submicron detection board.
Phase Pulse Coder
(20000P to 30000P, 24
m/min)
Pulse Coder)
(1) Connection between Series 0 and submicron detection board
Series 0 (control unit) Submicron detection board
M35 or M185 CN1 (right)

(MR–20RM) (MR–20RF)
01 0V 14 PCZn 01 0V 14 PCZn
08 OHnA 08 OHnA
02 0V 15 *PCZn 02 0V 15 *PCZn
09 OHnB 09 OHnB
03 0V 16 PCAn 03 0V 16 PCAn
10 Cn8 10 Cn8
04 +5V 17 *PCAn 04 +5V 17 *PCAn
11 Cn4 11 Cn4
05 +5V 18 PCBn 05 +5V 18 PCBn
12 Cn2 12 Cn2
06 +5V 19 *PCBn 06 +5V 19 *PCBn
13 Cn1 13 Cn1
07 20 07 20
Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female) Connector: MR–20LMH (HONDA, 20–pin, male)
Cable connection
(14) (14)
PCZn PCZn
(15) (15)
*PCZn *PCZn
(16) (16)
PCAn PCAn
(17) (17)
*PCAn *PCAn
(18) (18)
PCBn PCBn
(19) (19)
*PCBn *PCBn
(10) (10)
Cn8 Cn8
(11) (11)
Cn4 Cn4
(12) (12)
Cn2 Cn2
(13) (13)
Cn1 Cn1
(08) (08)
OHnA OHnA
(09) (09)
OHnB OHnB
(04, 05, 06) (04, 05, 06)
+5V +5V
(01, 02, 03) (01, 02, 03)
0V 0V
Shield

The cable length must not exceed 2 m.
188
(2) Connection between submicron detection board and high–speed,

high–resolution A/B–phase pulse coder
Submicron detection board High–speed, high–resolution A/B–phase pulse coder

(built–in incremental pulse coder)
CN1 (left)
(MR–20RM) (MS3102A–22–14P)
01 0V 14 PCZn A An B *An C Bn
08 OHnA
02 0V 15 *PCZn D *Bn E PCZn F *PCZn
09 OHnB
03 0V 16 An G Cn1 H Cn2 J Cn4
10 Cn8
04 +5V 17 *An K Cn8 L +5V M 0V
11 Cn4
05 +5V 18 Bn N SHLD P OHnA R OHnB
12 Cn2
06 +5V 19 *Bn S T +5V U 0V
13 Cn1
07 20

Cable connection
(14) (E)
PCZn PCZn
(15) (F)
*PCZn *PCZn
(16) (A)
An An
(17) (B)
*An *An
(18) (C)
Bn Bn
(19) (D)
*Bn *Bn
(10) (K)
Cn8 Cn8
(11) (J)
Cn4 Cn4
(12) (H)
Cn2 Cn2
(13) (G)
Cn1 Cn1
(08) (P)
OHnA OHnA
(09) (R)
OHnB OHnB
(04, 05, 06) (L, T)
+5V +5V
(01, 02, 03) (M, U)
0V 0V
(N)
SHLD
Shield
Cable (when the cable length is 14 m or less)
NOTE
189
9.3.4 An A/B–phase absolute pulse coder can be connected to the Series 0 in

A/B Phase Pulse Coder either of two ways: via the relay unit of the absolute pulse coder battery
unit, or directly.
(Built–in Absolute
Pulse Coder)
D When using the relay (1) Connection between Series 0 and relay unit
unit
Series 0 (control unit) Relay unit
M35 or M185 CF1A

(MR–20RM) (MR–20RM)
01 0V 14 PCZn 01 0V 14 PCZn
08 OHnA 08 OHnA
02 0V 15 *PCZn 02 0V 15 *PCZn
09 OHnB 09 OHnB
03 0V 16 PCAn 03 0V 16 PCAn
10 Cn8 10 Cn8
04 +5V 17 *PCAn 04 +5V 17 *PCAn
11 Cn4 11 Cn4
05 +5V 18 PCBn 05 +5V 18 PCBn
12 Cn2 12 Cn2
06 +5V 19 *PCBn 06 +5V 19 *PCBn
13 Cn1 13 Cn1
07 20 REQn 07 20 REQn
Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female) Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female)
Cable connection
(14) (14)
PCZn PCZn
(15) (15)
*PCZn *PCZn
(16) (16)
PCAn PCAn
(17) (17)
*PCAn *PCAn
(18) (18)
PCBn PCBn
(19) (19)
*PCBn *PCBn
(10) (10)
Cn8 Cn8
(11) (11)
Cn4 Cn4
(12) (12)
Cn2 Cn2
(13) (13)
Cn1 Cn1
(08) (08)
OHnA OHnA
(09) (09)
OHnB OHnB
(20) (20)
REQn REQn
(04, 05, 06) (04, 05, 06)
+5V +5V
(01, 02, 03) (01, 02, 03)
0V 0V
Shield
Cable material : +5V Three or more vinyl–coated wires each having a cross–sectional area of 0.5 mm2
: 0V Three or more vinyl–coated wires each having a cross–sectional area of 0.5 mm2

190
(2) Connection between relay unit and A/B–phase pulse coder
Relay unit A/B–phase pulse coder

(built–in absolute pulse coder)
CF1B
(MR–20RM) (MS3102A–22–14P)
01 0V 14 PCZn J8n A PCAn B *PCAn C PCBn
08 OHnA
09 OHnB
03 0VA 16 PCAn G Cn1 H Cn2 J Cn4
10 Cn8
04 +5V 17 *PCAn K Cn8 L +5V M 0V
11 Cn4
05 +5V 18 PCBn N G P OHnA R OHnB
12 Cn2
06 +6VA 19 *PCBn S REQn T +6VA U 0VA
13 Cn1
07 20 REQn

Cable connection
(14) (E)
PCZn PCZn
(15) (F)
*PCZn *PCZn
(16) (A)
PCAn PCAn
(17) (B)
*PCAn *PCAn
(18) (C)
PCBn PCBn
(19) (D)
*PCBn *PCBn
(10) (K)
Cn8 Cn8
(11) (J)
Cn4 Cn4
(12) (H)
Cn2 Cn2
(13) (G)
Cn1 Cn1
(08) (P)
OHnA OHnA
(09) (R)
OHnB OHnB
(20) (S)
REQn REQn
(04, 05) (L)
+5V +5V
(01, 02) (M)
0V 0V
(06) (T)
+6VA +6VA
(03) (U)
0VA 0VA
(N)
SHLD
Shield
Cable material : +5V, 0V For each, two or more vinyl–coated wires each having a cross–sectional area of 0.5 mm2
: +6VA, 0VA For each, one or more vinyl–coated wires each having a cross–sectional area of 0.5 mm2
Recommended cable specification Straight type A06B–6050–K055 (14m)
Elbow type A06B–6050–K056 (14m)
NOTE
The total voltage resistance for +5 V and 0 V must not exceed 0.5Ω, total for both ways,
including the cable between the axis control card and the relay unit.
191
D Direct connection
Series 0 (control unit) A/B–phase pulse coder

(built–in absolute pulse coder)
M35 or M185
(MR–20RM) n: axis number (MS3102A–22–14P)
01 0V 14 PCZn J22nB A PCAn B *PCAn C PCBn
08 OHnA
09 OHnB
03 0VB 16 PCAn G Cn1 H Cn2 J Cn4
10 Cn8
04 +5V 17 *PCAn K Cn8 L +5V M 0V
11 Cn4
05 +5V 18 PCBn N SHLD P OHnA R OHnB
12 Cn2
06 +5V 19 *PCBn S REQn T +6VB U 0VB
13 Cn1
07 +6VB 20 REQn

Cable connection
(14) (E)
PCZn PCZn
(15) (F)
*PCZn *PCZn
(16) (A)
PCAn PCAn
(17) (B)
*PCAn *PCAn
(18) (C)
PCBn PCBn
(19) (D)
*PCBn *PCBn
(10) (K)
Cn8 Cn8
(11) (J)
Cn4 Cn4
(12) (H)
Cn2 Cn2
(13) (G)
Cn1 Cn1
(08) (P)
OHnA OHnA
(09) (R)
OHnB OHnB
(20) (S)
REQn REQn
(04, 05, 06) (L)
+5V +5V
(01, 02) (M)
0V 0V
(07) (T)
+6VB +6VB
(03) (U)
0VB 0VB
(N)
SHLD
Shield
Cable material : +5V, Two 0.5–mm2 wires

: +6VB One 0.5–mm2 wire
: 0V Two 0.5–mm2 wires
: 0VB One 0.5–mm2 wire
Recommended cable specification Straight type A02B–0096–K801 (14m)

Elbow type A02B–0096–K802 (14m)
NOTE
192
9.3.5
Low–Resolution A/B
Phase Separate Pulse
Coder (2000P to 3000P)
(Separate Incremental
Pulse Coder) (1) Velocity feedback connection
Series 0 (control unit) A/B–phase pulse coder

(motor built–in pulse coder)
M36 or M185
(MR–20RM) (MS3102A–20–29PW)
n: axis number
01 0V 14 J24n A PCAn B PCBn C Cn1
08 OHnA
02 0V 15 D *PCAn E *PCBn F
09 OHnB
03 0V 16 PCAn G H SHLD J +5V
10 Cn8
04 +5V 17 *PCAn K +5V L Cn4 M Cn8
11 Cn4
05 +5V 18 PCBn N 0V P Cn2 R OHnA
12 Cn2
06 +5V 19 *PCBn S OHnB T 0V
13 Cn1
07 20
Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female) Connector: MS3106B20–29SW (straight)

MS3108B20–29SW (elbow)
Cable connection
(16) (A)
PCAn PCAn
(17) (D)
*PCAn *PCAn
(18) (B)
PCBn PCBn
(19) (E)
*PCBn *PCBn
(10) (M)
Cn8 Cn8
(11) (L)
Cn4 Cn4
(12) (P)
Cn2 Cn2
(13) (C)
Cn1 Cn1
(08) (R)
OHnA OHnA
(09) (S)
OHnB OHnB
(04, 05, 06) (J, K)
+5V +5V
(01, 02, 03) (N, T)
0V 0V
(H)
SHLD
Shield
NOTE
The total voltage resistance for +5 V and 0 V must not exceed 0.5Ω, total for both ways.
193
(2) Position feedback connection
Series 0 (control unit) Low–resolution A/B–phase separate

pulse coder
M35 or M186
(MR–20RM) (MS3102A–20–29P)
n: axis number
01 0V 14 PCZn J23n A PCAn B PCBn C +5V
08
02 0V 15 *PCZn D *PCAn E *PCBn F PCZn
09
03 0V 16 PCAn G *PCZn H G J +5V
10
04 +5V 17 *PCAn K +5V L M
11
05 +5V 18 PCBn N 0V P 0V R
12
06 +5V 19 *PCBn S T 0V
13
07 20
Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female) Connector: MS3106B–20–29S or

MS3108B–20–29S
Cable connection
(14) (F)
PCZn PCZn
(15) (G)
*PCZn *PCZn
(16) (A)
PCAn PCAn
(17) (D)
*PCAn *PCAn
(18) (B)
PCBn PCBn
(19) (E)
*PCBn *PCBn
(04, 05, 06) (C, J, K)
+5V +5V
(01, 02, 03) (N, P, T)
0V 0V
(H)
G
Shield
NOTE
194
9.3.6 Connect a high–speed, high–resolution A/B–phase separate pulse coder

High–Speed, via a submicron detection board.
Phase Separate Pulse
Coder (20000P to
30000P, 24 m/min)
(Separate Incremental (1) Connection between Series 0 and submicron detection board (velocity
Pulse Coder) feedback connection)

01 0V 14 PCZn 01 0V 14 PCZn
08 OHnA 08 OHnA
02 0V 15 *PCZn 02 0V 15 *PCZn
09 OHnB 09 OHnB
03 0V 16 PCAn 03 0V 16 PCAn
10 Cn8 10 Cn8
04 +5V 17 *PCAn 04 +5V 17 *PCAn
11 Cn4 11 Cn4
05 +5V 18 PCBn 05 +5V 18 PCBn
12 Cn2 12 Cn2
06 +5V 19 *PCBn 06 +5V 19 *PCBn
13 Cn1 13 Cn1
07 20 07 20
Cable connection
(14) (14)
PCZn PCZn
(15) (15)
*PCZn *PCZn
(16) (16)
PCAn PCAn
(17) (17)
*PCAn *PCAn
(18) (18)
PCBn PCBn
(19) (19)
*PCBn *PCBn
(10) (10)
Cn8 Cn8
(11) (11)
Cn4 Cn4
(12) (12)
Cn2 Cn2
(13) (13)
Cn1 Cn1
(08) (08)
OHnA OHnA
(09) (09)
OHnB OHnB
(04, 05, 06) (04, 05, 06)
+5V +5V
(01, 02, 03) (01, 02, 03)
0V 0V
Shield
195
(2) Connection between Series 0 and submicron detection board

(position feedback connection)

01 0V 14 PCZn 01 0V 14 PCZn
08 OHnA 08 OHnA
02 0V 15 *PCZn 02 0V 15 *PCZn
09 OHnB 09 OHnB
03 0V 16 PCAn 03 0V 16 PCAn
10 10
04 +5V 17 *PCAn 04 +5V 17 *PCAn
11 11
05 +5V 18 PCBn 05 +5V 18 PCBn
12 12
06 +5V 19 *PCBn 06 +5V 19 *PCBn
13 13
07 20 07 20
Cable connection
(14) (14)
PCZn PCZn
(15) (15)
*PCZn *PCZn
(16) (16)
PCAn PCAn
(17) (17)
*PCAn *PCAn
(18) (18)
PCBn PCBn
(19) (19)
*PCBn *PCBn
(10) (10)
Cn8 Cn8
(11) (11)
Cn4 Cn4
(12) (12)
Cn2 Cn2
(13) (13)
Cn1 Cn1
(08) (08)
OHnA OHnA
(09) (09)
OHnB OHnB
(04, 05, 06) (04, 05, 06)
+5V +5V
(01, 02, 03) (01, 02, 03)
0V 0V
Shield
196
(3) Connection between submicron detection board and the motor’s

built–in pulse coder (for velocity feedback), and high–speed,
high–resolution A/B–phase separate pulse coder (for position
feedback)
Submicron detection board Motor’s built–in pulse coder (velocity feedback)

CN1 (left) (velocity feedback) High–speed, high–resolution A/B–phase sepa-
CN2 (left) (position feedback) rate pulse coder (position feedback)
(MR–20RM) (MS3102A–22–14P)
01 0V 14 PCZn A An B *An C Bn
08 OHnA
02 0V 15 *PCZn D *Bn E PCZn F *PCZn
09 OHnB
03 0V 16 An G Cn1 H Cn2 J Cn4
10 Cn8
04 +5V 17 *An K Cn8 L +5V M 0V
11 Cn4
05 +5V 18 Bn N G P OHnA R OHnB
12 Cn2
06 +5V 19 *Bn S T +5V U 0V
13 Cn1
07 20
Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female) Connector MS3106B–22–14S or

MS3108B–22–14S
Cable connection
(14) (E)
PCZn PCZn
(15) (F)
*PCZn *PCZn
(16) (A)
An An
(17) (B)
*An *An
(18) (C)
Bn Bn
(19) (D)
*Bn *Bn
(10) (K)
Cn8 Cn8
(11) (J)
Cn4 Cn4
(12) (H)
Cn2 Cn2
(13) (G)
Cn1 Cn1
(08) (P)
OHnA OHnA
(09) (R)
OHnB OHnB
(04, 05, 06) (L, T)
+5V +5V
(01, 02, 03) (M, U)
0V 0V
(N)
SHLD
Shield
When the cable length is 14 m or less
197
9.3.7
A/B Phase Separate
Pulse Coder (Separate
Absolute Pulse Coder)
D Velocity feedback The velocity feedback connection between the motor’s built–in pulse
connection coder and the Series 0 is the same as that described in Section 9.3.5.
D Position feedback An A/B–phase absolute pulse coder can be connected to the Series 0 in
connection either of two ways: via the relay unit of the absolute pulse coder battery
unit, or directly.
D When using the relay unit
(1) Connection between Series 0 and relay unit
Series 0 (control unit) Relay unit
M35 or M186 CF1A

(MR–20RM) (MR–20RM)
01 0V 14 PCZn 01 0V 14 PCZn
08 08
02 0V 15 *PCZn 02 0V 15 *PCZn
09 09
03 0V 16 PCAn 03 0V 16 PCAn
10 10
04 +5V 17 *PCAn 04 +5V 17 *PCAn
11 11
05 +5V 18 PCBn 05 +5V 18 PCBn
12 12
06 +5V 19 *PCBn 06 +5V 19 *PCBn
13 13
07 20 REQn 07 20 REQn
Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female) Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female)
Cable connection
(14) (14)
PCZn PCZn
(15) (15)
*PCZn *PCZn
(16) (16)
PCAn PCAn
(17) (17)
*PCAn *PCAn
(18) (18)
PCBn PCBn
(19) (19)
*PCBn *PCBn
(20) (20)
REQn REQn
(04, 05, 06) (04, 05, 06)
+5V +5V
(01, 02, 03) (01, 02, 03)
0V 0V
Shield
Cable material : +5V, 0V Six or more vinyl–coated wires each having a cross–sectional area of 0.5 mm2
198
(2) Connection between relay unit and A/B–phase pulse coder
Relay unit A/B–phase separate pulse coder

(separate absolute pulse coder)
CF1B
(MR–20RM) (MS3102A–22–14P)
08
09
03 0V 16 PCAn G H J
10
04 +5V 17 *PCAn K L +5V M 0V
11
05 +5V 18 PCBn N SHLD P R
12
06 +6VA 19 *PCBn S REQn T +6VA U 0VA
13
07 20 REQn
Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female) Connector: MS3106B–22–14S (straight)

MS3108B–22–14S (elbow)
Cable connection
(14) (E)
PCZn PCZn
(15) (F)
*PCZn *PCZn
(16) (A)
PCAn PCAn
(17) (B)
*PCAn *PCAn
(18) (C)
PCBn PCBn
(19) (D)
*PCBn *PCBn
(20) (S)
REQn REQn
(04, 05) (L)
+5V +5V
(01, 02) (M)
0V 0V
(06) (T)
+6VA +6VA
(03) (U)
0VA 0VA
(N)
SHLD
Shield
Cable material : +5V, 0V Two 0.5–mm2 wires

: +6VA, 0VA One 0.5–mm2 wire
: Others Unified shield twisted pair wires each having a cross–sectional area of 0.18 mm2
NOTE
The total voltage resistance for +5 V and 0 V must not exceed 0.5Ω, total for both ways,
including the cable between the axis control card and the relay unit.
199
D Direct connection
Series 0 (control unit) A/B–phase separate pulse coder

(separate absolute pulse coder)
M35 or M186
(MR–20RM) (MS3102A–22–14P)
08
09
03 0V 16 PCAn G H J
10
04 +5V 17 *PCAn K L +5V M 0V
11
05 +5V 18 PCBn N SHLD P R
12
06 +5V 19 *PCBn S REQn T +6VB U 0VB
13
07 +6VB 20 REQn
Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female) Connector: MS3106B–22–14S (straight)

MS3108B–22–14S (elbow)
Cable connection
(20) (S)
REQn REQn
(14) (E)
PCZn PCZn
(15) (F)
*PCZn *PCZn
(16) (A)
PCAn PCAn
(17) (B)
*PCAn *PCAn
(18) (C)
PCBn PCBn
(19) (D)
*PCBn *PCBn
(04, 05, 06) (L)
+5V +5V
(01, 02) (M)
0V 0V
(07) (T)
+6VB +6VB
(03) (U)
0VB 0VB
(N)
SHLD
Shield
Cable material : +6VB, 0VB One or more wires each haveing a cross–sectional area of at least 0.5 mm2
: +5V, 0V Two or more wires each haveing a cross–sectional area of at least 0.5 mm2
: REQn One or more wires each haveing a cross–sectional area of at least 0.18 mm2
Recommended cable specification A02B–0096–K801 (14m) (straight)

A02B–0096–K802 (14m) (elbow)
NOTE
200
Input signal The standard of the feedback signal from the additional detector is as
requirements shown below.
(1) A and B phase signal input
This is a method to input position information by the mutual 90 degree
phase slip of A and B phase signals.
Detection of the position is performed with the state in which the B phase
is leading taken as a shift in the plus direction, and the state in which the
A phase is leading as a shift in the minus direction.
A phase signal
Shift in plus direction
B phase signal
A phase signal
Shift in minus direction
B phase signal
(2) Phase difference and minimum repeat frequency
A
PCA/*PCA
0.5V
*PCA/PCA
B
PCB/*PCB
0.5V
*PCB/PCB
Td Td Td Td
Tp
(3) Z phase signal input

For the Z phase signal (1 rotation signal), a signal width of more than 1/4
frequency of the A phase or B phase signals is necessary.
Z phase signal
Tw
Tw 1/4 frequency of A phase or B phase
201
Time requirements Requirements for the signals at the input pins of input connectors JF21
to JF24
TD 0.28 µsec
The signals for these connectors are differential input signals with A and
B phases. An important factor is time TD from point A, when the
potential difference between PCA and *PCA exceeds 0.5V, to point B,
when the potential difference between PCB and *PCB becomes lower
than 0.5V. The minimum value of TD is 0.15 µs. The period and pulse
width of the signals must be long enough to satisfy the above
requirements.
Receiver circuit
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS, INC.: SN75115
PCA The same circuit is used
A–phase for B–phase signals
signal 110Ω
(PCB and *PCB) and
*PCA one–rotation signals
(PCZ and *PCZ).
560Ω
5V
Relationship between If the separate pulse coder rotates in the opposite direction to that of the
the direction of rotation servo motor, reconnect the interface cable of the separate pulse coder as
of the servo motor and described below.
that of the separate (1) Exchange signal PCA with signal PCB.
pulse coder (2) Exchange signal *PCA with signal *PCB.
202
9.4
SERIAL PULSE
CODER INTERFACE
9.4.1
Serial Pulse Coder A or
B
Series 0–C (control unit) Pulse coder

Axis control card for serial pulse coder
M185
(MR–20RM) (MS3102A–22–14P)
14 REQ 01 0V J23n A SD B *SD C
08
15 *REQ 02 0V D E REQ F *REQn
09
16 SD 03 0VB G H J
10
17 *SD 04 +5V K L +5V M 0V
11
18 05 +5V N SHLD P R
12
19 06 +5V S T +6VB U 0VB
13
20 07 +6VB
Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female) Connector: MS3106B–22–14S or

MS3108B–22–14S
Cable connection
(16) (A)
SD SD
(17) (B)
*SD *SD
(14) (E)
REQ REQ
(15) (F)
*REQ *REQ
(04) (L)
+5V +5V
(05)
+5V
(06)
+5V
(01) (M)
0V 0V
(02)
0V
(03) (U)
0V 0VB
(07) (T)
+6VB +6VB
(N)
SHLD
Shield These wires do not have to be connected for
an incremental pulse coder.
Cable material : +5V, 0V Two or more wires each having a cross–sectional area of at least 0.5 mm2
(when the cable length is 14 m or less)
: +6VB, 0VB One or more wires each having a cross–sectional area of at least 0.5 mm2
: SD, *SD, REQ, *REQ Twisted pair wires each having a cross–sectional area of at least 0.18 mm2
NOTE
203
9.4.2
Serial Pulse Coder C
(Model 0S or Above)
α Series Motor
(α3/3000 to α150/2000)

Axis control card for serial pulse coders
M185
(MR–20RM) (MS3102A–22–29P)
14 REQ 01 0V J23n A SD B C
08
15 *REQ 02 0V D *SD E F REQ
09
16 SD 03 0VB G *REQn H SHILD J +5V
10
17 *SD 04 +5V K +5V L M
11
18 05 +5V N 0V P R +6VB
12
19 06 +5V S 0VB T 0V U
13
20 07 +6VB V
Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female) Connector: MS3106A20–29SW or

MS3108B20–29SW
Cable connection
(16) (A)
SD SD
(17) (D)
*SD *SD
(14) (F)
REQ REQ
(15) (G)
*REQ *REQ
(04) (J)
+5V +5V
(05) (K)
+5V +5V
(06)
+5V
(01) (N)
0V 0V
(02) (T)
0V 0V
(03) (S)
0V 0VB
(07) (R)
+6VB +6VB
(H)
SHLD
NOTE
204
9.4.3
Serial Pulse Coder C
(Model 1–0S to 0–0SP)
α Series Motor
(α1/3000, α2/2000, or
α2/3000)

Axis control card for serial pulse coders
M185
(MR–20RM) 1 0V
K22 9
14 REQ 01 0V 2 0V
08 10 0VB
15 *REQ 02 0V 3 0V
09 11
16 SD 03 0V 4 SHLD
10 12 SD
17 *SD 04 +5V 5 REQ
11 13 *SD
18 05 +5V 6 *REQ
12 14 +6VB
19 06 +5V 7
13 15 +5V
20 07 +6VB 8 +5V
Connector: MR–20LFH (HONDA, 20–pin, female) Connector: HDAB–15S (Hirose Electric, D–SUB)
Connector cover: HDAW–15–CV (Hirose Electric)
Cable connection
(16) (12)
SD SD
(17) (13)
*SD *SD
(14) (5)
REQ REQ
(15) (6)
*REQ *REQ
(04) (8)
+5V +5V
(05) (15)
+5V +5V
(06)
+5V
(01) (1)
0V 0V
(02) (2)
0V 0V
(3)
0V
(03) (10)
0V 0VB
(07) (14)
+6VB +6VB
(4)
SHLD
NOTE
205
9.5 The battery unit for an absolute pulse coder can be connected to the Series
0 in either of two ways: via a relay unit or directly.
CONNECTION OF THE
BATTERY UNIT FOR
AN ABSOLUTE
PULSE CODER
9.5.1
Connection Using the
Relay Unit Connector : SMS6PK–5D28 (JAPAN FCI)
Relay unit
Battery unit
CA7
01 02 03 04 05 06
+6VB 0V
Cable connection
Relay unit Battery unit

M3
(1) terminal
+6VB +
(6)
0V –
Shield
Cable material: Shielded wire each having a cross–sectional area of

at least 0.18 mm2
Recommended cable specification: A02B–0072–K902 (4m)
NOTE
1 A single relay unit can distribute power from the battery to
up to four pulse coders.
2 A single battery unit can supply power to up to six pulse
coders.
3 Replace the battery with a new one once a year.
206
9.5.2 The battery unit can be connected directly to each axis control card, from
Connection without a which the battery power is distributed to each pulse coder.
Relay Unit Battery connector name
5th/6th axis 7th/8th axis

1st–4th axis control card
control card control card
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th

axis axis axis axis axis axis axis axis
Connector
CPA9 CPA10 CPA11
name
For the Series 0–TTC, the first and second axes for tool post 2 correspond
to the fifth and sixth axes in the above table.
Connector : SMS3PWS–5(JAPAN FCI)

(A02B–0096–K891)
Series 0 (control unit)

Battery unit
CP9, CP10, CP11
01 02 03
+6VB 0V
Cable connection
Relay unit Battery unit

M3
(1) terminal
+6VB +
(2)
0V –
Shield
Cable material: Shielded wire each having a cross–sectional area of

at least 0.18 mm2
NOTE
1 A single battery unit can supply power to up to six pulse
coders.
2 Replace the battery with a new one once a year.
207
9.6 The user can select any of the supported axes as the axes to be controlled.
A cable for a servo amplifier or motor need not be connected to those axes
HANDLING OF that are not to be used. Leaving the connector for an unused axis open,
UNUSED AXES however, causes the CNC to enter a servo alarm state. This section
(CLAMPING) describes how to handle (clamp) unused axes.
NOTE
Servo parameters must also be set for clamped axes. Set
the same servo parameters as those for any axis to be used.
9.6.1 Connect a command clamping dummy connector to the command

Handling of the connector of each unused axis (for example, M34 or M184 for the first
axis).
Command Connectors
of Unused Axes
Command clamping dummy connector
MR–20LMH
(HONDA, 20–pin, male)
(7)
*DRDYn
(12) Jumper
*MCONn
D When a type B interface A dummy connector is not necessary. Set the relevant servo parameters
is used as follows and leave the servo interface connectors open.
Set the axis ignore parameter (bit 0 of No. 8n09 : n is the axis number)
for each unused axis to 1. Set flexible feed parameters 8n84 and 8n85 to
1.
208
9.6.2 Handling varies depending on whether an series servo motor is used.

Handling of the
Feedback Connectors
of Unused Axes
D When an α series servo Connect a feedback clamping connector to the feedback connector of each
motor is not used unused axis (for example, M35 or M185 for the first axis).
Feedback clamping dummy connector
MR–20LFH
(HONDA, 20–pin, female)
(4, 5, 6)
+5V
Resistor
(16) 1/4 W, 100W
PCAn
Resistor
(18) 1/4 W, 100W
PCBn
Resistor
1/4 W, 100W
(14)
PCZn
(17)
*PCAn
(19)
*PCBn
(15)
*PCZn
(1, 2, 3)
0V
(8)
OH1n
(9)
OH2n
The above example sets PCAn, PCBn, and PCZn to high and
*PCAn, *PCBn, and *PCZn to low. The reverse connection is
also allowed: PCAn, PCBn, and PCZn to low and *PCAn,
*PCBn, and *PCZn to high.
D When an α series servo A dummy connector is not necessary. Set the relevant servo parameters
motor is used as follows and leave the feedback connectors open.
Set the axis ignore parameter (bit 0 of No. 8n09: n is the axis number)
for each unused axis to 1. Set flexible feed gear parameters 8n84 and 8n85
to 1.
D When a type B interface A dummy connector is not necessary.

is used
209
9.7 This section describes the supported combinations of axis cards for serial
pulse coders and digital servo functions.
COMBINATION OF
AXIS CARDS FOR
SERIAL PULSE
CODERS AND
DIGITAL SERVO
FUNCTIONS
Name Order specification (PC board drawing number) Digital servo function
1st/2nd axis printed circuit board A02B–0098–H045 (A16B–2200–0391)
3rd/4th axis printed circuit board A02B–0098–H046 (A16B–2200–0390)
5th/6th axis printed circuit board A02B–0098–J030 (A16B–2200–0800)
5th/6th axis printed circuit board A02B–0098–J033 (A16B–2200–0800) 9046 9040 9030
(for 0–TTC)
7th axis printed circuit board A02B–0098–J199 (A16B–2200–0791)
7th/8th axis printed circuit board A02B–0098–J198 (A16B–2200–0790)
(1)
(2)
(3)
<Combination of axis cards for serial pulse coders and digital servo
function series 9046 (1)>
Use this combination when using an AC servo motor α series as the servo
motor. A motor of the AC servo motor α series cannot be used together
with a motor of another series.
Use this combination when using other than an AC servo motor α series
as the servo motor. This combination does not, however, apply to those
motors listed in (3) below. Serial pulse coders and A/B–phase pulse
coders can be used together, provided the motors are used in a valid
configuration.
Use this combination when using any of the following motors as the servo
motor. These motors cannot be used together with those for serial pulse
coders, or with α series motors.
Motor model 2–0 1–0 0 5 10 30 6L(A06B–0563–BXXX)
Motor No. 6 7 8 9 10 13 17
210
B–61393E/06 10. ANALOG INTERFACE CARD
10 ANALOG INTERFACE CARD
211
10. ANALOG INTERFACE CARD B–61393E/06
10.1 This describes the connecting with the analog interface card. It is possible
to connect 4 analog input channels, 2 spindles and 1 position coder.
OUTLINE
Series 0–C
L/A
±15V power cable
CPB1 (connection to FANUC)
CPA6
Analog interface PCB
Rear: First M121

Second M122
Interface connector
Front: First M123

Second M124
M121: Command voltage output for spindles 1 & 2
M122: Command voltage output for spindle 2
M123: Analog voltage or current 4 channel input
M124: Position coder signal input
212
10.2
ANALOG INPUT Item Specification
SPECIFICATIONS Number of inputs 4
Analog of input DC *10 to +10 V(Input resistance 1MΩ

DC *20 to+20 mA(Input resistance 250Ω)
Selection possible to use
Digital output 12 bit binary 2 complement expression
Input/output response
Analog input Digital output
+10 V +2000
+5 V or +20 mA +1000
0 V or 0 mA 0
–5 V or –20 mA –1000
–10 V –2000
Resolution ability 5 mV, 20µA
Total heat Under "0.5%
Response time Note1) Under 1 mS
Maximum input "15 V, "40 mA

voltage/current
Insulation Noninsulated
External connection method Connector
NOTE
This response time is the delay time of the card only. The
actual response time will be the value derived from adding
the scan time decided by the system configuration to the
above described value.
213
10.3
INSTALLATION
POSITION
214
10.4
CONNECTION
BETWEEN
MACHINES
M121 : MR20RFD
1 14
8
2 15
9
3 16
10 For spindle 1, 2
4 17
11
5 V02 18 0V
12
6 19
13
7 V01 20 0V
M122 : MR20RFD
1 14
8
2 15
9
3 16
10 For spindle 2
4 17
11
5 18
12
6 19
13
7 V02 20 0V
M123 : MR20RFD
1 VP1 14 IP1
8 COM1
2 VP2 15 IP2
9 COM2
3 VP3 16 IP3
10 COM3 For analog input
4 VP4 17 IP4
11 COM4
5 18
12
6 19
13
7 20
M124 : MR20RMD
1 0V 14 PCZ
8
2 0V 15 *PCZ
9
3 16
0V PCA
10 For position code
4 +5V 17 *PCA
11
5 +5V 18 PCB
12
6 +5V 19 *PCB
13
7 20
215
Spindle 1
ÁÁ
DV1
ÁÁ
V01 M121(7)
ÁÁ
0V M121(20)
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
0V M121(18)
Spindle 2
DV2
V02 M122(7)
0V M122(20)
ÁÁ
DV1, DV2 : MAX.±10V, 2mA
Zout 100W
ÁÁ
Position coder
RV
PCZ
*PCZ
M124(14)
M124(15) ÁÁ
ÁÁ
RV
PCA M124(16) ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
*PCA M124(17)
RV
PCB M124(18) ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
*PCB M124(19)
+5V
ÁÁ
+5V M124
(4, 5, 6)
0V M124 ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
(1, 2, 3)
NOTE
It is possible to make the connection cables for spindles 1 and 2 into one cable by including
the spindle 1 connection cable so as to destroy the spindle 2 connection cable.
216
Analog input connection

diagram
M123
Analog input card
Voltage input
VP1 1 Channel #0
0 to
10V 1MW
IP1 14
COM1 8 1MW
250W
VP2 2 Channel #1
1MW
15
IP2
COM2 9 1MW
Multi–plexer AMP A/D
250W Converter
Voltage input
VP3 3 Channel #2
0 to
20mA
IP3 1MW
16
Note COM3 10 1MW
250W
VP4 4 Channel #3
Be certain to compress
VPn–IPn at voltage input.
1MW
17
IP4
COM4 11 1MW
250W
ÁÁ
Connect to the earth plate of the magnetics
ÁÁ
cabinet.
NOTE
Use a 2 core pair shield cable for the connection cable.
217
11. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC2 INTERFACE) B–61393E/06
11 REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (INCLUDING

FANUC DNC2 INTERFACE)
218
B–61393E/06 (INCLUDING FANUC DNC2 INTERFACE)
11.1 The remote buffer is an optional function used to supply a large amount
of data to the CNC continuously and at high speed. The remote buffer is
OUTLINE connected to the host computer or an input/output device via a serial
interface.
Table 11.1 (a) lists the types of remote buffer printed circuit boards. Three
types are available, according to their location in the control unit.
Table 11.1 (a) Types of remote buffer printed circuit boards
Type Name Remarks Connection slot
A SUB CPU card Included in the multiaxis SUB

card. The fifth and sixth
axes can be controlled as
PMC axes.
Remote buffer card The fifth and sixth axes

for control unit B cannot be connected.
B Remote buffer card Can also be used for the Expansion connec-
for control unit A DNC2 interface. tor JA1 or JA2
C Remote buffer card Can also be used for the SP

for control unit B DNC2 interface.
Some remote buffer cards can also be used for the FANUC DNC2
interface. FANUC DNC2 is a communication protocol which enables the
exchange of a wide range of data between the CNC and a personal
computer which is connected to the CNC via the RS–232C interface. Its
hardware connection is the same as that for the remote buffer. For its
specifications and other information, refer to the FANUC DNC2
Descriptions (B–61992).
Table 11.1 (b) lists three remote buffer software functions.
219
Table 11.1 (b) Software functions of remote buffer

High–speed High–speed
Remote buffer
remote buffer A remote buffer B
Protocol A Available Available Available
Extended protocol A Available Available Available
Protocol B Available Available Available
Data format NC format data Binary data NC format data
RS–232–C
Interface RS–422 RS–422
or RS–422
RS–232–C baud rate 50 bps to 19.2 kbps
RS–422 baud rate 50 bps to 76.8 kbps 50 bps to 76.8 kbps 50 bps to 768 kbps
For RS–232–C
100m (4800 bps max.)
50m (9600 bps min.)
Maximum cable length
For RS–422 For RS–422 For RS–422
800m (9600 bps max.) 800m (9600 bps max.) 800m (9600 bps max.)
50m (19.2 kbps min.) 50m (19.2 kbps min.) 50m (19.2 kbps min.)
Maximum machining speed

Same as the speed when
(for execution of 1–mm con- 15m/min 12m/min
using memory
tinuous block commands)
NOTE
1 Protocol A is the handshake system that repeats data transfer between two communicating
devices.
2 Extended protocol A is almost the same system as protocol A except that it can transfer the NC
program at high speed.
3 Protocol B is the system that controls communication between two devices by control codes
output from the remote buffer.
220
11.2
INSTALLING TO THE
P.C. BOARD
11.2.1 As shown in the figure below, install the remote buffer card into the left
Installing to the P.C. side of the master printed circuit board. The (A02B–0098–K121) flat
metal bracket for the remote buffer card (A02B–0098–K121) contains the
Board in Case of two flat cables and bracket.
Control Unit A
Remote buffer card
JB2
JB1
JA2 JA1
Master printed circuit

board
11.2.2 Install the remote buffer card to the slot SP (CS1) according to above
Installing to the P.C. mentioned Table 11.1 (a).
Board in Case of
Control Unit B
221
11.3
OUTLINE DRAWING
11.3.1 The following illustration is an outline drawing for installing the remote
Outline Drawing in buffer card into controller A.
Case of Control Unit A
Remote buffer card
for 6–M5
Installation hole
222
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC2 INTERFACE)
Slot SUB
Slot SP
223
Case of Control Unit B
Outline Drawing in
Remote buffer card for control

unit B (Type C)
(Remote buffer) Remote buffer card for control
unit B (Type A) or SUB CPU card
B–61393E/06
11.3.2
11.4
REMOTE BUFFER
INTERFACE
(RS–232–C)
Remote buffer card Host computer (ex)
M77:MR20MH HONDA TSUSHIN

MR20FH DBM–25S
1 14
8 RD 1 FG
2 15 14
9 SD 2 SD
3 16 CD 15
10 3 RD
4 17 ER 16
11 4 RS
5 18 DR 17
12 5 CS
6 19 CS 18
13 6 DR
7 SG 20 RS JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONICS 19
Connector:DB–25P 7 SG
20 ER
Cover:DB–C2–J9 8 CD
21
9
22
10
23
11
24
12
25
13
Conceptional diagram of signal connection
CNC side Host side

output SD SD
Input
RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
ER ER
DR DR
CD CD
SG SG
FG
NOTE
When using the FANUC DNC2 interface with an IBM PC–AT as the host computer, the host
computer negates its RS (to low) upon transition to the reception phase. In this case, therefore,
CS on the CNC side must be connected to ER on the CNC side.
224
Cable wiring
8 2
RD SD
18 20
DR ER
19 4
CS RS
16 8
CD CD
9 3
SD RD
17 6
ER DR
20 5
RS CS
7 7
SG SG
1
FG
Shield
Connect CS to RS if CS is not used. However, when protocol A or

expanded protocol A is used, connect as shown above because CS is used
for busy control. Connect DR to ER when DR is not used. Be sure to
connect CD to ER.
The M77 connector is also used for the RS–422 interface. Those pins for
which nothing is indicated in the connector table must be left open.
225
11.5
REMOTE BUFFER
INTERFACE (RS–422)
Remote buffer card Host computer (Ex.)
M73:MR20MH HONDA TSUSHIN 1 FG

1 SD 14 CS MR20FH 20
8 TT 2
2 *SD 15 *CS 21
9 *TT 3
3 TR(ER) 16 22 *SD
10 RD 4 SD
4 *TR(*ER) 17 23
11 *RD 5
5 RS 18 RT 24 *RD
12 DM(DR) 6 RD
6 *RS 19 *RT 25 *RS
13 *DM(*DR) 7 RS
7 SG 20 26 *RT
8 RT
JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONICS 27 *CS
9 CS
M77:MR20MH Connector:DC–37–P 28
Cover:DC–C1–J16 10
29 *DM
1 SD 14 CS 11 DM
8 30 *TR
2 *SD 15 *CS 12 TR
9 31
3 TR(ER) 16 13
10 RD 32
4 *TR(*ER) 17 14
11 *RD 33
5 RS 18 15
12 DM(DR) 34
6 *RS 19 16
13 *DM(*DR) 35 *TT
7 SG 20 17 TT
36
18
37
19 SG
Conceptional diagram of The figure below shows a signal connection between CNC and host
signal connection computer. Since signals other than FG and SG perform differential signal
transmission standard RS–422, two wires of signal lines are used for those
signals.
Conceptional diagram of signal connection
CNC side Host side

Output SD SD
Input
RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
TR TR
DM DM
TT TT
RT RT
SG SG
FG
226
Actual example of
RS–422 signal wiring
Cable wiring
10 4
RD SD
11 22
*RD *SD
18 17
RT TT
19 35
*RT *TT
14 7
CS RS
15 25
*CS *RS
12 12
DM TR
13 30
*DM *TR
7 19
SG SG
1 6
SD RD
2 24
*SD *RD
8 8
TT RT
9 26
*TT *RT
5 9
RS CS
6 27
*RS *CS
3 11
TR DM
4 29
*TR *DM
1
FG
Shield
NOTE
1 Be sure to use twisted pair cable.
2 The connection of TT, *TT, RT, and *RT is required only
when an external clock is used.
3 When using an external clock, connect the cable to the M73
connector. Either the M73 or M77 connector can be used
if an external clock is not used.
4 The M77 connector is also used for the RS–232C interface.
Those pins for which nothing is indicated in the connector
table must be left open.
227
D Description of RS–422
interface signals
Signal name RS–422 circuit No. Input/output Description
SD 103 Output Transmitted data
RD 104 Input Received data
RS 105 Output Request to send

The remote buffer uses this signal to post reception en-
abled status. The remote buffer can receive data while
both this signal and the TR signal are set to ON.
CS 106 Input Clear to send

This signal is used to check whether the host computer is
busy. The remote buffer assumes that the host computer
can receive data if both this signal and the DM signal are
set to ON.
TR 108.2 Output Terminal ready

This signal, if set to ON, indicates that the remote buffer
is ready for operation. In other words, the SD signal is val-
id only while this signal is set to ON.
RR 109 Input Receiver ready

This signal, if set to ON, indicates that the host computer
can transmit data to the remote buffer. When this signal
is not used, always connect it to the TR signal on the re-
mote buffer.
TT 113 Output Transmission timing

The transmission clock for the remote buffer is output us-
ing this signal. When a baud rate of 38400 or higher is
used, always connect this signal to the RT signal on the
host computer.
RT 115 Input Reception timing

The reception clock for the remote buffer is input using this
signal. When a baud rate of 38400 or higher is used, al-
ways connect this signal to the TT signal on the host com-
puter.
SG 102 Signal ground
FG 101 Protective ground
NOTE
The ON and OFF states of the signals are defined as follows:
A< B A> B
Function OFF ON
Signal Condition Marking Spacing
Å ÅÅ
A
Driver Receiver
B
B
228
11.6 The remote buffer of type A is required to connect to a buttery unit.

CONNECTION TO
BATTERY UNIT
Japan FCI
SMS3PWS-5 Battery unit
Remote buffer
CPA8
M4 screw terminal
1 2 3 +
0V 4.5V 4.5V 0V
Connect the remote buffer to the battery unit on the memory printed
circuit board, using the supplied cable.
NOTE
The terminal block on the battery unit uses screw terminals.
To connect the battery cable for the remote buffer to these
terminals, first disconnect the battery cable for the memory
printed circuit board or other components, with the CNC
power turned on. Disconnecting the battery cable while the
CNC power is turned off will result in the loss of the data,
such as memories, stored on the remote buffer.
229
12. DNC1 INTERFACE B–61393E/06
12 DNC1 INTERFACE
230
B–61393E/06 12. DNC1 INTERFACE
12.1 DNC1 is a high speed network developed independently by FANUC that

combines cell levels. This manual gives hardware details regarding
OUTLINE connection etc., when using the FS0–C DNC1 function. This function
should be used with reference to the explanations given below.
Name Drawing number
FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS B–61782E
12.2
ORDER Name Order specification Remarks
SPECIFICATIONS Tap (Connector box for A13B–0156–C100 Set the necessary num-
cable divergence) ber.
Terminal resistor unit A13B–0156–C200 A total of 2 resistors

necessary for the whole
system.
CAUTION
When mounting the DNC1 card on control unit A, check
whether the FANUC Series 0–C uses a 16–bit or 32–bit
master PC board.
Avoid connecting a 16–bit DNC1 card to a 32–bit master PC
board, or a 32–bit DNC1 card to 16–bit master PC board.
If the control unit is tuned on while the wrong DNC1 card is
connected to the master PC board, a short circuit will occur
in the control unit. The control unit will be damaged.
NOTE
Select an appropriate power supply, referring to Chapter 5,
“Power Supply Unit.”
231
12.3
EXTERNAL
CONFIGURATION OF
MOUNTING
12.3.1
External Configuration
of Mounting for Control
Section A
DNC1 card
port
installation
6–M5
232
12.3.2
External Configuration
of Mounting for Control
Section B installation port DNC1 card
4–M5
233
12.4
PRINTED BOARD
MOUNTING
12.4.1 Install the DNC1 card on the left–hand side of the master printed circuit
Printed Circuit Board board, as illustrated below. Two plait cables and sheet metal are included
in control section A assembly sheet metal (A02B–0098–K121).
Mounting for Control
Section A
DNC1 card
JB2
JB1
JA2 JA1
Master printed board
12.4.2 Connect the DNC1 card to master printed circuit board connector SP
Printed Circuit Board (CS1).
Mounting for Control
Section B
234
12.5
CONNECTION
DRAWING
12.5.1
Overall Connection
Example for Mode 1
(Multi–point)
Terminal resistor unit 1
Tap 1
1
Primary station
FD–Mate
K1
CD3 2
K2
3
No.1 Secondary
station
K3 FS0–C
CD 3
Tap 2
K2
3
No.2 Secondary
station
K3 FS0–C
CD 3
Tap 3
K2
3
No.3 Secondary
station
K3 FS0–C
CD 3
Tap 4
Terminal resistor unit2
235
NOTE
1 As shown in the drawing, the number of taps necessary accord with the number of stations.
2 Connectors 1, 2 and 3 in any one tap have the same interface and therefore it does not matter
where the connection is made.
3 As shown in the drawing, a terminal resistor unit is necessary at both ends of the tap of the whole
system.
4 Signal wiring for cables K2, K3 is the same but differs for cable K1.
Refer to the next page. Note however that the maximum wiring length for K2 and K3 are
different.
Refer to FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS B–61782E.
12.5.2
Detailed Drawing of
Connector for Mode 1
(Multi–point)
D Primary station printed
circuit board side
connector (CD3) MR–20RMD (MALE)
14 01 TRD1(+)
08
15 02 TRD1()
09
16 03
10 TRD2(+)
17 04
11 TRD2()
18 05
12
19 06
13
20 07 SG
D Secondary staion printed

circuit board side
connector (CD3) MR–20RMD (MALE)
D Tap connector 01
14 TRD2(+)
(1, 2, 3)
08
15 02 TRD2()
09
16 03
10 TRD1(+)
17 04
11 TRD1()
18 05
12
19 06
13
20 07 SG
236
12.5.3
Detailed Drawing of
Connection Cable for
Mode 1 (Multi–point)
Primary station side Tap side
Detailed drawing of cable K1
H20.F H20.F
TRD1 (+) (01) (01) TRD2 (+)

TRD1 (–) (02) (02) TRD2 (–)
TRD2 (+) (10) (10) TRD1 (+)
TRD2 (–) (11) (11) TRD1 (–)
SG (07) (07) SG
Twist pair tied shield wire (A66L–0001–0041 or equivalent)

wire rod : more than 0.3mm3
Tap side Tap side or secondary station
H20.F Detailed drawing of cable K2 and K3 H20.F
TRD2 (+) (01) (01) TRD2 (+)

TRD2 (–) (02) (02) TRD2 (–)
TRD1 (+) (10) (10) TRD1 (+)
TRD1 (–) (11) (11) TRD1 (–)
SG (07) (07) SG

wire rod : more than 0.3mm3
Connect an earth wire more than 5.5m2 between the control apparatuses
that are connected by the DNC1 signal cable.
237
12.5.4
Overall Connection
Example for Mode 2
(Point–to–point)
Tap 1
1
Station
FD–Mate
K4
CD3 2
K5
3
Station
FS0–C
K6
CD 3
Tap 2
NOTE
1 As shown in the drawing, the number of taps necessary accord with the number of stations.
2 Connectors 1, 2 and 3 in any one tap have the same interface and therefore it does not matter
where the connection is made.
3 As shown in the drawing, a terminal resistor unit is necessary at both ends of the tap of the
station.
4 Signal wiring for cables K5, K6 is the same but differs for cable K4.
Refer to the 12.5.6. Note however that the maximum wiring length for K5 and K6 are different.
Refer to FANUC DNC1 DESCRIPTIONS B–61782E.
238
12.5.5
Detailed Drawing of
Connector for Mode 2
D Station printed circuit
board side connector
(CD3) MR–20RMD (MALE)
D Tap connector (1, 2, 3)

14 CS 01 SD
08 TT
15 *CS 02
*SD
09 *TT
16 03 ER
10 RD
17 04 *ER
11 *RD
18 RT 05 RS
12 DM
19 *RT 06 *RS
13 *DM
20 07 SG
239
12.5.6
Detailed Drawing of
Connection Cable for
Mode 2
Station side Tap side

Detailed drawing of cable K4
H20.F H20.F
SD (01) (01) SD
*SD (02) (02) *SD
RD (10) (10) RD
*RD (11) (11) *RD
TT (08) (08) TT
*TT (09) (09) *TT
RT (18) (18) RT
*RT (19) (19) *RT
RS (05) (05) RS
*RS (06) (06) *RS
CS (14) (14) CS
*CS (15) (15) *CS
DM (12) (12) DM
*DM (13) (13) *DM
TR (03) (03) TR
*TR (04) (04) *TR
SG (07) (07) SG

Wire rod : more than 0.3mm2
240
Tap side Tap or station side

Detailed drawing of cable K5 and K6
H20.F H20.F
SD (01) (01) SD
*SD (02) (02) *SD
RD (10) (10) RD
*RD (11) (11) *RD
TT (08) (08) TT
*TT (09) (09) *TT
RT (18) (18) RT
*RT (19) (19) *RT
RS (05) (05) RS
*RS (06) (06) *RS
CS (14) (14) CS
*CS (15) (15) *CS
DM (12) (12) DM
*DM (13) (13) *DM
TR (03) (03) TR
*TR (04) (04) *TR
SG (07) (07) SG

Wire rod : more than 0.3mm2
NOTE
Connect an earth wire more than 5.5m2 between the control apparatuses that are connected
by the DNC1 signal cable.
241
12.6 As a rule, use standard products regarding necessary taps and terminal
resistor units when constructing DNC1 communications circuits.
EXTERNAL
CONFIGURATION OF
TAP AND TERMINAL
RESISTOR UNIT
D Tap (A13B–0156–C100) A divergence connector box to draw together branch wires in order to
connect the DNC1 main line with the communication nodes.
50
25 25
5 5
65
5 32.5
1 2 3
100
35
120
Fig. 12.6 (a) Tap external configuration
D Terminal resistor unit Connect a terminal resistor unit at both ends of the main line to
(A13B–0156–C200) compensate for DNC1 transmission characteristics. Consequently 2
terminal resistor units are necessary for each main line circuit.
39.3 16.0
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
47.0
Fig. 12.6 (b) Terminal resistor unit external configuration
242
B–61393E/06 13. Series 0–TTC SYSTEM
13 Series 0–TTC SYSTEM
243
13. Series 0–TTC SYSTEM B–61393E/06
13.1 The Series 0–TTC is a CNC which can control two paths. It has been
designed for use with lathes which operate two tool posts independently
OUTLINE and which cut a workpiece by simultaneously using the two tool posts.
One of the two paths is controlled with the same system configuration as
that of the 0–TC. The other path is controlled by an added multiaxis card.
Here, the former path is referred to as tool post 1 or the main path, while
the latter path is referred to as tool post 2 or the subpath.
Basically, the main path controls the axes connected to the 1st to 4th axis
printed circuit board and the analog or serial spindle connected to the
memory printed circuit board. The subpath controls the axes connected
to the 5th/6th axis printed circuit board and the analog or serial spindle.
13.2 The Series 0–TTC requires the following hardware and software:
RESTRICTIONS (1) PMC–M printed circuit board
(2) PMC–M function (software)
(3) Power supply unit B2 or C, or power supply unit AI, qualifying for CE
marking
The following restrictions are imposed on the Series 0–TTC:
(1) No more than eight pulse coders can be used (including separate pulse
coders).
(2) The part program storage length is restricted to 320 m for each of the
main path and subpath.
(3) Conversational input is not supported for graphics.
244
B–61393E/06 13. Series 0–TTC SYSTEM
13.3 The connection of the Series 0–TTC is basically the same as that of the
Series 0–TC with a multiaxis card.
CONNECTION
To connect the spindle for tool post 2, use the M28 connector for an analog
spindle, or the COP6 connector for a serial spindle. The connection
interface is the same as that for tool post 1. To connect the spindle position
coder for tool post 2, use the M29 connector. These connectors are located
on the 5th/6th axis control printed circuit board. If the second position
coder is not used, however, connect the first position coder to the M29
connector, and also to the M27 connector on the memory printed circuit
board, in parallel.
In addition, eight input signals from the machine are used for the Series
0–TTC. Use the M28 connector for these signals. This connector is also
used for the velocity command for the analog spindle.
M28 (MR–20RFD)
01 0V 14 XAES
08 ZAES
02 15 +MIT1S
0V
09 –MIT1S
03 0V 16 +MIT2S
10 –MIT2S
04 COMS 17 *+LZS
11 SKIPS
05 18
12
06 19
13
07 SVCS 20 0V
245
13. Series 0–TTC SYSTEM B–61393E/06
Control unit
Multiaxis card (5th/6th axis PCB)
Bit No.
Terminal No. Address No.
Filter and level
Automatic tool compensation conversion circuit
signal (X2–axis)
Resistor
Automatic tool compensation

signal (Z2–axis)
Tool compensation measurement

direct input B signal/axis–specific
interlock signal (X2–axis)

interlock signal (X2–axis)

interlock signal (Z2–axis)

interlock signal (Z2–axis)
Z2–axis positive direction

overtravel signal
Skip signal
All the above signals are used for tool post 2.

Use the built–in I/O card for the signals for tool post 1.
All the above signals are classified as sink–type direct input signal B.
For 24 V and 0 V, those output from the connector of the CNC built–in I/O card can also be used.
246
B–61393E/06 14. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
14 EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
Using the emergency stop signal effectively enables the design of safe
WARNING machine tools.
The emergency stop signal is provided to bring a machine tool to an
emergency stop. It is input to the CNC controller, servo amplifier, and
spindle amplifier. An emergency stop signal is usually generated by
closing the B contact of a pushbutton switch.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is closed, the CNC
controller enters the emergency stop released state, such that the servo and
spindle motors can be controlled and operated.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact opens, the CNC
controller is reset and enters the emergency stop state, and the servo and
spindle motors are decelerated to a stop.
Shutting off the servo amplifier power causes a dynamic brake to be
applied to the servo motor. Even when a dynamic brake is applied,
however, a servo motor attached to a vertical axis can move under the
force of gravity. To overcome this problem, use a servo motor with a
brake.
While the spindle motor is running, shutting off the motor–driving power
to the spindle amplifier allows the spindle motor to continue running
under its own inertia, which is quite dangerous. When the emergency stop
signal (*ESP) contact opens, it is necessary to confirm that the spindle
motor has been decelerated to a stop, before the spindle motor power is
shut off.
The FANUC control amplifier α series products are designed to satisfy
the above requirements. The emergency stop signal should be input to the
power supply module (called the PSM). The PSM outputs a motor power
MCC control signal, which can be used to switch the power applied to the
power supply module on and off.
The CNC controller is designed to detect overtravel by using a software
limit function. Normally, no hardware limit switch is required to detect
overtravel. If the machine goes beyond a software limit because of a servo
feedback failure, however, it is necessary to provide a stroke end limit
switch, connected so that the emergency stop signal can be used to stop
the machine.
Fig. 10 shows an example showing how to use the emergency stop signal
with this CNC controller and α series control amplifier.
247
14. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL B–61393E/06
Stroke end limit switch Emergency

stop button
+X –X +Y –Y +Z –Z +4 –4
Relay
power
Release switch
Spark killer
SK
EMG
Relay
CNC control unit
emg1
+24
*ESP
α series control amplifier SVM

(PSM) SPM
emg2
+24
*ESP
MCCOFF3
MCCOFF4
External power source
L1 L2 L3
Spark killer
SK
3φ
Coil
200VAC
L1
L2
L3
Circuit breaker 1 MCC AC reactor
Fig. 14
WARNING
To use a spindle motor and amplifier produced by a
manufacturer other than FANUC, refer to the corresponding
documentation as well as this manual. Design the
emergency stop sequence such that, if the emergency stop
signal contact opens while the spindle motor is rotating, the
spindle motor is decelerated until it stops.
248
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX VARIOUS UNITS
A EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF VARIOUS UNITS
251
VARIOUS UNITS APPENDIX B–61393E/06
A.1
UNITS OF CNC
Name of dimensions Specifications
Fig. U1 (a) Control unit (Control unit A)
Fig. U1 (b) Control unit (Control unit B)
Color MDI Key
Fig. U2 (a) 9″CRT/MDI unit Monochrome Small English T series A02B–0091–C041, C042
Monochrome Small English M series A02B–0098–C041, C042
Monochrome Small English T series A02B–0098–C045#TAR
Monochrome Small English T series A02B–0098–C045#TBR
Monochrome Small English M series A02B–0098–C045#MAR
Monochrome Small English M series A02B–0098–C045#MBR
Monochrome Small Symbolic T series A02B–0098–C046#TAR
Monochrome Small Symbolic T series A02B–0098–C046#TBR
Monochrome Small Symbolic M series A02B–0098–C046#MAR
Monochrome Small Symbolic M series A02B–0098–C046#MBR
Fig. U2 (b) 9″CRT/MDI unit Monochrome Full key English T series A02B–0091–C052
Monochrome Full key English M series A02B–0092–C052
Monochrome Full key English T series A02B–0098–C055#TAR
Monochrome Full key English T series A02B–0098–C055#TBR
Monochrome Full key English M series A02B–0098–C055#MAR
Monochrome Full key English M series A02B–0098–C055#MBR
Monochrome Full key Symbolic T series A02B–0098–C056#TAR
Monochrome Full key Symbolic T series A02B–0098–C056#TBR
Monochrome Full key Symbolic M series A02B–0098–C056#MAR
Monochrome Full key Symbolic M series A02B–0098–C056#MBR
Fig. U2 (c) 9″CRT/MDI unit Monochrome Small English 0–PD A02B–0099–C094#PBR
Fig. U2 (d) 9″CRT/MDI unit Color Small English T series A02B–0098–C104

Color Small English M series A02B–0099–C104
Fig. U2 (e) 9″CRT/MDI unit Color Full key English T series A02B–0098–C084
Color Full key English M series A02B–0099–C084
Fig. U2 (f) 14″CRT/MDI unit Color Full key English M series A02B–0092–C200
Fig. U2 (g) Color Full key English M series A02B–0098–C210#MBR
Color Full key Symbolic M series A02B–0098–C211#MBR
Fig. U2 (h) EL/MDI unit Monochrome Small English T series A02B–0091–C062

Monochrome Small English M series A02B–0092–C062
Fig. U2 (i) PDP/MDI unit Monochrome Small English T series A02B–0098–C065

200VAC input type Monochrome Small English M series A02B–0099–C065
Fig. U2 (j) PDP/MDI unit Monochrome Small English T series A02B–0098–C068#TBR

24VDC input type Monochrome SmalI English M series A02B–0098–C068#MBR
Monochrome Small Symbolic T series A02B–0098–C069#TBR
Monochrome Small Symbolic M series A02B–0098–C069#MBR
Fig. U2 (k) PDP/MDI unit Monochrome Full key English T series A02B–0098–C075
200VAC input type Monochrome Full key English M series A02B–0099–C075
Fig. U2 (l) PDP/MDI unit Monochrome Full key English T series A02B–0098–C078#TBR
24VDC input type Monochrome Full key English M series A02B–0098–C078#MBR
Monochrome Full key Symbolic T series A02B–0098–C079#TBR
Monochrome Full key Symbolic M series A02B–0098–C079#MBR
252
Color MDI Key Function
Fig. U2 (m) 7.2″LCD/MDI unit Monochrome Small English T series A02B–0098–C091#TBR

Monochrome Small English M series A02B–0098–C091#MBR
Monochrome Small Symbolic T series A02B–0098–C091#TBS
Monochrome Small Symbolic M series A02B–0098–C091#MBS
Fig. U2 (n) 7.2″LCD/MDI unit Monochrome Full key English T series A02B–0098–C092#TBR
Monochrome Full key English M series A02B–0098–C092#MBR
Monochrome Full key Symbolic T series A02B–0098–C092#TBS
Monochrome Full key Symbolic M series A02B–0098–C092#MBS
Fig. U2 (o) Detachable Monochrome Small English T series A02B–0098–C121, C122

9″CRT/MDI unit Monochrome Small English M series A02B–0099–C121, C122
Fig. U3 (a) Separate type Monochrome — — Common A02B–0098–C131, C132

9″CRT unit
Fig. U3 (b) Separate type Color Common A02B–0099–C135

9″CRT unit
Fig. U3 (c) Separate type Monochrome — — Common A02B–0091–C138

EL unit
Fig. U3 (d) Separate type Monochrome — — Common A02B–0098–C135

PDP unit
200VAC input type
Fig. U3 (e) Separate type Monochrome — — Common A02B–0098–C136

PDP unit
24VDC input type
Fig. U3 (f) Separate type Monochrome — — Common A02B–0098–C093

7.2″LCD unit
Fig. U3 (g) Separate type Color — — Common A02B–0098–C098

8.4″LCD unit Color — — M series A02B–0098–C099
Fig. U3 (h) Separate type Color — — Common A02B–0098–C088

8.4″ LCD unit Color M series A02B–0098–C089
Fig. U4 (a) Separate type — Small English T series A02B–0091–C133

MDI unit — Small English T series A02B–0098–C145#TAR
Small Symbolic T series A02B–0098–C145#TB
—
Small English M series A02B–0092–C133
— Small English M series A02B–0098–C145#MAR
— Small Symbolic M series A02B–0098–C145#MB
—
Fig. U4 (b) Separate type — Full key English T series A02B–0091–C135

MDI unit — Full key English T series A02B–0098–C146#TAR
Full key Symbolic T series A02B–0098–C146#TB
—
Full key English M series A02B–0092–C135
— Full key English M series A02B–0098–C146#MAR
— Full key Symbolic M series A02B–0098–C146#MB
Full key Englich M series A02B–0098–C147#MAR
—
Full key Symbolic M series A02B–0098–C147#MB
—
—
Fig. U5 (a) Manual pulse generator A860–0201–T001
253
Fig. U5 (b) Manual pulse generator (Thin type) A860–0202–T001
Fig. U5 (c) Pendant type manual pulse generator A860–0202–T004 to T015
Fig. U6 Punch panel A02B–0072–C061 to C069
Fig. U7 (a) Position coder (Max.4000 rpm) A86L–0027–0001#102

(Max.6000 rpm) A86L–0027–0001#002
Fig. U7 (b) α series position coder (Max.10000 rpm) A860–0309–T302
Fig. U8 (a) Battery unit for NC
Fig. U8 (b) Power supply battery case for absolute pulse coder A06B–6050–K060
Fig. U9 (a) Additional I/O B2 A20B–1001–0731

Additional I/O F1 (DO common output type) A20B–1002–0310
Fig. U9 (b) Additional I/O B3 (Corresponding to I/O link) A20B–1004–0500

Additional I/O F3 (Corresponding to I/O link and DO common output) A20B–2001–0880
Fig. U10 Transformer of control unit forshipment A80L–0001–0176
Fig. U11 Input unit A2 A14B–0076–B001
Fig. U12 FANUC PPR
Fig. U13 FANUC floppy cassette adaptor (2DD)
Fig. U14 Integrated type FA card adaptor
Fig. U15 Integrated type floppy cassette adaptor (2DD)
Fig. U16 Floppy cassette adaptor (2HD)
Fig. U17 FA card adaptor
Fig. U18 Program file mate
Fig. U19 (a) Portable tape reader
Fig. U19 (b) Tape reader with serial interface/without reels
Fig. U19 (C) Tape reader with reels
See Appendix D. Machine operator’s panel For samll CRT (PDP or LCD)/MDI A02B–0091–C141
Machine operator’s panel For Full key CRT (PDP or LCD)/MDI A02B–0091–C161
Machine operator’s panel (smbolic keysheet) A02B–0098–C170#TB

For small CRT (PDP or LCD)/MDI
Machine operator’s panel (symbolic keysheet) A02B–0099–C161#TB

For full key CRT (PDP oR LCD)/MDI
Machine operator’s panel For small CRT (PDP or LCD)/MDI A02B–0092–C141
Machine operator’s panel For full key CRT (PDP or LCD)/MDI A02B–0092–C161
Machine operator’s panel (symbolic keysheet) A02B–0099–C150#MB

For small CRT (PDP or LCD)/MDI
Machine operator’s panel (symbolic keysheet) A02B–0099–C161#MB

For full key CRT (PDP or LCD)/MDI
254
Hole for installation of 4–M5
Fig. U1 (a) External dimension of control unit (Control unit A)
255
Hole for installation

of 4–M5
Fig. U1 (b) External dimension of control unit (Control unit B)
256
Connector KMI
Weight : 4.2kg
Installation dimension
18.5
153
Connector KMI
Earth stud
(M4)
(Note)
The earth stud is
prepared only for
CE marking
For the model
qualifying for CE
marking, the area
within 8 mm of
the outside edge
of the rear of the
metal panel is left
unpainted.
The panel sur-
face is colored
gray (Munsell N3)
and finished to a
GS30 level of
smoothness.
Fig. U2 (a) 9″ CRT/MDI unit (Monochrome, small key type)
257
KM1
Weight 4.5kg
(Note)
The earth stud is
prepared only for
CE marking.
Earth stud (M4) For the model
qualifying for CE
marking, the area
within 8 mm of
the outside edge
of the rear of the
metal panel is left
unpainted.
The panel sur-
30 face is colored
gray (Munsell
20 N3) and finished
to a GS30 level
of smoothness.
Fig. U2 (b) 9″CRT/MDI unit (Monochrome, full key type) dimension
258
KM1
Weight 4.5kg
Earth stud (M4)
30
20
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell N3) and finished to a GS30 level of smoothness.
Fig. U2 (c) For 0–PD 9″CRT/MDI unit (Monochrome, full key type) dimension
259
Take the ped-

estal into the
consideration
(Reference)
Pedestal
(Reference)
8–M3
Weight Approx.8kg
Fig. U2 (d) 9″CRT/MDI unit (Color, small type key)
260
Take the ped-

estal into the
consideration
(Reference)
Pedestal
(Reference)
Weight 8.5kg or less

Fig. U2 (e) 9″CRT/MDI unit (Color,full key type)
261
Weight : 21 kg
Earth
stud
(M4)
For the model qualifying for CE marking, the area within 8 mm of

the outside edge of the rear of the metal panel is left unpainted.
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell N3) and finished to a
GS30 level of smoothness.
Fig.U2(f) 14″CRT/MDI unit
262
2–M4(Bottom)
(Mounting hole
for stand)
(Mounting dimension of stand)
Color: Mancell N3 GS50 smooth finish
Stand
(Example)
Lack for air flow Unit stand

(Example)
Notices of mount
Mounting dimension of stand
Consider the mounting of stand when mounting the unit.
(Refer the figure above.)
Fig. U2 (g) Installing drawing for 14″CRT/MDI
263
Weight : 2.8kg
Earth stud
(M4)
Panel cut figure
Fig. U2 (h) EL/MDI unit (Small key type)
264
Weight : 2.9kg
Panel cut figure
Stud for earth (M4)
Fig. U2 (i) PDP/MDI unit (Small key type)
265
95
Weight : 2.9kg
Panel cut figure

CN2
Stud for earth (M4)
Fig. U2 (j) PDP/MDI unit (Small key type) (A02B–0098–C068)

Fig. U2 (h) PDP/MDI unit (Small key type) (A02B–0098–C069)
266
Weight : 3.3kg
Pannel cut figure
Fig. U2 (k) PDP/MDI unit (Full key type)
267
Weight : 3.3kg
Hole
for installation earth
cable (M4)
Panel cut figure
Fig. U2 (l) PDP/MDI unit (Full key type)
268
(Note)
This dimension is depth of LCD unit. (Note)
The connector of MDI cable is left
out of consideration.
For the model qualifying for CE
marking, the area within 8 mm of the Weight : 1.9kg
outside edge of the rear of the metal
panel is left unpainted.
The panel surface is colored gray
(Munsell N3) and finished to a GS30
level of smoothness.
Hole
cable (M4)
Panel cut figure
Fig. U2 (m) 7.2I LCD/MDI unit (Small key type)
269
(Note)
This dimension is depth of LCD unit. (Note)
The connector of MDI cable is left
out of consideration.
marking, the area within 8 mm of the
outside edge of the rear of the metal
panel is left unpainted.
The panel surface is colored gray
(Munsell N3) and finished to a GS30 Weight : 2.2kg
level of smoothness.
Hole
cable (M4)
30
Panel cut figure
Fig. U2 (n) 7.2″LCD/MDI Unit (Full key type)
270
HONDA MR
connector
20P2pcs
Rear of unit
Cable length :
Approx.1.5m
Weight : Approx. 11kg
Fig. U2(o) Detachable CRT/MDI unit
271
Weight : 4kg
Panel
cut
figure
Stud (M4) for earth

5 14
40
For the model qualifying for CE marking, the area

within 8 mm of the outside edge of the rear of the
metal panel is left unpainted.
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell N3) and
finished to a GS30 level of smoothness.
Fig. U3 (a) Remote type 9″CRT unit(Monochrome)
272
Weight : 7.8kg
Panel
cut
figure
293
Stud for earth(M4)
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell N3)

and finished to a GS30 level of smoothness.
Fig. U3 (b) Remote type 9I CRT unit (Color)
273
Weight : 2.1kg
Stud(M4) for
earth
Panel cut
figure

Fig. U3 (c) Remote type EL unit
274
Weight : 2.7kg
Panel
cut fig-
ure
Screw (M4)
for earth
Fig. U3 (d) Remote type PDP unit (A02B–0098–C135)
275
Weight : 2.7kg
95
Panel
cut fig-
ure
CN2 Screw (M4)

for earth
Fig. U3 (e) Remote type PDP unit (A02B–0098–C136)
276
Weight : 1.4kg
Connector for
soft key
Panel cut figure
Hole for installation of

earth cable (M4)
For the model qualifying for CE marking, the area within 8 mm of the outside edge of the rear
of the metal panel is left unpainted.
Fig. U3 (f) Remote type 7.2″ LCD unit
277
Weight : 1.9kg
In case of A02B–0098–C099 In case of A02B–0098–C098
Connector for
soft key
Panel cut figure
For the model qualifying for CE marking,

the area within 8 mm of the outside edge of Hole for installation
the rear of the metal panel is left unpainted. earth cable (M4)
The panel surface is colored gray (Munsell
N3) and finished to a GS30 level of
smoothness.
Fig. U3 (g) Remote type 8.4″ LCD unit
278
Weight 1.9 kg
In case of A02B–0098–C089
In case of A02B–0098–C088
Hole for installation earth cable (M4)
Connector for soft key

Panel cut figure
For the model qualifying for CE marking, the area within 8 mm of the outside edge of the rear
Fig. U3 (h) Separate type 8.4″ LCD unit
279
(Note)
The Earth stud is prepared only
for CE marking.
marking, the area within 8 mm of
the outside edge of the rear of
the metal panel is left unpainted.
The panel surface is colored
gray (Munsell N3) and finished to
a GS30 level of smoothness.
Weight : 0.7kg
Panel cut figure
Stud for
earth(M4)
22.0
18.5
Fig. U4 (a) MDI unit (Small type)
280
(Note)
The earth stud is prepared only for CE marking.
For the model qualifying for CE marking, the
area within 8 mm of the outside edge of the rear
Weight : 1.1kg
Panel cut figure
Stud for
earth(M4)
22.5
18.0
Fig. U4 (b) MDI unit (Full key type)
281
M3 screw terminal
Fig. U5 (a) Manual pulse generator (A–860–0201–T001)
282
8.35
80.0
55.0
50.0
30.0
M4X8.0
60.0
On 72
PULSE GENERATOR
11.0
FANUC LTD
0V 5V A B
M3 screw terminal
120.0°
Fig. U5 (b) Manual pulse generator (A860–0202–T001)
283

∼
90 38.0
25
M3 screw terminal
140
100.0
39.0
M3 screw terminal

∼
90 38.0
25
M3 screw terminal
140
100.0
39.0
M3 screw terminal
Fig. U5 (c) Pendant type manual pulse generator (A860–0202–T004 to T015)
284
Panel cut figure
Crimped
Length: terminal
200mm for M4 flame
ground
HONDA TUSHIN
MR20RM
JAPAN AIR ELECTRIC

DBM–25S
Painting :
P–ME–N1.5–3G
(Note)Earth terminal for mounting

flame ground is required to
be set near punch panel
Fig. U6 Punch panel
285
+0
–0.11
–0.009
68 14.3 –0.025
16 –0.006 50
–0.017
15
+0.14
–0

Connector

45.4
+0.012
–0
+0.05
–0
V56
V68 Unit : mm
Fig. U7 (a) Diagram of position coder A86L–0027–0001#102 : Max. 4000rpm

Fig. U7 Diagram of position coder A86L–0027–0001#002 : Max. 6000rpm
NOTE
Mechanical specifications of the position coder are as follows :
(1) Input axis inertia 1.010–3 kg,cm,sec2 or less
(2) Input axis starting torque 1000g,cm or less
(3) Input axis permissible loads
Radial Thrust
Operation 1kg or less 1kg or less
Idle 20kg or less 10kg or less
Attach a pulley directly to the position coder shaft and drive the timing belt. Note that
the loads conform with the above allowable value.
(4) Weight 1kg or less
286
MS connector: MS3102A–20–29P
Fig. U7 (b) α position coder

Specification No.: A860–0309–T302 (10000 rpm maximum)
287
Body
Cover
M4 Tap4
Mounting panel hole

working position
Mounting hole
(countersink)
Fig. U8 (a) Battery unit for CNC
288
4–M4 counter sinking Minus polarity indication

Plus polarity indication
Plus terminal with

3–M3 screw holes
Minus terminal
with 3–M3 screw
holes
4–Φ4.3 Mounting
holes
Arrow view A
Fig. U8 (b) Battery case for absolute pulse coder
289
Space
Note
M261
M61
Mou
nting
hole M278
M78
M280
M80
M262
M62
Mou Note)
nting The names of connector I/O–B2 is different
hole from the names of connector I/O–F1.
M279
M79
Upper are names of connector I/O–F1.

Lower are names of connector I/O–B2.
Fig. U9 (a) Additional I/O B2 and I/O F1
290
Space
M261
M61
Mou
nting
hole M278
M78
M280
M80
M262
M62
Mounting
hole
M279
M79
Note)
The names of connector I/O–B3 is different
from the names of connector I/O–F3.
Upper are names of connector I/O–F3.
Lower are names of connector I/O–B3.
Fig. U9 (b) Additional I/O–B3 and I/O–F3
291
Weight : 14kg
Unit : mm
Max. 155
Max.175
Fig. U10 Control transformer (A80L–0001–0176)
CAUTION
Switch off the main line switch when TB1 and TB2 are touched.
292
Specification of control (1) Primary sie rated voltage

transformer AC200V/220V/230V/380V/415V/440V/460V/480V/550V
(2) Voltage fluctuation
Primary sie rated voltage10% and –15%
(3) Frequency
50Hz/60Hz3Hz
(4) Secondary side line voltage
(5) Secondary side voltage deviation
Less than3%
(6) Secondary side voltage regulation
Less than 7%
(7) Transformer ambient temperature and humidity
–5°C+60°C 10 to95% (Relative humidity)
TB1
550
480
460
440
415
TB1
380
240
230 200A
220
200
200 to 550V
200V 5A
100V 100A
1A
COM 200B
100B
293
Printed Circuit Board
Fig. U11 Input unit
294
Cable length: 1.5m

Weight : approx. 1.2kg
Unit : mm
Fig. U12 FANUC PPR
295
Cable length: 1.5m

Weight : 3.3kg
Unit : mm
Fig. U13 FANUC Floppy Cassette Adapter (2DD)
296
The “Panel Cut”
Fig. U14 Integrated type FA card adapter
297
Fig. U15 Integrated type floppy cassette adapter
298
Fig. U16 Floppy Cassette Adapter (2HD)
299
Fig. U17 FA card adapter
300
Fig. U18 Program file mate
301
Painting : Munsell No. 5GY3.5/0.5 leather tone finish

Weight : Approx. 15kg
Fig. U19 (a) Portable tape reader
302
Signal cable
connector
Painting : Metallic silver

Weight : 6kg
Unit : mm
Power
terminal strip
Wiring
screw
M36
Cable
holder
Signal
cable
Fig. U19 (b) Tape reader without reels (With serial interface)
NOTE
Set the tape reader into it, from the rear side of panel with holes and secure with screws and
nuts. If this is not convinient, attach a M5 stud in Φ5.3 hole and secure with a nut.
303
RS–232–C Parallel
interface interface
connector Power connector
connector
Coating color : Metallic silver

Weight : 9kg Stud
Fig. U19 (c) Tape reader with reels
NOTE
Set the tape reader into it, from the rear side of panel with holes and secure with screws and
nuts. If this is not convinient, attach a M5 stud in Φ5.3 hole and secure with a nut.
304
A.2
CONNECTOR
Name of external dimension
Fig. C1 (a) PCR connector (Soldering type) PCR–E20FS
Fig. C1 (b) FI40 connector FI40–2015S
Fig. C2 (a) Dimension of connector case (HONDA TUSHIN PCR TYPE) PCR–V20LA/PCR–V20LB
Fig. C2 (b) Dimension of connector case (HIROSE FI TYPE) FI–20–CV
Fig. C2 (c) Dimension of connector case (FUJITSU FCN) FCN–240C20–Y/S
Fig. C3 (a) AMP connector(1) AMP1–178128–3
Fig. C3 (b) AMP connector(2) AMP2–178128–3
Fig. C3 (c) AMP connector(3) AMP1–178288–3
Fig. C3 (d) AMP connector(4) AMP2–178288–3
Fig. C3 (e) AMP connector(5) AMP2–178129–6
Fig. C3 (f) Contact for AMPconnector AMP1–175218–2/5

AMP1–175196–2/5
Fig. C4 (a) HONDA connector (Case)
Fig. C4 (b) HONDA connector (Beveled case)
Fig. C4 (c) HONDA connector (Male)
Fig. C4 (d) HONDA connector (Female)
Fig. C4 (e) HONDA connector terminal layout
Fig. C5 (a) NIPPON FCI (Old name is Nippon Burndy) SMS3PK–5

connector (3–pins, black)
Fig. C5 (b) NIPPON FCI (Old name is Nippon Burndy) SMS3PN–5

connector (3–pins,brown)
Fig. C5 (c) NIPPON FCI (Old name is Nippon Burndy) SMS3PW–5

connector (3–pins,white)
Fig. C5 (d) NIPPON FCI (Old name is Nippon Burndy) SMS6PN–5

connector (6–pins,brown)
Fig. C5 (e) NIPPON FCI (Old name is Nippon Burndy) SMS6PW–5

connector (6–pins,white)
Fig. C5 (f) NIPPON FCI (Old name is Nippon Burndy) SMS6P–1

connector (6–pins,black rectangle)
Fig. C6 Connector for HIROSE flat cable HIF3BB–50D–2.54R
Fig. C7 Connector forYAMAICHI flat cable NFP–10A–0124
Fig. C8 (a) Punch panel connector for reader/puncher interface
Fig. C8 (b) Reader/puncher interface metal fitting for lock
Fig. C9 Power contact for portable tape reader
Fig. C10 (a) Contact for 9″ PDP power cable (DC24V input type)
Fig. C10 (b) Housing for 9″PDP power cable (DC24V input type)
305
Connector body
HONDA TSUSHIN PCR–E20FS (Soldering type)
Usage General
Connector cover HONDA TSUSHIN PCS–E20LA (Metal)
HONDA TSUSHIN PCR–V20L (Plastic)
A
n
7.3 2 1.27 1
n n1
2
Display
HONDA
7
15.1
1.27
B

PCR–E20FS
Fig. C1 (a) PCR connector (Soldering type)
306
Connector body HIROSE FI40–2015S

Usage For simultaneous axis
Housing HIROSE FI–20–CV
Dimension
16.25 15°
11.43
1.27
(Note)
This connector is not contanted with
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 the position 11,13,15,17, and 19.
5.5
2.2
9.2
1.7
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
13.35
19.2
Tab for
connection
of shield
7
(4)
4.3
3

5
8.5
1.8 (1)
(2)
2.4 2.4
A A
Face AA S 20 18 16 14 12
(Measure 10/1)
View of back side(Soldering side)
10 8 6 4 2
9 7 5 3 1
Fig. C1 (b) F140 connector
307
Connector body HONDA TSUSHIN PCR–V20LA (External cable diameter F6)

PCR–V20LB (External cable diameter F8)
Usage General
Dimension
9.5
21 11.4
(1)
HONDA
(2)
37
30
(3) (6)
(5)
(4)
(1) (2) Case

(3) Cable clamp
(4) Lock metal
(5) Lock lever
(6) Screw for mounting cable
clamp
Fig. C2 (a) Connector case (HONDA TSUSHIN PCR)
308
Connector body HIROSE F1–20–CV

Usage For simultaneous axes cable
Dimension
(1), (2) Case
(3) Lock metal
(4) Lock lever
(5) Cable clamp
(6) Screw for mounting cable clamp
210.3
11.50.3
9.50.2
(5)
(6)
(4)
370.5
17.50.3
(3)
300.3
(2) (1)
Fig. C2 (b) Connector case (HIROSE F1 type)
309
Connector body Fujitsu FCN–240C20–Y/S(For External cable diameter Φ5.8)

Usage General
Dimension
9.5
21 11.4
(2)
F
C020–02
37
30
Cable clamp
Pan head screw
Locking lever
Fig. C2 (c) Connector case (Fujitsu FCN type)
310
Style AMP1–178128–3 G
3
Usage For CE marking S
2
Power supply unit
200VAC input 1 R Location of key
For CE marking
Power supply unit 3 G
200VAC output 2 200B
Dimension 1 200A
(25.5) Circuit No.
3 2 1
AMP D–3
X 22.8
16.3
19.24
0.6
10.16
5.08
7.15
4.05
6.55
3.1
3 2 1
Circuit No.
Fig. C3 (a) AMP connector (1)
311
Style AMP2–178128–3
Dimension
Circuit No.
(29.7)
3 2 1
AMP D–3
22.8 0.3
Y
16.3 0.3
(19.24)
0.3
0.6
10.16
5.08
6.55 0.3
7.15
4.05
3.1
3 2 1
Circuit No.
Fig. C3 (b) AMP connector(2)
312
Usage For CE marking
Power supply unit 3
+24E Output
2 0V
Dimension
1 +24E
(22.96) Circuit No.
3 2 1
AMP D–3
22.8
16.3
16.7
0.6
7.62
3.81
7.15
4.05
6.55
3.1
3 2 1
Circuit No.
Fig. C3 (c) AMP connector(3)
313
Usage For CE marking
3
Power supply unit
+24V output 2 0V
Dimension 1 +24V
Circuit No.
0.6
7.15
6.55
3 2 1
Circuit No.
Fig. C3 (d) AMP connector(4)
314
Usage For CE marking B3 FB A3 COM
Power supply unit B2 FA A2 OFF
ON/OFF control
B1 AL A1 ON
Dimension
Circuit No.
Circuit No.
Fig. C3 (e) AMP connector (5)
315
Style Piece : AMP1–175218–2 (Metal plating) AMP1–175218–5 (Tin plating)

Reel : AMP1–175196–2 (Metal plating) AMP1–175196–5
Connector cable AWG 16, 18, 20
Dimension
(21.8) A–A
2.9 0.4
2.90.5
1
Reel
3
0.5 B–B
17.8
0.4
4.2
(9.3) (2.5) B
0.2 A
2.9
3.40.2 5.50.5

–AMP
Plating code 2.6)
((1.7)) 2.50.2 (PLATING ID–MARK)
A B
Crimped display
(PRESSER ID–MARK)
Fig. C3 (f) Contact for AMP connector
316
(2)
(4)
(1)
(3)
C
(5)
A (D)
(B)
Symbol No. of
Specification A (B) C (D) terminals
MR–20LMH (Plug)
39.3 44.9 39.8 17 20
MR–20LFH (Jack)
MR–50LMH (Plug)
67.9 73.5 44.8 18 50
MR–50LFH (Jack)
Symbol Name
Outer diameter of the cable
(1) Connector cover MR–20L dia.10mm max
MR–50L dia.16mm max
(2) Cable clamp
(3) Stopper
(4) Screw for cable clamp
(5) Plug connector(MR–20,50MH)

Jack connector(MR–20,50FH)
Fig. C4 (a) HONDA connector (case)
317
External view of the 50–pin connector housing
External view of the 20–pin connector housing
Fig. C4 (b) HONDA connector (Beveled case)
318
2–M2
13
A
B
(1)
2.4
18.1
(2)
8.5
(3)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
No. of
A B terminals
MR–20RMH 32.8 27.8 20

MR–50RMH 61.4 56.4 50
Symbol Name
(1) Metal clamp of connector
(2) Clamp screw Φ2.68
(3) Connector(MR–20, 50MH)
Fig. C4 (c) HONDA connector (Plug connector)
319
2–M2
13
B
A
(1)
2.4
19.9
8.4
(2)
10.9
(3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
No.of
A B terminals
MR–20RFH 32.8 27.8 20
MR–50RFH 61.4 56.4 50
Symbol Name
1 Metal clamp of connector
2 Screw for mounting φ2.68
3 Connector(MR–20, 50FH)
Fig. C4 (d) HONDA connector (Jack connector)
320
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
HONDA
MR–50MH
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 (50core plug)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
MR–50FH
HONDA
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 (50core jack)
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDA MR–20MH
8 9 10 11 12 13
(20 core plug)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MR–20FH
HONDA (20 core jack)
8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Fig. C4 (e) Terminal layout of HONDA connector
321
32 max.
5.08
2
19.060.2
1
60.2
7.7
30
Manufacturer : NIPPON FCI
Name Specification
(Connector maker number) Remarks
Connector housing for cable SMS3PK–5 Black
(Crimp type) RC16M–23T3 For details on tools re-
Contact quired for crimp terminals,
(Solder type) RC16M–SCT3 contact the manufacturer.
Cables
Cross sectional area : 0.75mm2(30/0.18)
Insulation diameter : 2.8mm max
Peeling length : 7.2mm
Fig. C5 (a) NIPPON FCI connector (3–pins,black)
322
5.08
1
32 max.
2
19.060.2
3
60.2
7.7
30
Name Specification
Connector housing for cable SMS3PNS–5 Brown
(Crimp type) RC16M–23T3 For details on tools for
Contact crimp terminals, con-
(Solder type) RC16M–SCT3 tact the manufacturer.
Cables
Fig. C5(b) NIPPON FCI connector (3–pins,Brown)
323
Name Specification
Connector housing for cable SMS3PWS–5 White
(Crimp type) RC16M–23D28 For details on tools for
tact the manufacturer.
Cables
Insulationdiameter : 2.8mm max
Fig. C5 (c) NIPPON FCI connector (3–pins,white)
324
5.08
5
38 max.
48 max.
4
3
1
2
1
7 max.
24.9
Name Specification
Connector housing for cable SMS3PN–5 Brown
(Crimp type) RC16M–23T3 For details on tools for
(Soldering type) RC16M–SCT3 tact the manufacturer.
Cables
Fig. C5 (d) NIPPON FCI connector (6–pins,brown)
325
Name Specification
Connector housing for cable SMS6PW–5 White
RC16M–23D28 For details on tools for
(Crimp type)
(Soldering type) RC16M–SCD28 tact the manufacturer.
Cables
Cross sectional area : 1.27mm2 (50/0.18)
Fig. C5(e) NIPPON FCI connector (6–pinds,white)
326
Name Specification
Connector housing for cable SMS6P–1 Black
RC16M–23T3 For details on tools for
(Crimp type)
(Soldering type) RC16M–SCT3 tact the manufacturer.
Cables
Fig. C5 (f) NIPPON FCI connector (6–pins, Black, Rectangle)
327
Hirose Electric flat cable connectors

Model Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
HIF3BB-50D-2. 54R (50contacts)
HIF3BA
HIF3BB
15.6
14.4
1.27 1.27 1.09
1.27
Section A–A’ Section B–B’ When assembled
Connector body Protector Clamp
A A A
2.54
D
6.0
A A’ B
3.6
6.0
6.0
1.27 2.54
B’ 3.81
D
3.5
3.8 (Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 3)
7.0 3.5
7.0
10.5
0.95
0.3
8.5
1.05
2.3 2.3
2.7
C 3.5
4.5
Dimensions
Model Number A B C D
of pins
HIF3BB–50D–2.54R 50 68.07 60.96 62.23 63.6
Pin assignment for Hirose flat cable connectors
AOI pin mark (side face)
20PINS Polarity guide
Row A
Row B
01 03 05 07 09
02 04 06 08 10
View from connector
50PINS
Row A
Row B
01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
View from connector
Fig. C6 Hirose Electric flat cable connectors
328
NFP–10A–0122 NFP–10A–0124
C
3.25
6.3 6.3
2.54 2.54
0.1
0.5 0.5
1.905
8.3
3.85
1.27 0.7 3.0 3.0
9.6 B
1.905
A
2.7
1.905 1.905
4.15 1.905
F 1.905
2.7
Alignment mark NFP–10A–0122 NFP–10A–0124

3.5
27.7
17.2
6.5
12.9
4.5
7.4
0.5¢ 2–2.4 hole

1.27
5.0 B Additional symbol marking position (white)
D
Name A B C D E F
NFP–10A–0122&0124 24.28 5.08 11.58 15.08 20.48 40.2
7.7
0.5¢
E
2–2.4 hole
E
D
5.065 0.8
1.27
B Through hole
5.0
PC board hole dimensions
Fig. C7 Yamaichi Denki flat cable connectors
329
H
J
A 53.0 D 7.8 G 10.7
B 38.3 E 12.6 H 1.2
C 47.0 F 41.3 J 0.8
A
C A–A Cross section
B F
A 10
E D G
6.1 10
A 10
2–3.05Φ
10.8
Fig. C8 (a) Punch pannel connector for reader/puncher interface
Small round
M2.6P0.45 screw Interlock screw head screw
1.2 groove
6.1
12.7
1.2
6.2 Spring washer
Fig. C8 (b) Reader puncher connector metal fitting for lock
330
Color : Cream
Note) When connecting with crimp terminal, use M4 terminal (all 3 poles)
Fig. C9 Power receptacle for portable tape reader
331
Corresponding wire Cable diameter Quantity

Model including shields Material Surface

AWG# (mm) treatment Reel

Brass
0.33 to 0.83 22 to 18 1.7 to 3.0 Phosphor Tinning 4500
bronze
Fig. C10 (a) Contact for 9″ PDP power cable (24 VDC input type)
Specification VHR–2N
Material Nylon 6
UL94V–0
Natural
Quantity/bag 1000
Fig. C10 (b) Housing for 9″ PDP power cable (24 VDC input type)
332
B. CONNECTING CABLES AND
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX CONNECTORS
B CONNECTING CABLES AND CONNECTORS
333
CONNECTORS APPENDIX B–61393E/06
B.1
TABLE OF CABLE
Cable Usage Max–length (m)
J1 Machine interface: CNC M1–Magnetic cabinet 50
J2 Machine interface: CNC M2–Magnetic cabinet 50
J15 1st axis motor power line: Velocity control unit motor 50
J16 2nd axis motor power line: Velocity control unit motor 50
J17 3rd axis motor power line: Velocity control unit motor 50
J18 4th axis motor power line: Velocity control unit motor 50
J15A 5th axis motor power line: Velocity control unit motor 50
J16A 6th axis motor power line: Velocity control unit motor 50
J20* AC input unit CP2–power source CP11
J23 Position coder CNC, M27–Position coder 50
J23A Position coder CNC, M29–Position coder 50
J24 Manual pulse generator : CNC M12 or M21–manual pulse generator 50

(For 1st unit)
J25 Manual pulse generator : CNC M12 or M21–manual pulse generator 50

(For 2nd/3rd unit)
J26 Analog output : CNC, M26–spindle control circuit 50
J26A Analog output : CNC, M28–spindle control circuit 50
J27 MDI key signal : CNC, M3–CRT/MDI, KM1 50
J28 Reader puncher interface : CNC M5–connecting pin 50 to I/O device
J30 Machine interface CNC: M18–magnetic cabinet 50
J31 Machine interface CNC: M18–magnetic cabinet 50
J32 Machine interface CNC:M18–magnetic cabinet 50
J36 Additional B2 power cable : Power supply unit CP14–additional I/O Voltage drop is less than 1V
B2 CP51
J37 CRT signal : CNC, CCX (CCX2)–CRT/MDI unit, CN1 50
J38 CRT power supply : Power supply unit, CP15–CRT/MDI unit, CN2 50
J39 Additional B2 signal cable : PMC–M PCB, M24–additional I/O 10

B2,M60
J40 Machine interface: CNC,M61–magnetic cabinet 50
J41 Machine interface:CNC, M62–magnetic cabinet 50
334
Cable Usage Max–length (m)
J44 Machine interface: CNC, M80–magnetic cabinet 50
J51 Servo power : Servo transformer–Velocity control unit
J52 Power supply for MCC : 100VAC velocity control unit
J61 Servo transformer input power supply : AC input 3 phases–servo

transformer
J81 Absolute pulse coder relay 1st axis : Integrated relay unit to pulse
coder
J82 Absolute pulse coder relay 2nd axis : Integrated relay unit to pulse
coder
J83 Absolute pulse coder relay 3rd axis : Integrated relay unit to pulse
coder
J84 Absolute pulse coder relay 4th axis : Integrated relay unit to pulse
coder
J85 to J88 Absolute pulse coder relay from 1st to 4th axis : Relay unit to Bat-
tery unit
J89 Absolute pulse coder battery cable : Relay unit to Battery unit
J141 Operator’s panel interface : CNC,M1–Operator’s panel, M1A 50
J142 Operator’s panel interface : CNC,M1–Operator’s panel, M2A 50
J143 Machine interface : CNC, M1B–magnetic cabinet 50 together with J141
J144 Machine interface: CNC, M2B–magnetic cabinet 50 together with J142
J210 to J217 Servo command 1 axis to 6 axis : CNC to Integrated pulse coder 50
J220 to J227 Position feedback cable 1 axis to 6 axis : CNC to integrated pulse 50
coder
J230 to J237 Position feedback cable 1 axis to 6 axis : CNC to remote pulse cod- 50
er
J240 to J247 Velocity feedback cable 1 axis to 6 axis : CNC to servo motor 50
335
B.2 The following interface cables are provided.

INTERFACE CABLE
(OUR SUPPLY)
Connection cable for

SERVO
Usage Name Specifications Code Length
For current command

Control unit A02B–
J210
0074– 5m
to J217
Servo amplifier K801
(S series)
For current command

J210
0098– 5m
to J217
(S series)
For current command

J210
0098– 5m
to J217
(C,αseries)
Serial spindle signal

cable
α series amplifier A02B–
(JA7B) 0120– 1m
K844
Electric/optical
transducer
Incremental
A/B phase pulse coder
A02B–
Servo amplifiler J220
0074– 14 m
(S series) to J227
K802

Control unit
Incremental
A02B–
Servo amplifiler J220
0074– 14 m
(S series) to J227
K803

Control unit
Incremental
High resolution servo A02B–
J220
motor 0074– 14 m
to J227
(S series) K807

Control unit
336
Incremental
J220
motor 0074– 14 m
to J227
(S series) K808

Control unit
Incremental
A02B–
Servo motor J220
0098– 14 m
(S series) to J227
K822

Control unit
Incremental
A02B–
J220
Servo motor 0098– 14 m
to J227
(S series) K823

Control unit
Incremental
A02B–
High resolution servo J220
0098– 14 m
motor (S series) to J227
K827

Control unit
Incremental
A02B–
High resolution servo J220
0098– 14 m
motor (S series) to J227
K828

Control unit
Absolute A/B phase

pulse coder
J220B
motor (S series) 0096– 14 m
to J227B
K801
Control unit
(Relay unit is not used.)
337
Absolute A/B phase

pulse coder
J220B
motor (S series) 0096– 14 m
to J227B
K802
Control unit
(Relay unit is not used.)
Incremental A/B phase

pulse coder
A02B–
Servo motor J220
0098– 14 m
α3–α150 to J227
K860

Control unit

pulse coder
A02B–
Servo motor J220
0098– 14 m
α3–α150 to J227
K861

Control unit
connector
pulse coder
A06B–
Servo motor J220
6050– 14 m
α1,α2 to J227
K854

Control unit
Absolute A/B phase

feedback A02B–
J220
Relay unit 0074– 2m
to J227A
K804
Control unit
Absolute A/B phase

feedback
A06B–
AC servo motor J81
6050– 14 m
to J84
K055

Relay unit
Absolute A/B phase

feedback
A06B–
AC servo motor J81
6050– 14 m
to J84
K056

Relay unit
338
Battery unit for abso-

A02B–
lute pulse coder
J89 0072– 4m

K902
Relay unit
Cable for position cod-

er A02B–
Position coder J23 0050– 7m
K801
Controller Cabtyre cable
10–pair whole shielded(cable A)
Crimped terminal T1 25–4

HIROSE connector
AC servo motor drive
cable
A06B–
Servo amplifier J15
6050– 14 m
to J18
K003
Servo motor
(For 2–0,1–0)
Cabtyre cable
4 core30/0 18 0 75SQ
Crimped terminal T2–4

(connector)
(clamp)
cable
A06B–
Servo amplifier J15
6050– 14 m
to J18
K005
Servo motor
(For 0,5)
Cabtyre cable
4 core 37/0 26 2SQ

(connector)
(clamp)
cable
A06B–
Servo amplifier J15
6050– 14 m
to J18
K006
Servo motor
(For 0,5)
Cabtyre cable
4 core 37/0 26 2SQ

(connector)
AC servo motor drive (clamp)
cable
A06B–
Servo amplifier J15
6050– 14 m
to J18
K007
Servo motor
(For 10,20,30)
Cabtyre cable
4 core 45/0 32 3 5SQ
339

(connector)
(clamp)
AC motor drive cable
Servo amplifier A06B–
J15
6050– 14 m
to J18
Servo motor K008
(For 10,20,30)
Cabtyre cable
4 core 45/0 32 3 5SQ

(connector)
(clamp)
J15
6050– 14 m
to J18
Servo motor K009
(For 30R)
Cabtyre cable
4 core 72/0 32 5 5SQ

(connector)
(clamp)
J15
6050– 14 m
to J18
Servo motor K010
(For 30R)
Cabtyre cable
4 core 72/0 32 5 5SQ
For servo motor drive

Servo amplifier
A06B–
J15
6050– 14 m
Servo motor to J18
K824
α1,α2
(Without brake) Cabtyre cable

Servo amplifier
A06B–
J15
6050– 14 m
Servo motor to J18
K825
α1,α2
(With brake)
Cabtyre cable

(connector)
(clamp)
Servo amplifier
A06B–
J15
6079– 14 m
Servo motor to J18
K800
α3,α6,α9
(Straight)
Cabtyre cable
340

(connector)
For servo motor drive (clamp)
Servo amplifier
A06B–
J15
6079– 14 m
Servo motor to J18
K801
α3,α6,α9
(Elbow)
Cabtyre cable

(connector)
Servo amplifier
A06B–
J15
6079– 14 m
Servo motor to J18
K802
α12,α22,α30
(Straight)
Cabtyre cable

(connector)
Servo amplifier
A06B–
J15
6079– 14 m
Servo motor to J18
K803
α12,α22,α30
(Elbow)
Cabtyre cable

(connector)
Servo amplifier
A06B–
J15
6079– 14 m
Servo motor to J18
K804
α22,α30,α40
(Straight)
Cabtyre cable

(connector)
Servo amplifier
A06B–
J15
6079– 14 m
Servo motor to J18
K805
α22,α30,α40
(Elbow)
Cabtyre cable
341

Servo amplifier
A06B–
J15
6050– 14 m
Servo motor to J18
K822
α0.5
(Without brake)

Servo amplifier
A06B–
J15
6050– 14 m
Servo motor to J18
K823
α0.5
(With brake)
Connection cable for

CNC
J1
Signal cable for DI/DO J2
Control unit J30
A02B–
J32
0029– 7m
J40
K801
Operator’s panel or J41 Cabtyre cable
control panel J42 50 core whole shielded(Cable B)
J44
J1
J2
Signal cable for DI/DO
J30
J32
0098– 7m
J40
Operator’s panel or K801
J41 Cabtyre cable
control panel
J42 50 core whole shielded(Cable B)
J44

Control unit
J31 A02B–

J39 0029– 7m
J43 K802
Operator’s panel or Cabtyre cable
control panel 10 core whole shielded(Cable A)
342

Control unit
J31 A02B–

J39 0098– 7m
J43 Cabtyre cable K802
Operator’s panel or
control panel 10 core whole shielded(Cable A)
Crimped terminal for M3

Signal cable (For 1
axis) for manual pulse
generator A02B–
Control unit J24 0050– 7m
K802
Manual pulse genera-
tor
10 core whole shielded cable
Signal cable for MDI

Control unit
A02B–
J27 0050– 10 m
MDI unit K803
(Common to both small
type and full key type) 10 core whole shielded cable
Signal cable for MDI

Control unit
A02B–

J27 0098– 10 m
K803
MDI unit 10 core whole shielded cable
(Common to both small
type and full key type)
Signal cable for VIDEO

J37A 0098– 7m
Display K871
(For EMC) Simultaneous axes cable with shield
CRT/LCD
VIDEO signal cable
A02B–
Control unit
J37 0098– 5m

K870
14″CRT(For CE)
LCD unit
343
Monochrome CRT
Power supply cable A02B–
Power supply unit J38 0072– 7m
K814
CRT unit
Monochrome CRT
Power supply cable
A02B–
Power supply unit
J38 0120– 5m
(For CE)
K820

CRT unit
LCD unit
K820
LCD unit
LCD unit
Power supply cable
A02B–
Power supply unit
J38 0120– 5m
(For CE)
K823

LCD unit
14″color CRT
K815
14″color CRT unit
14″color CRT
Power supply cable
A02B–
Power supply unit
J38 0120– 5m
(For CE)
K821

14″color CRT unit
14″color CRT
Power supply cable
Power supply unit A02B–
(For CE) J38 0200– 5m
K812
14″ color CRT unit
(For CE)
Power supply ON/OFF Fasten terminal

cable
(For CE) 0120– 5m
K830
ON/OFF switch
(Except 14″CRT )
344
Power supply ON/OFF Crimped terminalM4

cable
(For CE) 0120– 5m
K831
ON/OFF switch
(only for 14″CRT)
I/O link cable A03B–

Control unit (JD1A) 0807– 10 m
K801 or
I/O unit or 5m
(JD1B) K802
I/O link cable

Control unit (J1A) A03B–
0807– 1m
Electric/optical K803
transducer
Additional I/O or I/O

unit power supply cable A02B–
K817
Each unit
Additional I/O or I/O

unit power supply cable
A02B–
Power supply unit
J36 0120– 5m
(For CE)
K843

Each unit
M4 crimped terminal
Control unit power
supply cable
A02B–
Power supply unit (AI)
0072– 7m

K823
Input power supply
(200VAC)
M5 crimped terminal
Control unit power
supply cable
(For CE) 0120– 7m
K845
Input power supply
(200VAC)
345
B.3
CONNECTOR FOR
INTERFACE
(ATTACHED TO
CABLES)
Usage Num-
Name Specifications Code
(Connector No.) ber
M3
M12 Connector Soldering Cover
M19 MR–20FH terminal MR–20L
M21 Connec-
M27 tor with
M35 cov- A02B–
M36 + 0029–
er(20–pin
M38 female K890
M39 soldering
M45 type)
M46
M48 Connector with cover
MR–20LFH By HONDA TSUSHIN
M49
M60
M79
M185
Connector Cover
M186 MRP–20F01 MR–20L
M188 Connec-
M189 tor with
M195 cov- A02B–
er(20–pin Terminal 0029–
M196 + + MRP–F112
M198 female K892
(20 pcs.)
M199 crimp
M219 type)
CCX1 to 5 By HONDA TSUSHIN
CX1
Connector Cover
MR–20MH Soldering terminal MR–20L
Connec-
tor with
cov- A02B–
M5 +
er(20–pin 0029–
M24 male sol- K898
M26 dering
M34 type)
M37
M44 Connector with cover
MR–20LMH By HONDA TSUSHIN
M47
M184
Connector Cover
M187 MR–20L
Connec- MRP–20M01
M194
M197 tor with
KM1 cov- A02B–
er(20–pin Terminal 0029–
male + + MRP–M112 K900
(20 pcs.)
crimp
type)
By HONDA TSUSHIN
346
Usage Num-
(Connector No.) ber
Connector Cover
MR–50FH Soldering Terminal MR–50L
Connec-
tor with
M1 cover A02B–
M2 +
(50 pin 0029–
M18 female K891
M20 soldering
M61 type)
M62
Connector with cover
M78 MR–50LFH By HONDA TSUSHIN
M80
M1B Connector Cover:
M2B MRP–50F01 MR–50L
M201 Connec-
M202 tor with
M218 cover A02B–
(50 pin terminal 0029–
M220 + + MRP–F112
female (50 pcs.)
K893
crimp
type)
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Connector Soldering Cover:

MR–50MH terminal MR–50L
Connec-
tor with
cover + A02B–
(50 pin 0029–
male sol- K899
dering
type)
Connector with cover
M1 to M2A MR–50LMH By HONDA TSUSHIN
Connector Cover:
MRP–50M01 MR–50L
Connec-
tor with
cover A02B–
(50 pin Terminal 0029–
male + + MRP–M112
K901
(50 pcs.)
crimp
type)
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Connec- Housing Contact

tor 6 pin SMS6P–1 RC16M–SCT3 (6 pcs.)
A02B–
CP2 square
0072–
CP11 soldering
K891
type
black
347
Usage Num-
(Connector No.) ber
Housing SMS6PN–5
Contact
Connec- RC16M–SCT3 (6 pcs.)
tor 6 pin
CP15 A02B–
female
CN2 0061–
soldering
(CRT/MDI) + K203
type
brown
By JAPAN FCI
Housing SMS6PW–5
Contact
Connec- RC16M–SCT3 (6 pcs.)
tor 6 pin
A06B–
AC servo (Degital) unit female
6047–
CN2 soldering
+ H031
type
white
By JAPAN FCI
Housing SMS3PN–5
Connec- Contact
RC16M–SCT3 (3 pcs.)
tor 3 pin
A02B–
CP14 female
0072–
CP51 soldering
K893
type
brown
By JAPAN FCI
348
Usage Num-
(Connector No.) ber
Connector Cover
MR–50FH Soldering termi- MR–50NSB
Connec- nal
tor with
M1 cover (50 A02B–
M2 pin fe- 0098–
M18
+
male sol- K891
M20 dering
M61 type)
M62
M78 By HONDA TSUSHIN
M80
Connector Cover:
M1B MRP–50F01 MR–50NSB
M2B Connec-
M201 tor with
pin fe- Terminal 0098–
M218 + + MRP–F112
M220 male (50 pcs.)
K893
crimp
type)
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Connector Cover
MR–50MH Soldering terminal MR–50NSB
Connec-
tor with
A02B–
cover (50
0098–
pin male + K899
soldering
type)
By HONDA TSUSHIN
M1 to M2A
Connector Cover
MRP–50M01 MR–50NSB
Connec-
tor with
A02B–
cover (50 Terminal 0098–
pin male + + MRP–M112
K901
crimp (50 pcs.)
type)
By HONDA TSUSHIN
349
Usage Num-
(Connector No.) ber
M3
M12 Cover:
M19 Connector
MR–20FH Soldering terminal MR–20NSB
M21 Connec-
M27 tor with
M36 pin fe- 0098–
+
M38 male sol- K890
M39 dering
M45 type)
M48
M49
M60
M79
M185 Connector Cover:
MRP–20F01 MR–20NSB
M186 Connec-
M188 tor with
M195 Terminal
pin fe- + + MRP–F112 0098–
M196 male K892
(20 pcs.)
M198 crimp
M199 type)
M219
CCX1 to 5 By HONDA TSUSHIN
CX1
Connector Cover:
MR–20MH Soldering terminal MR–20NSB
Connec-
tor with
A02B–
M5 cover (20
+ 0098–
M24 pin male
K898
M26 soldering
M34 type)
M37
M47
M184 Connector Cover:
MRP–20M01 MR–20NSB
M187
Connec-
M194
tor with
M197 A02B–
cover (20 Terminal
KM1 0098–
pin male + + MRP–M112
K900
crimp (20 pcs.)
type)
By HONDA TSUSHIN
Connec- +
Relay connector for A02B–
tor and
reader/puncher inter- 0061–
lock met-
face Metal fitting for lock K201
al
D20418–J2
(2 pcs.)
Connector
DBM–25S
By JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRIC
350
B.4
CABLE FOR
STANDARD
INTERFACE
Conductor Electric characteristic

Sheath Total o ter
outer
Name Code*
Composi- thickness dia. Conductor Allowable
Diameter
tion resistance current
Cable A
0.55 mm 7/0.18 1.5 mm 10.0 mm 110W/km 1.6 A A66L–0001–0041
(10–pair)
Cable B
0.55 mm 7/0.18 1.7 mm 12.5 mm 106W/km 1.6 A A66L–0001–0042
(50 core)
Cable C 0.55 mm 7/0.18 1.6 A

116W/km
(5– air,
(5–pair 1.0
1 0 mm 11.0
11 0 mm A66L–0001–0157
1.5 mm 50/0.18 16W/km 10 A
6 core)
Total shield
Individual shield
(For tachogenerator signal)
For power (50/0.18) (+5V3,0V3)
pair cable (7/0.18)
351
Usage
Name Specification Code Number
(Connector symbol)
AMP1–178128–3
3 2 1
Power supply unit for
AMP, AMP D–3
CE Marking A02B–
3–pin,
For 200 VAC X Terminal 0120–
Black, + AMP1–175218–5
input/output K321
Type X (3 pcs)
(CP1, CP2, CP3)
AMP2–178129–6
Power supply unit for AMP,

A02B–
CE Marking 6–pin,
Terminal 0120–
For ON/OFF control Black,
+ AMP1–175218–2 K322
(CP4) Type YY
(6 pcs.)
AMP2–178288–3
Power supply unit for AMP,

A02B–
CE Marking 3–pin,
Terminal
0120–
For 24 VDC output Black,
+ AMP1–175218–5 K323
(CP5) Type Y
(3 pcs.)
AMP1–178288–3
3 2 1
Power supply unit for AMP, AMP D–3
A02B–
CE Marking 3–pin,
X Terminal 0120–
For 24 VDC output Black, + AMP1–175218–5 K324
(CP6) Type X (3 pcs.)
352
Usage
Name Specification Code Number
(Connector symbol)
HONDA
Connec-
tor with
cover Main body of connector
+ PCR–E20FS
(20–pin, A02B–
half– 0120–
pitch, fe- K301
male,
solder
Cover
type) PCR–V20LA
For I/O Link (JD1A,
HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
JD1B) Servo cable or
type B interface
(JS1A)
Connec- HONDA
tor with
cover Main body of connector
(20–pin, + PCR–E20FA A02B–
half– 0120–
pitch, fe- K302
male,
crimp
Cover
type)
PCR–V20LA
HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
353
C. HALF PITCH 20–PIN INTERFACE
CONNECTORS AND CABLES APPENDIX B–61393E/06
C HALF PITCH 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND

CABLES
Connector for the PC Model: PCR–EV20MDT manufactured by Honda Tsushin

board The connector for the PC board has been specially developed support
FANUC’s high–mounting density. PCR connectors made by Honda
Tsushin are compatible with the mating part of the connector and can be
selected for the cable connection.
Cable connector Several connector manufacturers have developed custom cable side
connectors for this purpose.
The cable connector is separated into a body and a housing. The
connectors available are shown below. Models marked with (:) have
been customized for FANUC; those not so marked are mass produced as
standard products.
Use Type Manufacturer Connector Case model Applicable cable

model name name outside diameter
Cable side General Pressure Honda PCR–E20FA PCR–V20LA: 6mm
connector (I/O–Link) contact for PCS–E20LA 6mm
separate
wires Hirose FI30–20S: FI–20–CV2: 6.2mm
Fujitsu FCN–247J020 FCN–240C020 5.8mm
–G/E: –Y/S:
Molex 52622–2011: 52624–2015: 6.2mm
Solder Honda PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA: 6mm

contact PCS–E20LA 6mm
Hirose FI40–20S: FI–20–CV2: 6.2mm
FI40A–20S: FI–20–CV5: 9.2mm
Coaxial Solder Hirose FI40–2015S: FI–20–CV: 8.5mm

cable contact
FI40A–20S: FI–20–CV5: 9.2mm (*)
Honda PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA: 6mm (*)
PCS–E20LA 6mm
354
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX CONNECTORS AND CABLES
Pressure contact for This connector assembles multiple #28AWG wires into a single
separate wires connection. In comparison with solder contact and crimp contact
connectors, this connector enables a cable to be assembled at a much
lower cost.
Solder contact The Honda Tsushin PCR–E20FS is a solder contact type connector used
for assembling a small number of cables or for cable assembly on site.
The Hirose Electric FI40–20S is equivalent to the PCR–E20FS but has
large solder terminals to facilitate soldering.
Hirose Electric has also developed the FI40A–20S, which has the same
number of pins as the FI40–20S but a larger solder row pitch to enable
easier soldering. Since the applicable cable diameter of the case has been
increased, the FI40A–20S can also be used with thick wires (diameter:
9.2 mm).
These connectors enable the soldering of wires of up to around #20AWG.

When a large number of #20AWG wires are used, however, the pitch of
the solder contacts may be too small to achieve satisfactory workability.
To overcome this problem, the Hirose Electric FI40–2015S has been
developed. The number of pins has been reduced so that the pitch of the
solder contacts is as large as a conventional MR connector.
NOTE
The connectors can also be used for pulse coders and other
equipment. In this case, the supported cable outside
diameters are 9.2 mm and 6.0 mm, respectively. Either
connector can be used, depending on the outside diameter
of the cable to be used.
The FANUC–developed cable (A66L–0001–0286) has an
outside diameter of 8.5 mm and cannot be used with these
connectors.
355
Recommended
connectors and
applicable housings
Connector name FANUC–authorized FANUC–authorized FANUC order number of

in Connection connector housing or case applicable cable Remarks
Manual (manufacturer) (manufacturer) (FANUC–developed cable)
PCR–E20FA PCR–E20FA PCR–V20LA A66L–0001–0284#10P Plastic housing

Pressure contact (Honda Tsushin) (Honda Tsushin) (Outside diameter: 6.2 mm)
for separate
se arate wires
PCS–E20LA Metal housing
(Honda Tsushin)
FI30–20S FI–20–CV2 Plastic housing

(Hirose Electric) (Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/E FCN–240C020–Y/S Plastic housing

(Fujitsu) (Fujitsu)
52622–2011 52624–2015 Plastic housing

(Molex) (Molex)
PCR–E20FS PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA A66L–0001–0284#10P Plastic housing

Solder contact (Honda Tsushin) (Honda Tsushin) (Outside diameter: 6.2 mm)
PCS–E20LA Metal housing

(Honda Tsushin)
FI40–20S FI–20–CV2 Plastic housing

(Hirose Electric) (Hirose Electric)
FI40–2015S FI40–2015S FI–20–CV A66L–0001–0286 Plastic housing

15–pin solder (Hirose Electric) (Hirose Electric) (Outside diameter: 8.5 mm)
contact
FI40A–20S FI40A–20S FI–20–CV5 A66L–0001–0367 Plastic housing

Solder contact (Hirose Electric) (Hirose Electric) A66L–0001–0368
(Outside diameter: 9.2 mm)
356
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX CONNECTORS AND CABLES
Specialized tools for

assembling pressure
contact connector
FANUC–authorized
Connector name in
connector Wire preparation tool Pressure tool Remarks
Connection Manual
(manufacturer)
PCR–E20FA PCR–E20FA PCS–K2A FHPT–918A Low price

(Honda Tsushin)
JGPS–015–1/1–20 MFC–K1 (Note)
JGPS–014 PCS–K1
FHAT–918A
FI30–20S FI30–20CAT FI30–20/ID Low price

(Hirose Electric)
FI30–20CAT1 HHP–502
FI30–20GP
FCN–247J020–G/S FCN–237T–T043/H FCN–237T–T109/H

(Fujitsu) FCN–247T–T066/H
FCN–237T–T044/H
FCN–237T–T062/H
52622–2011 57829–5000 57830–5000 Low price

(Molex)
57823–5000 57824–5000
NOTE
1 The tools in the shaded boxes are available from FANUC (order number: A02B–0120–K391).
2 The tools are designed for use with the connectors of the corresponding manufacturers.
357
Materials for cable Machine tool builders are required to manufacture or procure the
assemblies materials for the cable assemblies to be used with their products. FANUC
recommends the following materials as being suitable for interface
connectors. Individual machine tool builders are encouraged to contact
each cable manufacturer for themselves, as required.
Material Use Constitution FANUC Manufacturer Remark

specification
number
10–pair cable General use 0.08mm2 A66L–0001–0284 Hitachi Cable, Ltd.

10–pair #10P Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
6–pair cable CRT interface 0.08mm2 A66L–0001–0295 Hitachi Cable, Ltd. 20 m or less
(press–mount) 6–pair
6–conductor CRT interface 6–conductor A66L–0001–0296 Hitachi Cable, Ltd. 50 m or less

coaxial cable (long–distance) coaxial
12–conductor Pulse coder, 0.5mm2 A66L–0001–0286 Hitachi Cable, Ltd. 20 m or less

composite cable linear scale, 6–conductor Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
manual pulse 0.18mm2
generator 3–pair
0.75mm2 A66L–0001–0402 Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. 30 m or less

6–conductor Usable on
0.18mm2 movable parts
3–pair
1.25mm2 A66L–0001–0403 Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. 50 m or less

6–conductor Usable on
0.18mm2 movable parts
3–pair
358
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX D. MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL
D MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL
359
D. MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL APPENDIX B–61393E/06
D.1 The Series 0 has a machine operator’s panel which consists of general
operation keys configured as a flat keyboard. The keys and LEDs on the
OUTLINE flat keyboard are configured using matrices. Input from the keys and
output to the LEDs are performed using encoded signals via the CNC
DI/DO interface. The number of DI/DO signals required for the
operator’s panel can thus be substantially reduced.
Encoding and data transfer are automatically performed by the PMC

control software. The user need only create a PMC program according
to the bit images for the keys or LEDs. The PMC–MODEL L or
PMC–MODEL M is required.
In addition to the flat keyboard, the machine operator’s panel features an

emergency stop button, override switch, and program protect key switch.
The minimum required switches are clustered closely together.
The machine tool builder can also order only the control printed circuit
board for the machine operator’s panel, and design the operator’s panel
itself as required.
Machine operator’s panels and control printed circuit boards which

conform to European safety standards (CE marking) are also available.
Table D.1 (a) Machine operator’s panels

Specification drawing
Type Name Keyboard Connectable I/O card
number
T series A02B–0091–C141
Machine operator’s
o erator s panel
anel Small–size
M series A02B–0092–C141
A I/O–C5 C6
I/O–C5, C6, C7
T series A02B–0091–C161
o erator s panel
anel Full–key
M series A02B–0092–C161
T series A02B–0098–C170#TB
Machine operator’s panel
Small–size
qualifying for CE marking M series A02B–0099–C150#MB
B I/O–E1,
I/O–E1 E2,
E2 E3
T series A02B–0099–C161#TB
Full–key
qualifying for CE marking M series A02B–0099–C161#MB
Table D.1 (b) Control PC board for machine operator’s panels

Type Name Specification Connectable I/O card
With built–in sneak cur- A16B–1310–0380

Control printed circuit
rent prevention circuit
board for machine opera-
A I/O–C5 C6
I/O–C5, C6, C7
tor’s panels No sneak current preven- A16B–1310–0381
(conventional model) tion circuit
With built–in sneak cur- A16B–2300–0110

Control circuit board,
rent prevention circuit
qualifying
q y g for CE marking,
g
B I/O–E1 E2,
I/O–E1, E2 E3
for machine operator’s No sneak current preven- A16B–2300–0111
panels tion circuit
360
D.2
OPERATION
D.2.1 The operator’s panel is provided with a lot of keys, LEDs, rotary switches,
General Description of etc. For keys and LEDs, they are coded, and connected to the CNC with
smaller number of signal lines than the actual number of keys or LEDs.
Operation Since coding and data transfer are executed by the management program
of the PMC automatically, it is only necessary to operate the key or bit
image by the PMC program. (See Fig. D.2.1.)
Bear in mind that the PMC management only executes the generation of
bit image for LED, but not any operation by the significance of bit. When
“EDIT” key is depressed, for instance, only one bit (F293.0)
corresponding to the EDIT key is turned to “1”, but the CNC will not be
turned to EDIT mode. It is not turned to the EDIT mode until “1” is
transferred to the bit of EDIT mode by the PMC program. The same
applies to the LED, and all the ON/OFF operations must be processed by
program.
Bit Manage- Input

F292 – ment X.. Keyboard
software (Coding)
Bit Output
G242 – Y.. LED
(Coding)
LED
Input
X.. Rotary
(Constant) Switch,
etc.
PMC Input
Program X.. (Constant)
(User)
Output Operator’s
F.. Y.. panel
G..
(CNC) CNC Master PCB (Machine side DI/DO)
Fig. D.2.1 Connection block diagram of operator’s panel
361
D.2.2 The key switch signal is generated by the bit image at the PMC address
Key Switch Signal (F292 – F299) through the management software of the PMC. Whether
the necessary key is depressed can be known by checking the bit image
of the key switch by the PMC program of the user. While the key is
depressed, the bit corresponding to the key is turned to “1“. In addition,
the key may be input up to two at the same time. Do not attempt to use
in such a manner that more than three keys need to be depressed at the
same time in using the keyboard input. If more than three keys are
depressed at the same time, the key will not be properly input. It takes
a maximum of approx. 60 msec. after depressing the key until the bit of
the key is turned to “1” (“0”).
D.2.3 Generate the LED signal by the bit image at the PMC address (G242 –
LED Signal G249) through the PMC program of the user. While “1” is written at the
bit image of the LED, the corresponding LED is turned on automatically.
Similarly when “0” is written at the bit image, the LED is turned off.
When the power is turned on, all the “LED” are turned off. It takes a
maximum of approx. 200 msec. after “1” (“0”) is written in the bit image
by the PMC until the LED is actually turned on (of).
D.2.4 Since the contact signal of emergency stop button, over–ride rotary switch
Emergency, Over–ride, and protect key is directly input to the PMC, process such signal by the
PMC program.
Protect Key
362
D.3 The machine operator’s panel has 2 kinds as type–A and type–B. When
it is connected with the I/O card which have sink type DO drivers, type–A
CONNECTION must be used. And when source type DO drivers, type–B must be used.
D Type A (does not qualify Connect the M1 and M2 connectors of the I/O card (I/O–C5, C6, or C7) to
for CE marking) the 22 DI points and eight DO points of the machine. Between the M1A
and M1B connectors and the M2A and M2B connectors, signals are
relayed on a one–to–one basis within the operator’s panel, with the
exception of those used in the operator’s panel. By connecting M1 to
M1A and M2 to M2A using one–to–one cables, therefore, those signals
that are not used in the operator’s panel can be connected to the
general–purpose DI/DO on the machine, through the M1B and M2B
connectors. The emergency stop signal (*ESP) is, however, also
connected to M1B.
+24 V is used as the power supply common and override common in the
operator’s panel. 0 V and +24 V of the M1 connector must be connected to
the operator’s panel. For +24 V operation, the operator’s panel consumes
approximately 0.5 A. Determine the cable material and number of wires
for 0 V and +24 V based on the current rating. If +24 V is also used for
DI/DO on the machine, that also must be considered. For 0 V and +24 V,
connect all the power supply pins to ensure a reliable connection.
The M1B and M2B connectors are not required when the lines are
branched between the I/O card and operator’s panel so that only required
signals are connected to the operator’s panel.
CNC I/O–C5 to C7 Control PCB for machine operator’s panel
M1 M1A M1B
To machine
DI/DO
M2 M2A M2B
To machine DI/DO
(when M1B and Keyboard and LEDs CKD, CDX1,
M2B are not used) CDX2, CDX3
D Type B (product Connect the M201 and M202 connectors of the I/O card (I/O–E1, E2, or
qualifying for CE E3) to the 22 DI points and eight DO points of the machine. The
marking) connection between the M201 and M1A connectors is the same as that
between M1 and M1A for type A. Source–type I/O cards E1 to E3 require
the connection of an external 24 V power supply. The connection between
the M202 and MB2A connectors, therefore, differs from that between M2
and M2A for type A.
CNC I/O–E1 to E3 External 24 VDC Control PCBV for machine
power supply operator’s panel
M201 M1A M1B

To machine
DI/DO
M202 MB2A MB2B
To machine DI/DO
(when M1B and Keyboard and LEDs CKD, CDX1,
MB2B are not used) CDX2, CDX3
363
Connector table (Type A)
M1A M1B
1 0V 33 X21.3 1 0V 33
2 0V 34 X21.2 2 0V 34
19 X21.4 19 X21.4
3 0V 35 X21.1 3 0V 35
20 X16.3 20 X16.3
4 0V 36 X21.0 4 0V 36
21 X16.2 21 X16.2
5 X20.5 37 X20.6 5 37
22 X17.3 22 X17.3
6 X16.7 38 X16.5 6 X16.7 38 X16.5
23 X17.2 23 X17.2
7 X17.7 39 X17.5 7 X17.7 39 X17.5
24 X18.3 24 X18.3
8 X18.7 40 X18.5 8 X18.7 40 X18.5
25 X18.2 25 X18.2
9 X17.1 41 X21.7 9 X17.1 41
26 X21.6 26 X21.6
10 X17.0 42 X22.7 10 X17.0 42
27 X21.5 27
11 X16.1 43 X22.6 11 X16.1 43 X22.6
28 28
12 X16.0 44 X22.5 12 X16.0 44
29 +24V 29 +24V
13 X20.7 45 X22.4 13 45
30 +24V 30 +24V
14 X20.4 46 X22.3 14 46
31 +24V 31 +24V
15 X20.3 47 X22.2 15 47
32 +24V 32 +24V
16 X20.2 48 X22.1 16 48
17 X20.1 49 X22.0 17 49
18 X20.0 50 18 50
M2A M2B
1 0V 33 Y51.7 1 0V 33
2 0V 34 Y51.6 2 0V 34
19 Y50.2 19 Y50.2
3 0V 35 Y51.5 3 0V 35
20 Y50.3 20 Y50.3
4 0V 36 Y51.4 4 0V 36
21 Y50.0 21 Y50.0
5 Y48.7 37 Y51.3 5 Y48.7 37
22 Y49.3 22 Y49.3
6 Y48.6 38 Y51.2 6 Y48.6 38
23 Y49.1 23 Y49.1
7 Y48.5 39 Y51.1 7 Y48.5 39
24 Y49.0 24 Y49.0
8 Y48.4 40 Y51.0 8 Y48.4 40
25 Y48.0 25 Y48.0
9 Y49.7 41 Y49.4 9 Y49.7 41 Y49.4
26 Y48.1 26 Y48.1
10 Y50.5 42 Y53.7 10 Y50.5 42 Y53.7
27 Y48.2 27 Y48.2
11 Y52.7 43 Y53.6 11 Y52.7 43 Y53.6
28 28
12 Y52.6 44 Y53.5 12 Y52.6 44 Y53.5
29 29
13 Y52.5 45 Y53.4 13 Y52.5 45 Y53.4
30 30
14 Y52.4 46 Y53.3 14 Y52.4 46 Y53.3
31 31
15 Y52.3 47 Y53.2 15 Y52.3 47 Y53.2
32 32
16 Y52.2 48 Y53.1 16 Y52.2 48 Y53.1
17 Y52.1 49 Y53.0 17 Y52.1 49 Y53.0
18 Y52.0 50 NC8 18 Y52.0 50
Hatch marks signals are used in the Machine Operator’s Panel Control PCB. Other signals
are possible to use for machine side DI/DO through the connectors M1B and M2B.
NOTE
1 X21.4 is an emergency stop signal (*ESP). It is used in the Machine Operator’s Panel and also
connected to M1B.
2 The same name signals (except 0V) in M1A, M1B, MB2A, M2B are connected point to point
through the Machine Operator’s Panel Control PCB.
364
Connector table (Type B)
M1A M1B
1 0V 33 X21.3 1 0V 33
2 0V 34 X21.2 2 0V 34
19 X21.4 19 X21.4
3 0V 35 X21.1 3 0V 35
20 X16.3 20 X16.3
4 0V 36 X21.0 4 0V 36
21 X16.2 21 X16.2
5 X20.5 37 X20.6 5 37
22 X17.3 22 X17.3
6 X16.7 38 X16.5 6 X16.7 38 X16.5
23 X17.2 23 X17.2
7 X17.7 39 X17.5 7 X17.7 39 X17.5
24 X18.3 24 X18.3
8 X18.7 40 X18.5 8 X18.7 40 X18.5
25 X18.2 25 X18.2
9 X17.1 41 X21.7 9 X17.1 41
26 X21.6 26 X21.6
10 X17.0 42 X22.7 10 X17.0 42
27 X21.5 27
11 X16.1 43 X22.6 11 X16.1 43 X22.6
28 28
12 X16.0 44 X22.5 12 X16.0 44
29 +24V 29 +24V
13 X20.7 45 X22.4 13 45
30 +24V 30 +24V
14 X20.4 46 X22.3 14 46
31 +24V 31 +24V
15 X20.3 47 X22.2 15 47
32 +24V 32 +24V
16 X20.2 48 X22.1 16 48
17 X20.1 49 X22.0 17 49
18 X20.0 50 18 50
MB2A MB2B
1 0V 33 Y51.7 1 0V 33
2 0V 34 Y51.6 2 0V 34
19 Y50.2 19 Y50.2
3 0V 35 Y51.5 3 0V 35
20 Y50.3 20 Y50.3
4 0V 36 Y51.4 4 0V 36
21 Y50.0 21 Y50.0
5 Y48.7 37 Y51.3 5 Y48.7 37
22 Y49.3 22 Y49.3
6 Y48.6 38 Y51.2 6 Y48.6 38
23 Y49.1 23 Y49.1
7 Y48.5 39 Y51.1 7 Y48.5 39
24 Y49.0 24 Y49.0
8 Y48.4 40 Y51.0 8 Y48.4 40
25 Y48.0 25 Y48.0
9 Y49.7 41 Y49.4 9 Y49.7 41 Y49.4
26 Y48.1 26 Y48.1
10 Y50.5 42 Y53.7 10 Y50.5 42 Y53.7
27 Y48.2 27 Y48.2
11 Y52.7 43 Y53.6 11 Y52.7 43 Y53.6
28 NC3 28 NC3
12 Y52.6 44 Y53.5 12 Y52.6 44 Y53.5
29 NC4 29 NC4
13 Y52.5 45 Y53.4 13 Y52.5 45 Y53.4
30 NC5 30 NC5
14 Y52.4 46 Y53.3 14 Y52.4 46 Y53.3
31 NC6 31 NC6
15 Y52.3 47 Y53.2 15 Y52.3 47 Y53.2
32 NC7 32 NC7
16 Y52.2 48 Y53.1 16 Y52.2 48 Y53.1
17 Y52.1 49 Y53.0 17 Y52.1 49 Y53.0
18 Y52.0 50 NC8 18 Y52.0 50 NC8
Hatch marks signals are used in the Machine Operator’s Panel Control PCB. Other signals
are possible to use for machine side DI/DO through the connectors M1B and MB2B.
NOTE
1 X21.4 is an emergency stop signal (*ESP). It is used in the Machine Operator’s Panel and also
connected to M1B.
2 The same name signals (except 0V) in M1A, M1B, MB2A, MB2B are connected point to point
through the Machine Operator’s Panel Control PCB.
365
D Examples for connections

between M202 of I/O card
E1 to E3 and MB2A of PCB
(Type B) for operator’s
panel control
I/O card E1 to E3 External 24 VDC Power Supply Machine Operator’s Panel Control PCB (Type B)
M202(01) to (04), MB2A (01) to
(50) (04), (50)
COMO0 to 0V, NC8
COMO4
M202 (33) MB2A (33)
Y51.7 Y51.7
M202 (34) MB2A (34)
Y51.6 Y51.6

M202 (40) MB2A (40)
Y51.0 Y51.0
M202 (**) MB2A (**) Y**.* Y**.* MB2B (**)

Y**.*
Machine
M202 (**) MB2A (**) Y**.* Y**.* MB2B (**) side DO
Y**.*

Machine side DO
(Without relay of MB2B)
Example connection 1
Machine Operator’s Panel

External 24 VDC Power Supply
I/O card E1 to E3 Control PCB (Type B)
M202 (01) MB2A (29) NC4 NC4 MB2B (29)

COMO3
M202 (02) MB2A (30) NC5 NC5 MB2B (30)
COMO2
M202 (03) MB2A (31) NC6 NC6 MB2B (31)
COMO1
M202 (04) MB2A (32) NC7 NC7 MB2B (32)
COMO0
M202 (50) MB2A (50) NC8 NC8 MB2B (50)
COMO4
M202 (33) MB2A (33)
Y51.7 Y51.7
M202 (34) MB2A (34)
Y51.6 Y51.6

M202 (40) MB2A (40)
Y51.0 Y51.0
M202 (**) MB2A (**) Y**.* Y**.* MB2B (**)

Y**.*
Machine
M202 (**) MB2A (**) Y**.* Y**.* MB2B (**) side DO
Y**.*

Machine side DO
(Without relay of MB2B)
Example connection 2
366
D.4 The DI/DO signals at the following addresses (PMC) are used exclusively
for the operator’s panel.
OPERATOR’S PANEL
CONNECTION
SIGNALS
D List of operator’s panel
PMC ADDRESS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X20 KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X21 KEY :RSV1 :ESP :OV8 :OV4 :OV2 :OV1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X22 KST RSV3 RSV2 KA3 KA2 KA1 KA0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y51 LD7 LD6 LD5 LD4 LD3 LD2 LD1 LD0
D.4.1 Contact B of the emergency stop button of the operator’s panel is

:ESP (X21.4) connected in series for output via the No. 19 pin of connector M1B. To
use the emergency stop signal on the machine side, therefore, the
Emergency Stop emergency stop signal should be connected to connector M1B.
If the No. 19 pin of connector M1B is not used (the emergency stop signal
is not used on the machine side, etc.), the emergency stop signal common
should be connected to +24V inside via the setting pin inside the
operator’s panel PCB.
The CNC directly monitors this signal.
For the emergency stop button, one circuit of Contact B is available.
Install wiring, therefore, so that the servo amplifier MCC is broken at
emergency stop. (Contact: Max. AC 220V, 5A).
24 V inside
MA1–29–32
+24V MA1–29–32
:ESP
M1A–19
Emergency stop M1B–19 Emergency stop contact on
button machine side
Setting pin (SA1)
A B
Setting pin SA1 A B
Operator’s panel
A : M1B–19 pin used
B : M1B–19 not used
(Set to A at shipment from factory)
Fig. D.4.1 Emeragency stop signal connection
367
D.4.2 The key switch signal is input directly. Execute processing by using the
:KEY (X21.7) Program PMC so that the protect mode is reset at KEY=1.
On the PC board for controlling the machine operator’s panel, the signal
Protect Signal can be used as a general–purpose input signal.
D.4.3 The override codes are input according to the table below. Execute
:OV1–:OV8 processing by using the PMC.
(X21.0–21.3) Override Table D.4.3 Override code
Signal Rotary
:OV8 :OV4 :OV2 :OV1
switch dial
0% 1 1 1 1
10% 1 1 1 0
20% 1 1 0 1
30% 1 1 0 0
40% 1 0 1 1

150% 0 0 0 0
(Binary code reverse signal)
D.4.4 These signals are processed directly by the PMC management software
KD0–KD7 (X20.0–20.7) as coded signals of the key switch and the LED. Therefore, they should
not be processed (bit operation) in the user’s PMC program.
KA0–KA3 (X22.0–22.3),
KST (X22.7)
LD0–LD7 (Y51.0–51.7)
RSV1–RSV3
(X21.5, X22.4–22.5)
D.4.5 The above PMC addresses are used as bit images for reading the key or
F292–F299, turning the LED on/off.
(See items D.2.2 and D.2.3 and Table D.5.3.)
G242–G249
368
D.5
SELF–DIAGNOSTIC
FUNCTION
D.5.1 The operator’s panel PCB (the reverse side of the operator’s panel) is
Status Display LED equipped with a green status display LED. It indicates the following
statuses.
Flashing about every second : Normal
On (No flashing) : Test mode
Other than above : Fault
D.5.2 To set the operator’s panel to test mode, turn the power on while holding
Test Mode down the keys corresponding to bits 0 and 1 of PMC address F292.
Bit 0 of F292 corresponds to A1 on the small–size operator’s panel and

to A6 on the full–key operator’s panel. Bit 1 of F292 corresponds to B1
on the small–size operator’s panel and to B6 on the full–key operator’s
panel.
As soon as the test mode is assumed, all the LED’s flash seven times
simultaneously. By this it is possible to check whether the LED is faulty
or not. If any of the keys is depressed thereafter, the LED of the depressed
key lights up. By this it is possible to check whether the key is faulty or
not. In the test mode, however, neither the depressed key is transferred
to the PMC nor is it possible to light the LED from the PMC.
To exit from test mode, press the keys corresponding to bits 0 and 2 of
F292 simultaneously.
Bit 2 of F292 corresponds to C1 on the small–size operator’s panel and

to C6 on the full–key operator’s panel.
369
D.5.3 The address (equivalent to bit) for key signal read–in or LED ON/OFF is
Key Board Address as shown in the table below.
Table D.5.3 (a) Key board address for small type operator’s panel
BIT 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PMC ADDRESS
F292/G242 F3 F2 F1 D1 C1 B1 A1
F293/G243 F4 D2 C2 B2 A2
F294/G244 D4 D3 C4 C3 B4 B3 A4 A3
F295/G245 F6 F5 D5 C5 B5 A5
F296/G246 F8 D6 C6 B6 A6
F297/G247 D8 C8 B8 A8 A7
(Note) (Note)
F298/G248 F9 D9 C9 B9 A9
F299/G249 F10 D10 C10 B10 A10

(Note) (Note)
Key coordinates
NOTE
1 This address list is the standard machine operator’s panel external diagram for Fig. D.7.1 (a)
and (b).
2 The key coordinate keys B8, D8, B10, D10 used in 0–TC are not available.
Table D.5.3 (b) Keyboard address for full–key operator’s panel

BIT 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PMC ADDRESS
F292/G242 E1 C1 A1 E6 D6 C6 B6 A6
F293/G243 E2 C2 A2 E7 D7 C7 B7 A7
F294/G244 E3 C3 A3 E8 D8 C8 B8 A8
F295/G245 E5 C4 A4 E9 D9 C9 B9 A9
F296/G246 D2 C5 A5 E10 D10 C10 B10 A10
F297/G247 D4 D5 B2 E11 D11 C11 B11 A11
F298/G248 D1 B1 B4 E12 D12 C12 B12 A12
F299/G249 D3 B3 B5 E13 D13 C13 B13 A13
Key coordinates
NOTE
This address list is the standard machine operator’s panel external diagram for Fig. D.7.1 (c)
and (d).
370
D.6 To use operator’s panel, set the OPERATOR PANEL on the Parameter
setting screen when PMC ladder program is registered.
SETTING OF When using the operator panel, set the parameter preceded by ‘02’ in Fig.
OPERATOR’S PANEL D.6 to ‘YES’.
AVAILABILITY IN 1) At first make the CRT display the parameter setting pattern show in
REGISTERING PMC Fig. D.6.
(Key in ‘10 NL’ immediately after loading the FAPT LADDER
LADDER PROGRAM
system floppy or via the menu pattern.)
2) Key in ‘02 NL’
The following is displayed in the lower left part of the screen.
EXAMPLE 0 : NO, 1 : YES.
OP. PANEL =
3) Key in ‘1 NL’ when using the operator’s panel, and ‘0 NL’ when not
using it.
The set parameter is displayed.
KEY IN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING NO. S WHICH YOU WANT TO SET PARA.S
NO. ITEMS CURRENT PARAMETER
01 PMC PARAM. (D) SIZE ; 400BYTES (MAX 400)

02 OPERATOR PANEL ; NO
00 NOTHING TO SET
; PMC TYPE =M
; R–AREA =0
NO.=
Fig. D.6 Parameter setting pattern
371
D.7
EXPLANATIONS FOR
OPERATOR’S PANEL
D.7.1 This operator’s panel is operative only on PMC–L/M. The operator’s

Configuration panel is made up of the following keys, LEDs, etc.
D Key switch (Seat key)
D Small type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 key (T series),
.................... 46 key (M series),
.................... full key type
D LEDs (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepared for all key switches
D Override rotary switch . . . . . . . . . . . 4 bits
D Emergency stop button . . . . . . . . . . . 1 bits
D Program protect key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 bits
D Manual pulse generator . . . . . . . . . . 1 pcs (only for full key type)
372
Emergency stop
Override rotary
button
switch
in the key describes LED (red)

Key switch (sheet key)
f
Program protect key
Fig. D.7.1 (a) Front view of operator’s panel for 9″ small type CRT/MDI unit (T series)
373
Fig. D.7.1 (b) Front view of operator’s panel for 9″ small type CRT/MDI unit (M series)
374
B–61393E/06
Override rotary switch Program protectkey
375
APPENDIX
Emergency stop button Cordinate system

Manual pulse generator Key switch (sheet key)
f
in the key describes LED (red)
Fig. D.7.1 (c) Front view of operator’s panel for full key 9″ CRT/MDI unit (T series)
D. MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL
Cordinate system
Fig. D.7.1 (d) Front view of operator’s panel for full key 9″ CRT/MDI unit (M series)
376
This bracket can be removed.

Panel cutout
Type B has a stud

for protective
ground (M4).
Weight 1.9 kg
Part mounting limit
(including cables)
Fig. D.7.1 (e) Operator’s panel for 9″ small type CRT/MDI unit
NOTE
The above figure applies to type A. For type B, connector M2A is replaced with MB2A, and M2B
with MB2B.
377
Panel cutout
This bracket can be removed.
Weight 1.9 kg
Part mounting limit
(including cables)
Type B has a stud

for protective
ground (M4).
Fig. D.7.1 (f) Operator’s panel for 9″ full key CRT/MDI unit
NOTE
The above figure applies to type A. For type B, connector M2A is replaced with MB2A, and M2B
with MB2B.
378
D Differences between
types A and B
Differences in the
silk–screen printing on
the panel, other than the
key sheets
Type A Type B
Does not qualify for CE marking Qualifies for CE marking
379
The symbolic design key

sheets for type B
operator’s panel
(1) M series full key type
(2) M series small type
380
(3) T series full key type
(4) T series small type
381
Meaning of the keys
English Symbol Meanings
AUTO mode selection:

AUTO Mode is automatic operation.
EDIT mode selection:

EDIT Mode is program edition.
MDI mode selection:

MDI Mode is MDI.
JOG feed mode selection:

JOG Mode is jog feed.
INC STEP feed mode selection:

JOG Mode is step feed.
HANDLE feed mode selection:

MPG Mode is manual handle feed.
MPG HANDLE feed mode and 1st HANDLE unit selection:

1 Mode is manual handle feed and 1st manual handle is available.
MPG HANDLE feed mode and 2nd HANDLE unit selection:

2 Mode is manual handle feed and 2nd manual handle is available.
ZERO return mode selection:

HOME Mode is zero return.
TEACH in JOG (Teach in HANDLE) mode selection:

TEACH Mode is teach in jog (teach in handle)
OFSET TOOL OFFSET DATA write mode selection:

MESUR Mode is tool offset setting.
CNC alarm:
? LED is turned on when CNC alarm. Key pad does not have an meanings.
NC
MACHINE alarm:
? LED is turned on when Machine alarm.
MC Key pad does not have any meanings.
SINGL Single block:

BLOCK Single block program execution for test operation.
Block delete:
BLOCK
Execution block is stopped and jump blocks following/to next end of block (;)
DELET
in AUTO mode (Optional block skip).
PROGRAM STOP (Output only):

PRG
When automatic operation is stopped by M00 command in the program, LED
STOP
on the button is turned on.
382
OPTIONAL STOP:
OPT
When this signal is turned on, auto running operation is stopped after execut-
STOP
ing M01 block.
DRY RUN:
DRY When this signal is turned on, axes feed speed will be JOG feed speed not
RUN command speed on the program.
To check the moving of tool without workpiece.
MACHINE LOCK:
PRG When this signal is tuned on and auto running operation, axes are not moved
TEST but position screen on CRT is only executed.
To check the program.
HANDLE feed X axis selection:

MPG When manual handle feed mode is selected and turn on this button, X axis
X is moved by manual handle feed. (Same for Y–axis, Z–axis, C–axis and
4–axis).
WORK LIGHT:
WORK WORK LIGHT on/off control
LIGHT
HANDLE INTERRUPTION:
MPG
Selecting this button in automatic operation, the moving value of manual han-
INTRT
dle feed is added to the moving value of program.
AXES INHIBIT:
AXIS The specific axis or all axes are stopped to move.
INHBT
JOG (STEP) FEED OVERRIDE

LOW
UPPER: Set override to the jog feed (or step feed) five steps display.
1
HANDLE FEED MULTIPLY

MEDL LOWER: Manual handle feed multiply 1, 10, 100, 1000.
10
MED
100
MANUAL FEED DIRECTION:

+X Selecting this button in jog feed (or step feed), selected axis is moved to the
selected direction by jog feed (or stop feed). (Same for –X, +Y, –Y and +Z)
TRAVERSE:
TRVRS Executing jog feed in on this button the jog feed is executed in the rapid tra-
verse.
CYCLE CYCLE START:

START Automatic operation is started.
CYCLE CYCLE STOP:

STOP Automatic operation is stopped.
383
COOLANT ON:
CLNT Coolant is started.
ON
COOLANT OFF:
CLNT Coolant is stopped.
OFF
CLNT COOLANT AUTO:

AUTO COOLANT ON/OFF control in AUTO operation.
SPDL SPINDLE OVERRIDE 100%:

100% The rotation of spindle motor is 100% override.
SPDL SPINDLE SPEED DECELERATION:

DEC The rotation of spindle motor is decelerated.
SPDL SPINDLE SPEED ACCELERATION:

INC The rotation of spindle motor is accelerated.
SPINDLE DIRECTION CW:

SPDL The rotating direction of spindle motor is clock wise.
CW
SPINDLE DIRECTION CCW:

SPDL The rotating direction of spindle motor is counter clockwise.
CCW
SPINDLE STOP:
SPDL The rotation of spindle motor is stopped.
STOP
SPINDLE MANUAL FEED:

SPDL
SPINDLE FEED is manually.
JOG
384
D.8 Refer to the following figure to mount the reader/puncher interface to the
operator’s panel.
MOUNTING OF Plate A is usually mounted so as the blind face is front.
READER/PUNCHER However, when reader/puncher interface is mounted, use it so as the
connector mounting face is fronted.
Rotary
Emergency
stop button
PCB
Protect key
Screw
M5 M3 6 mm
Front
Cable J28 Stud bolt (M4)

(With plate B)
Plate B
Nut (M4)
Plate A
Connector mounting face Blind face
Front
Plate A
385
When cable J28 is prepared by the machine tool builder, make the plate
B according to the following figure.
2–M3 19 23
ÃÃ R1
5
2–3.1
42
47
65
75
ÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃ
11.0 5
5
5
Dimensions of plate B
Specification of the connector is as follows.
D–sub connector . . . DBM–25S
Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . D20418–J2 (2pcs.)

(by JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONICS)
Specification No. for cable J28.

Name Specification No. Remarks
Cable J28 A02B–0083–K801 5m

(including plate B)
386
D.9
PCB FOR MACHINE
OPERATOR’S PANEL
CONTROL
Increase of maximum I/O When the PC board for controlling the machine operator’s panel is used,
numbers the Series 0 supports the number of I/O points indicated in the table below.
The numbers in the table do not include the I/O points added by using the
FANUC I/O Link.
A B C D
Maximum
number or
I/O–C7 I/O–B2 Number of Number of
I/Os
or or operator’s control
E=A+B+C–D
I/O–E3 I/O–F1 panel I/Os signals
DI 104 104 64+6 22 256
DO 72 72 64 8 200
Input/output signal
regulation
D Input/output signal Set the switch contacts to satisfy the following conditions.
regulation 1) *KYD0–KYD7, #KCY0–*KCY7
Contact capacity DC6V over 2mA
Leak current between contacts when Under 0.2mA (DC6V)

open circuit
Voltage drop between contacts when Under 0.9V (current: 1mA)

open circuit Note 1)
NOTE
When the diode is inserted in series in the contact in order
to prevent a current detour, also set within the above
described voltage.
When the detour prevention diode is not inserted, up to 2
switches can simultaneously close the contact.
When more than 3 have closed the contact, the data cannot
be correctly exchanged.
2) *ESP/KEY/*OV1–*OV8
Contact capacity DC30V, over 16mA
Leak current between contacts when Under 1 mA (DC26.4V)

open circuit
Voltage drop between contacts when Under 2 V (current: 8.5 mA)

open circuit
387
D Output signal regulation Ensure that the LEDs satisfy the following conditions.
1) *LD0–*LD15, *T01–*T32
Normal direction voltage 2.4 V max. (If = 5mA)
Normal direction current 30 mA max.
Reverse direction voltage 3V max.
Power supply capacity DC24V (approx. 0.5A) is supplied to the operator’s panel which uses this
operator’s panel control PCB by the CNC.
This power source can use the items described below.
1) This PCB
2) Keyboard
3) LED
4) General–use input 6 points
5) Other operator’s panel lamps, for LED (maximum 0.1A)
388
External and installation

dimensions
D External dimensions
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
7–M3 hole
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
The area surrounded by broken lines must not contain a bracket.
Part mounting limit (excluding the cables)
Connector layout on printed circuit board
Status display LED (green)
Fig. D.9 (a) External dimensions of printed circuit board and brackets
389
Interface
D Connector signal
arrangement
M1A M2A
01 0V 33 X21.3 01 0V 33 Y51.7
02 0V 34 X21.2 02 0V 34 Y51.6
19 X21.4 19 Y50.2
03 0V 35 X21.1 03 0V 35 Y51.5
20 X16.3 20 Y50.3
04 0V 36 X21.0 04 0V 36 Y51.4
21 X16.2 21 Y50.0
05 X20.5 37 X20.6 05 Y48.7 37 Y51.3
22 X17.3 22 Y49.3
06 X16.7 38 X16.5 06 Y48.6 38 Y51.2
23 X17.2 23 Y49.1
07 X17.7 39 X17.5 07 Y48.5 39 Y51.1
24 X18.3 24 Y49.0
08 X18.7 40 X18.5 08 Y48.4 40 Y51.0
25 X18.2 25 Y48.0
09 X17.1 41 X21.7 09 Y49.7 41 Y49.4
26 X21.6 26 Y48.1
10 X17.0 42 X22.7 10 Y50.5 42 Y53.7
27 X21.5 27 Y48.2
11 X16.1 43 X22.6 11 Y52.7 43 Y53.6
28 28
12 X16.0 44 X22.5 12 Y52.6 44 Y53.5
29 +24V 29
13 X20.7 45 X22.4 13 Y52.5 45 Y53.4
30 +24V 30
14 X20.4 46 X22.3 14 Y52.4 46 Y53.3
31 +24V 31
15 X20.3 47 X22.2 15 Y52.3 47 Y53.2
32 +24V 32
16 X20.2 48 X22.1 16 Y52.2 48 Y53.1
17 X20.1 49 X22.0 17 Y52.1 49 Y53.0
18 X20.0 50 18 Y52.0 50
Fig. D.9 (b)
NOTE
The signals within are the signals used by this operator’s
panel control P.C.B.
M1B M2B
01 33 01 33
02 0V 34 02 0V 34
19 X21.4 19 Y50.2
03 0V 35 03 0V 35
20 X16.3 20 Y50.3
04 36 04 0V 36
21 X16.2 21 Y50.0
05 37 05 Y48.7 37
22 X17.3 22 Y49.3
06 X16.7 38 X16.5 06 Y48.6 38
23 X17.2 23 Y49.1
07 X17.7 39 X17.5 07 Y48.5 39
24 X18.3 24 Y49.0
08 X18.7 40 X18.5 08 Y48.4 40
25 X18.2 25 Y48.0
09 X17.1 41 09 Y49.7 41 Y49.4
26 X21.6 26 Y48.1
10 X17.0 42 10 Y50.5 42 Y53.7
27 27 Y48.2
11 X16.1 43 X22.6 11 Y52.7 43 Y53.6
28 28
12 X16.0 44 12 Y52.6 44 Y53.5
29 +24V 29
13 45 13 Y52.5 45 Y53.4
30 +24V 30
14 46 14 Y52.4 46 Y53.3
31 +24V 31
15 47 15 Y52.3 47 Y53.2
32 32
16 48 16 Y52.2 48 Y53.1
17 49 17 Y52.1 49 Y53.0
18 50 18 Y52.0 50
Fig. D.9 (c)
390
CDX1 CDX2
01 :ESP 01 COM3
02 COM1 02 :OV1
03 :OV2
CDX3 04 :OV4
01 COM2 05 :OV8
02 KEY 06
Fig. D.9 (d)
CDK
A B
01 01
02 :KYD0 02 :KYD1
03 :KYD2 03 :KYD3
04 :KYD4 04 :KYD5
05 :KYD6 05 :KYD7
06 :KCY0 06 :KCY1
07 :KCY2 07 :KCY3
08 :KCY4 08 :KCY5
09 :KCY6 09 :KCY7
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 :LD0 13 :LD8
14 :LD1 14 :LD9
15 :LD2 15 :LD10
16 :LD3 16 :LD11
17 :LD4 17 :LD12
18 :LD5 18 :LD13
19 :LD6 19 :LD14
20 :LD7 20 :LD15
21 :T01 21 :T02
22 :T11 22 :T12
23 :T21 23 :T22
24 :T31 24 :T32
25 25
Fig. D.9 (e)
391
Table D.9 (a) shows the connector standard name on the cable side.
Table D.9 (a)
Name Standard name Manufacturer
M1A MR–50LMH HONDA TSUSHIN
M1B MR–50LFH HONDA TSUSHIN
M2A MR–50LMH HONDA TSUSHIN
M2B MR–50LFH HONDA TSUSHIN
CDK FAS–50–17 YAMAICHI DENKI
CDX1 5051–02 Housing NIHON MOREX

2759GL Contact

2759GL Contact

2759GL Contact
Cable length The cable connected to CDK must be no longer than 30 cm.
392
Key switch and PMC When the detour prevention diode is not inserted, up to 2 key switches can
address correspondence be simultaneously inputted. A0 to H7 in Table D.9 (b) shows the key
table switch numbers of Figure D.9 (f).
Table D.9 (b)
PMC ADDRESS BIT 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F292 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
F293 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
F294 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
F295 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
F296 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0
F297 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
F298 G7 G6 G5 G4 G3 G2 G1 G0
F299 H7 H6 H5 H4 H3 H2 H1 H0
CKD–A6 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
:KCY0
CKD–B6 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
:KCY1
CKD–A7 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
:KCY2
CKD–B7 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
:KCY3
CKD–A8 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0
:KCY4
CKD–B8 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
:KCY5
CKD–A9 G7 G6 G5 G4 G3 G2 G1 G0
:KCY6
CKD–B9 H7 H6 H5 H4 H3 H2 H1 H0
:KCY7
CKD–B5
:KYD7
CKD–A5
:KYD6
CKD–B4
:KYD5
CKD–A4
:KYD4
CKD–B3
:KYD3
CKD–A3
:KYD2
Detour prevention
CKD–B2
:KYD1 diode
CKD–A2
:KYD0
Fig. D.9 (f)
393
LED–PMC address A0–H7 in Table D.9 (c) shows the LED numbers of Figure D.9 (g) and
correspondence table Figure D.9 (h).
Table D.9 (c)
PMC ADDRESS BIT 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
F242 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0
F243 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
F244 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
F245 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
F246 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 E0
F247 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 F0
F248 G7 G6 G5 G4 G3 G2 G1 G0
F249 H7 H6 H5 H4 H3 H2 H1 H0
394
CKD–A24
:T31
CKD–A23
:T21
CKD–A22
:T11
CKD–A21
:T01
CKD–A13 A0
:LD0
CKD–A14 A1
:LD1
CKD–A15 A2
:LD2
CKD–A16 A3
:LD3
CKD–A17 A4
:LD4
CKD–A18 A5
:LD5
CKD–A19 A6
:LD6
CKD–A20 A7
:LD7
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Fig. D.9 (g)
395
CKD–B24
:T32
CKD–B23
:T22
CKD–B22
:T12
CKD–B21
:T02
CKD–B13
:LD8 E0
CKD–B14
:LD9
E1
CKD–B15
E2
:LD10
CKD–B16
E3
:LD11
CKD–B17
E4
:LD12
CKD–B18
E5
:LD13
CKD–B19
E6
:LD14
CKD–B20
E7
:LD15
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
G0
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
H0
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
H7
Fig. D.9 (h)
396
KEY/:ESP/:OV1 to
:OV8 connection
example
P.C board for machine operator’s panel

Terminal number
Emergency stop
signal
Emergency stop (:ESP) signal:

Contact closed: Emergency stop cancellation
Contact open: Emergency stop state
397
E. PRINTED BOARD FOR OPERATOR’S
PANEL CONTROLLER
(FOR FANUC I/O Link) APPENDIX B–61393E/06
E PRINTED BOARD FOR OPERATOR’S PANEL

CONTROLLER (FOR FANUC I/O Link)
398
PANEL CONTROLLER
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX (FOR FANUC I/O Link)
E.1 The machine operator’s panel interface unit (A16B-2201-0110) is

connected to the Series 0 control unit through the I/O link and is used for
CONNECTION OF interfacing with the machine operator’s panel.
MACHINE It features interfaces with matrix key switches and LEDs.
OPERATOR’S PANEL
INTERFACE UNIT Machine operator’s
panel I/F unit FANUC I/O Link
Series 0
control unit

(supplied by a machine tool builder)
E.1.1
Function Overview
Number of DI/DO points

Operator’s panel control DI/DO=128/128 DI/DO=256/256
PCB allocation to the
I/O Link DI/DO
(Name of
DIor DO module) DI DO DI DO
(OC02I) (OC02O) (OC03I) (OC03O)
Number of matrix key switch 64 96

inputs
Number of matrix LED data 64 64

outputs
Number of general-purpose 32 32
switch inputs
Number of general-purpose LED 32 32

data outputs
Number of total DI/DO points 96 96 128 96
D Matrix key switch inputs (matrix DI)

Ninety-six DI points are provided by a matrix of twelve common
signals times eight data signals. Note that I/O link allocation may limit
the number of usable key switch inputs.
D Matrix LED data outputs (matrix DO)
Sixty-four DO points are provided by a matrix of eight common
signals times eight data signals.
D General-purpose switch inputs (general-purpose DI)
Each general-purpose DI point has an individual interface.
D General-purpose LED data outputs (general-purpose DO)
Each general-purpose DO point has an individual interface.
399
PANEL CONTROLLER
Analog signal inputs D Two inputs (input voltage: 0 to +10 V)

D Input voltages are converted from analog to digital. The resulting five
bits of data are sent to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.
D The analog signal input function can be used regardless of whether I/O
link allocation is 128/128 or 256/256.
Terminal for signal for D Emergency stop and OT release signals are forwarded without change
warding to the power magnetics cabinet.
D Power ON/OFF control signals are forwarded without change to an
input unit.
D Analog signal inputs described in item ”Analog signal inputs” can be
sent out without being changed.
E.1.2
System Configuration
CNC Machine operator’s panel Machine operator’s

interface unit panel
Note 2
FANUC JD1B CM26 Matrix DI/DO
I/O Link (I/O Link)
:ESP, OTR, and
general-purpose
JD1A CM15
DI/DO
Other machine
interface CM16 General-purpose
DI/DO
CM17 General-purpose
Power supply unit CPD1 DI/DO
(24V)
Note 1 CNB1 LM/SM
Power ON/OFF
Power magnetics
cabinet
:ESP , OTR
CNA1
Input unit power
ON/OFF
CRT/MDI
Spindle amp LM/
SM
:ESP : Emergency stop signal
OTR : OT release signal
ON/OFF: Power ON/OFF control signal
LM/SM : Load meter or speed meter signal
NOTE
1 Power requirements
When 60% of the DI/DO points are on, this interface unit requires “1.0 A”
(not including the current required by the CRT and MDI).
2 The cable connected to CM26 must be no longer than 30 cm.
400
PANEL CONTROLLER
E.1.3
Signal Assignment
Connector pin signal

assignment
CM15 (Matrix DI/DO) CM16 (Matrix DI/DO) CM17 (Matrix DI/DO)

A B A B A B
01 +5E DI06 01 DI20 DI22 01 0V 0V
02 0V DO06 02 DI24 +5E 02 DO20 DO21
03 +5E DI07 03 DI23 DI21 03 DO22 DO23
04 0V DO07 04 DI25 DI26 04 DO24 DO25
ÇÇÇ
05 +5E DI16 05 DI27 +5E 05 DO26 DO27
ÇÇÇ
06 0V DO16 06 DO00 0V 06 0V 0V
07 +5E DI17 07 DI05 +5E 07 DO30 DO31
08 0V D017 08
ÇÇÇDO01 0V 08
ÇÇÇÇ
DO32 DO33
ÇÇÇ
09 :ESP ECM1 09 DI15 +5E 09 DO34 DO35
10 OTR ECM2 10 DO02 0V 10 DO36 DO37
11 DI00 D102 11 DO03 DO04 11 0V 0V
12 DI04 +5E 12 DO05 0V 12 +5E +5E
ÇÇÇ
13 DI03 DI01 13 0V 0V 13 DI30 DI31
14 DI05 DI10 14 DO10 DO11 14 DI32 DI33
15 DI12 DI14 15 DO12 DO13 15 DI34 DI35
ÇÇÇ
16 +5E DI13 16 DO14 DO15 16 DI36 DI37
17 DI11 DI15 17 +5E +5E 17 +5E +5E
CNA1 (Connector on the machine side)

10 ECM2 20
ÇÇÇ
9 0M 19 OTR
8 ECM1 18
7 DO36 17 :ESP
6 SM 16
5 SM 15 COM
4 0M 14
3 0M 13 EOF
2 LM 12
1 LM 11 EON
ÇÇÇ
CNB1 (Connector on the operator’s panel side) CPD1 (Power supply)
ÇÇÇ
01 LM 05 EON 09 3 2 1
02 SM 06 EOF 10 0V +24V
03 0M 07 COM 11 +5V 6 5 4
04 0M 08 0V 12 0V 0V +24V
Pins shaded by are those for forwarding signals. Pins with the
ÇÇÇ
same name are connected directly to one another.
Input/output pins shaded by are in pairs. Only one in each pair is
usable.
NOTE
1 LM and SM also function as input terminals to the A/D
converter.
2 OM is connected to 0 V on the PCB.
401
PANEL CONTROLLER
JD1A (FANUC I/O Link : NEXT SLAVE)

10 20 +5V
9 +5V 19
8 18 +5V
7 17
6 16 0V
5 15 0V
4 :TXB 14 0V
3 TXB 13 0V
2 :RXB 12 0V
1 RXB 11 0V
JD1B (FANUC I/O Link : BEFORE SLAVE)

10 20 +5V
9 +5V 19
8 18 +5V
7 17
6 16 0V
5 15 0V
4 :TXA 14 0V
3 TXA 13 0V
2 :RXA 12 0V
1 RXA 11 0V
CM26 (Matrix DI/DO)

A B
01 0V :MND1
02 :KYD0 :KYD1
03 :KYD2 :KYD3
04 :KYD4 :KYD5
05 :KYD6 :KYD7
06 :KYC0 :KYC1
07 :KYC2 :KYC3
08 :KYC4 :KYC5
09 :KYC6 :KYC7
10 :KYC8 :KYC9
11 :KYCA :KYCB
12 :BZMD 0V
13 :LD0 :LD8
14 :LD1 :LD9
15 :LD2 :LD10
16 :LD3 :LD11
17 :LD4 :LD12
18 :LD5 :LD13
19 :LD6 :LD14
20 :LD7 :LD15
21 LC1L LC1H
22 LC2L LC2H
23 LC3L LC3H
24 LC4L LC4H
25 0V 0V
402
PANEL CONTROLLER
DInx General-purpose DI LM Load meter voltage
DOnx General-purpose DO SM Speed meter voltage
:ESP Emergency stop 0M LM/SM reference voltage

(0V)
ECM1 :ESP common signal :KYDx Matrix DI data signal
OTR OT release :KYCx Matrix DI common signal
ECM2 OTR common signal :LDx Matrix DO data signal
EON/OF Power ON/OFF control sig- LCnL/H Matrix DO common signal

nal
COM EON/EOF common signal :MNDI Three DI points acceptable
:BZMD Buzzer off
NOTE
See Subsection E.1.4 for details of connection and signal
meanings.
403
PANEL CONTROLLER
E.1.4
Interface
General–purpose DI
+5E
DI00–DI37
RV
0V
Input signal specifications
Contact rating 5VDC, 3.2mA or higher
Leakage current between open contacts 0.2mA or lower (5 VDC)
Voltage drop across closed contacts 0.75V or lower
General–purpose DO
+24V
Photocoupler
DO00–DO37 +
FET
0V
Output signal specifications
Maximum load current 0.03A
Maximum open-circuit leakage current 0.1mA
Maximum closed-circuit voltage drop 0.1V
NOTE
When using an LED at the DO point, connect an external
resistor that meets the requirements of the LED.
404
PANEL CONTROLLER
Matrix DI
D Key switch addresses See Section E.1.5 for the corresponding PMC addresses.
CM26–A06 KY07 KY06 KY05 KY04 KY03 KY02 KY01 KY00 BZ0
:KYC0
CM26–B06 KY17 KY16 KY15 KY14 KY13 KY12 KY11 KY10 BZ1
:KYC1
:KYC2 CM26–A07 KY27 KY26 KY25 KY24 KY23 KY22 KY21 KY20 BZ2
:KYC3 CM26–B07 KY37 KY36 KY35 KY34 KY33 KY32 KY31 KY30 BZ3
:KYCA CM26–A11 KYA7 KYA6 KYA5 KYA4 KYA3 KYA2 KYA1 KYA0 BZA
:KYCB CM26–B11 KYB7 KYB6 KYB5 KYB4 KYB3 KYB2 KYB1 KYB0 BZB
:KYD7
CM26–B05
:KYD6
CM26–A05
:KYD5
CM26–B04
:KYD4
CM26–A04
:KYD3
CM26–B03
:KYD2
CM26–A03
:KYD1
CM26–B02
:KYD0
CM26–A02
:BZMD
CM26–A12
:MNDI
CM26–B01
When :MNDI = 0, it enables three or more simultaneous inputs.
0V
When :MNDI = 1, it inhibits three or more simultaneous inputs.
CM26–A01
Detail of f is key switch as following figure.
405
PANEL CONTROLLER
D Mode selection - Preventing malfunctions that may be caused by detouring current

When there are three or more matrix DI points, detouring current can
cause a nonexistent DI input to be falsely detected as existing.
As shown below, if KY01, KY03, and KY21 are closed
simultaneously, current detours through the path indicated with
arrows, thus causing a false input of KY23 to be detected because of
a current path formed by a combination of common signal :KYC2
and data signal :KYD3.
KY03 KY01
:KYC0
:KYC1
KY23 KY21
:KYC2
:KYC3
:KYD3
:KYD2
:KYD1
:KYD0
Two modes are available to prevent this malfunction. One should be

selected according to the user applications.
[Method 1]
D Ignoring all occurrences of three or more simultaneous inputs
Action : Make the :MNDI signal open
(see item “D Key switch addresses”)
NOTE
If there are two inputs and a third is added, all three are
ignored. When one of the three inputs is removed, two are
accepted.
[Method 2]
D Attaching detour prevention diodes to enable three simultaneous
inputs
Action : Connect the :MNDI signal
(see item “D Key switch addresses”) to 0V.
406
PANEL CONTROLLER
NOTE
A diode must be connected in series with a switch, as shown
below. Detour prevention
diode
:KYCn
:KYDn
- This PCB can raise a key input confirmation sound on key inputs. The
condition to raise a key input confirmation sound is set in 8-bit units,
or in :KYCn units. If :BZMD and common :KYCn are
disconnected, a KYnx input causes the key input confirmation sound
to sound. If they are connected, a KYnx input does not cause the key
input confirmation sound to sound.
To sound the key input confirmation sound, the DO (PMC address DO
+ 00.7 BIT) “MD07” must have been turned to “1” (see Section E.1.5).
NOTE
1 A diode is necessary to connect :BZMD and common, as
shown below.
2 This setting cannot be changed when power is supplied.
3 The key input confirmation sound sounds at the moment a
current path is formed between common signal :KYCn
and data signal :KYDx. It does not sound when the path
is disconnected. If key switches are used, the alarm sounds
at the moment a key is pressed. It does not sound when a
key is released or when a key is held pressed.
:KYCn
:BZMD
407
PANEL CONTROLLER
Example If :BZMD is connected to :KYC0 and :KYC2, but disconnected

from :KYC1 and KYC3, as shown on the left, closing a switch at key
addresses KY10 to KY17 and KY30 to KY37 causes the key input
confirmation sound to sound, but closing a switch at key addresses KY00
to KY07 and KY20 to KY27 does not.
See item “D Key switch addresses”.
:KYC0
:KYC1
:KYC2
:KYC3
:BZMD
D Signal specification
Contact rating 6VDC, 2mA or higher
Leakage current between open 0.2mA or lower (6VDC)

contacts
Voltage drop across closed contacts 0.9V or lower (1 mA) Note )
NOTE
This voltage must be maintained even when detour
prevention diodes are used.
408
PANEL CONTROLLER
Matrix DO
D LED addresses See item E.1.5 for the corresponding PMC addresses.
CM26-A24
LC4L
CM26-A23
LC3L
CM26-A22
LC2L
CM26-A21
LC1L
CM26-A13 L1L0
:LD0
CM26-A14 L1L1
:LD1
CM26-A15 L1L2
:LD2
CM26-A16 L1L3
:LD3
CM26-A17 L1L4
:LD4
CM26-A18 L1L5
:LD5
CM26-A19 L1L6
:LD6
CM26-A20 L1L7
:LD7
L2L0
L2L1
L2L2
L2L3
L2L4
L2L5
L2L6
L2L7
L3L0
L3L1
L3L2
L3L3
L3L4
L3L5
L3L6
L3L7
L4L0
L4L1
L4L2
L4L3
L4L4
L4L5
L4L6
L4L7
NOTE
The timing for the common signals are shown below. Their
duty cycle is 2 ms for LEDs being on and 6 ms for LEDs
being off.
LC4L (H)
LC3L (H)
LC2L (H)
LC1L (H)
8ms
409
PANEL CONTROLLER
CM26-B24
LC4H
CM26-B23
LC3H
CM26-B22
LC2H
CM26-B21
LC1H
CM26-B13 L1H0
:LD8
CM26-B14 L1H1
:LD9
CM26-B15 L1H2
:LD10
CM26-B16 L1H3
:LD11
CM26-B17 L1H4
:LD12
CM26-B18 L1H5
:LD13
CM26-B19 L1H6
:LD14
CM26-B20 L1H7
:LD15
L2H0
L2H1
L2H2
L2H3
L2H4
L2H5
L2H6
L2H7
L3H0
L3H1
L3H2
L3H3
L3H4
L3H5
L3H6
L3H7
L4H0
L4H1
L4H2
L4H3
L4H4
L4H5
L4H6
L4H7
D Internal circuit The circuit contains a 100-ohm resistor, as shown below.

Connecting an LED does not require an external resistor.
+5V
CM26 LCnL (H)
CM26 :LDx
LnL(H)x
100 W
410
PANEL CONTROLLER
D Signal specifications The LEDs must have the following rating

Forward voltage 2.4V max (If=5mA)(Typical value)
Forward current 30mA max
Reverse voltage 3V max
Analog signal inputs Analog inputs received from the outside are forwarded without change to
output terminals.
D Connection diagram Analog inputs from the spindle amp being output for load meter and speed
(example) meter indications.
LM
Spindle LM 1, 2 1
amp Load
0M
0M 3 3 meter
(Operator’s
0M 4 4 panel
0M
SM Speed
SM 5, 6 2 meter
CNA1 CNB1
panel interface unit
D Sent to the CNC Analog inputs received on the Machine operator’s panel interface unit are
converted to five-bit digital values, which are sent to the CNC though the
I/O link.
See Section E.1.5 for PMC addresses.
LM conversion data : “LM03 to LM07”
SM conversion data : “SM03 to SM07”
D Analog signal
specifications
Acceptable input voltage 0V to +15V
Voltage that can be converted to digital 0V to +10V Note)
NOTE
Any voltage higher than +10V is converted to the same
digital value as +10V is.
D A/D conversion
specifications
Conversion error 5% (max)
Resolution 5 bit (min)
411
PANEL CONTROLLER
D Emergency stop A signal generated by the emergency stop switch on the machine
operator’s panel can be sent to the power magnetics cabinet. (This signal
cannot be sent to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.)
Emergency stop signal
A09 17 :ESP
:ESP :ESP
B09 8 24V
ECM1 ECM1
CM15 CNA1
Machine operator’s Power magnetics

panel interface unit cabinet
D OT release A signal generated by the OT release switch on the machine operator’s

panel can be sent to the power magnetics cabinet.
(This signal cannot be sent to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.)
OT release switch
A10 19 OTR
OTR OTR
B10 10
ECM
ECM2 ECM2
CM15 CNA1
Machine operator’s Power magnetics

panel interface unit cabinet
412
PANEL CONTROLLER
D Power ON/OFF control Signals generated by the power ON/OFF control switches on the machine
signal operator’s panel can be sent to an input unit. (These signals cannot be sent
to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.)
5 11 EON
ON switch EON
6 13 ECF
OFF switch ECF
7 15 COM
COM
CM15 CNA1
panel interface unit Input unit
NOTE
The LM, OM, SM, D036, ECM, EON, EOF, COM, ESP, and
OTR signals are all assigned to the pins of one connector
(CNA1).
They can be connected to the machine using only one
cable.
413
PANEL CONTROLLER
E.1.5
PMC Addresses
Spcope in which PMC

addresses can be used
BIT NUMBER I/O link allocation
PMC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 128/128 256/256
ADDRESS
DI+00 FUSE
DI+01 KY07 KY06 KY05 KY04 KY03 KY02 KY01 KY00
DI+09 DI07 DI06 DI05 DI04 DI03 DI02 DI01 DI00
DI+13 LM07 LM06 LM05 LM04 LM03
DI+14 SM07 SM06 SM05 SM04 SM03
DI+15
DI+16 Reserved for use by FANUC
DI+17
DI+20 KYA7 KYA6 KYA5 KYA4 KYA3 KYA2 KYA1 KYA0
DI+21 KYB7 KYB6 KYB5 KYB4 KYB3 KYB2 KYB1 KYB0
DO+00 MD07 MD06 FUSE

DO+01 L1L7 L1L6 L1L5 L1L4 L1L3 L1L2 L1L1 L1L0
DO+05 L1H7 L1H6 L1H5 L1H4 L1H3 L1H2 L1H1 L1H0
DO+09 DO07 DO06 DO05 DO04 DO03 DO02 DO01 DO00
FUSE : When 1, it indicates the +5E fuse has blown.

Shorting of the general-purpose DI input is considered as a possible cause. Turn off the power at once, check the
general-purpose DI input and its vicinity, replace the fuse and turn the power on.
DInx : General-purpose DI
LM0x : Load meter indication
SM0x : Speed meter indication
KYnx : Ky signal (matrix)
LnL (H) x : LED signal (matrix)
DOnx : General-purpose DO
MD07 : Buzzer mode selection (It is possible to sound the buzzer at the matrix DI input by turning this to “1”.
MD06 : Buzzer ON/OFF setting (The buzzer sounds as this is turned to “1” and stops as it is turned to “0”. This operation is
performed irrespective of MD07.)
414
PANEL CONTROLLER
E.1.6 D Use flat cables for connectors CM15, CM16, CM17, and CM26.
Major Connection When splitting and connecting flat cables to the machine operator’s
panel or other equipment, be careful not to break or short the
Precautions conductors.
D All signals with the same name described in Section E.1.3 are
connected to one another.
D One of the holes for mounting the PCB is also used for grounding.
Before mounting the PCB, check the location of that hole with the
diagram in Section E.1.10.
E.1.7 L1 (green) :
State of the LEDs on Monitors +5E. When on, it indicates that the fuse is intact.
When off, it indicates that the fuse has blown.
the Machine Operator’s L2 (green) :
Panel Interface Unit Monitors key scanning. When blinking, it indicates that the keys are
being scanned normally. When on or off, it indicates key scanning is at
halt.
L3 (red) :
When on, it indicates that an alarm condition has occurred. When off, it
indicates that there is no alarm condition. It monitors :INT0 and
:INT1.
415
PANEL CONTROLLER
E.1.8
Connector Connector Major use Specification
(on the Cable Side)
CM15, General-purpose HIF3BA-34D-2.54R :
Specifications CM16, DI/DO Manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC
CM17 CO., LTD.
CNA1 Signal forwarding PCR-E20FS :

(to the machine) Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN CO.,
LTD.
CNB1 Signal forwarding MVSTBR2.5/12-ST-5.08 :

(to the machine Manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT
operator’s panel) GmbH & Co.
JD1A, FANUC I/O Link PCR-E20FS :

JD1B Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN CO.,
LTD.
CPD1 Power supply Dynamic D3100 (three pins) :

Manufactured by AMP JAPAN, LTD.
1-178288-3 : Connector
1-175218-5 : Contact
CM26 Matrix DI/DO HIF3BB-50D-2.54R :

Manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRIC
CO., LTD.
NOTE
1 Several types of connectors are available for use at the
other end of the cable leading to connector CNB1. Refer to
brochures of PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co..
The connector used on the machine operator’s panel
interface unit side is MSTBVA2.5/12-G-5.08.
2 Crimped type cable connector is available for CA40. For
purchase from FANUC, please specify as below.
A02B-0029-K890 : Solder type
A02B-0029-K892 : Crimped type
416
PANEL CONTROLLER
E.1.9
Machine Operator’s
Panel Interface Unit
Dimension Diagram
(Including Connector
Locations)
89 22
CM26 A1
CPD1
B25
15
11
A1
17 10
60
CNB1
CM17
150
CNA1
9
B17
41
75
JD1B
16
JD1A
CM16 A1 CM15 A1
22
B17 B17
124 89 26
310
Unit: mm
Tolerance: 5 (mm)
CPD1
CND1
CNA1
CA40 JD1A
JD2B
Applox. 100mm 10mm
1.6mm
417
PANEL CONTROLLER
E.1.10
Machine Operator’s
Panel Interface Unit
Mounting Dimension
Diagram
Mounting hole position
CM26
20
18
114
150
110
CM17
Hole for connecting to a ground

4.5
CM16 CM15
20
18
296
310
Fasten the PCB with four M4 screws. Unit : mm
418
PANEL CONTROLLER
Sheet fixing area It is possible to fix the sheet, spacer, etc. only in the area shown in the
(mounting face side) diagram below.
15 12
10
10
CM26
8
10
18
25
130
130
CM17
7 5
CM16 CM15
20
14
10
8
10
10
12 14
NOTE
Applied to the PCB version number “03A” and beyond.
Sheet fixing area It is possible to fix the sheet, spacer, etc. only in the area shown in the
(Soldering face side) diagram below.
14 12
13
CM26 10
8
7
14
21
126
CM17
124
3
CM16 CM15
17
7
12
8
13
10
13 14
NOTE
Applied to the PCB version number “03A” and beyond.
419
PANEL CONTROLLER
E.1.11
Fuse Mounting
Position
CM26
FU1
CPD1
FU3
FU2
CM17
JD1B
JD1A
CM16 CM15
FU1 : +24V fuse (general-purpose DO, this supplies printed board power protection)
FU2 : +5V fuse (IC power, manual pulse generator protection)
FU3 : +5E fuse (general-purpose DI protection)
NOTE
FU2 is not mounted on Revision 05A or later.
420
PANEL CONTROLLER
E.1.12
Option Card 1
D Outline “Option card 1” is a option PCB for “Machine operator’s panel control
PCB designed for use with FANUC I/O Link”. This PCB can control the
7 segment LEDs to display the turret number, spindle rotating speed, etc.
and can control the level–meters to display the percentage of override,
spindle rotating speed, etc.
OVER RIDE
TURRET No.
1 2 0 %
0 3
0 100 150 %
SPINDLE SPEED
9 0 0 rpm
0 1000 2000 3000 rpm
D Function Overview (1) about 7 segment LED

(a) number of LEDs : maximum 20/the number of 7 segment
LED is at most 20.
(b) zero–suppress : Zero–suppress (don’t display anything on 7
segment LED) is treated by PMC.
(c) display style : Numbers that 7 segment LED displays is as
follows.
(2) about level–meter

(a) number of LEDs : maximum 20/The number of LEDs that can
be included in one level–
meter is at most 20.
(b) number of level–meters : maximum 2
NOTE
Following usage cannot be done.
Use a level–meter which includes 40 LEDs.
Use four level–meter which includes 10 LEDs.
421
PANEL CONTROLLER
(c) display style : When one LED of a level meter is lighted,

all LEDs to the left of the lighted LED are
also lighted. A single LED cannot be
lighted alone (with the exception of the
leftmost LED).
(i) display like this ( LED on LED off)
(ii)cannot like this
422
PANEL CONTROLLER
Block diagram of The connections of 7 segment LEDs and level–meters on machine

operator’s panel operator’s panel is as follows.
About details, please refer to “2.6 Connector Table” and “Connections of
Signal Line”.
7
:LEDAa∼:LEDAg
7
:LEDBa∼:LEDBg
LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1

LEDCOM1
LEDCOM4
LED8 LED7 LED6 LED5

LEDCOM7
LEDCOM9
7
:LEDCa∼:LEDCg
:LEDDa∼:LEDDg 7
LEDCOM2
ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ
LED12 LED11 LED10 LED9
LEDCOM5

LEDCOM8
LEDCOM10
7
:LEDEa∼:LEDEg
:LEDFa∼:LEDFg 7

LEDCOM3
LEDCOM6
20
:LM01∼:LM20
LEVEL METER 1 LEVEL METER 2
LMCOM1
LMCOM2
423
PANEL CONTROLLER
Address allocation PMC address, that is allocated for 7 segment LED data and level–meter
data, is as follows.
PMC
ADDRESS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DO+00
DO+01
S
S ∼
S
DO+13 7 segment LED 2 data 7 segment LED 1 data
DO+23 Level–meter 1 data
DO+24 Level–meter 2 data
DO+28
DO+29
(DO : The first address of area that allocated for this PCB)
shows the area where this PCB is actuary uses.
424
PANEL CONTROLLER
Date for display (1) Data for 7 segment LED

(a) PMC output : BCD
The data for 7 segment LED must be transformed to BCD of 4bit
by PMC.
Treated data for 7segment LED is from “0000” to “1001” and
“1111”. (When 1111 is written, LED displays nothing.)
Don’t use from 1010 to 1110.
(b) Zero suppression:
Write 1111 to the address corresponding to the LED which does not
display a non–significant zero.
BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) data is as follows.
BCD data BCD data
... 0 0 0 0 ... 0 1 1 1
... 0 0 0 1 ... 1 0 0 0
... 0 0 1 0 ... 1 0 0 1
... 0 0 1 1 ... 1 1 1 1
(Zero–suppress)
... 0 1 0 0
... 0 1 0 1
... 0 1 1 0
425
PANEL CONTROLLER
Example The data for following displays of 7 segment LED are as follows.
DISPLAY
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
LED8
ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ
LED7
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
LED6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1
Zero–suppress
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
LED16
ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ
LED15
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
LED14 LED13 LED12 LED11 LED10 LED9
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
LED20 LED19
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
LED18 LED17
PMC
ADDRESS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DO+13 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
DO+14 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
DO+15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DO+16 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
DO+17 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
DO+18 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DO+19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DO+20 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
DO+21 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
DO+22 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
426
PANEL CONTROLLER
(2) Data for level–meter

PMC output : Binary
The data for level–meter is Binary of 5 bit
The treated data is from “00000” to “10100”. Don’t use besides them.
Binary data
Level–meter display Binary data
...... 0 0 0 0 0
...... 0 0 0 0 1
...... 0 0 0 1 0
...... 0 0 0 1 1
...... 0 0 1 0 0
...... 0 0 1 0 1
...... 0 0 1 1 0
...... 0 0 1 1 1
...... 0 1 0 0 0
...... 0 1 0 0 1
...... 0 1 0 1 0
...... 0 1 0 1 1
...... 0 1 1 0 0
...... 0 1 1 0 1
...... 0 1 1 1 0
...... 0 1 1 1 1
...... 1 0 0 0 0
...... 1 0 0 0 1
...... 1 0 0 1 0
...... 1 0 0 1 1
...... 1 0 1 0 0
427
PANEL CONTROLLER
Connector table The signal allocation in connector CM18 and CM19 are as follows.
CM18 CM19
A B A B
01 :LEDAa :LEDAb 01 :LM20 :LM19
02 :LEDAc :LEDAd 02 :LM18 :LM17
03 :LEDAe :LEDAf 03 :LM16 :LM15
04 :LEDAg 04 :LM14 :LM13
05 :LEDBa :LEDBb 05 :LM12 :LM11
06 :LEDBc :LEDBd 06 :LM10 :LM09
07 :LEDBe :LEDBf 07 :LM08 :LM07
08 :LEDBg 08 :LM06 :LM05
09 :LEDCa :LEDCb 09 :LM04 :LM03
10 :LEDCc :LEDCd 10 :LM02 :LM01
11 :LEDCe :LEDCf 11
12 :LEDCg 12 LEDCOM1 LEDCOM2
13 :LEDDa :LEDDb 13 LEDCOM3 LEDCOM4
14 :LEDDc :LEDDd 14 LEDCOM5 LEDCOM6
15 :LEDDe :LEDDf 15 LEDCOM7 LEDCOM8
16 :LEDDg 16 LEDCOM9 LEDCOM10
17 :LEDEa :LEDEb 17 LMCOM1 LMCOM2
18 :LEDEc :LEDEd
19 :LEDEe :LEDEf
20 :LEDEg
21 :LEDFa :LEDFb
22 :LEDFc :LEDFd
23 :LEDFe :LEDFf
24 :LEDFg
25
:LED_a∼:LED_g : signal for 7 segment LED data

:LM20∼:LM01 : signal for level–meter data
LEDCOM1∼LEDCOM10 : common signal for 7 segment LED

LMCOM1, LMCOM2 : common signal for level–meter
428
PANEL CONTROLLER
Connection of signal line (1) 7 segment LED

Connect a each of signals (:LED_j and LEDCOM_) with the a ∼g
terminals and with common terminal of 7 segment LED.
:LED_a a a
:LED_b b f b
:LED_c c COMMON
g
:LED_d d
:LED_e e e c
:LED_f f
:LED_g g d
LEDCOM_
NOTE
Type of 7 segment LEDs must be COMMON ANODE TYPE.
(2) level–meter
Connect the lowest level LED with signal :LM01, the second level
with signal :LM02, @@@@, the highest level with signal :LM20.
:LM20
:LM19
:LM18
:LM17
:LM16
:LM15
:LM14
:LM13
:LM12
:LM11
:LM10
:LM09
:LM08
:LM07
:LM06
:LM05
:LM04
:LM03
:LM02
:LM01
← lower level higher level →

LMCOM_
NOTE
Type of LEDs must be COMMON ANODE TYPE.
429
PANEL CONTROLLER
Connector specification Specification of connector which is used in flat cable that connects
“Option card 1” with Operator’s panel is as follows.
HIF3BB–34D–2.54R (HIROSE)
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
C
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
M
1
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
9
ÔÔ ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔ ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
C
ÔÔ C
C
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔ ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
M M
M
P P
ÔÔ ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
1
1 1
8
ÔÔ ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
HIF3BB–50D–2.54R (HIROSE)
Order specification
A02B–0099–J290
Followings are prepared by ordering as this specification.

(1) Option card 1
(2) Flat cable which connects “Option card 1” with “Machine operator’s
panel control PCB”.
(3) Spacers that settle “Option card 1” on “Machine operator’s panel
control PCB”.
430
PANEL CONTROLLER
Assemblage Settle the “Option card 1” on “Machine operator’s panel control PCB”
with 6 pieces of spacer.
And connect a connector CMP1 on “Option card 1” with a connector

CMP1 on “Machine operator’s panel control PCB” with cable
A660–2040–T045#50C0050.
Option card 1
Flat cable

control PCB
Spacer
431
F. SERIES 0–C OPERATOR’S PANEL
CONNECTION UNIT C1 APPENDIX B–61393E/06
F SERIES 0–C OPERATOR’S PANEL CONNECTION UNIT C1
432
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX CONNECTION UNIT C1
F.1 The operator’s panel connection unit C1 is common DI/DO unit having
DI: 96 points and DO: 64 points. The operator’s panel connection unit
GENERAL C1 can be connected to Series 0 through FANUC I/O Link.
F.2 For the standard of I/O signals, see 6.2.1 Machine Interface Signal
Standard.
SETTING OF I/O
SIGNALS
433
F.3
CONNECTION
F.3.1 The connection diagram is shown below. For the details of the signal
Connection of the cable, refer to the FANUC PMC–M with I/O Link.
Control Unit and
Operator’s Panel
Connection Unit C1
(When using an optical cable, see the drawing below.)

Master
PCB PMC–M
Operator’s
panel connec-
K1X tion unit C1
CS3 JD1A1 JD1B
M11
M12
To I/O Unit or Power Mate JD1A Power
magnetic
cabinet
M13
M14
Power
supply
J36
CAP CP14 CP61
Using an optical cable

PMC Link adapter Link adapter Operator’s
–M panel
connection
unit C1
K3X JD1 K4X JD1 K3X
JD1A1 JD1B
COP1 COP1
Optical cable
434
F.3.2 Operator’s panel connection unit C1.

Signal Connection
between Operator’s
Panel Connection Unit
C1 and Machine Side
CM11 (FAP–50–07#4) CM12 (FAP–50–07#4) CM13 (FAP–50–07#4)

A B A B A B
1 Xn+0.0 Xn+0.1 1 Xn+6.0 Xn+6.1 1 +5V +5V
2 Xn+0.2 Xn+0.3 2 Xn+6.2 Xn+6.3 2 Ym+0.0 Ym+0.1
3 Xn+0.4 Xn+0.5 3 Xn+6.4 Xn+6.5 3 Ym+0.2 Ym+0.3 CM11
4 Xn+0.6 Xn+0.7 4 Xn+6.6 Xn+6.7 4 Ym+0.4 Ym+0.5 J135
5 Xn+1.0 Xn+1.1 5 Xn+7.0 Xn+7.1 5 Ym+0.6 Ym+0.7
6 Xn+1.2 Xn+1.3 6 Xn+7.2 Xn+7.3 6 Ym+1.0 Ym+1.1
7 Xn+1.4 Xn+1.5 7 Xn+7.4 Xn+7.5 7 Ym+1.2 Ym+1.3
8 Xn+1.6 Xn+1.7 8 Xn+7.6 Xn+7.7 8 Ym+1.4 Ym+1.5
9 Xn+2.0 Xn+2.1 9 Xn+8.0 Xn+8.1 9 Ym+1.6 Ym+1.7
10 Xn+2.2 Xn+2.3 10 Xn+8.2 Xn+8.3 10 Ym+2.0 Ym+2.1
11 Xn+2.4 Xn+2.5 11 Xn+8.4 Xn+8.5 11 Ym+2.2 Ym+2.3
Magnetic cabinet and Operator’s panel or machine side

12 Xn+2.6 Xn+2.7 12 Xn+8.6 Xn+8.7 12 Ym+2.4 Ym+2.5
13 Xn+3.0 Xn+3.1 13 Xn+9.0 Xn+9.1 13 Ym+2.6 Ym+2.7 CM12
14 Xn+3.2 Xn+3.3 14 Xn+9.2 Xn+9.3 14 Ym+3.0 Ym+3.1 J136
15 Xn+3.4 Xn+3.5 15 Xn+9.4 Xn+9.5 15 Ym+3.2 Ym+3.3
16 Xn+3.6 Xn+3.7 16 Xn+9.6 Xn+9.7 16 Ym+3.4 Ym+3.5
17 Xn+4.0 Xn+4.1 17 Xn+10.0 Xn+10.1 17 Ym+3.6 Ym+3.7
18 Xn+4.2 Xn+4.3 18 Xn+10.2 Xn+10.3 18 Ym+4.0 Ym+4.1
19 Xn+4.4 Xn+4.5 19 Xn+10.4 Xn+10.5 19 Ym+4.2 Ym+4.3
20 Xn+4.6 Xn+4.7 20 Xn+10.6 Xn+10.7 20 Ym+4.4 Ym+4.5
21 Xn+5.0 Xn+5.1 21 Xn+11.0 Xn+11.1 21 Ym+4.6 Ym+4.7
22 Xn+5.2 Xn+5.3 22 Xn+11.2 Xn+11.3 22 Ym+5.0 Ym+5.1 CM13
J137
23 Xn+5.4 Xn+5.5 23 Xn+11.4 Xn+11.5 23 Ym+5.2 Ym+5.3
24 Xn+5.6 Xn+5.7 24 Xn+11.6 Xn+11.7 24 Ym+5.4 Ym+5.5
25 0V 25 0V 25 0V
CM14 (FAP–20–07#4)
In J135, J136 and J137, use the connectors for flat cable
A B
FAS–50–17 or FAS–50–18 of Yamaichi Denki on the operator’s
1 Ym+5.6 Ym+5.7
panel connection unit C1 side.
2 Ym+6.0 Ym+6.1
In J138, use the connectors for flat cable
3 Ym+6.2 Ym+6.3
FAS–20–17 or FAS–20–18 of Yamaichi Denki.
4 Ym+6.4 Ym+6.5 CM14
5 Ym+6.6 Ym+6.7 J138
CP61 (Japan FCI), Brown connector for cable: SMS 3PINS–5
6 Ym+7.0 Ym+7.1
7 Ym+7.2 Ym+7.3
3 2 1
8 Ym+7.4 Ym+7.5
9 Ym+7.6 Ym+7.7 0V +24V
10 0V
435
Addresses of DI/DO in the FANUC PMC–M with I/O Link are as follows:
DI/DO Address DGN. NO
DI X3072–X3199 5072–5199
128 byte = 1024 point (MAX)
DO Y3200–Y3327 5200–5327
128 byte = 1024 point (MAX)
The point number of DI and DO of the operator’s panel connection unit

C1 are as follows:
Number of points
DI 12 byte=96 points
DO 8 byte=64 points
Therefore, the signal names DI (Xn+j.j) and (Ym+j.j) of the

operator’s panel connection unit C1 can be freely allocated in the range:
3072 n 3188
3200 m 3320
An example of allocation is shown below.
Example First address n of DI = 3100 and first address m of DO = 3200

DI/DO Address DGN.No.
DI X3100 – X3111 5100 – 5111
DO Y3200 – Y3207 5200 – 5207
As a concrete example,
DI signal (Xn+6.2) of pin A2 of CM12 connector is X3106. 2.
DO signal (Ym+1.7) of pin B9 of CM13 connector is Y3201.7.
436
Connection example
Bit No.
+24
Address No.
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+0.0 CM11 (A01)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+0.1 CM11 (B01)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+0.2 CM11 (A02)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+0.3 CM11 (B02)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+0.4 CM11 (A03)
RV
ÁÁ
Xn+0.5 CM11 (B03)
RV
ÁÁ
Xn+0.6 CM11 (A04)
RV
Xn+0.7
RV
ÁÁ
CM11 (B04)
Xn+1.0
RV
ÁÁ
CM11 (A05)
Xn+1.1
RV ÁÁ
CM11 (B05)
Xn+1.2
RV ÁÁ
CM11 (A06)
Xn+1.3
RV ÁÁ
CM11 (B06)
Xn+1.4
ÁÁ
CM11 (A07)
ÁÁ
RV
Xn+1.5
RV ÁÁ
CM11 (B07)
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+1.6 CM11 (A08)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+1.7 CM11 (B08)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
CM11 (A25)
437
Connection example
Bit No.
+24
Address No.
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+2.0 CM11 (A09)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+2.1 CM11 (B09)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+2.2 CM11 (A10)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+2.3 CM11 (B10)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+2.4 CM11 (A11)
RV
ÁÁ
Xn+2.5 CM11 (B11)
RV
ÁÁ
Xn+2.6 CM11 (A12)
RV
Xn+2.7
RV
ÁÁ
CM11 (B12)
Xn+3.0
RV
ÁÁ
CM11 (A13)
Xn+3.1
RV ÁÁ
CM11 (B13)
Xn+3.2
RV ÁÁ
CM11 (A14)
Xn+3.3
RV ÁÁ
CM11 (B14)
Xn+3.4
ÁÁ
CM11 (A15)
ÁÁ
RV
Xn+3.5
RV ÁÁ
CM11 (B15)
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+3.6 CM11 (A16)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+3.7 CM11 (B16)
RV
0V
(CM11–A25)
438
Connection example
Bit No.
+24
Address No.
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+4.0 CM11 (A17)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+4.1 CM11 (B17)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+4.2 CM11 (A18)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+4.3 CM11 (B18)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+4.4 CM11 (A19)
RV
ÁÁ
Xn+4.5 CM11 (B19)
RV
ÁÁ
Xn+4.6 CM11 (A20)
RV
Xn+4.7
RV
ÁÁ
CM11 (B20)
Xn+5.0
RV
ÁÁ
CM11 (A21)
Xn+5.1
RV ÁÁ
CM11 (B21)
Xn+5.2
RV ÁÁ
CM11 (A22)
Xn+5.3
RV ÁÁ
CM11 (B22)
Xn+5.4
ÁÁ
CM11 (A23)
ÁÁ
RV
Xn+5.5
RV ÁÁ
CM11 (B23)
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+5.6 CM11 (A24)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+5.7 CM11 (B24)
RV
0V
(CM11–A25)
439
Connection example
Bit No.
+24
Address No.
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+6.0 CM12 (A01)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+6.1 CM12 (B01)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+6.2 CM12 (A02)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+6.3 CM12 (B02)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+6.4 CM12 (A03)
RV
ÁÁ
Xn+6.5 CM12 (B03)
RV
ÁÁ
Xn+6.6 CM12 (A04)
RV
Xn+6.7
RV
ÁÁ
CM12 (B04)
Xn+7.0
RV
ÁÁ
CM12 (A05)
Xn+7.1
RV ÁÁ
CM12 (B05)
Xn+7.2
RV ÁÁ
CM12 (A06)
Xn+7.3
RV ÁÁ
CM12 (B06)
Xn+7.4
ÁÁ
CM12 (A07)
ÁÁ
RV
Xn+7.5
RV ÁÁ
CM12 (B07)
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+7.6 CM12 (A08)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+7.7 CM12 (B08)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
CM12 (A25)
440
Connection example
Bit No.
+24
Address No.
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+8.0 CM12 (A09)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+8.1 CM12 (B09)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+8.2 CM12 (A10)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+8.3 CM12 (B10)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+8.4 CM12 (A11)
RV
ÁÁ
Xn+8.5 CM12 (B11)
RV
ÁÁ
Xn+8.6 CM12 (A12)
RV
Xn+8.7
RV
ÁÁ
CM12 (B12)
Xn+9.0
RV
ÁÁ
CM12 (A13)
Xn+9.1
RV ÁÁ
CM12 (B13)
Xn+9.2
RV ÁÁ
CM12 (A14)
Xn+9.3
RV ÁÁ
CM12 (B14)
Xn+9.4
ÁÁ
CM12 (A15)
ÁÁ
RV
Xn+9.5
RV ÁÁ
CM12 (B15)
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+9.6 CM12 (A16)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+9.7 CM12 (B16)
RV
0V
(CM12–A25)
441
Connection example
Bit No.
+24
Address No.
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+10.0 CM12 (A17)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+10.1 CM12 (B17)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+10.2 CM12 (A18)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+10.3 CM12 (B18)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+10.4 CM12 (A19)
RV
ÁÁ
Xn+10.5 CM12 (B19)
RV
ÁÁ
Xn+10.6 CM12 (A20)
RV
Xn+10.7
RV
ÁÁ
CM12 (B20)
Xn+11.0
RV
ÁÁ
CM12 (A21)
Xn+11.1
RV ÁÁ
CM12 (B21)
Xn+11.2
RV ÁÁ
CM12 (A22)
Xn+11.3
RV ÁÁ
CM12 (B22)
Xn+11.4
ÁÁ
CM12 (A23)
ÁÁ
RV
Xn+11.5
RV ÁÁ
CM12 (B23)
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+11.6 CM12 (A24)
RV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Xn+11.7 CM12 (B24)
RV
0V
(CM12–A25)
442
Connection example
Bit No.
Address No.
ÁÁ
CM13 (A02)
ÁÁ
DV
Relay
Yn+0.0
ÁÁ
Yn+0.1 CM13 (B02)
DV
ÁÁ
Yn+0.2 CM13 (A03)
DV
ÁÁ
Yn+0.3 CM13 (B03)
DV
Yn+0.4
DV
ÁÁ
CM13 (A04)
Yn+0.5
DV
ÁÁ
CM13 (B04)
Yn+0.6
DV ÁÁ
CM13 (A05)
Yn+0.7
DV ÁÁ
CM13 (B05)
Yn+1.0
DV ÁÁ
CM13 (A06)
Yn+1.1
ÁÁ
CM13 (B06)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+1.2 CM13 (A07)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+1.3 CM13 (B07)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+1.4 CM13 (A08)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+1.5 CM13 (B08)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+1.6 CM13 (A09)
DV
ÁÁ
Yn+1.7 CM13 (B09)
DV
ÁÁ
+24 power stabilizer
CM13 (A25)
0V +24V
443
Connection example
Bit No.
Address No.
ÁÁ
CM13 (A10)
ÁÁ
DV
Relay
Yn+2.0
ÁÁ
Yn+2.1 CM13 (B10)
DV
ÁÁ
Yn+2.2 CM13 (A11)
DV
ÁÁ
Yn+2.3 CM13 (B11)
DV
Yn+2.4
DV
ÁÁ
CM13 (A12)
Yn+2.5
DV
ÁÁ
CM13 (B12)
Yn+2.6
DV ÁÁ
CM13 (A13)
Yn+2.7
DV ÁÁ
CM13 (B13)
Yn+3.0
DV ÁÁ
CM13 (A14)
Yn+3.1
ÁÁ
CM13 (B14)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+3.2 CM13 (A15)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+3.3 CM13 (B15)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+3.4 CM13 (A16)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+3.5 CM13 (B16)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+3.6 CM13 (A17)
DV
ÁÁ
Yn+3.7 CM13 (B17)
DV
ÁÁ
0V
(CM13–A25)
0V +24V
444
Connection example
Bit No.
Address No.
ÁÁ
CM13 (A18)
ÁÁ
DV
Relay
Yn+4.0
ÁÁ
Yn+4.1 CM13 (B18)
DV
ÁÁ
Yn+4.2 CM13 (A19)
DV
ÁÁ
Yn+4.3 CM13 (B19)
DV
Yn+4.4
DV
ÁÁ
CM13 (A20)
Yn+4.5
DV
ÁÁ
CM13 (B20)
Yn+4.6
DV ÁÁ
CM13 (A21)
Yn+4.7
DV ÁÁ
CM13 (B21)
Yn+5.0
DV ÁÁ
CM13 (A22)
Yn+5.1
ÁÁ
CM13 (B22)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+5.2 CM13 (A23)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+5.3 CM13 (B23)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+5.4 CM13 (A24)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+5.5 CM13 (B24)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+5.6 CM14 (A01)
DV
ÁÁ
Yn+5.7 CM14 (B01)
DV
ÁÁ
0V
(CM13–A25)
0V +24V
445
Connection example
Bit No.
Address No.
ÁÁ
CM14 (A02)
ÁÁ
DV
Relay
Yn+6.0
ÁÁ
Yn+6.1 CM14 (B02)
DV
ÁÁ
Yn+6.2 CM14 (A03)
DV
ÁÁ
Yn+6.3 CM14 (B03)
DV
Yn+6.4
DV
ÁÁ
CM14 (A04)
Yn+6.5
DV
ÁÁ
CM14 (B04)
Yn+6.6
DV ÁÁ
CM14 (A05)
Yn+6.7
DV ÁÁ
CM14 (B05)
Yn+7.0
DV ÁÁ
CM14 (A06)
Yn+7.1
ÁÁ
CM14 (B06)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+7.2 CM14 (A07)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+7.3 CM14 (B07)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+7.4 CM14 (A08)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+7.5 CM14 (B08)
DV
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Yn+7.6 CM14 (A09)
DV
ÁÁ
Yn+7.7 CM14 (B09)
DV
ÁÁ
CM14 (A10)
0V +24V
446
F.4
EXTERNAL
DIMENSION
Approx. 70 mm
447
G. ADDITIONAL I/O–B3, F3 APPENDIX B–61393E/06
G ADDITIONAL I/O–B3, F3
448
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX G. ADDITIONAL I/O–B3, F3
G.1 Additional I/O–B3 and F3 are I/O cards featuring a FANUC I/O Link
interface. Additional I/O–B3 cards have the same number of input/output
OUTLINE signals as those of additional I/O–B2 cards, thus maintaining the
compatibility of the interface with the machine.
Additional I/O–B3 cards use sink–type output signals, while additional

I/O–F3 cards use source–type output signals. Both have the same number
of input/output signals: 104 inputs and 72 outputs.
449
G.2 The input signals are the same as those of the built–in I/O card. See the
input signal standard in Section 6.2.1.
INPUT/OUTPUT The output signals for sink–type additional I/O–B3 are the same as those
SIGNAL STANDARDS of the built–in I/O card. See the description of output signal A in the
output signal standard in Section 6.2.1. For source–type additional
I/O–F3, the following applies:
D Output signal definition D Maximum load current when output is “ON”:
of additional I/O–F3 200 mA or less including instantaneous current
(One power supply pin “DOCOM” must be less than 2.0A.)
D Saturation voltage when output is “ON”:
1.0V max. when load current is 200 mA
D Withstand voltage when output is “OFF”:
24V + 20% or less including instantaneous voltage
D Leak current when output is “OFF”:
100 mA or less
D External power supply D Voltage: 24V "10%
for output signals D Current:
Max. total load current including instantaneous current +100 mA
or more when using I/O–F3.
D Power on sequence:
Just or before power on of the control unit
D Power off sequence:
Just or after power off of the control unit
D Detail of output signal The device of the output signal driver on this I/O board turns on and off
driver for additional 8 points DO signals per 1 device.
I/O–F3 DO driver IC on this board observes and protects a over current. If the
protection circuit observes a over current, it works to turn off the output
signal, and then output current does not appears and it is not over current
condition. So, the driver turns on the output signal again. Therefore, if
the signal shorts to the ground or over current condition continuously, the
output signal is reperted to turn on and off. This condition may be happen
if instantaneous current is more. Further, DO driver IC on this board
observes and protects a over heat. If a DO signal shorts to the ground as
it must keep a over current condition and the device temperature may be
more heat, then over heat protection circuit will be worked and all 8 points
DO of the 1 device must be turned off. As the cancellation of protect
condition, at once turn off the output signal logically using ladder after
device temperature is cool, or at once power off.
A group of the 8 points of the 1 device is followings.
Group #0: Ym+0.0∼Ym+0.7, Group#1 : Ym+1.0∼Ym+1.7,
Group #8: Ym+8.0∼Ym+8.7
If some DO signal is turned on on the diagnosis screen but the signal is
really turned off, it may be turned off by other signal of the same group.
It means if one of the DO signals has over heat condition, the other 8
points DO signals of the same group including itself must be turned off.
In this case, at once power off and remove a cause of the over load.
450
[Block diagram of a DO drive IC]
Ã DOCOM
OHD
Ã Ã
Ã Ã
CONTROL
IN#0 LOGIC OUT#0
Ã Ã
OCD
Ã Ã
CONTROL
IN#1 LOGIC OUT#1
OCD
IN#7 Ã CONTROL
LOGIC Ã OUT#7
OCD
OHD: Over heat protect circuit OCD: Over current protect circuit
451
D Caution of a DO
connection
NOTE
Don’t connect with parallel as followings.
DOCOM
+24V 0V
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
Relay
DV
DV
0V
NOTE
If using a resister for slight lighting as followings, connect a
diode for leak current prevention.
DOCOM
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
+24V 0V
ÃÃ
Resister for
slight lighting
Lamp
0V
DV
Diode for leak current prevention
452
G.3
CONNECTION
(1) Connection of the The connection outline is shown below. For the details of the signal cable,
control unit and refer to section 6.3.2.
additional I/O–B3 and
F3
(When using an optical cable, see the drawing below.)

Master
PCB PMC-M
Additional
I/O-B3
CS3 K1X
JD1A1
JD1B
M61
M62
To I/O Unit or
Power Mate JD1A
Power
M78 magnetic
cabinet
Power M79
supply
J36
CAP M80
CP14
CP5
Using an optical cable

PMC Link adapter Link adapter Additional
-M I/O-B3
K3X JD1 K4X JD1 K3X

JD1A1
JD1B
COP1 COP1
Optical cable
453
Additional I/O board F3, F4
Connector HONDA TSUSHIN JD1B

PCR–E20FS 10 20 +5V
09 +5V 19
08 18 +5V
07 17
Control unit 06 16 0V
05 15 0V
04 *SOUT 14 0V
03 SOUT 13 0V
02 *SIN 12 0V
01 SIN 11 0V
Connector HONDA TSUSHIN JD1A

PCR–E20FS 10 20 +5V
09 +5V 19
08 18 +5V
07 17
To I/O Unit or 06 16 0V
Power Mate etc. 05 15 0V
04 *SOUT 14 0V
03 SOUT 13 0V
02 *SIN 12 0V
01 SIN 11 0V
Connector Japan FCI
SMS3PNS–5
CP51
1 2 3
Control unit
+24V 0V
454
(2) Connection between

additional I/O–B3 and
machine side
Additional I/O–B3
M61(MR–50RMA) M78(MR–50RMA)
1 0V 33 Xn+8.3 1 0V 33 Xn+0.0
2 0V 34 Xn+8.2 2 0V 34 Xn+0.2
19 Xn+8.4 19 Xn+0.1
3 0V 35 Xn+8.1 3 0V 35 Xn+0.4
20 Xn+5.3 20 Xn+0.3
4 0V 36 Xn+8.0 4 COM1 36 Xn+0.7 M61 J40
21 Xn+5.2 21 Xn+0.6
5 Xn+7.5 37 Xn+7.6 5 Xn+0.5 37 Xn+1.2
22 Xn+5.1 22 Xn+1.1
6 Xn+5.7 38 Xn+5.5 6 Xn+1.0 38 Xn+1.5
23 Xn+5.0 23 Xn+1.4 H50.F
7 Xn+5.6 39 Xn+5.4 7 Xn+1.3 39 Xn+2.0
24 Xn+6.3 24 Xn+1.7
8 Xn+6.7 40 Xn+6.5 8 Xn+1.6 40 Xn+2.3
25 Xn+6.2 25 Xn+2.2
9 Xn+6.6 41 Xn+8.7 9 Xn+2.1 41 Xn+2.6
26 Xn+8.6 26 Xn+2.5
10 Xn+6.4 42 Xn+9.7 10 Xn+2.4 42 Xn+3.1
27 Xn+8.5 27 Xn+3.0
11 Xn+6.1 43 Xn+9.6 11 Xn+2.7 43 Xn+3.3
28 28 COM2
Machine side magnetic cabinet and operator’s panel

12 Xn+6.0 44 Xn+9.5 12 Xn+3.2 44 Xn+3.5
29 +24V 29 COM3
13 Xn+7.7 45 Xn+9.4 13 Xn+3.4 45 Xn+3.7
30 +24V 30 +24V M78 J42
14 Xn+7.4 46 Xn+9.3 14 Xn+3.6 46 Xn+4.1
31 +24V 31 +24V
15 Xn+7.3 47 Xn+9.2 15 Xn+4.0 47 Xn+4.3
32 +24V 32 +24V
16 Xn+7.2 48 Xn+9.1 16 Xn+4.2 48 Xn+4.5
H50.F
17 Xn+7.1 49 Xn+9.0 17 Xn+4.4 49 Xn+4.7
18 Xn+7.0 50 18 Xn+4.6 50
1 0V 33 Ym+2.7 1 0V 33 Ym+7.0
2 0V 34 Ym+2.6 2 0V 34 Ym+7.2
19 Ym+1.5 19 Ym+7.1
3 0V 35 Ym+2.5 3 0V 35 Ym+7.4
20 Ym+1.4 20 Ym+7.3 M62 J41
4 0V 36 Ym+2.4 4 0V 36 Ym+7.7
21 Ym+1.3 21 Ym+7.6
5 Ym+0.7 37 Ym+2.3 5 Ym+7.5 37 Ym+8.2
22 Ym+1.2 22 Ym+8.1
6 Ym+0.6 38 Ym+2.2 6 Ym+8.0 38 Ym+8.5 H50.F
23 Ym+1.1 23 Ym+8.4
7 Ym+0.5 39 Ym+2.1 7 Ym+8.3 39 Xn+10.0
24 Ym+1.0 24 Ym+8.7
8 Ym+0.4 40 Ym+2.0 8 Ym+8.6 40 Xn+10.3
25 Ym+0.0 25 Xn+10.2
9 Ym+1.7 41 Ym+0.3 9 Xn+10.1 41 Xn+10.6
26 Ym+0.1 26 Xn+10.5
10 Ym+1.6 42 Ym+4.7 10 Xn+10.4 42 Xn+11.1
27 Ym+0.2 27 Xn+11.0
11 Ym+3.7 43 Ym+4.6 11 Xn+10.7 43 Xn+11.3
28 28 COM4
12 Ym+3.6 44 Ym+4.5 12 Xn+11.2 44 Xn+11.5
29 29 COM5
13 Ym+3.5 45 Ym+4.4 13 Xn+11.4 45 Xn+11.7 M80 J44
30 30 +24V
14 Ym+3.4 46 Ym+4.3 14 Xn+11.6 46 Xn+12.1
31 31 +24V
15 Ym+3.3 47 Ym+4.2 15 Xn+12.0 47 Xn+12.3
32 32 +24V H50.F
16 Ym+3.2 48 Ym+4.1 16 Xn+12.2 48 Xn+12.5
17 Ym+3.1 49 Ym+4.0 17 Xn+12.4 49 Xn+12.7
18 Ym+3.0 50 18 Xn+12.6 50
M79(MR–20RMA)
Use unified shielded cable for cable J40 to J44. 1 Ym+5.0 14 Ym+6.5
Recommended cable: 8 Ym+5.7
2 Ym+5.1 15 Ym+6.6
A66L – 0001 – 0042 (7/0. 18, 50 core) 9 Ym+6.0
Recommended cable: 3 Ym+5.2 16 Ym+6.7
10 Ym+6.1
A66L – 0001 – 0041 (7/0. 18, 20 core) 4 Ym+5.3 17 M79 J43
11 Ym+6.2
5 Ym+5.4 18 0V
12 Ym+6.3
6 Ym+5.5 19 0V
13 Ym+6.4
7 Ym+5.6 20 H20.F
455
(3) Connection between

additional I/O board F3
and machine side
1 0V 33 Xn+8.3 1 0V 33 Xn+0.0
2 0V 34 Xn+8.2 2 0V 34 Xn+0.2
19 Xn+8.4 19 Xn+0.1
3 0V 35 Xn+8.1 3 0V 35 Xn+0.4
20 Xn+5.3 20 Xn+0.3
4 0V 36 Xn+8.0 4 COM1 36 Xn+0.7
21 Xn+5.2 21 Xn+0.6
5 Xn+7.5 37 Xn+7.6 5 Xn+0.5 37 Xn+1.2
22 Xn+5.1 22 Xn+1.1
6 Xn+5.7 38 Xn+5.5 6 Xn+1.0 38 Xn+1.5
23 Xn+5.0 23 Xn+1.4
7 Xn+5.6 39 Xn+5.4 7 Xn+1.3 39 Xn+2.0
24 Xn+6.3 24 Xn+1.7
8 Xn+6.7 40 Xn+6.5 8 Xn+1.6 40 Xn+2.3
25 Xn+6.2 25 Xn+2.2
9 Xn+6.6 41 Xn+8.7 9 Xn+2.1 41 Xn+2.6
26 Xn+8.6 26 Xn+2.5
10 Xn+6.4 42 Xn+9.7 10 Xn+2.4 42 Xn+3.1
27 Xn+8.5 27 Xn+3.0
11 Xn+6.1 43 Xn+9.6 11 Xn+2.7 43 Xn+3.3
28 28 COM2
12 Xn+6.0 44 Xn+9.5 12 Xn+3.2 44 Xn+3.5
29 +24V 29 COM3
13 Xn+7.7 45 Xn+9.4 13 Xn+3.4 45 Xn+3.7
30 +24V 30 +24V
14 Xn+7.4 46 Xn+9.3 14 Xn+3.6 46 Xn+4.1
31 +24V 31 +24V
15 Xn+7.3 47 Xn+9.2 15 Xn+4.0 47 Xn+4.3
32 +24V 32 +24V
16 Xn+7.2 48 Xn+9.1 16 Xn+4.2 48 Xn+4.5
17 Xn+7.1 49 Xn+9.0 17 Xn+4.4 49 Xn+4.7
18 Xn+7.0 50 0V 18 Xn+4.6 50 0V
MB80(MR–50RMA) MB62(MR–50RMA)
1 DOCOM 33 Ym+7.0 1 DOCOM 33 Ym+2.7
2 DOCOM 34 Ym+7.2 2 DOCOM 34 Ym+2.6
19 Ym+7.1 35 Ym+7.4 3 0V 19 Ym+1.5 35 Ym+2.5
3 0V
20 Ym+7.3 36 Ym+7.7 4 0V 20 Ym+1.4 36 Ym+2.4
4 0V
5 Ym+7.5
21 Ym+7.6 37 Ym+8.2 5 Ym+0.7 21 Ym+1.3 37 Ym+2.3
6 Ym+8.0
22 Ym+8.1 38 Ym+8.5 6 Ym+0.6 22 Ym+1.2 38 Ym+2.2
7 Ym+8.3
23 Ym+8.4 39 Xn+10.0 7 Ym+0.5 23 Ym+1.1 39 Ym+2.1
8 Ym+8.6
24 Ym+8.7 40 Xn+10.3 8 Ym+0.4 24 Ym+1.0 40 Ym+2.0
9 Xn+10.1
25 Xn+10.2 41 Xn+10.6 9 Ym+1.7 25 Ym+0.0 41 Ym+0.3
10 Xn+10.4
26 Xn+10.5 42 Xn+11.1 10 Ym+1.6 26 Ym+0.1 42 Ym+4.7
11 Xn+10.7
27 Xn+11.0 43 Xn+11.3 11 Ym+3.7 27 Ym+0.2 43 Ym+4.6
12 Xn+11.2
28 COM4 44 Xn+11.5 12 Ym+3.6 28 44 Ym+4.5
13 Xn+11.4
29 COM5 45 Xn+11.7 13 Ym+3.5 29 45 Ym+4.4
14 Xn+11.6
30 +24V 46 Xn+12.1 14 Ym+3.4 30 46 Ym+4.3
15 Xn+12.0
31 +24V 47 Xn+12.3 15 Ym+3.3 31 47 Ym+4.2
16 Xn+12.2
32 +24V 48 Xn+12.5 16 Ym+3.2 32 48 Ym+4.1
17 Xn+12.4 49 Xn+12.7 17 Ym+3.1 49 Ym+4.0
18 Xn+12.6 50 0V 18 Ym+3.0 50 0V
MB79(MR–20RMA)
1 Ym+5.0 14 Ym+6.5
8 Ym+5.7
Use unified shielded cable. 2 Ym+5.1 15 Ym+6.6
9 Ym+6.0
3 Ym+5.2 16 Ym+6.7
10 Ym+6.1
4 Ym+5.3 17 DOCOM
11 Ym+6.2
5 Ym+5.4 18 DOCOM
12 Ym+6.3
6 Ym+5.5 19 0V
ÃÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
13 Ym+6.4
7 Ym+5.6 20 0V
ÃÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
MB79 MB62 MB80 M78 M61
H20.F H50.F H50.F H50.F H50.F
Magnetic cabinet
456
(4) Input signal pin

assignment Table G.3(a) Pin assignment for input signals and common
signal pin assignment for those signals
Common signal pin
Signal assignment
address
Xn+0#0 M78 M78 33
Xn+0#1 M78 M78 19
Xn+0#2 M78 M78 34
Xn+0#3 M78 M78 20
Xn+0#4 M78 M78 35
Xn+0#5 M78 M78 05
Xn+0#6 M78 M78 21
Xn+0#7 M78 M78 36

M78 M78 04
Xn+1#0 M78 M78 06
Use M78 pins 30, 31,
Xn+1#1 M78 M78 22
and 32 for +24 V.
Xn+1#2 M78 M78 37 and 03 for 0 V.
Xn+1#3 M78 M78 07
Xn+1#4 M78 M78 23
Xn+1#5 M78 M78 38
Xn+1#6 M78 M78 08
Xn+1#7 M78 M78 24
Xn+2#0 M78 M78 39
Xn+2#1 M78 M78 09
Xn+2#2 M78 M78 25
Xn+2#3 M78 M78 40
Xn+2#4 M78 M78 10
Xn+2#5 M78 M78 26
Xn+2#6 M78 M78 41 M78 M78 28
Xn+2#7 M78 M78 11 Use M78 pins 30, 31,

and 32 for +24 V.
Xn+3#0 M78 M78 27 Use M78 pins 01, 02,
and 03 for 0 V.
Xn+3#1 M78 M78 42
Xn+3#2 M78 M78 12
Xn+3#3 M78 M78 43
Xn+3#4 M78 M78 13
457
Common signal pin

Signal assignment
address
Xn+3#5 M78 M78 44 M78 M78 28

Xn+3#6 M78 M78 14 and 32 for +24 V.
Xn+3#7 M78 M78 45 and 03 for 0 V.
Xn+4#0 M78 M78 15
Xn+4#1 M78 M78 46
Xn+4#2 M78 M78 16
Xn+4#3 M78 M78 47

M78 M78 29
Xn+4#4 M78 M78 17
Xn+4#5 M78 M78 48 and 32 for +24 V.
and 03 for 0 V.
Xn+4#6 M78 M78 18
Xn+4#7 M78 M78 49
Xn+5#0 M61 M61 23
Xn+5#1 M61 M61 22
Xn+5#2 M61 M61 21
Xn+5#3 M61 M61 20
Xn+5#4 M61 M61 39
Xn+5#5 M61 M61 38
Xn+5#6 M61 M61 07
Xn+5#7 M61 M61 06

Always sink in
input
ut
Xn+6#0 M61 M61 12
Xn+6#1 M61 M61 11 Use M61 pins 29, 30, 31,

and 32 for +24 V.
Xn+6#2 M61 M61 25
Xn+6#3 M61 M61 24
Xn+6#4 M61 M61 10
Xn+6#5 M61 M61 40
Xn+6#6 M61 M61 09
Xn+6#7 M61 M61 08
Xn+4#0 to Xn+4#7 are direct input signal B (for high–speed signal input).
458
Common signal pin

Signal assignment
address
Xn+7#0 M61 M61 18
Xn+7#1 M61 M61 17
Xn+7#2 M61 M61 16
Xn+7#3 M61 M61 15
Xn+7#4 M61 M61 14
Xn+7#5 M61 M61 05
Xn+7#6 M61 M61 37
Xn+7#7 M61 M61 13
Xn+8#0 M61 M61 36
Xn+8#1 M61 M61 35
Xn+8#2 M61 M61 34
Xn+8#3 M61 M61 33

Always sink in
input
ut
Xn+8#4 M61 M61 19
Use M61 pins 29, 30, 31,
Xn+8#5 M61 M61 27 and 32 for +24 V.
Xn+8#6 M61 M61 26
Xn+8#7 M61 M61 41
Xn+9#0 M61 M61 49
Xn+9#1 M61 M61 48
Xn+9#2 M61 M61 47
Xn+9#3 M61 M61 46
Xn+9#4 M61 M61 45
Xn+9#5 M61 M61 44
Xn+9#6 M61 M61 43
Xn+9#7 M61 M61 42
459
Common signal pin

Signal assignment
address
Xn+10#0 M80 MB80 39
Xn+10#1 M80 MB80 09
Xn+10#2 M80 MB80 25
Xn+10#3 M80 MB80 40
Xn+10#4 M80 MB80 10
Xn+10#5 M80 MB80 26
Xn+10#6 M80 MB80 41
Xn+10#7 M80 MB80 11
Xn+11#0 M80 MB80 27
Xn+11#1 M80 MB80 42
Xn+11#2 M80 MB80 12
Xn+11#3 M80 MB80 43

M80 MB80 29
Xn+11#4 M80 MB80 13
Use M80/MB80 pins 30,
Xn+11#5 M80 MB80 44 31, and 32 for +24 V.
Use M80/MB80 pins 01
Xn+11#6 M80 MB80 14 and 02 for 0 V.
Xn+11#7 M80 MB80 45
Xn+12#0 M80 MB80 15
Xn+12#1 M80 MB80 46
Xn+12#2 M80 MB80 16
Xn+12#3 M80 MB80 47
Xn+12#4 M80 MB80 17
Xn+12#5 M80 MB80 48
Xn+12#6 M80 MB80 18
Xn+12#7 M80 MB80 49
460
Table G.3 (b) Pin assignment for output signals and common
signal pin assignment for those signals
The additional I/O–B3 card is capable only of sink–type output.
The additional I/O–F3 card is capable only of source–type output.
Signal pin Signal pin
Signal
g
address
I/O–B3 No. I/O–F3 No.
Ym+0#0 M62 25 MB62 25
Ym+0#1 M62 26 MB62 26
Ym+0#2 M62 27 MB62 27
Ym+0#3 M62 08 MB62 08
Ym+0#4 M62 07 MB62 07
Ym+0#5 M62 06 MB62 06
Ym+0#6 M62 05 MB62 05
Ym+0#7 M62 41 MB62 41
Ym+1#0 M62 24 MB62 24
Ym+1#1 M62 23 MB62 23
Ym+1#2 M62 22 MB62 22
Ym+1#3 M62 09 MB62 09
Ym+1#4 M62 21 MB62 21
Ym+1#5 M62 19 MB62 19
Ym+1#6 M62 20 MB62 20
Ym+1#7 M62 10 MB62 10
Ym+2#0 M62 40 MB62 40
Ym+2#1 M62 39 MB62 39
Ym+2#2 M62 38 MB62 38
Ym+2#3 M62 37 MB62 37
Ym+2#4 M62 36 MB62 36
Ym+2#5 M62 35 MB62 35
Ym+2#6 M62 34 MB62 34
Ym+2#7 M62 33 MB62 33
461

Signal
address
Ym+3#0 M62 18 MB62 18
Ym+3#1 M62 17 MB62 17
Ym+3#2 M62 16 MB62 16
Ym+3#3 M62 15 MB62 15
Ym+3#4 M62 14 MB62 14
Ym+3#5 M62 13 MB62 13
Ym+3#6 M62 12 MB62 12
Ym+3#7 M62 11 MB62 11
Ym+4#0 M62 49 MB62 49
Ym+4#1 M62 45 MB62 45
Ym+4#2 M62 47 MB62 47
Ym+4#3 M62 46 MB62 46
Ym+4#4 M62 45 MB62 45
Ym+4#5 M62 44 MB62 44
Ym+4#6 M62 43 MB62 43
Ym+4#7 M62 42 MB62 42
Ym+5#0 M79 01 MB79 01
Ym+5#1 M79 02 MB79 02
Ym+5#2 M79 03 MB79 03
Ym+5#3 M79 04 MB79 04
Ym+5#4 M79 05 MB79 05
Ym+5#5 M79 06 MB79 06
Ym+5#6 M79 07 MB79 07
Ym+5#7 M79 08 MB79 08
462

Signal
address
Ym+6#0 M79 09 MB79 09
Ym+6#1 M79 10 MB79 10
Ym+6#2 M79 11 MB79 11
Ym+6#3 M79 12 MB79 12
Ym+6#4 M79 13 MB79 13
Ym+6#5 M79 14 MB79 14
Ym+6#6 M79 15 MB79 15
Ym+6#7 M79 16 MB79 16
Ym+7#0 M80 33 MB80 33
Ym+7#1 M80 19 MB80 19
Ym+7#2 M80 34 MB80 34
Ym+7#3 M80 20 MB80 20
Ym+7#4 M80 35 MB80 35
Ym+7#5 M80 05 MB80 05
Ym+7#6 M80 21 MB80 21
Ym+7#7 M80 36 MB80 36
Ym+8#0 M80 06 MB80 06
Ym+8#1 M80 22 MB80 22
Ym+8#2 M80 37 MB80 37
Ym+8#3 M80 07 MB80 07
Ym+8#4 M80 23 MB80 23
Ym+8#5 M80 38 MB80 38
Ym+8#6 M80 08 MB80 08
Ym+8#7 M80 24 MB80 24
463
G.4 To use additional I/O–B3 or F3 cards, input/output signals must be

assigned by means of I/O module assignment using a PMC–M ladder
INPUT/OUTPUT program. For details, refer to the FANUC PMC–MODEL K/L/M/P
SIGNAL Programming Manual.
ASSIGNMENT ON
Make the following settings for the additional I/O–B3 or F3 cards.
FANUC I/O LINK
Address of DI/DO in the FANUC PMC–M with I/O Link are as follows:
DI/DO Address DGN. NO
DI 128byte=1024 point
X3072 ∼ X3199 5072∼5199
(MAX)
DO 128byte=1024 point
Y3200∼Y3327 5200∼5327
(MAX)
The point number of DI and DO of the additional I/O–B3 and F3 are as

follows:
DI/DO of additional I/O–B3 Number of points
DI 13byte=104 point
DO 9byte=72 point
Therefore, the signal names DI (Xn + j.j) and DO (Ym + j.j) of the
additional I/O–B3 and F3 can be freely allocated in the range:
3072 n 3187
3200 m 3319
An example of allocation is shown below.
Example First address n of DI = 3100 and first address m of DO = 3200

DI/DO of additional I/O–B3 Address DGN. NO
DI X3100∼X3112 5100∼5112
DO Y3200∼Y3208 5200∼5208
As a concrete example,
DI signal (Xn + 11.2) of pin 12 of M80 connector is X3111.2.

DO signal (Ym + 4.7) of pin 42 of M62 connector is Y3204.7.
464
G.5
B–61393E/06
DIMENSIONS
Mounting hole
Mounting hole
M79 (I/O–B3) M62 (I/O–B3) M80 (I/O–B3)

MB79 (I/O–F3) MB62(I/O–F3) MB80(I/O–F3) M78 M61
Reserve space
465
APPENDIX
G. ADDITIONAL I/O–B3, F3
H. DESCRIPTION OF I/O MODULE
CONNECTION APPENDIX B–61393E/06
H DESCRIPTION OF I/O MODULE CONNECTION
466
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX CONNECTION
H.1 In this chapter, the required electrical and structural specification on

connecting I/O module for Series 0–C is described.
OUTLINE In order to connect the I/O module, a PMC–M with optical interface is
necessary.
PMC–M
Printed circuit board
M25 Optical fiber cable COP4
PMC
I/O unit
Optical connector
0–C
Master printed
circuit board
PMC
Power unit
0–C
Master printed circuit board
M25 PMC–M printed circuit board

Optical connector
467
H.2
CONFIGURATION OF
THE I/O UNIT
H.2.1 The I/O unit is a unit for mounting the I/O modules, with the following
Configuration of the I/O components.
Unit D I/O base unit
A motor board to mount various modules. Four types of I/O base units
are offered with I/O module mount capacity of 4, 6, 8 and 10 modules.
D I/O Interface module
A module is for controlling I/O module. One of IF01A or IF01B is
always necessary. IF01A is connected to the NC control unit with
an optical fiber cable to control the I/O module. It can control up to
3 other I/O units. When expanding the I/O unit, IF01B is connected
with the IF01A mounted on I/O unit with an electric cable to control
the I/O module. Up to three IF01Bs can be connected to one IF01A.
IF04C can also be mounted to expand the I/O unit. The IF04C is
connected to the NC control unit with an optical fiber cable to control
up to four IF01As.
D I/O module
Various I/O modules are prepared for the input/output control of the
PMC. Details are described in after the next section.
Fig. H.2.1 (a) is an example of the I/O unit construction (maximum
components).
Metal cable
I/O base unit I/O base unit I/O base unit I/O base unit
Optical fiber
cable CA15 CA16 CA15 CA16 CA15 CA16
CNC Group
Control unit PSU #0
PSU PSU PSU
COP4 IEO1B IEO1B IEO1B
M25 IEO1A
Base #0 Base #1 Base #2 Base #3
Fig H.2.1 (a) Example of the I/O unit construction
468
Metal cable
Optical fiber
cable
CNC
control unit Base #0 Base #1 Base #2 Base #3
M25 I/O base unit I/O base unit I/O base unit I/O base unit
CA15 CA16 CA15 CA16 Group

CA16 CA15
#0
PSU
PSU PSU PSU
COP4
IEO1B IEO1B IEO1B
IEO1A
IFO4C
COP4 CA15 CA16 CA15 CA16 Group
CA16 CA15
#1
COP2A PSU
PSU PSU PSU
COP2B COP4
COP2C IEO1B IEO1B IEO1B
IEO1A
ÃÃÃ
COP2D
Optical I/O base unit I/O base unit I/O base unit I/O base unit
ÃÃÃ
fiber
cable
CA15
PSU
CA16 CA15 CA16 CA15 CA16 Group
#2
PSU PSU PSU
COP4
IEO1B IEO1B IEO1B
IEO1A
CA15 CA16 CA15 CA16 Group

CA16 CA15
Optical fiber #3
PSU
cable PSU PSU PSU
COP4
IEO1B IEO1B IEO1B
IEO1A
Fig. H.2.1(b) Example of I/O unit construction
The number of I/O modules mountable on the I/O unit is limited

according to the slots on the I/O base unit, maximum DI/DO points, and
the power capacity of the power supply module.
NOTE
The I/O interface module IF04C can be mounted on any I/O
base unit. Every I/O base units can be used.
469
D The slot number limit

I/O Base unit name Slots numer
BU10A 10
BU08A 8
BU06A 6
BU04A 4
NOTE
When using the interface module IF04C, one more slot is
necessary for the IF04C, so I must be subtracted from the
slots number of the I/O base unit mounted with IFG04Cs in
the above table.
D Maximum DI/DO Points DI : 752 points (X1100–X1193)

DO : 496 points (Y1200–Y1261)
For the DI/DO points occupied by each DI/DO modules, see Table H.2.1.
D Limits according to the Calculate the necessary value of voltage A, B, and C according to Table
power capacity H.2.1 for each I/O unit, and decide the mountable number of I/O modules
so that it is within the limits.
470
Table H.2.1 Power supply capacity of the I/O unit calculation list
Power supply Occupied DI/DO points
Mod le name
Module
Voltage A Voltage B Voltage C DI DO
I/O interface module IF01A 1.8 – –
I/O interface module IF01B 1.6 – –
I/O interface module IF01C 1.6 – –
Output module OD64A 2.1 64

Output module OD32A 1.2 32
Output module OD64B 2.1 64
Output module OD16C 0.8 16
Output module OD08C 0.5 8
Output module OD16D 0.6 16
Output module OD08D 0.4 8
Output module OD16E 0.6 16
Output module OD08E 0.4 8
Input module ID64A/B 0.6 0.7 64

Input module ID64C/D 0.6 64
Input module IA16E 0.5 16
Output module IA08E 0.4 8
Analog input module AD04A 0.7 0.6 64
Analog output module AD03A 0.5 0.35 1.1 48
Analog output module AD02A 0.4 0.25 0.8 32
12
Limit value 3 4 752 496
(15)*
NOTE
The limit of voltage A is normally 12, but when not using the input modules ID64A/B, 32A/B,
16A/B, 08A/B the limit will become 15. (In this case the +24E output from the I/O base unit
cannot be used.)
471
D Mount position of the two modules at the right are fixed.

D Optional I/O modules can be mounted on mount positions 1 to 10.
D The I/O interface module (IF04C) can be mounted on any mount
position 1 to 10.
Note 1
screw
anything to these
cannot be used.
Do not connect
M3
two terminals.
These two
terminals
T1
M4 tap
CA15
CA16
+24V(2A)
+24E
GND
ALC
ALD
Power supply
F35
module
2A 0.5A
Mount position fixed
F34 F33
POW
(5A) (5A)
F31 F31
CP31
I/O interface
(IF01A/01B)
COP4
module
0
1
2
ÃÃ
3
ÃÃ
I/O module mount slots (10 modules)
ÃÃ
4
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
5
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
6
ÃÃ
ÃÃ
7
8
9
10
number
Slot
NOTE
When using a non–insular type input module, use these terminal to supply power to the external
contacts. Be careful not to connect short with the +24E of other base units.
472
D Mount position of the two modules at the right are fixed.

D Optional I/O modules can be mounted on mount positions 1 to 8.
D The I/O interface module (IF04C) can be mounted on optional
position of mount positions 1 to 8.
screw
Note 1
M4 tap
M3
T1
CA15
CA16
+24V(2A)
+24E
GND
ALC
ALD
F35
Power supply
POWER
Mount position fixed
0.5A 2A
module
F33 F34
(5A) (5A)
F31 F32
CP31
I/O interface
(IF01A/01B)
BU08A
BU06A
BU04A
COP4
module
0
1
2
(8 modules)
(6 modules)
(4 modules)
3
Mountable position of I/O machine

4
5
6
7
8
number
Slot
NOTE
When using a non–insular type input module, use these terminal to supply power to the external
contacts. Be careful not to connect short with the +24E of other base units.
473
H.2.2 The I/O unit offers abundant I/O modules so that optional systems can be
Types of I/O Modules constructed according to the machine tool specifications.
D Digital input module

Specification
External
LED input
inp t
Input form Module name Points (bytes) connection
Rated Rated Response display
terminal
voltage current time
ID08A 8(1) Terminal board Provided
ID16A 16(2) Terminal board Provided

20mS
ID32A 32(4) One connector None
ID64A 64(8) Two connectors None

Non–insulated
24VDC 7 5mA
7.5mA
DC input ID08B 8(1) Terminal board Provided
ID16B 16(2) Terminal board Provided

2mS
ID32B 32(4) One connector None
ID64B 64(8) Two connectors None
ID08C 8(1) Terminal board Provided
ID16C 16(2) Terminal board Provided

20mS
ID32C 32(4) One connector None
ID64C 64(8) Two connectors None

Insulated DC
24VDC 9mA
input ID08D 8(1) Terminal board Provided
ID16D 16(2) Terminal board Provided

2mS
ID32D 32(4) One connector None
ID64D 64(8) Two connectors None
IA08E 8(1) Terminal board Provided

100V to
AC in
input
ut 9mA 50mS
IE16E 120VAC 16(2) Terminal board Provided
474
D Digital output module

Specification
External
Mod le
Module Points inp t
LED input
Output form connection Fuse
name Rated Rated Response (bytes) display
terminal
voltage current time
Non– OD32A 32(4) One connector None None

24V to
insulated 0 125A
0.125A 0 2mS
0.2mS
48VDC
DC input OD64A 64(8) Two connectors None None
OD08B 8(1) Terminal board Provided Provided

0 5A
0.5A
OD16B 16(2) Terminal board Provided Provided
0 3mS
0.3mS
Polarity OD32B 32(4) One connector None None
24V to
non–contact 0 25A
0.25A
OD64B 48VDC 64(8) Two connectors None None
DC output
OD08C 8(1) Terminal board Provided Provided

2A 0.4mS
0 4mS
OD16C 16(2) Terminal board Provided Provided
OA08D 8(1) Terminal board Provided Provided

100V to 1/2
1 6A
1.6A
OA16D 120VAC cycles 16(2) Terminal board Provided Provided
AC output
out ut
OA08E 8(1) Terminal board Provided Provided
200V to 1/2
1 6A
1.6A
OA16E 240VAC cycles 16(2) Terminal board Provided Provided
D Analog input/output
module
Specification Occupying
External
Module
Mod le Analog input/
inp t/ input/output
inp t/o tp t
Type connection
name Analog signal Resolu- General output points points
terminal
range tion accuracy (bytes)
64 input
Analog input –10 to +10VDC Terminal
AD04A 12 bit 0.5% 4 inputs points
module –20 to +20mADC board
(8 bytes)
32 input
Terminal
DA02A 2 outputs points
board
(4 bytes)
Analog
g output –10 to +10VDC
12 bit 0 5%
0.5%
module 0 to +20mADC 48 input
Terminal
DA03A 3 inputs points
board
(6 bytes)
475
H.2.3 Address of the modules in the sequence program must be decided by

Module Addresses machine tool builder. Set the memory using the PMC–M programmer.
The address information set in the programmer must also be written when
writing the sequence program in the EPROM.
After written in the EPROM, the I/O addresses cannot be changed.
Elements to decide this address are, connection position of the I/O unit
(group number and base number), position of the modules (slot number)
mounted on the I/O unit, and the names of the modules.
D Group number As described in section H.2.1, I/O unit can be extended up to four units
using additional I/O interface modules IF01As with the I/O interface
module IF01A as its base. Up to four I/O units extended from one IF01A
are called groups. If a single group cannot accommodate the necessary
I/O modules, or when multiple I/O base units are dispersed somewhere
away from the machine tool connected with optical fiber cables, the I/O
interface module IF04C can be used to branch the optical fiber cable
connecting the NC and the I/O units. Thus, maximum 4 I/O unit groups
can be connected. When IF04C is not used, the group number of the I/O
unit is 0. When using the IF04C, the group connected to the optical
connector COP2A is group number 0, COP2B group number 1 COP2C
group number 2, COP2D group number 3. (See Fig. H.2.1 (a).)
D Base number The maximum 4 I/O base units are in one group. The I/O unit mounted
with I/O interface module IF01A is base number 0, and the other units are
numbered base #1, base #2, base #3 as it goes away from base #0.
D Slot number Maximum 4 (BU04A), 6 (BU06A), 8 (BU08A), 10 (BU10A) I/O

modules can be mounted on one I/O base unit, according to the type of
I/O base units. The mount position of the modules on the I/O base unit
is expressed with slot numbers. The mount position of the I/O interface
module is numbered 0, and the others are numbered 1, 2, 3 ..... form the
right in order. the I/O modules can be mounted on optional slots. It is also
not necessary to mount the slots in right order without space. See Fig.
H.2.1 (b) and Fig. H.2.1 (c).
D Module name See Section H.2.2 and Table H.2.1 for module names.
476
D How to set address to The character and the mount position of each module is now decided with
each module the group number, base number, slot number, and module name, so the
address of each module can now be decided, corresponding these data and
the input/output addresses. After display the I/O unit address screen as
shown below on the PMC–M programmer’s CRT, set necessary data on
the screen. the module address is now decided. The occupying DI/DO
points (bytes) of each module are stored in the PMC–I programmer, so
just decide the address of the head byte of each module, and the addresses
of the other bytes in the module are automatically decided by the
programmer.
ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME
X1100
X1101
X1102
X1103
X1104
X1105 0 0 5 ID32C
X1106 0 0 5 ID32C
X1107 0 0 5 ID32C
X1108 0 0 5 ID32C
X1109
Automatically set
Fig. H.2.3 I/O unit address screen
For instance, when the module ID32C is assigned address X5 as in Fig.

H.2.3, the necessary 4 bytes are automatically secured. For details on
operation, see PMC–M programming manual. The input/output
addresses of each module can be freely decided in this method at the
machine tool builder, so the address can be decided when making the
ladder diagram, as long as it does not duplicate with the addresses of each
module.
477
D Notes when setting D When assigning I/O modules of different group number to the
addresses input/output addresses in series, using the I/O interface module
IP04C, the address where the group number changes, must be an even
number address.
ADDRESS GROUP BASE SLOT NAME
X1100 0 0 1 ID16A
X1101 0 0 1 ID16A
X1102 0 0 2 ID08A
X1103 0 0 3 IA08E
X1104 1 0 1 IA08E
X1105 1 0 2 IA08E
X1106 1 0 3 IA16E
X1107 1 0 3 IA16E
X1108 2 0 1 ID16A
X1109 2 0 1 ID16A
Group number changes from the even number address
D The head bytes of the analog input module (AD04A) and analog
output module (DA02A, 03A) must be assigned to even number
addresses of input address (X jjj), and output address (Y jjj)
each.When reading the A/D–converted digital value from the input
address (X jjj), or wen writing the D/A–converting value to the
output address (Y jjj), readout and write–in must always be done
in word (16 bits) units.
478
H.2.4
Digital Input Module
(1) Specifications Digital input module specifications are shown at Table H.2.4 (a) – (c).
Table H.2.4 (a) DC input specifications (non–insulation type)
Module
ID08A/B ID16A/B ID32A/B ID64A/B
Item
Points/module 8 16 32 64
Rated input voltage 24VDC
Max. input voltage 30VDC
ON 18V or more
O eration voltage (Note 1)
Operation
OFF 6V or less
ON 6mA or more
Operation
O eration current (Note 1)
OFF 1.5mA or less
Input current Approx.7.5mA
Input impedance Approx. 3.3kW
OFF→ON IDxxA : 20mS max / IDxxB : 2mS max

Res onse time (Note 2)
Response
ON→OFF IDxxA : 20mS max / IDxxB : 2mS max
Operation display LED lights when input is ON. None
Eternal connection method Terminal board (M3) Connector
Common points (Note 3) 1 common per 4 points input 2 commons per 8 points
Dielectric strength Non–insulation type input
NOTE
1 When voltage between input terminal and common terminal is 18V or more, or when current
flowing into input terminal is 6 mA or more, the input signal (contact point) is regarded as ON.
When input terminal voltage is 6V or less, or when input current is 1.5 mA or less, input signal
(contact point) is regarded as OFF.
When using proximity switches or photo electric switches, be careful of current leakage when
contact point is off. In case current leakage is 1.5 mA or more, it will not be regarded as OFF.
2 Response times shown here is the delay time from module input to output. The actual response
time is the above value plus the scanning time which is different in each system configuration.
3 The commons are not connected in the module.
4 This module is a non–insular type, so the 24 VDC applied to the external contact point is
provided from the I/O unit. However, as only 1.2 A or less can be externally supplied, maximum
contact points per one I/O unit which can be set ON, is limited to 140 points (when calculated
with the worst value of contact point current).
479
Table H.2.4 (b) DC input specifications (insulation type)
Module
ID08C/D ID16C/D ID32C/D ID64C/D
Item
Rated input voltage 24VDC
Max. input voltage 30VDC
ON 15V or more
Operation
OFF 8V or less
ON 4.5mA or more
Response
OFF 2mA ore less
Input current 9mA or less
OFF→ON IDxxC : 20mS max / IDxxD : 2mS max

Response
ON→OFF IDxxC : 20mS max / IDxxD : 2mS max
Operation display LED lights when input is ON. None
External connection method Terminal board (M3) Connector
Common points (Note 3) 1 common per 4 points input 2 commons per 8 points
Dielectric strength 1 minute under 100 VAC
NOTE
flowing into input terminal is 4.5 mA or more, the input signal (contact point) is regarded as ON.
When input terminal voltage is 8V or less, or when input current is 2 mA or less, input signal
When using proximity switches or photo–electric switches, be careful of current leakage when
contact point is off. In case current leakage is 2 mA or more, it will not be regarded as OFF.
2 Response time shown here is the delay time from module input to output. The actual response
3 The commons are not connected to each other in the module.
480
Table H.2.4 (c) AC input specifications
Module
IA08E IA16E
Item
Points/module 8 16
Rated input voltage 100∼120VAC, 50/60Hz
Max. input voltage 140VAC
ON 70V or more
Operation
OFF 20V or less
ON 5mA or more
Operation
O eration current (Note 1)
OFF 2mA or less
Input current 9mA type (100VDC)
OFF→ON 50mS max

Response
Res onse time (Note2)
ON→OFF 50mS max
Operation display LED lights when input is ON.
External connection method Terminal board (M3)
Common points (Note 3) 1 common per 4 points input
Dielectric strength 1 minute under 100 VAC
NOTE
flowing into input terminal is 5 mA or more, the input signal (contact point) is regarded as ON.
When input terminal voltage is 20V or less, or when input current is 2 mA or less, input signal
When using proximity switches or photo electric switches, be careful of current leakage when
contact point is off. In case current leakage is 2 mA or more, it will not be regarded as OFF.
2 Response times shown here is the delay time from module input to output. The actual response
3 Commons are not connected in the module.
481
D Connection with the (1) Outer view of the digital input module
digital input module The digital input module is housed in a plastic case. It has three types
according to the connection method of the signal cable.
C20B
(for DI)
250mm
C20A C20A
(for DI) (for DI)
162mm 35mm
(i) Terminal board type (ii) Single connector type (iii) Double connectors type
ID08A/B, ID16A/B ID32A/B ID64A/B
ID08C/D, ID16C/D ID32C/D ID64C/D
IA08E, IA16E
Connector:
MR–50LFH
MR–50RMA to load
C20B
(HONDA TSUSIN KOGYO)
MR–50RMA to load
C20A
(HONDA TSUSIN KOGYO)
Cable:
Input module With unified shield
The connection cables to the connector and load used in the above type
(ii) and (iii) are described in details in the above figure. When working
with the shield wire, fasten the shield casing to the ground plate with metal
fitting.
The terminal board in the above figure (i), can freely be mounted/
dismounted , so it is not necessary to remove the wiring when exchanging
the module.
482
(2) Correspondence of the input signals and the addresses in the module
The following figure shows the correspondence of the input signals of
the digital input module and the addresses in the module and the bits.
The address in module are relative address taken in each module, and
the head address of the module is “0”. The actual address in the
sequence program is decided as in the section H.2.3 (Module address)
by setting the correspondence of the module and the input/output
address. The input signal to PC–I is “1” when the contact connected
to the digital input module is ON, and “0” when OFF. In the
non–insulated type DC input module (IDxxA, IDxxB), it is “1” when
ON and “0” when off, without relations to the polarity of the common.
ÃÃÃ
Address in ÃÃÃ BIT
ÃÃÃÃ
module
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ÃÃÃÃ
0 IS07 IS06 IS05 IS04 IS03 IS02 IS01 IS00 8 points
module 16 points
module
1 IS17 IS16 IS15 IS14 IS13 IS12 IS11 IS10

ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
32 points
module

ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
64 points
6 IS67 IS66 IS65 IS64 IS63 IS62 IS61 IS60 module
Connection drawing of the digital input module

Fig. H.2.4 (a):
Connecting drawing of ID08A, ID16A, ID08B, ID16B
Fig. H.2.4 (b)–(e):
Connecting drawing of ID32A, ID64A, ID32B, ID64B
Fig. H.2.4 (f):
Connecting drawing of ID08C, ID16C, ID08D, ID16D
Fig. H.2.4 (g)–(j):
Connecting drawing of ID32C, ID64C, ID32D, ID64D
Fig. H.2.4 (k):
Connecting drawing of IA08E, IA16E
483
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
Terminal number Address in
↓ module
Ã ÃÃ ÃÃ
↓
IS00 (1)
ÃÃ
0.0
IS01
ÃÃ (2) ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ 0.1
IS02
ÃÃ
(3)
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
0.2
IS03 (4)
0.3
ÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ICM0 (5)
IS04
IS05
ÃÃ
(6)
(7)
0.4
0.5
IS06 (8)
0.6
IS07
ICM1
ÃÃ
(9)
(10)
IS10
Ã
(11)
IS11 (12)
1.1
IS12
ÃÃ
(13)
1.2
IS13 (14)
1.3
ICM2 (15)
IS14
ÃÃ
(16)
IS15 (17)
1.5
Ã ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
IS16 (18)
1.6
IS17 (19)
1.7
ICM3 (20)
IS10–17 are not mounted on ID08A, ID08B.
Ã
ÃÃ
24V common
connection +24E
I/O base unit
Terminal board (T1)
Ã GND
Either 24V or GND can be selected as input common.
Fig. H.2.4 (a) Input module ID16A, ID08A, ID16B, ID08B
484
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
C20A Address in
module
Ã ÃÃ ÃÃ
↓
IS00 (16)
ÃÃ
0.0
IS01
IS02
ÃÃ
(48)
0.2
IS03 (15)
0.3
IS04 (31)
0.4
IS05
IS06
ÃÃ
(47)
(39)
0.5
0.6
IS07 (46)
0.7
ICM0 (49, 50)
IS10 (12)
1.0
IS11
ÃÃ
(28)
1.1
IS12 (44)
1.2
IS13 (11)
1.3
IS14
IS15
ÃÃ
(27)
(43)
1.4
1.5
IS16 (10)
1.6
IS17 (42)
1.7
ICM1 (29, 45)
Ã
ÃÃ
24V common
connection +24E
I/O base unit
Terminal board(T1)
GND common
Ã GND
connection
Whether 24V or GND is selected for input common.
Fig. H.2.4 (b) Input module ID64A, ID32A, ID64B, ID32B (1)
485
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
C20A Address in
module
Ã ÃÃ ÃÃ
↓
IS20 (7)
ÃÃ
2.0
IS21
IS22
ÃÃ
(39)
2.2
IS23 (6)
2.3
IS24 (23)
2.4
IS25
IS26
ÃÃ
(38)
(22)
2.5
2.6
IS27 (37)
2.7
ICM2 (40, 41)
IS30 (3)
3.0
IS31
ÃÃ
(20)
3.1
IS32 (35)
3.2
IS33 (2)
3.3
IS34
IS35
ÃÃ
(19)
(34)
3.4
3.5
IS36 (1)
3.6
IS37 (33)
3.7
ICM3 (21, 36)
Ã
ÃÃ
24V common
connection +24E
I/O base unit
Terminal board(T1)
GND common
Ã GND
connection
Fig. H.2.4 (c) Input module ID64A, ID32A, ID64B, ID32B (2)
486
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
C20B Address in
module
Ã ÃÃ ÃÃ
↓
IS40 (16)
ÃÃ
4.0
IS41
IS42
ÃÃ
(48)
4.2
IS43 (15)
4.3
IS44 (31)
4.4
IS45
IS46
ÃÃ
(47)
(30)
4.5
4.6
IS47 (46)
4.7
ICM4 (49, 50)
IS50 (12)
5.0
IS51
ÃÃ
(28)
5.1
IS52 (44)
5.2
IS53 (11)
5.3
IS54
IS55
ÃÃ
(27)
(43)
5.4
5.5
IS56 (10)
5.6
IS57 (42)
5.7
ICM5 (29, 45)
Ã
ÃÃ
24V common
connection +24E
I/O base unit
Terminal board (T1)
GND common
Ã GND
connection
Fig. H.2.4 (d) Input module ID64A, ID64B (3)
487
ÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃ
C20B Address in
module
Ã ÃÃ ÃÃ
↓
IS60 (7)
ÃÃ
6.0
IS61
IS62
ÃÃ
(39)
6.2
IS63 (6)
6.3
IS64 (23)
6.4
IS65
IS66
ÃÃ
(38)
(22)
6.5
6.6
IS67 (37)
6.7
ICM6 (40, 41)
IS70 (3)
7.0
IS71
ÃÃ
(20)
7.1
IS72 (35)
7.2
IS73 (2)
7.3
IS74
IS75
ÃÃ
(19)
(34)
7.4
7.5
IS76 (1)
7.6
IS77 (33)
7.7
ICM7 (21, 36)
Ã
ÃÃ
24V common
connection +24E
I/O base unit
Terminal board(T1)
GND common
Ã GND
connection
Fig. H.2.4 (e) Input module ID64A, ID64B (4)
488

↓ module
Ã ÃÃÃ ÃÃÃ
↓
R
IS00 (1)
Ã
ÃÃÃ
0.0
Ã Ã Ã
R
IS01
ÃÃ (2)
0.1
IS02 (3)
0.2
IS03 (4)
0.3
ÃÃÃÃ
DC24V
ICM0
IS04
ÃÃ
(5)
(6)
0.4
IS05 (7)
0.5
IS06
IS07
ÃÃ
(8)
(9)
0.6
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
0.7
ÃÃÃÃ Ã ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ICM1 (10)
DC24V
IS10 (11)
1.0
IS11
ÃÃ
(12)
1.1
IS12 (13)
1.2
IS13 (14)
1.3
ÃÃÃÃ
DC24V
ICM2
IS14
ÃÃ
(15)
(16)
1.4
IS15 (17)
1.5
IS16 (18)
1.6
ÃÃÃÃ
IS17
Ã
(19)
1.7
ÃÃÃÃ
ICM3 (20)
DC24V
IS10–17 are not mounted on ID08C, ID08D.
24 VDC can be connected to either +24V side or 0V side.
Fig. H.2.4 (f) Input module ID16C, ID08C, ID16D, ID08D
489
C20A Address in
module
Ã ÃÃÃ ÃÃÃ
↓
R
IS00 (16)
Ã
ÃÃÃ
0.0
Ã Ã Ã
R
IS01
ÃÃ (32)
0.1
IS02 (48)
0.2
IS03 (15)
0.3
IS04
IS05
ÃÃ
(31)
(47)
0.4
0.5
IS06 (30)
0.6
ÃÃÃÃ
IS07
Ã
(46)
DC24V
ICM0 (49, 50)
IS10 (12)
1.0
IS11
ÃÃ
(28)
1.1
IS12 (44)
1.2
IS13 (11)
1.3
IS14
ÃÃ
(27)
IS15 (43)
1.5
IS16 (10)
1.6
ÃÃÃÃ
IS17
ÃÃ (42)
DC24V
ICM1 (29, 45)
24VDC can be connected to either +24V side or 0V side.
Fig. H.2.4 (g) Input module ID64C, ID32C, ID64D, ID32D (1)
490
C20A Address in
module
Ã ÃÃÃ ÃÃÃ
↓
R
IS20 (07)
Ã
ÃÃÃ
2.0
Ã Ã Ã
R
IS21
ÃÃ (24)
2.1
IS22 (39)
2.2
IS23 (06)
2.3
IS24
IS25
ÃÃ
(23)
(38)
2.4
2.5
IS26 (22)
2.6
ÃÃÃÃ
IS27
Ã
(37)
DC24V
ICM2 (40, 41)
IS30 (03)
3.0
IS31
ÃÃ
(20)
3.1
IS32 (35)
3.2
IS33 (02)
3.3
IS34
ÃÃ
(19)
IS35 (34)
3.5
IS36 (01)
3.6
ÃÃÃÃ
IS37
ÃÃ (33)
DC24V
ICM3 (21, 36)
Fig. H.2.4 (h) Input module ID64C, ID32C, ID64D, ID32D (2)
491
C20B Address in
module
Ã ÃÃÃ ÃÃÃ
↓
R
IS40 (16)
Ã
ÃÃÃ
4.0
Ã Ã Ã
R
IS41
ÃÃ (32)
4.1
IS42 (48)
4.2
IS43 (15)
4.3
IS44
IS45
ÃÃ
(31)
(47)
4.4
4.5
IS46 (30)
4.6
ÃÃÃÃ
IS47
Ã
(46)
DC24V
ICM4 (49, 50)
IS50 (12)
5.0
IS51
ÃÃ
(28)
5.1
IS52 (44)
5.2
IS53 (11)
5.3
IS54
ÃÃ
(27)
IS55 (43)
5.5
IS56 (10)
5.6
ÃÃÃÃ
IS57
ÃÃ (42)
DC24V
ICM5 (29, 45)
24 VDC can be connected to either +24V side or 0V side.
Fig. H.2.4 (i) Input module ID64C, ID64D (3)
492
C20B Address in
module
Ã ÃÃÃ ÃÃÃ
↓
R
IS60 (07)
Ã
ÃÃÃ
6.0
Ã Ã Ã
R
IS61
ÃÃ (24)
6.1
IS62 (39)
6.2
IS63 (06)
6.3
IS64
IS65
ÃÃ
(23)
(38)
6.4
6.5
IS66 (22)
6.6
ÃÃÃÃ
IS67
Ã
(37)
DC24V
ICM6 (40, 41)
IS70 (03)
7.0
IS71
ÃÃ
(20)
7.1
IS72 (35)
7.2
IS73 (02)
7.3
IS74
ÃÃ
(19)
IS75 (34)
7.5
IS76 (01)
7.6
ÃÃÃÃ
IS77
ÃÃ (33)
DC24V
ICM7 (21, 36)
Fig. H.2.4 (j) Input module ID64C, ID64D (4)
493

↓ module
Ã ÃÃÃ ÃÃÃ
↓
R
IS00 (1)
Ã
ÃÃÃ
0.0
Ã Ã Ã
R
IS01
ÃÃ (2)
0.1
IS02 (3)
0.2
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
IS03 (4)
0.3
ÃÃÃÃ
AC100
∼120V
ICM0
IS04
ÃÃ
(5)
(6)
0.4
IS05 (7)
0.5
IS06
IS07
ÃÃ
(8)
(9)
0.6
0.7
ÃÃÃÃ Ã ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
AC100 ICM1 (10)
∼120V
IS10 (11)
1.0
IS11
ÃÃ
(12)
1.1
IS12 (13)
1.2
ÃÃÃÃ ÃÃ ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
IS13 (14)
1.3
ÃÃÃÃ
AC100
∼120V
ICM2
IS14
ÃÃ
(15)
(16)
1.4
IS15 (17)
1.5
IS16 (18)
1.6
ÃÃÃÃ IS17
Ã
(19)
1.7
AC100
ÃÃÃÃ
ICM3 (20)
∼120V
IS10–17 are not mounted on ID08A, ID08B.
Fig. H.2.4 (k) Input module IA16E, IA08E
494
H.2.5
Digital Output Module
D Specification Digital input module specifications are shown at Table H.2.5 (a) – (e).
Table H.2.5 (a) DC output specifications (polarized non–contact type)
Module
OD32A OD64A
Item
Points/module 32 64
Rated output voltage 24 – 48 VDC
Rated output voltage range 50 VDC or less (Note 1)
Per point 0.125A
Max. output current Per common 0.5A
Total 4A 8A
Surge–on current —
Output voltage fall at ON (Note 3) 0.75V max
Current leakage at OFF 0.1mA max
OFF→ON 0.2mS max (Resistance load)

Response
ON→OFF 0.2mS max (Resistance load)
Operation display None
External connection method Connectors
Common points 2 commons per 8 points output
Fuse None
Polarity None
Dielectric strength 100 VAC, 1 min.
CAUTION
In case of connecting inductive loads (like relays) to the output, do not fail to connect a diode
to both sides of the load.
In case of connecting a lamp load, insert dark lightening resistances in parallel between the
output terminals to decrease current flow to within the standard.
NOTE
1 There is no lower limit in output voltage for the output operation.
2 Respoinse time shown here is the delay time from module input to output. The actual response
time is the above value plus the scanning time which is different to each system configuration.
3 The output voltage drop at power ON depends on a load current. It is represented by following
equation.
Vsat = 6 IL (Vsat : Output voltage drop IL : Load current)
495
Table H.2.5 (b) DC output specifications (polarized non–contact type)
Module
OD08B OD16B OD32B OD64B
Item
Rated output voltage 24 –48 VDC
Output voltage range 50 VDC or less (Note 1)
Per point 0.5A 0.25A
Max. output current Per common 2A 1A
Total 4A 8A 8A 16A
Output voltage fall at ON 1V max 0.5V max

Response
Operation display LED lights when output is ON. None
External connection method Terminal board (M3) Connectors
Common points 1 common per 4 points output 2 commons per 8 points output
Fuse (Note 3) 3.2A/common None
Polarity Exists (the common is the “–” side)
CAUTION
1 The commons are mutually connected in the modules of types OD08B and OD16B, but load
current cannot be sent in the internal pattern. The common must always be connected to the
minus side (0V) of the load current.
2 In case of connecting inductive loads (like relays) to the output, do not fail to connect a diode
NOTE
1 There is no lower limit in output voltage for the output operation, but the operation display LED
of the modules with operation display will become dark if the output voltage is 24 VDC or less.
3 Fuse are inserted to each common. The red LED at the bottom of the module front will light
if any of the fuse breaks.
496
Table H.2.5 (c) DC output specifications (polarized non–contact type)

Module
OD08C OD16C
Item
Points/module 8 16
Rated output voltage 24–48 VDC
Output voltage range 50 VDC or less (Note 1)
Per point 2A
Max. output current Per common 4A (Note 4)
Total 8A 16A
Output voltage fall at ON (Note 5) 1.0V max
Response
Operated display LED lights when Output is ON.
External connection method Terminal board connectors (M3)
Common points 1 common per 4 points output
Fuse (Note 3) None
Polarity Exists (the common is the “–” side)
CAUTION
1 The commons are mutually connected in the modules, but load current cannot be sent in the
internal pattern. The common must always be connected to the minus side (0V) of the load
current.
NOTE
1 There is no lower limit in output voltage for the output operation, but the operation display LED
will become dark if the output voltage is 24 VDC or less.
3 A fuse is inserted between the following two points of outputs.
(00, 01) (02, 03) (04, 05) (06, 07)
(10, 11) (12, 13) (14, 15) (16, 17)
4 The output current is limited to 2A per above fuse (group of two points).
5 The output voltage drop at power ON depends on a load current. It is represented by following
equation.
Vsat = 2 IL (Vsat : Output voltage drom IL : Load current)
497
Table H.2.5 (d) DC output specifications (polarized non–contact type)

Module
OD08D OD16D
Item
Points/module 8 outputs 16 outputs
Rated output voltage 100-120VAC, 50/60Hz
Output voltage range 85-132VAC
Per point 1.6A
Maximum output current Per common 3.2A (Note 3)
Total 6.4A 12.8A
Surge–on current 10A (1 cycle)
Output voltage fall at ON 1.5V max
OFF→ON 0.2mS max
Response
ON→OFF 1/2 cycle max
Operation display LED lights when outputs is turned on.
External connection method Terminal bord connectors (M3)
No. of common points 1 common/4 outputs
Fuse (Note 2) 6.3A/common
Polarity None
Dielectric strength 1500VAC, 1min
CAUTION
1 The common lines are interconnected inside the module. However, no load current is applicable to
internal patterns. Connect each common to one end of the load power supply without fail.
to both side of the load.
output teminal to decrease current flow to within the standard.
3 It shows maximum of surge–on current which can be sent to one fuse. When plural loads are
turned to ON at the same time, total surge–on current which sends to one fuse should be under
the above value.
NOTE
1 The response time shows a delay time from an input to an output of the module. Actual
response time is obtained by adding the scan time determined by the system configuration to
the value shown in the above table.
2 A fuse is inserted every common line. If one of these fuses is blown out, the red LED lights at the
bottom part of the front panel of the module.
3 In addition to the above limitation, the output current is limited to 1.6A every 2–output group
shown below.
(00, 01) (02, 03) (04, 05) (06, 07)
(10, 11) (12, 13) (14, 15) (16, 17)
Example, during the load current is sent to output [00], the load current cannot be sent to output
[01].
498
Table H.2.5 (e) DC output specifications (polarized non–contact type)

Module
OA08E OA16E
Item
Points/module 8 outputs 16 outputs
Rated output voltage 200 - 240VAC, 50/60Hz
Output voltage range 160 - 264VAC
Per point 1.6A
Maximum output current Per common 3.2A (Note 3)
Total 6.4A 12.8A
Surge–on current 10A (1 cycle)
Output voltage drop at turn–on 1.5V max.
Current leakage at OFF 3 mA max.
OFF→ON 0.2mS max.
Response
ON→OFF 1/2 cycle max.
Operation display LED lights when output is turned on.
External connection method Terminal board connectors (M3)
No. of common points 1 common/4 outputs
Fuse (Note 2) 3.2A 2 pcs/common
Polarity None
Dielectric strength 1500V AC, 1 min.
CAUTION
1 The common lines are interconnected inside the module. However, no load current is applicable to
internal patterns. Connect each common to one end of the load power supply without fail.
to both side of the load.
In case of connecting a lamp load, insert dark lightening resistances in paralle between the
3 It shows maximum of surge–on current which can be sent to one fuse. When plural loads are
turned to ON at the same time, total surge–on current which sends to one fuse should be under
the above value.
NOTE
1 The response time shows a delay time from an input to an output of the module. Actual
response time is obtained by adding the scan time determined by the system configuration to
the value shown in the above table.
2 Two fuses are inserted every common line. One red LED is mounted every two fuses, and a
corresponding LED lights, if a fuse is blown out.
3 In addition to the above limitation, the output current is limited to 1.6A every 2–output group
shown below.
(00, 01) (02, 03) (04, 05) (06, 07)
(10, 11) (12, 13) (14, 15) (16, 17)
Example, during the load current 2A is sent to output [00], the load current cannot be sent to
output [01].
499
D Connection with the (1) Outer view of the digital output module
digital output module The digital output module is housed in a plastic case. It has three types
according to the connection method of the signal cable.
250mm C21B
C21A
C21A
162mm 35mm
(i) Terminal board (ii) Single connector type (iii) Double connector type
OD08B/C, OD16B/C OD32A/B OD64A/B
OA08D/E, OA16D/E
Connector:
MR–50LFH
MR–50RMA to load
C21B
(HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO)
MR–50RMA
C21A
(HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO)
Cable:
Input module
With unified shield
The connection cables to the connector and load used in the above type
(ii) and (iii) are described in details in the above figure. See section
3.7.5 for details on shield treatment. The terminal board in the above
figure (i), can freely be mounted/dismounted, so it is not necessary to
remove the wiring when exchanging the module.
(2) Correspondence of the output signals and the addresses in the module
The following figure shows the correspondence of the output signals
of the digital output module and the addresses in the module and the
bits.
The in–module address is an address assigned within a module or an
address defined in relation to the first address 0 of the module.
The actual address in the sequence program is decided as in section
H.2.3 (Module address) by setting the correspondence of the module
and the input/output address. When the output signal from the
PMC–0M is “1” , the output contact of the digital output module is
ON, and OFF when “0”.
500
Address in
ÅÅÅBIT
module
ÅÅÅÅ
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
8 points
ÅÅÅÅ
0 OS07 OS06 OS05 OS04 OS03 OS02 OS01 OS00
module 16 points
module
ÅÅÅ

ÅÅÅ
32 points
ÅÅÅ
module
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
64 points
6 OS67 OS66 OS65 OS64 OS63 OS62 OS61 OS60 module
(3) Connecting drawing of the digital output module

Fig. H.2.5 (a) – (d) : Connecting drawing of OD32A, OD64A
Fig. H.2.5 (e) : Connecting drawing of OD08B, OD16B
Fig. H.2.5 (f) – (i) : Connecting drawing of OD32B, OD64B
Fig. H.2.5 (j) : Connecting drawing of OA08C, OD16C
Fig. H.2.5 (k) : Connecting drawing of OD08D, OD16D
Fig. H.2.5 (l) : Connecting drawing of OA08E, OD16E
501
Address in
ÅÅÅ
C21A
Å ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
module (16) OS00
↓ LOAD
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
0.0 Isolator
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ (32)
Å OS01
0.1
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
(48)
ÅÅ
OS02
0.2
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ
(15) OS03
0.3
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ (31) OS04

0.4
(47)
ÅÅ
OS05
0.5
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
(30) OS06
(Note)
0.6

ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
LOAD
0.7
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
(49) OCM0 (–) DC24V (+)
ÅÅÅÅ
to
DC48V (Note)
ÅÅÅÅ
(50) OCM0
(12)
Å OS10
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
LOAD
0.0
(28) OS11
0.1
(44) OS12
0.2
0.3 ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
(11)
ÅÅ OS13
(27) OS14
0.4
(43) OS15
0.5
(10)
ÅÅ OS16
ÅÅÅÅ
(Note)
(42) OS17
LOAD
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
0.7
(–) (+)
ÅÅÅÅ
(29) OCM1 DC24V
to
Å ÅÅÅÅ
DC48V (Note)
(45) OCM1
Fig. H.2.5 (a) Digital output module OD32A, OD64A (1)
NOTE
The polarity of the power supply can be the opposite. In this case, the direction of the surge
proof diode must also be set opposite.
502
Address in
ÅÅÅ
C21A
Å ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
module (07) OS20
↓ LOAD
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
2.0 Isolator
(24)
ÅÅ OS21
(39) OS22
2.2
(06) OS23
2.3
(23)
ÅÅ OS24
(38) OS25
2.5
(22) OS26
(Note)
2.6
ÅÅ OS27
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
LOAD
2.7
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
(40) OCM2 (–) DC24V (+)
ÅÅÅÅ
to
DC48V (Note)
(41) OCM2
3.0
(03) OS30
ÅÅÅÅLOAD
(20) OS31
3.1
(35) OS32
3.2
ÅÅ OS33
3.3
(19) OS34
3.4
(34) OS35
3.5
ÅÅ OS36
(Note)
3.6
(33) OS37
LOAD
3.7
(21) OCM3 (–) (+)
ÅÅÅÅ
DC24V
to
Å
DC48V (Note)
(36) OCM3
Fig. H.2.5 (b) Digital output module OD32A, OD64A (2)
NOTE
The polarity of the power supply can be the opposite. In this case, the direction of the surge
proof diode must also be set opposite.
503
Address in
ÅÅÅ
C21B
Å ÅÅÅÅ
Å ÅÅÅÅ
module (16) OS40
↓ LOAD
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
4.0 Isolator
(32)
ÅÅ OS41
(48) OS42
4.2
(15) OS43
4.3
(31)
ÅÅ OS44
(47) OS45
4.5
(30) OS46
(Note)
4.6
Å OS47
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
LOAD
4.7
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
(49) OCM4 (–) DC24V (+)
ÅÅÅÅ
to
DC48V (Note)
(50) OCM4
5.0
(12) OS50
ÅÅÅÅLOAD
(28) OS51
5.1
(44) OS52
5.2
ÅÅ OS53
5.3
(27) OS54
5.4
(43) OS55
5.5
ÅÅ OS56
(Note)
5.6
(42) OS57
LOAD
5.7
(29) OCM5 (–) (+)
ÅÅÅÅ
DC24V
to
Å
Circuit for OS40–OS57 is not (Note)
DC48V
mounted in case of OD32A. (45) OCM5
Fig. H.2.5 (c) Digital output module OD64A (3)
NOTE
The polarity of the power supply can be the opposite.
In this case, the direction of the surge proof diode must also be set opposite.
504
Address in
ÅÅÅ
C21B
Å ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
module (07) OS60
↓ LOAD
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
6.0 Isolator
Å OS61
6.1
(39)
ÅÅ
OS62
6.2
(06) OS63
6.3

6.4
(38)
ÅÅ
OS65
6.5
(22) OS66
(Note)
6.6

ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
LOAD
6.7
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
(40) OCM6 (–) DC24V (+)
ÅÅÅÅ
to
DC48V (Note)
ÅÅÅÅ
(41) OCM6
(03)
Å OS70
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
LOAD
7.0
(20) OS71
7.1
(35) OS72
7.2
(02)
ÅÅ OS73
(19) OS74
7.4
(34) OS75
7.5
(01)
ÅÅ OS76
ÅÅÅÅ
(Note)
(33) OS77
LOAD
7.7
(–) (+)
ÅÅÅÅ
(21) OCM7 DC24V
to
Å ÅÅÅÅ
Circuit for IS60 – IS77 is not (Note)
DC48V
mounted in case of OD32A. (36) OCM7
Fig. H.2.5 (d) Digital output module OD32A, OD64A (4)
NOTE
The polarity of the power supply can be the opposite.
In this case, the direction of the surge proof diode must also be set opposite.
505
ÅÅÅÅ Å ÅÅ 21 POW
ÅÅÅÅ
Å ÅÅÅÅ
Address in 1 OS00 LOAD
ÅÅÅÅ
module
ÅÅÅÅ
0.0 Isolator
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ Å ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
2 OS01
0.1
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ 3 OS02
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
0.2
4 OS03
0.3
3.2A
5 OCM1
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ Å 6 OS4
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
0.4
7 OS5
0.5
8 OS6
0.6
ÅÅÅÅ
0.7
Å
3.2A 10 OCM2
11 OS10
1.0
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
1.1
13 OS12
1.2
14 OS13
1.3
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ Å
Å
3.2A 15 OCM3
ÅÅÅÅ
16 OS14
1.4
ÅÅÅÅ
17 OS15
1.5
1.6
Å
18 OS16
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
19 OS17
1.7
ÅÅÅÅÅ
3.2A
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
20 OCM4
DC24V
(–) (+)
ÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
to
OS16 – OS17 can not be used for Fuse brown DC48V
ÅÅÅÅÅ
OD08B. detective
circuit
M3 screw
terminals
Fig. H.2.5 (e) Digital output module OD08B, OD16B
506
Å ÅÅÅÅ
Address in C21A
module (16) OS00
ÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
LOAD
ÅÅÅ
0.0 Isolator
(32)
ÅÅ OS01
(48) OS02
0.2
(15) OS03
0.3
ÅÅ OS04
0.4
(47) OS05
0.5
(30) OS06
0.6
0.7
(46) OS07
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
LOAD
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
(49) OCM0 (–) DC24V (+)
to
(50) OCM0
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
DC48V
(12)
ÅÅ OS10
ÅÅÅÅLOAD
(28) OS11
1.1
(44) OS12
1.2
ÅÅ OS13
1.3
(27) OS14
1.4
(43) OS15
1.5
ÅÅ OS16
1.6
(42) OS17
LOAD
1.7
(29) OCM1 (–) DC24V (+)
(45)
Å OCM1 ÅÅÅÅto
DC48V
Fig. H.2.5 (f) Digital output module OD32B, OD64B (1)
507
Å ÅÅÅÅ
Address in C21A
module (07) OS00
ÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
LOAD
ÅÅÅ
2.0 Isolator
(24)
ÅÅ OS01
(39) OS02
2.2
(06) OS03
2.3
ÅÅ OS04
2.4
(38) OS05
2.5
(22) OS06
2.6
2.7
(37) OS07
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
LOAD
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
(40) OCM2 (–) DC24V (+)
to
(41) OCM0
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
DC48V
(03)
ÅÅ OS10
ÅÅÅÅLOAD
(20) OS11
3.1
(35) OS12
3.2
ÅÅ OS13
3.3
(19) OS14
3.4
(34) OS15
3.5
ÅÅ OS16
3.6
(33) OS17
LOAD
3.7
(21) OCM1 (–) DC24V (+)
(36)
Å OCM1 ÅÅÅÅto
DC48V
Fig. H.2.5 (g) Digital output module OD32B, OD64B (2)
508
Å ÅÅÅÅ
Address in C21A
module (16) OS40
ÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
LOAD
ÅÅÅ
4.0 Isolator
(32)
ÅÅ OS41
(48) OS42
4.2
(15) OS43
4.3
ÅÅ OS44
4.4
(47) OS45
4.5
(30) OS46
4.6
4.7
(46) OS47
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
LOAD
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
(49) OCM4 (–) DC24V (+)
to
(50) OCM4
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
DC48V
(12)
ÅÅ OS50
ÅÅÅÅLOAD
(28) OS51
5.1
(44) OS52
5.2
ÅÅ OS53
5.3
(27) OS54
5.4
(43) OS55
5.5
ÅÅ OS56
5.6
(42) OS57
LOAD
5.7
(29) OCM5 (–) DC24V (+)
(45)
Å OCM5 ÅÅÅÅto
DC48V
Fig. H.2.5 (h) Digital output module OD64B (3)
509
Address in
ÅÅ
C21A
Å ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
module (16) OS60
↓
ÅÅÅÅ
LOAD
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
Isolator
6.0
(32)
ÅÅ OS61
(48) OS62
6.2
(15) OS63
6.3
ÅÅ OS64
6.4
(47) OS65
6.5
(30) OS66
6.6
6.7
(46) OS67
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
LOAD
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
(49) OCM6 (–) DC24V (+)
to
(50) OCM6
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
DC48V
(12)
ÅÅ OS70
ÅÅÅÅLOAD
(28) OS71
7.1
(44) OS72
7.2
ÅÅ OS73
7.3
(27) OS74
7.4
(43) OS75
7.5
ÅÅ OS76
7.6
(42) OS77
LOAD
7.7
(29) OCM7 (–) DC24V (+)
Circuit for OS60–OS77 is not

mounted in case of OD32B.
(45)
Å OCM7 ÅÅÅÅto
DC48V
Fig. H.2.5 (i) Digital output module OD64B (4)
510
ÅÅÅÅ Å ÅÅ 21 POW
ÅÅÅÅ
Å ÅÅÅÅ
Address in 1 OS00 LOAD
ÅÅÅÅ
module
ÅÅÅÅ
0.0 Isolator
ÅÅÅÅ
2 OS01
0.1
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ 3.2A 3 OS02

ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
0.2
4 OS03
0.3
3.2A
5 OCM1
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ Å 6 OS4
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
0.4
7 OS5
0.5
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ Å 3.2A
ÅÅÅÅ
8 OS6
0.6
ÅÅÅÅ
0.7
Å
3.2A 10 OCM2
11 OS10
1.0
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
1.1
3.2A 13 OS12
1.2
14 OS13
1.3
Å
3.2A 15 OCM3
ÅÅÅÅ
16 OS14
1.4
ÅÅÅÅ
17 OS15
1.5
1.6
Å
3.2A 18 OS16
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
19 OS17
1.7
ÅÅÅÅÅ
3.2A
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
20 OCM4
DC24V
(–) (+)
ÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
to
OS10 – OS17 can not be used for DC48V
Fuse brown
ÅÅÅÅÅ
OD08C.
detective
circuit M3 screw
terminal
Fig. H.2.5 (j) Digital output module OA08C, OD16C
511
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ Å ÅÅÅÅ
Address in
module
21 POW
ÅÅ ÅÅ Å ÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
1 OS00 LOAD
ÅÅ Å
0.0
ÅÅ
R
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ Å ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
2 OS01
0.1
3 OS02
ÅÅ Å
ÅÅÅÅ
0.2
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅ

4 OS03
0.3
6.3A 5 OCM1
ÅÅÅ
6 OS4
ÅÅ Å
ÅÅÅÅ
Å
0.4
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ Å
7 OS5
0.5
ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
8 OS6
0.6
9 OS7
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ ÅÅ
0.7
6.3A 10 OCM2
ÅÅÅ
11 OS10
1.0
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ 12 OS11
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ Å
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ Å
1.1
13 OS12
1.2
ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
14 OS13
1.3
6.3A 15 OCM3
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ Å
16 OS14
1.4
ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
17 OS15
1.5
18 OS16
ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
Å
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ Å
1.6
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
19 OS17
1.7
ÅÅÅÅÅ
6.3A 20 OCM4 ~
ÅÅ Å
ÅÅÅÅÅ
OS10 – OS17 can not be used for OA08B. AC100–120V, +10%, –15%
Fuse brown
ÅÅÅÅÅ detective
circuit M3 screw
terminal
Fig. H.2.5 (k) Digital output module OD08D, OD16D
512
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ Å ÅÅÅÅ
Address in
module
21 POW
ÅÅ ÅÅ Å ÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
1 OS00 LOAD
ÅÅ Å
0.0
ÅÅ
R
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ Å ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
2 OS01
0.1
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ 3.2A
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
3 OS02
ÅÅ Å
ÅÅÅÅ
0.2
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅ

4 OS03
0.3
3.2A 5 OCM1
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ Å Å ÅÅÅÅ
6 OS4
ÅÅ Å
ÅÅÅÅ
Å
0.4
7 OS5
0.5
3.2A
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
8 OS6
0.6
9 OS7
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ ÅÅ
0.7
3.2A 10 OCM2
ÅÅÅ
11 OS10
1.0
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ 12 OS11
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ Å
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ Å
1.1
3.2A 13 OS12
1.2
ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
14 OS13
1.3
3.2A 15 OCM3
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ Å
16 OS14
1.4
ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
17 OS15
1.5
3.2A 18 OS16
ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
Å
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ Å
1.6
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
19 OS17
1.7
ÅÅÅÅÅ
3.2A 20 OCM4
ÅÅ
~ Å
ÅÅÅÅÅ
OS10 – OS17 can not be used for OA08E. AC200–240V, +10%, –15%
Fuse brown
ÅÅÅÅÅ detective
circuit M3 screw
terminal
Fig. H.2.5 (l) Digital output module OA08E, OD16E
513
H.2.6 (1) Specification

Analog Input Module Module AD04A
Item
Input points 4 points/module
Analog inpout DC–10 to + 10V (Inpout resister 1MW)

DC–20 to + 20 mA (Input resister 250W)
can be selected.
Digital output 12 bit binary (complement of 2)
I/O correspondence
Analog input Digital output
+10V +2000
+5V or +20mA +1000
0V or 0mA 0
–5V or –20mA –1000
–10V –2000
Resolution 5mV, 20mA
Accuracy 0.5% or less
Response time (Note) 1mS or less
Max. inpout voltage/current 15%, 40 mA
Insulated Non–insulated
Exclusive input points 64 points (8 byte)
NOTE
Response time shown here is the delay time of module only.
The actual response time is the above value plus the
scanning time which is different in each system
configuration.
514
D Connection with analog (1) Outer view of analog input module

input module Analog input module is terminal board type, being housed in a plastic
case.
250mm
162mm
35mm
(2)Correspondence between analog input signal and address in the

module
In analog input unit AD04A, 4–channel analog input signals are
sequentially and cyclically A–D converted, and digital signals thus
obtained are written into the following addresses. Accordingly, each
analog input signal value can be known at any time by referring to the
following addresses in PMC program.
Address in
module
↓
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 –– –– –– –– IA11–0 IA10–0 IA09–0 IA08–0
0 IA07–0 IA06–0 IA05–0 IA04–0 IA03–0 IA02–0 IA01–0 IA00–0
3 –– –– –– –– IA11–1 IA10–1 IA09–1 IA08–1
5 –– –– –– –– IA11–2 IA10–2 IA09–2 IA08–2
7 –– –– –– –– IA11–3 IA10–3 IA09–3 IA08–3
515
D IA00–X corresponds to the weight of 20 and IA11–x corresponds

to the weight 211; provided that IA11–x corresponds to the sign
bitin two’s–compliment notation.
D Internal addresses correspond to analog input channels as follows:
Channel #0 . . . . Addresses 0 and 1
Channel #1 . . . . Addresses 2 and 3
Channel #2 . . . Addresses 4 and 5
Channel #3 . . . Addresses 6 and 7
NOTE
1 The same value as bit 3 value is written into bits 7–4 of
evenbytes in the above figure.
2 The start address of this module must be allocated to even
addresses when setting I/O module addresses.
When A/D converted values are referred to by a user
program, they should be read in the unit of word (16 bits)
without fail.
516
(3) Connecting drawing of analog input module
Voltage input AD04A (analog input module)
0
ÅÅ
VP1 1
Å
Channel #0
ÅÅ Å
±10V 1MW
IP1 2
ÅÅ ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
1MW
COM1 3
Note 1 250W
ÅÅ
FG1
ÅÅ
4
ÅÅ Å
Channel #1
VP2 5
ÅÅ Å
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅ
IP2 6 1MW
ÅÅ
COM2 7
ÅÅÅ 1MW
ÅÅ
250W Multiplexer
FG2 8
Current input A/D
AMP
ÅÅ
Converter
Channel #2
VP3 9
ÅÅÅÅ
0
ÅÅ
±10V 1MW
IP3 10
ÅÅ ÅÅÅ
ÅÅ
1MW
COM3 11
ÅÅ
Note 1. 250W
ÅÅ
VPn and IPn must FG3 12
always be connected
ÅÅ
shorter for current in-
put Channel #3
ÅÅ Å
VP4 13
ÅÅ
IP4 14
Å
ÅÅÅ
1MW
ÅÅ
COM4 15
ÅÅÅ
250W
1MW
ÅÅ
FG4 16
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
PG1 21
Connect to ground plate in

power magnetic cabinet
NOTE
Shielded twist pair cables (2 cores) are required as connecting cables.
517
H.2.7
Analog Output Module
D Specifications
Module DA02A DA03A
Item
Input points 2 points/module 3 points/module
Analog input –10 to + 10V DC

(External load resistance more than 10 kMW)
0 to +20mA DC
(External load resistance 0 to 500 W)
Selectively employable
Digital output 12–bit binary (Two’s–compliment notation)
I/O correspondence
Digital input Analog input
+2000 +10V
+1000 +5V or +20mA
0 0V or 0mA
–1000 –5V or –20mA
–2000 –10V
Resolution 5mV, 20mA
Accuracy Less than "0.5%
Response time (Note) Shorter than 1mS
No. of occupied output points "15%, 40 mA
Insulated Non–insulated
No. of occupied output points 32 points (4 byte) 48 points (6 byte)
NOTE
The response time shows the delay time of the module only.
Actual response time is obtained by adding the scan time
determined by the system configuration to the above value.
518
D Connection with the analog (1) Outer view of the analog output module
output module The analog output module is a terminal board type module housed
in a plastic case.
250mm
162mm
35mm
(2) Correspondence of the output signals and the analog address in the
module
In the analog output unit DA02A and DA03A by writing a 12–bit
digital value in the following address, the desired voltage or current
is output to the corresponding analog output. The assignment of the
digital output signal and its address is as follows:
Address in
module
↓
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 –– –– –– –– OA11–0 OA10–0 OA09–0 OA08–0
0 OA07–0 OA06–0 OA05–0 OA04–0 OA03–0 OA02–0 OA01–0 OA00–0
3 –– –– –– –– OA11–1 OA10–1 OA09–1 OA08–1
5 –– –– –– –– OA11–2 OA10–2 OA09–2 OA08–2
D OA00–x corresponds to the weight of 20, and OA11–x to 211.

Note that OA11–x corresponds to the sign bit in two’s–compliment
expression.
D The correspondence of the internal address and the analog output
channel is as follows:
Channel #0 . . . . . . Address 0 and 1
519
NOTE
1 When setting address of the I/O module, the head address
of this module must be assigned and even number address.
When writing the D/A–converting value from the user
program, writing must always be done in word (16 bits) unit.
2 In analog output module DA02A, the channel #2 cannot be
used.
520
(3) Connecting drawing of analog output module
DA02A/DA03A
Å
Voltage output
ÅÅ ÅÅ
1 VP1 Note 1.
Voltage
ÅÅ
AMP More
than
ÅÅ
Channel D/A 2 VN1 10KW
#0 converter Note 1.
Current 3 IP1
AMP
Å
Load impedance
10KW
4 IN1
5
Å
Voltage
AMP
6
ÅÅ VP2
ÅÅ
Channel D/A 7 VN2
#1 converter Voltage output
ÅÅ ÅÅ
Current 8 IP2
AMP
ÅÅ
Less
than
9 IN2 500W
Å
FG
10
Load impedance
Voltage
AMP
11
ÅVP3 500W
Channel
#2
D/A
Converter
12
ÅÅ
VN3
ÅÅ
Current
13 IP3
AMP
ÅÅ
14 IN3
15
Analog output module
NOTE
1 A 2 pair shielded cable must be used as connection cable. The shield must be connected to
the ground at the load side.
2 Channel #2 cannot be used in DA02A.
521
H.3
NC AND I/O UNIT
CONNECTION
H.3.1 Fig. H.3.1 (a) shows connection when only one group of I/O unit is used
I/O Unit Signal and Fig. H.3.1 (b) shows connection when two or more groups of I/O units
are used. It is necessary to set the group number of interface module
Connection Diagram IF01A according to the H.3.3.
H.3.2 Fig. H.3.2 (a) shows power connection when one I/O unit is used and
I/O Unit Power Fig. H.3.2 (b) shows power connection when two or more units are used.
When two or more I/O units are used, one power input unit may not have
Connection Diagram capacity enough to supply power to all I/O units. In such case it is required
to use an additional power input unit and additional number of power
connectors as shown in Fig. H.3.2 (b). The additional power input unit
should be mounted to the magnetic cabinet power on the machine side.
Fig. H.3.2 (c) shows signal cable connection between I/O unit.
NOTE
1 Use optical cables listed below.
Name Specification Length
Optical fiber cable A02B–0072–K801 5m
2 Max. length between NC and I/O unit is 200 m.
522
ÅÅ
10 1 0
I/O base unit

ÅÅ IF01B CA15
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅ
I/O module CA16
#3 MR50F
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅ
(IF01B used)
Power
Module
ÅÅÅ
J81
10 1 0
ÅÅ IF01B CA15
MR50M
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅ
I/O base unit I/O module CA16
#2
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅ
(IF01B used) I/O unit
Power Group #0
Module
ÅÅÅ J81
ÅÅ
10 1 0
ÅÅ IF01B CA15
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅ
#1
(IF01B used)
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅ
Power
Module
ÅÅÅ
J81
10 1 0
ÅÅ IF01A CA15
ÅÅÅÅ
#0
ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
(IF01A used)
Power
ÅÅ
Module
ÅÅÅ COP4
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
Optical fiber
cable
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
M25
N C
Fig. H.3.1 (a) I/O unit signal connection diagram (1) (In case of one group)
NOTE
Cable J81 must be 1.5 m or shorter.
Run wiring separately from the power supply and I/O module input signals.
523
I/O unit group #0 I/O unit group #1 I/O unit group #2 I/O unit group #3
10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0
NOTE
IF01B CA15 IF01B CA15 IF01B CA15 IF01B CA15
Å
Å
Å
Å
Å
Å
I/O base unit #3
(IF01B used)
Power
CA16
MR50F Power
CA16
Power
CA16
Å Power
CA16
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
than No. 0.
CONNECTION
J81 J81 J81 J81
module in wiring.
10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
IF01B CA15 IF01B CA15 IF01B CA15 IF01B CA15
Å
Å
Å
Å
Å
Å
Å
Power MR50M Power Power Power

I/O base unit #2 CA16 CA16 CA16
CA16
Å
ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ
Å ÅÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
(IF01B used)
J81 J81 J81 J81
10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
IF01B IF01B CA15 IF01B CA15 IF01B CA15
Å
Å
CA15
Power Power Power Power
I/O base unit #1 CA16 CA16 CA16
CA16
ÅÅ
Å
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ
Å
ÅÅÅÅ
Å
(IF01B used)
524
J81 J81 J81 J81
Interface module (Note 1)
APPENDIX
(IF04C)
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
I/O base unit #0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0

(IF01A used)
IF04C IF01A IF01A CA15 IF01A CA15 IF01A CA15
COP2D CA15
COP2D Power Power Power Power
COP2C
COP2C
Å
Å
Å
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
COP2B CA16 CA16 CA16 CA16

COP2B
COP2A
COP4 COP4 COP4 COP4 COP4
C OP4
COP2A
ÅÅÅ
Å
Å
Å
Å
Å
Å
Å
Å
Å
Å ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
Å ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
COP4 COP4 COP4 COP4
Optic
fiber
cable
M25
Optical fiber cable
Fig. H.3.1 (b) I/O unit signal connection diagram (2) (When several groups are employed)
N C
2 Cable J81 should be shorter than 1.5 m. It should be separated from I/O signal of power I/O
1 Interface module (IF04C) for optical interface expansion is mounted on base unit #0 in group 0
as example. Actually it can be mounted on any type of base unit and on arbitrary slot NO other
B–61393E/06
Crimp–style
Å ÅÅ
ÅÅ
terminal
M3
M3
ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
+24E
GND
ALC
ALD
Tap
M4
T1
Å
SMS6P–1
Å
ÅÅ
module
Å
ÅÅ
CP31
Power
Å
IF01A
PB
SMS6RA–2TK2
G
3
6
I/O unit
I/O module
PA
S
2
Japan FCI
CP31
R
1
4
ÅÅ ÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅÅ J74
J73
ÅÅ ÅÅÅ
SMS3PWS–5
SMS3PK–5
ÅÅ ÅÅ
CP6
CP5
SMS3RWS–4D28
SMS3RK–4TK2
G
3
3
Power input unit
ALD
S
2
2
Japan FCI
Japan FCI
(in NC unit)
CP5
CP6
ALC
R
1
Fig. H.3.2 (a) I/O unit power connection diagram (In case of one I/O unit)
CAUTION
Use 1.25 mm2 or larger wire to ground for GND terminal of T1.
NOTE
1 PA and PB of CP31 are not used.
2 Use 30/0.18 (0.75 mm) or larger wire for J73 and J74.
3 When the power unit containing the input unit is used, connect J73 to CP2, ALD of J74 to AL
of CP3 (SMS6RW–4D28), and ALC of J74 to OFF.
525
SMS6RA–2TK2
PB
G
3
6
PA
Japan FCI
S
2
5
CP91
R
1
To next I/O unit

J80
J80
J80
J80
ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
M3
M3
M3
M3
GND
GND
GND
GND
ALC
ALD
ALC
ALD
ALC
ALD
ALC
ALD
+24E
+24E
+24E
Å Å Å Å
+24E
ÅÅ
T1
T1
T1
T1
M4
M4
M4
M4
ÅÅ
Å Å Å Å
Power
Power
Power
Power
CP31
CP31
CP31
CP31
SMS6P–1
SMS6P–1
SMS6P–1
SMS6P–1
I/O module
I/O module
I/O module
I/O module
To next I/O unit CP31

J74
J73
J73
J73
J73
J82
SMS3PWS–5
SMS3PK–5
SMS3PK–5
Å Å ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ ÅÅ
CP92
CP93
CP94
CP95
CP6
CP92
CP5
SMS3PK–5
SMS3RWS–4D28
Å ÅÅ ÅÅ
SMS3PK5
SMS3RK–4TK2
SMS3RK–4TK2
SMS3RK–4TK2
G
G
3
G
3
Power input unit (inside NC)
Å ÅÅ ÅÅ
J82
CP92 CP96
CP91
CP96
CP91
ALC ALD
S
2
S
Japan FCI
2
2
Japan FCI
Japan FCI
Japan FCI
Additional Power
CP91
R
R
1
1
CP5
input unit
ÅÅÅÅ
INPUT
AC
M4
M4
R
S
Fig. H.3.2. (b) I/O unit power connection diagram (When several I/O units are employed)
CAUTION
GND terminal (T1) of I/O unit (max. 4 sets ) in one group is connected by the wire with cross
section more than 1.25 mm2.
NOTE
1 PA and PB in CP31 are not used.
2 Wires more than 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) are used for J73, 74 and 80.
3 One additional power input unit can control I/O unit power input. (Max. 4 sets)
4 Connector contact specification (made in Burndy)
1 Other than CP6 . . RC16M–SCT3
2 CP6 . . . . . . . . . . . . RC16M–23D28
526
(1) Connector
CA15 CA16
Honda Tsushin, MR–50LMH Honda Tsushin, MR–50LFH

(50–pin, male) (50–pin, female)
(2) Connection
CA15 CA16
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
Pin number Pin number
49
49 49
50 50
D Use twist pair wires for (1,2) , (3,4), (5,6), (7,8) ⋅⋅⋅ ⋅⋅⋅ ⋅⋅⋅ and (49,50).
(3) Wiring materials 25 pairs, vinyl coated cable, 7/0.18

(Reference) Specification of cable used by FANUC
(A66L–0001–0066)
No. of Conductor Finished Electric

cores O.D. characteristics
Conductor
Dia. (incl. insulator) Construction
resistance
25 pairs 1.05 mm 7/0.18 14 mm 110 W/km
527
H.3.3
Interface Module
Setting
D IF01A Setting I/O unit can be expanded to maximum 4 groups by a combination of the
interface module IF01A and IF04C. The setting terminal inside of the
IF01A should be set as follows according to the group number of IF01A.
(1) Position of setting terminal
Setting plug
Setting terminal Front

view
Interface module IF01A
(b) Setting method

IF04C IF01A group Setting
number
SH3 SH2 SH1
When IF04C is not used Group 0 f f
When IF04C is used Group 0 f f
Group 1 f
Group 2 f f
Group 3 f
Insert a setting plug to the setting terminals marked with f.

Other terminals without f should be open.
528
D IF04C setting IF04C has the same type of setting as IF01A should be set as follows
without fail. (Already set as follows at FANUC before shipment.)
Setting plug
Setting terminal
SH1 SH2 SH3
Setting method
Insert SH2 and SH3 to the setting plug. (SH1 is open.)
529
I. I/O Unit–MODEL A APPENDIX B–61393E/06
I I/O Unit–MODEL A
530
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX I. I/O Unit–MODEL A
I.1 The FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A (“I/O Unit”) is a modular–type I/O

unit. It interfaces the Series 0 with the machine via the I/O Link. One I/O
CONNECTION OF unit can be configured by mounting the I/O modules required for either
THE FANUC I/O the 5– or 10–slot base unit. A variety of I/O modules are provided so
Unit–MODEL A appropriate modules can be selected according to the use, points, voltage
level, current capacity, and signal specifications.
I.1.1
Structure of FANUC Base Unit ABU05A (5 slots) or ABU10A (10 slots)
I/O Unit–MODEL A
I/F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Various I/O modules (Up to 10 modules)

Interface module AIF01A or AIF01B
AIF01A is used for connection to FANUC I/O Link

AIF01B expands I/O Units in the same group.
I.1.2
Outer Dimensions
A (80) 142
130
90
B
20
ø5 (mounting hole)
A B
For 5–slot base unit (ABU05A) 253 238
For 10–slot base unit (ABU10A) 430 415
531
I.1.3 Interface modules and various types of I/O modules can be mounted to
Mounting and and dismounted from the base unit easily as shown below.
Dismounting Modules
Mounting
1 Hang the hook at the top of the module on the groove in the upper side
of the base unit.
2 Make the connector of the module engage with that of the base unit.
3 Push the module in the lower groove of the base unit till the stopper
in the lower side of the module stops.
Dismounting
1 Release the stopper by pushing the lever at the bottom of the module.
2 Push the module upwards.
532
I.1.4
Connection Diagram
Series 0
control unit
PMC–M
(Correspinded to
I/O–Link)
JD1A
Terminator TX
K1X I/O Unit–A I/O Unit–A

AIF01A AIF01B
JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
CP32 PC32
24VDC 24VDC
K2X
K1X
AIF01A AIF01B
JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
Max. S CP32 PC32

16 S
group S 24VDC 24VDC
K2X
K1X AIF01A AIF01B
JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
CP32 PC32
24VDC 24VDC
K2X
NOTE
1 Number of I/O Units and connecting method are restricted
depending on the allocation of the I/O points.
2 Cable K1X can be an optical fiber cable by using the optical
I/O link adapter.
533
I.1.5 Connect the following power source to the connector CP32 of the
Connecting Input interface module (AIF01A or AIF01B).
Power Source D Voltage : 24VDC10%
D Current : Determine from Table I.1.6.
Japan FCI, LTD. tripolar connector (Brown)

Housing : SMS3PNS–5
Contact : RC16M–SCT3
AIF01A/AIF01B
CP32
1 +24V
2 GND 24VDC
3
NOTE
Turn ON the power for the I/O unit just before or when the
power for the CNC is turned ON. When the CNC power is
turned OFF, make sure to turn the power to the I/O unit OFF
as well.
ON
Power for the
master device OFF
Power for the ON

I/O unit
OFF
t : more than –500ms

(Turn ON of the power for I/O unit can be late 500ms or less.)
534
I.1.6 D Ground the base unit (ABU05A, ABU10A) by its grounding terminal
Grounding
Base unit (ABU05A, ABU10A)
M4 Screw
terminal
D When the cable K1X (see connection diagram in section I.1.4) runs
between different cabinets, make sure to connect the cabinets with a
grounding wire more than 5.5 mm2.
Table I.1.6 Required current of each module

Required current (mA) of +24V
Mod le name
Module
A B
AIF01A 50
AIF01B 50
AIF32A 20+0.5n 30+7.5n
AIF32B 20+0.5n 30+7.5n
AIF16C 5
AIF16D 5
AIF32E 5
AIF32F 5
AIA16G 5+1.5n
AOD08C 5+2n
AOD08D 5+2n
AOD16C 5+2n
AOD16D 5+2n
AOD32C 5+0.5n
AOD32D 5+0.5n
AOA05E 5+5.5n
AOA08E 5+5.5n
AOA12F 5+4.5n
AOR08G 5 10n
AOR16G 5 10n
AAD04A 5 130
n : Number of the input and output points (for each module) which turn
ON simultaneously
D The rating (mA) of the module to be used can be obtained by adding
the corresponding values in the A and B columns.
D The current sum requirement for modules used in Column A should
not exceed 500 mA.
D The current sum requirement for modules used in Column B should
not exceed 1500 mA.
535
I.1.7 Details of the cables K1X, K2X and the terminator shown in the general
Connecting Signal connection diagram are as follows.
Cables
Cable K1X
Connector HONDA TSU-

CNC or AIF01A SHIN KOGYO CO., LTD. AIF01A
PCR–E20FS
JD1A JD1B
1 SIN 11 0V 1 SIN 11 0V
2 :SIN 12 0V 2 :SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 0V 3 SOUT 13 0V
4 :SOUT 14 0V 4 :SOUT 14 0V
5 15 5 15
6 16 6 16
7 17 7 17
8 18 8 18
9 19 9 19
10 20 10 20
Cable connection
JD1A JD1B
SIN (1) (3) SOUT

:SIN (2) (4) :SOUT
SOUT (3:) (1) SIN
SOUT (4) (2) :SIN
0V (11) (11) 0V
0V (12) (12) 0V
0V (13) (13) 0V
0V (14) (14) 0V
D Use twisted pair wires for signal SIN and *SIN, and signals SOUT and
*SOUT.
D Recommended cable material : A66L–0001–0284#10P
(twisted pair/shielded)
D Shielding wires should be connected with the grounding plate of the
cabinet at the JD1A side using a cable clamp.
D Maximum cable length: 10 m
D Do not make any wire connections to the connector spare pins.
D Use an optical I/O link adapter and an optical fiber cable, [in the
following cases] :
- When the cable is more than 10 meters long.
- When the cable runs between different cabinets and there is no
appropriate ground wire between the cabinets.
- When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong noise.
536
Cable K2X
Connector HONDA
AIF01A or TSUSHIN KOGYO CO.,
AIF01B AIF01B
LTD. PCR–E20FS
JD2 JD3
1 S1 11 S5 1 S1 11 S5
2 :S1 12 :S5 2 :S1 12 :S5
3 S2 13 S6 3 S2 13 S6
4 :S2 14 :S6 4 :S2 14 :S6
5 S3 15 0V 5 S3 15 0V
6 :S3 16 0V 6 :S3 16 0V
7 S4 17 ID2 7 S4 17 ID2
8 :S4 18 ID3 8 :S4 18 ID3
9 ID1 19 9 ID1 19
10 20 10 20
Cable connection
JD2 JD3
S1(1) (1) S1
:S1(2) (2) :S1
S2(3) (3) S2
:S2(4) (4) :S2
S3(5) (5) S3
:S3(6) (6) :S3
S4(7) (7) S4
:S4(8) (8) :S4
S5(11) (11) S5
:S5(12) (12) :S5
S6(13) (13) S6
:S6(14) (14) :S6
ID1(9) (9) ID1
ID2(17) (17) ID2
ID3(18) (18) ID3
0V(15) (15) 0V
0V(16) (16) 0V
D Connect the signals with the same name.

D Make sure to use twisted pair wires for the following signals:
S1 and *S1, S2 and *S2, S3 and *S3
S4 and *S4, S5 and *S5, S6 and *S6
D Do not connect the pins No. 10, No. 19 and No. 20, as they are used
internally.
D Recommended cable material : A66L – 0001 – 0284#10P
(twisted pair/shielded)
D Maximum cable length : 2 m
537
Terminator TX
AIF01B
JD2 Connector HONDA TSU-

SHIN KOGYO Co., LTD.
1 11 PCR–E20FS
2 12 TRM2
3 13
4 TRM1 14 TRM3
5 15
6 16
7 17 (a) Terminate the connector JD2 of
8 18 the last AIF01B in a single group
9 19 TRM2 with the terminator
10 TRM1 20 TRM3 (b) Short–circuit the TRM1 signals as
shown. Repeat the shorting pro-
cedure for signals TRM2 and
TRM3.
Cable connection
JD2
Shortting jumper
TRM1 (4)
TRM1 (10)
Shortting jumper
TRM2 (12)
TRM2 (19)
Shortting jumper
TRM3 (14)
TRM3 (20)
538
I.1.8 For an external connecting method, there are two types of I/O modules :
Connecting with I/O one with a terminal block, and one with a connector.
The terminal block is a removable type.
Modules
Terminal block type Connector type
Input/Output
display LED
A0 . . .7
B0 . . .7 Terminal
block cover
Connector
HONDA
TSUSHIN
KOGYO
CO., LTD.
MR–50RMA
M3.5 screw terminal (20 terminal)
Dismounting the
terminal block
1 Open the cover of the terminal block.
2 Push up the latch at the top of the terminal block.
3 Drag out the tab at the top of the terminal block and pull it out.
The terminal block will be removed from the module.
Mounting the terminal

block
1 Insert the protruding portion at the bottom of the terminal block in the
groove of the module side.
2 Push the terminal block using the engaging point of the protruding
portion and the groove as an axis and mount it in the module firmly.
3 Open the cover of the terminal block and check to make sure the latch
at the top of the terminal block is firmly set.
539
Cautionary points when D Wiring material : AWG22 – 18 (0.3 – 0.75mm2)

wiring terminal block A wire as thin as possible is recommended.
type D Crimp style terminal : M3.5
Crimp style terminal with no insulation sleeve
and a short distance “A”, as illustrated in the
drawing below, is recommended.
DAIDO SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG. CO., LTD 1.25–S3.5
NICHIFU EUROPE B.V 1.25–3.5S, etc.

NICHIFU AMERICA, INC.
D Mark tube : As short a mark tube as possible ; cover crimped part with
the mark tube.
I.1.9
Digital Input/Output
Module
Digital input modules
Input Module Rated Rated Response External LED
Polarity Points
type name voltage current time connection display
AID Maximum not
24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector
Non–insulation 32A 20ms provided
DC input AID Maximum not
32B 2ms provided
AID Maximum Terminal
24VDC 7.5mA NEG 16 provided
16C 20ms block
AID Maximum Terminal
Insulation 24VDC 7.5mA POS 16 provided
16D 20ms block
ty
typee DC
input AID Maximum not
32E 20ms provided
AID Maximum not
32F 2ms provided
AIA 100– 10.5mA ON Max 35ms Terminal
AC input 16 provided
16G 120VAC (120V AC) OFF Max 45ms block
NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative : 0 V common (current source type)
– The input is defined as ON when at a low level
Positive : 24 V common (current sink type)
– The input is defined as ON when at a high level
2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer to FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A
Connection⋅Maintenance Manual (B–61813E).
540
Digital output modules

Input Module Rated Rated Points External LED
Polarity Points Fuse
type name voltage current /common connection display
AOD 12–24VD Terminal
2A NEG 8 8 provided provided
08C C block
AOD Terminal
2A POS 8 8 provided provided
08D block
AOD Terminal not
Insulation 0.5A NEG 16 8 provided
16C block provided
ty e DC
type
output AOD Terminal not
0.5A POS 16 8 provided
16D block provided
AOD not not
0.3A NEG 32 8 Connector
32C provided provided
AOD not not
0.3A POS 32 8 Connector
32D provided provided
AOD 100– Terminal
2A – 5 1 provided provided
05E 240V block
AC
AOD Terminal
1A – 8 4 provided provided
AC output 08E block
100–
AOD Terminal
120V 0.5A – 12 6 provided provided
12F block
AC
AOR Maximum Terminal not
4A – 8 1 provided
Relay 08G 250VAC/ block provided
output 30VDC
AOR Terminal not
2A – 16 4 provided
16G block provided
NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative : 0 V common (current sink type)
– Output is at low level when ON.
Positive : 24 V common (current source type)
– Output is at high level when ON.
2. For the details of the specifications for each module, refer to FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A
Connection⋅Maintenance Manual (B–61813E).
541
I.1.10
Correspondence
between I/O Signals Bit
and Addresses in a Address in the
module
Module #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Module of 8
0 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 points
Module of 16
points
1 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
2 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
Module of
32 points
3 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Addresses in a module are defined relatively, with the beginning address

as 0. Real addresses viewed by the sequence program of the PMC are set
by the programmer.
For input modules, an input signal becomes “1” when the contact point
connected with the input is turned ON. For output modules, an output
contact point (or transistor) is turned ON when the output signal is “1”.
I.1.11 Determine the number of I/O points for the I/O Unit –MODEL A using
Number of Points for the following.
I/O Unit–MODEL A
D Output points
Sum of the actual output Occupied output points
points in a group
0 to 32 → 32 points
72 to 128 → 128 points
136 to 256 → 256 points
NOTE
Count AOA05E as 8 points and AOA12F as 16 points.
D Input points
Sum of the actual input Occupied input points
points in a group
72 to 128 → 128 points
136 to 256 → 256 points
As a result of the calculation above, when the number of input points is

smaller than that of the output points in a single group, the number of
input points is assumed to be equal to that of the output points.
542
Example 1:
When the following modules are used in the group No. 0
AOD32C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
AOA12F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
AID32A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
AIA16G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
[Input points]
325+163 = 208 → 256 points
[Output points]
323+162 = 128 → 128 points
Example 2:
When the following modules are used in the group No. 2.
AOD16C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
AOA05F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
AID16A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
AIA16G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
[Input points]
164+163 = 112 → 128 points
[Output points]
167+89 = 184 → 256 points
In this case, as the number of input points is smaller than that of the
output points, the number of input points is assumed to be equal to that
of the output points, in other words, 256 points.
543
J. CONNECTION OF CRT/MDI
UNIT FOR Series 00 APPENDIX B–61393E/06
J CONNECTION OF CRT/MDI UNIT FOR Series 00
544
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX UNIT FOR Series 00
J.1 The installation conditions and method for the CRT/MDI for the Series
00 are basically the same as in 9″ CRT/MDI unis. Therefore, refer to item
INSTALLATION 3 in the text. Follow this reference material, however, for the following
items.
D Cautions about heating This unit’s heating value is about 170 W. The pendant, etc. on which to
value mount this unit should be designed as follows so that the inside
temperature does not rise more than 15_C above the outside temperature.
(1) Heat absorber
The conventional 14″ CRT/MDI unit heat absorber has insufficient
radiation. A special heat absorber is available for this unit. (It is a little
different from the conventional 14″ CRT/MDI unit heat absorber in
size.)
(2) Air agitation fan in cabinet
An air agitation fan (1) should be installed at the position shown in the
figure below so that air flows between the printed circuit boards at
0.5m/sec. (A special fan unit is available.)
(1)
P C B C R T
Rear view
D The unit’s supporting (See section J.3 for external dimension.)

attachments should be
procured.
545
J.2
CONNECTION
J.2.1
General Connection
Diagram
Manual Manual Manual

pulse pulse pulse
Å Å ÅÅ
generator generator generator
No.2 unit No.3 unit
Å Å ÅÅ
No.1 unit
H20- F
CA3
CD13
14″ CRT/ MDI
M4
ÅÅ
M4
Å
BK6· F Battery
CA7 unit
Note
Type of connectors and terminals
CNC control unit M : Connector, male

F : Connector, female
CRT/MDI H20- F
CD13
adapter
H20 : Honda Tsushin, MR connector, 20–pin
BK3· F H34 : Honda Tsushin, MR connector, 34–pin
ÅÅ
CP3
BN6 : JAPAN FCI, 6–pin, brown
Input unit
ÅÅ
BK6 : JAPAN FCI, 6–pin, black
M4
TP2 BK3 : JAPAN FCI, 3–pin, black
Y50 : Yamaichi Denki, 50–pin for flat cable
M4 : M4 screw terminal
NOTE
Connection with the battery unit is necessary when using RAM file.
Connection with the battery unit on the CNC side is also possible.
546
J.2.2
Connector Layout
Drawing
View from the back of the CRT/MDI

Screw terminal block (M4)
547
J.2.3
Connection of the CNC
and the CRT/MDI
CNC CRT/ MDI

CD13
CD13 Signal
MRE20-RMA
MRE20-RMA
Input unit
M4 screw terminal
TP2 : M4 screw terminal
EON
ON
EOF
OFF
COM
COM
Å Power ON/OFF
ÅÅ ON1
ON
ON2
COM
OFF1
COM
OFF2
OFF
Remove the connection

attachment between EOF Shot using a short bar.
and COM when connecting
a cable.
Input unit SMS3PK-5 M4 screw terminal

CP3
ÅÅ 200A 200B G
ÅÅ
1 2 3 Power supply
200A 200B G 200A 200B G
CAUTION
A power cable 30/0.18 (0.75mm2) and over in gauge should be used.
NOTE
For the signal cable, see the next page.
548
CNC CRT/ MDI

1 10
2 11
5 14
6 15
8 18
9 19
10 1
11 2
14 5
15 6
28 8
19 9
7 7
NC earth plate
Wiring gauge : 7/0.18 (0.18mm2), twist pairl, entire shielding

Specification : A66L–0001–0041
549
J.2.4
Connection of the
CRT/MDI and Manual
Pulse Generators
CA3 MRE20-RMD
1 0V 14 Name of signal Description

8 HA1
2 0V 15 HA1 to 3 Manual pulse generator,
9 HB1 Phase A signal
3 0V 16
10 HA2 HB1 to 3 Manual pulse generator,
4 +5V 17 Phase B signal
11 HB2
5 +5V 18
12 HA3
6 +5V 19
13 HB3
7 20
CNC
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
Manual Pulse CA3 (8)
HA1 5
ÅÅ
Generator
CA3 (9)
ÅÅ
HB1 6
ÅÅ
CA3 (1) Manual Pulse
0V 4
Generator
ÅÅ
Power supply CA3 (4)
+5V 3 (1st M. P. G)
for M. P. G
HA2
CA3 (10)
ÅÅ
ÅÅ 5
HB2
CA3 (11)
CA3 (2) ÅÅ
ÅÅ
6
Manual Pulse
ÅÅ
0V 4
Generator
CA3 (5)
+5V 3 (2nd M. P. G)
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
CA3 (12)
HA3 5
HB3
CA3 (13)
CA3 (3)
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
6
Manual Pulse
ÅÅ
0V 4
Generator
ÅÅ
CA3 (6)
+5V 3 (3rd M. P. G)
PNC earth cable (Cable clamp)
550
NOTE
The manual pulse generator’s current drain is 95mA per unit. The +5–V and 0–V wire gauges
should be decided on so that the two–way voltage drop between the CRT/MDI and the manual
pulse generator is not over 0.25V.
J.2.5
Connection of the
CRT/MDI and the
Battery Unit
CRT/ MDI Battery unit

SMS6PK-5
CA7
Å M4 screw terminal
+
1 2
–
6
Å +
+

NOTE
1 Connection with the battery unit is necessary only when using RAM file.
2 A cable (3.4m) is attached to the battery unit for CRT/MDI.
3 Connection with the battery unit on the CNC side is also possible. In this case, the cable should
be manufactured by the machine tool builder.
Wire gauge : 30/0.18 (0.75mm2) and over twist pair, shielding
Connector contact : Gold–plated
4 The cable shielding should be shorted to the earth plate.
551
J.3
OUTER VIEW
J.3.1
Outer View of CRT/MDI
Unit
2–M4 (Bottom)
(Mounting hole
for stand) Air flow
(Mounting Dimension of Stand)
Color : Mancell N3 GS50 smooth finish
Stand
(Example)
Lack for air flow

Unit stand
(Example) Machining drawing
for mounting hole.
D Notices of mount 1) The calorific value of this unit is 170 W. Give careful consideration
to cooling at design. Specially, air is made flow at section with °
Mark in above drawings.
2) Consider the mounting of stand when mounting the unit.
552
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX K. CRT/MDI SWITCHING CIRCUIT
K CRT/MDI SWITCHING CIRCUIT
553
K. CRT/MDI SWITCHING CIRCUIT APPENDIX B–61393E/06
K.1
CRT/MDI SWITCHING
CIRCUIT
K.1.1 When a CRT/MDI switching circuit is used in a system featuring two
Overview Series 0–C (Series 0–Mate C) control units, the single CRT/MDI unit can
be switched between the two control units.
With the CRT/MDI switching circuit, a single control unit can be
switched between two CRT/MDI units. Section K.1.2 describes the
former use, while Section K.1.3 describes the latter use.
K.1.2 This operating manual describes the switching circuit connections when
When Connecting Two used to switch one CRT/MDI unit in a system using 2 control units.
Control Unit with One
CRT/MDI Unit
D Block diagram
CRT/MDI signal from A

Control unit A Switching printed board
Switching CRT/MDI
circuit UNIT
Control unit B
CRT/MDI signal from B
Switching signal
Selected CRT/MDI signal
switchover
switch
A B
Machine–side operation board
D Operation The CRT/MDI switching is performed by the switchover switch shown

above.
D Connection The switching printed board is installed in the CRT/MDI unit. There are
2 kinds of printed board for use with the small–size MDI and for use with
the full key MDI.
554
D Installation diagram (1) For small–size MDI
CRT/MDI UNIT
To connector CP 15 on the control
unit electric power section
To switchover switch on machine–side

operation board
Connector CCX5
(4)
To control unit B
Connector M3
Switching circuit printed board Connector CCX5
A20B–1003–0890 (4)
To control unit A
Connector M3
(2) For full–key MDI
CRT/MDI UNIT
To connector CP 15 on control unit

electric power section
To switchover switch on machine–side

operation board
Connector CCX5
(4)
To control unit B
Connector M3
Connector CCX5
(4)
Switching circuit printed board To control unit A
A20B–1003–0891 Connector M3
NOTE
Above is color CRT.
555
D Connection diagram (1) For monochrome CRT
Switching printed CRT/MDI

Electric board panel
power M3
K1 M3A
Control unit A
CP15 CCX5 CCXA
K2
(CCX4)
K3 CP51IN
M3S KM1
CP15 M3
K4 M3B
Electric
power Control unit B
CCX5 K5 CCXB
(CCX4)
Switchover switch
(machine–side operation board) K6 SW
CCXS
K8
F1
CP51OUT
This cable is installed at FANUC

CN1
K7
CN2
NOTE
1 Connect [CCX4] when using graphic card.
2 Select either K7 or K8 . When selecting K7 , specify either electric power unit B2 or electric
power unit C for the electric power of the control unit connected to CP51ITN.
3 In the case of 0–Mate C, be sure to select K8 .
556
(2) For color CRT
Switching printed CRT/MDI

board panel
Power
supply M3
K1 M3A
Control unit A
CP15 CCX4 K2 CCXA
K3 CP51IN
M3S KM1
CP15 M3
K4 M3B
Power
supply
Control unit B
CCX4 K5 CCXB
Switchover switch
(machine–side operation board) K6 SW
CCXS
F1
CP51OUT
This cable is installed at FANUC

(Only for assembly)
CN1
Input unit
CN2
CP5 K9
M4 screw terminal
M4 section terminal
557
D Points of caution about (1) The relationship between the switchover switch connection point and
connection the selected control unit is as shown below.
Connection Open ⋅⋅⋅ Select control unit A

point Open ⋅⋅⋅ Select control unit B
SW(18)
SW(19, 20)
(2) Prepare all the cables below at the machine manufacture
K1 K4 According to J27 (signal cable) in B.

CONNECTION CABLES AND
CONNECTORS. Cable length less than 50m.
K2 K5 According to J37 (signal cable for CRT) in B.

CONNECTION CABLES AND
K3 K7 K8
Use vinyl cable of more than 30/0.18 (0.8mm2).
Set according to J38 (input electric power cable)
in B. CONNECTION CABLES AND
CONNECTORS. Cable length 50m.
K6 Use vinyl cable of more than 30/0.18 (0.8mm2).

Use a cable length of less than 10m.
K9 Use vinyl cable of more than 30/0.18 (0.8mm2).

Set according to J40 (input electric power cable)
in B. CONNECTION CABLES AND
(3) Kind of connector
MR–20LFH (HONDA 20 pin female) SMS6PN–5(JAPAN FCI)
MR–20LMH(HONDA 20 pin male) SMS3PK–5(JAPAN FCI)
(4) Connet K3 to the electric power of either control unit A or B.
(5) When K8 is selected, connect to the electric power which is not
being used by the K3 cable.
558
D Application example When connecting one CRT/MDI unit with many Series 0–C or Series 0
Mate–C units.
When using the CRT/MDI switching circuit, it is possible to connect one
CRT/MDI unit or many Series 0–C or Series 0 Mate–C units. An example
is shown below of the connection for 5 units.
CRT/MDI
Switching signal Switching circuit printed board
M3S, CCXS
A SW CP51IN
M3A, CCXA M3B, CCXB
CN2
2 2
M3S, CCXS M3S, CCXS
B SW CP51IN C SW CP51IN
M3A, CCXA M3B, CCXB M3A, CCXA M3B, CCXB
2 2
2 2
M3S, CCXS
D SW CP51IN
M3A, CCXA M3B, CCXB
2 2
Series 0 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5
NOTE
1 /2 means the 2 signal cables (MDI key signal and CRT video signal)
2 The switching signal A, B, C and D are as shown in the below.
Switching signal No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5

A Ę Ę
B Ę
C Ę
D Ę
Ę : close
: open
559
K.1.3
When Connecting One
Series 0–C with Two
CRT/MDI Units
D Overview The following figure shows an example of connecting the Series 0–C
(Series 0 Mate–C) and two CRT/MDI units when using the units by
switching between them.
Control unit CRT/MDI signal

(FS0)
CRT/MDI
unit
CRT/MDI signal A
Changeover
CRT/MDI signal
circuit
CRT/MDI
unit
Changeover signal B
A B
Changeover switch on the
machine operator’s panel
NOTE
Order a changeover circuit for use with a small MDI unit.
D Operation The output of the CRT/MDI signal can be changed to either CRT/MDI
unit A or CRT/MDI unit B by using the above changeover switch.
NOTE
Only the CRT/MDI unit selected by the changeover switch
is enabled.
The unselected CRT display shows nothing, and no data
can be input from the MDI.
560
D Connection (1) Example of Connection for 9–inch monochrome CRTs
Control unit Changeover circuit CRT/MDI A
Power M3 C1 M3S M3A C3 KM1

supply
FS0
CCXA C4 CN1
CP15 CCX5
C2 CCXS
(CCX4)
CN2
K3 CP51 CP51 K7
IN OUT
CRT/MDI B
M3B C5 KM1
Changeover switch C7 SW
(on the machine
operator’s panel) CCXB C6 CN1
CN2
24 VDC P3
24 VDC P4
CAUTION
Be sure to select P4 for the FS0–Mate C.
NOTE
1 Connect CCX4 when the graphic card is used.
2 Select either K7 or P4 . If K7 is selected, specify power supply unit B2 or C as the power
supply to be used for the control unit.
561
(2) Example of Connection for color CRTs
Control unit Changeover circuit CRT/MDI A
Power M3
C1 M3S M3A C3 KM1
supply
FS0
CCXA C4 CN1
CP15 CCX5
C2 CCXS
(CCX4)
CN2
M4 crimp
terminal
CP51 CP51
K3
IN OUT
CRT/MDI B
M3B C5 KM1
Changeover switch
C7 SW
(on the machine
operator’s panel) CCXB C6 CN1
CN2
M4 crimp
terminal
200 VAC P5
200 VAC P6
NOTE
Connect CCX4 when the graphic card is used.
(3) Connectors
: MR–20LFH : MR–20LMH : SMS6PN–5

(Honda 20–pin female) (Honda 20–pin male) (Japan FCI)
562
(4) Changeover switch

(a) The following table shows the relationship between the contact
state of the changeover switch and selected CRT/MDI unit.
Contact Selection
Open CRT/MDI unit A is selected.
Close CRT/MDI unit B is selected.
(b) Contact circuit
SW(18)
SW(19, 20)
(5) Cables
The machine tool builder must prepare all the following cables.
C1 C3 C5
Conform to J27 (signal cable) in B.
CONNECTION CABLE AND CONNECTORS.
Each cable should be less than 50m long. Note that
only C1 has female connectors.
C2 C4 C6
Conform to J37 (CRT signal cable) in B.
Each cable should be less than 50m long.
C7 Polyvinyl chloride wire of 30/0.18 (0.8mm2).

This cable should be less than 10 m long.
P3 P4 Polyvinyl chloride wire of 30/0.18 (0.8mm2).

Conform to J38 (input power cable) in B.
Each cable should be less than 50 m long. Note that
the power supply connectors (terminals) may be
different.
P5 P6 Three polyvinyl chloride wires of 30/0.18

(0.8mm2).
Conform to J40 (input power cable) in the FS0
CONNECTING MANUAL (B–61393E). Each
cable should be less than 50 m long.
563
D External view diagram (1) MDI : Small–size
(2) MDI : Full–key
564
(3) Floor mounting type
D Arrangement There are 2 kinds of CRT/MDI switching circuit arrangement

specification specifications for the MDI small–size type and full–key type. When 2
control units are connected to one CRT/MDI unit being used normally, set
according to the MDI type. Other than this, when the earlier menitinoned
application example is used, arrange the necessary number.
MDI Arrangement
specifications
CRT/MDI SWITCHER Small–size A02B–0098–J122
CRT/MDI SWITCHER Full key A02B–0098–J123
Printed board unit Small–size A20B–1003–0890
Printed board unit Full key A20B–1003–0891
Floor mounting type Common to Small and A20B–1003–0770

Full key
565
D Precautions 1) Arrange the CRT/MDI unit according to the standard order list.
2) When the CRT and switching circuit electric power is taken from on
electric power unit by the K7 cable, specify either the electric power
unit B2 and C.
Electric power unit B2 :
A02B–0098–H012
Electric power unit C :
A02B–0098–H013
3) Do not use the CRT/MDI switching printed board when it is leaning

more than 30° from the vertical.
566
K.2
PDP/MDI SWITCHING
CIRCUIT
K.2.1 This PDP/MDI switching circuit corresponds to the switch of not only the
Overview Plasma display but also CRT, EL and PDP display.
Following are the examples of connection and adjustment for PDP.
K.2.2 Attach the switching circuit to the PDP/MDI unit. There are two kinds
Connection of switching circuit for small MDI and full–key MDI.
K.2.2.1 The PDP/MDI switching circuit is assembled to the back side of the MDI
Installation diagram unit as well as the case of CRT/MDI switching circuit.
K.2.2.2
Connection diagram
24V INPUT CP5IN

24V OUTPUT CP15
K1
Note 1) CONTROL
24V OUTPUT CP5OUT VIDEO SIGNAL
K2 CCX5 UNIT A
MDI SIGNAL
K3 M3
VIDEO SIGNAL JA1A
INPUT A
VIDEO SIGNAL JA1B VIDEO SIGNAL

K4 CCX5 CONTROL
INPUT B UNIT B
MDI SIGNAL
K5 M3
VIDEO SIGNAL JA1S
OUTPUT
SWITCHOVER SWITCH
SWITCHOVER SW K6
SIGNAL
MDI SIGNAL JA2A

INPUT A
MDI SIGNAL JA2B

INPUT B VIDEO SIGNAL
K7
MDI SIGNAL M3S

OUTPUT
(Note 2) MDI SIGNAL
SWITCHING CIRCUIT PDP/MDI UNIT
567
NOTE
1 When a graphic card is used, the connector name is different. (CCX4)
2 This connection does not use the cable. Directly connect the switching circuit to MDI unit.
K.2.2.3
Diagram of cable details
(1) K1
POWER UNIT SWITCHING CIRCUIT
CP15 CP5IN
(SMS 6RN–4) (AMP)
(3,4) (2)
0V 0V
(5,6) (1)
+24V +24V
Use two cables which are equal to or larger than 30/0.18 (0.8mm2).
Cable lenth to be 50m or shorter.
(2) K2 , K4 , K7
CONTROL UNIT SWITCHING CIRCUIT
CCX5(CCX4), CN1 JA1A, JA1B, JA1S

(MR–20LFH) (PCR–V20LA)
(01) (1)
RVDO RVDO
(08) (2)
0G 0G
(04) (3)
GVDO GVDO
(11) (4)
0G 0G
(05) (5)
BVDO BVDO
(12) (6)
0G 0G
(02) (18)
HSYN HSYN
(09) (16)
0V 0V
(03) (12)
VSYN VSYN
(10) (14)
0V 0V
Recommended cable
A66L–0001–0295 (20m or less in length) ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ small–capacity twist pair cable (IDC)
A66L–0001–0296 (20m or more in length) ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ coaxial cable
or A66L–0001–0371
A66L–0001–0371 is best.
568
(3) K3 , K5
CONTROL UNIT SWITCHING CIRCUIT
M3 JA2A, JA2B
(MR–20LFH) (PCR–V20LA)
(07) (01)
*SW00 *SW00
(13) (11)
*SW01 *SW01
(06) (02)
*SW02 *SW02
(12) (12)
*SW03 *SW03
(05) (03)
*SW04 *SW04
(11) (13)
*SW05 *SW05
(04) (04)
*SW06 *SW06
(10) (14)
*SW07 *SW07
(02) (05)
*KCM00 *KCM00
(03) (15)
*KCM01 *KCM01
(08) (06)
*KCM02 *KCM02
(09) (16)
*KCM03 *KCM03
(14) (07)
*KCM04 *KCM04
(15) (17)
*KCM05 *KCM05
(16) (08)
*KCM06 *KCM06
(17) (18)
*KCM07 *KCM07
(01) (09)
*KCM08 *KCM08
Recommended cable
A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWGX10 pair)
569
K.2.3 The relation between state of the contact point of the switchover switch
Selection Method and selected control units is as follows.
open ⋅⋅⋅ Control unit A is selected.

Contact point
close ⋅⋅⋅ Control unit B is selected.
Contact point
SW (12)
SW (14, 16)
K.2.4
Connector Table
JA1A, JA1B, JA1S (PCR–20P FEMALE)
10 20
9 19
8 18 HSYN
7 17
6 0G 16 0V
5 BVDO 15
4 0G 14 0V
3 GVDO 13
2 0G 12 VSYN
1 RVDO 11
JA2A, JA2B (PCR–20P FEMALE)
10 20
9 *KCM08 19
8 *KCM06 18 *KCM07
7 *KCM04 17 *KCM05
6 *KCM02 16 *KCM03
5 *KCM00 15 *KCM01
4 *SW06 14 *SW07
3 *SW04 13 *SW05
2 *SW02 12 *SW03
1 *SW00 11 *SW01
570
SW (PCR–20P FEMALE)
10 20
9 19
8 18
7 17
6 16 0V
5 15
4 14 0V
3 13
2 12 SELECT
1 11
CP5IN,CP5OUT (AMP D–3000 3P Y–KEY)
1 +24V
2 0V
M3S (MR–20P MALE)
14 *KCM04 01 *KCM08
08 *KCM02
15 *KCM05 02 *KCM00
09 *KCM03
16 *KCM06 03 *KCM01
10 *SW07
17 *KCM07 04 *SW06
11 *SW05
18 05 *SW04
12 *SW03
19 06 *SW02
13 *SW01
20 07 *SW00
571
K.2.5 (1) Select control unit A side. (switchover switch ¡¡open”)

Adjustment Method (2) Adjust a flat display.
(It is necessary this adjustment of PDP and EL unit to absorb a slight
difference of control unit and the utilization cable at use.)
A) Adjustment place
FINE
POWER SW1 SW2 POWER
UNIT UNIT
HP1
PDP/MDI(BACK SIDE) EL/MDI(BACK SIDE)
B) Adjustment method
a) Adjustment of flicker
1. PDP : Set switch SW1 or TM1
2. EL : Set switch FINE
Change setting. And, search for the range not generating the
flicker.
Set the switch at the center within the range when there are
several set values not generating the flicker in the screen.
b) Position setting of horizontal direction
1. PDP : Set switch SW2
2. EL : Set switch HP1
It is possible to move to the horizontal direction by every one
dot.
Please set the switch in the place where all displays can be done.
There is only one–placebest position. You need not change
setting when shipping usually.
c) Please do not change setting not listed above and volume, etc.
(3) Select control unit B side. (switchover switch ¡¡close”)
(4) Turn set switch SW1 of the this switching circuit. And, search for the
range not generating the flicker.
(5) Set switch at the center within the range of setting where the flicker is
not generated.
572
Example If you set and do not generate the flicker by 5–9, assume setting to be ¡¡7”.
SW1
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
NOTE
It is not necessary to adjust when use this switching circuit
to switch CRT.
573
K.2.6
External View
K.2.6.1
MDI : small
574
K.2.6.2
MDI : full key
575
K.2.7 There is two kinds of order specification of the PDP/MDI switching

Order Specification circuit (small MDI type and full key MDI type). And it has the one
attached to the back side of MDI unit individually and the one arranged
with the unit.
MDI ORDER SPECIFICATION
ATTACHED TYPE small A02B–0098–J124
ATTACHED TYPE full key A02B–0098–J125
UNIT small A02B–0098–C194
UNIT full key A02B–0098–C195
576
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX L. DETACHABLE CRT/MDI
L DETACHABLE CRT/MDI
577
L. DETACHABLE CRT/MDI APPENDIX B–61393E/06
L.1 The detachable CRT/MDI panel is a portable type CRT/MDI panel.

Normally it is detached, and when necessary it uses a cable connection to
OUTLINE the relay connector which is installed in the control panel on the machine
side.
Machine side control board
Relay connector
Control unit
J72
(CCX4) CCX5
J71
M3
J71
Detachable CRT/MDI
CP15
Approx. 1.5 m of cable is provided.
CAUTION
Set the position of the relay connector in a location which does not require cutting liquid or
cutting power.
NOTE
When not using the CRT/MDI panel, set so as to be able to protect the relay connector with the
protective cover.
578
L.2
ARRANGEMENT Detachable monochrome CRT/MDI unit
SPECIFICATIONS Item Arrangement specifications Remarks
1 A02B–0098–C121 Without software key for

Series 0–TC
2 A02B–0098–C122 With software key for

Series 0–TC
3 A02B–0099–C121 Without software key for

Series 0–MC
4 A02B–0099–C122 With software key for

Series 0–MC
L.3
EXTERNAL
DIMENSIONS
DIAGRAM
Rear view
of unit
Honda MR connector
210
20P×2
Cable length :
about 1.5 m
15
410 275
Panel color :
Weight : about 11 kg
579
L.4
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM
M51(MR–20RH)
Machine side control board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
+24 *CM0 *CM1 *SW6 *SW4 *SW2 *SW0
8 9 10 11 12 13
Control unit *CM2 *CM3 *SW7 *SW5 *SW3 *SW1
M3(MR–20RMD) 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
+24 *CM5 *CM6 *CM7 *CM4 0V 0V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
*CM0 *CM1 *SW6 *SW4 *SW2 *SW0
8 9 10 11 12 13
J71
*CM2 *CM3 *SW7 *SW5 *SW3 *SW1
J71
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
*CM4 *CM5 *CM6 *CM7
Detachable
(CCX4) CRT/MDI
CCX5(MR–20RMD) panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RVDO HSNC VSNC GVDO BVDO
8 9 10 11 12 13
J72
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
M52(MR–20RFH)
CP15(SMS6PN–5)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6
RVDO HSNC VSNC GVDO BVDO
0V 0V +24 +24
8 9 10 11 12 13
0V 0V 0V 0V 0V
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
NOTE
1 The J71 and J72 cables in the above diagram are produced by the machine manufacture.
2 Connect cable J72 to CCX4 when a graphic card is connected, and to CCX5 when there is no
graphic card.
580
L.5
DIAGRAM OF CABLE
DETAILS
Detachable CRT/MDI unit side Controller unit side

Cable J72
H20.M H20.F
(01) (01)
RVDO RVDO
(08) (08)
0V 0V
(02) (02)
HSYN HSYN
(09) (09)
0V 0V
(03) (03)
VSYN VSYN
(10) (10)
0V 0V
(04) (04)
GVDO GVDO
(11) (11)
0V 0V
(05) (05)
BVDO BVDO
(12) (12)
0V 0V
NOTE
For the J72 cable use a coaxial cable and set the cable length under 48 m. Recommended
cable specifications : A66L–0001–0219 or A66L–0001–0371 A66L–0001–0371 is the best.
Refer to L.6 DIAGRAM OF MATERIAL DETAILS.
581
Detachable CRT/MDI unit side Controller unit side
H20.F Cable J71 H20.F

(02) (02)
*KCM00 *KCM00
(03) (03)
*KCM01 *KCM01
(04) (04)
*SW06 *SW06
(05) (05)
*SW04 *SW04
(06) (06)
*SW02 *SW02
(07) (07)
*SW00 *SW00
(08) (08)
*KCM02 *KCM02
(09) (09)
*KCM03 *KCM03
(10) (10)
*SW07 *SW07
(11) (11)
*SW05 *SW05
(12) (12)
*SW03 *SW03
(13) (13)
*SW01 *SW01
(15) (15)
*KCM05 *KCM05
(16) (16)
*KCM06 *KCM06
(17) (17)
*KCM07 *KCM07
(18) (14)
*KCM04 *KCM04
(01)
+24V
(14)
+24V
(19)
0V
(05) SMS 6PN–5
(20) +24V
0V
(06)
+24V
(03)
0V
(04)
0V
CAUTION
For the 0V and +24V power lines. use material greater than 30/0.18 (0.8 mm2) and set the cable
length under 48 m.
NOTE
For the J71 cable, with the exception of the 0V and +24V power lines, use a collective shield
cable and set the cable length under 48m.
Recommended cable specifications : A66L–0001–0041
Refer to L.6 DIAGRAM OF MATERIAL DETAILS.
582
L.6
DIAGRAM OF
MATERIAL DETAILS
Details of cable material of A66L–0001–0219 Manufacture Hitachi Densen
Item unit Material and standard value
Cable type – C0–CX–75–5C
Number of cable cores Core 5
Conductor Size mm2 0.18
Composition Cable/mm 7/0.18 (Tinplate soft steel cable)
External diameter (approx.) mm 0.54
Insulator Material – Expanded polyethylene White color
Thickness mm 0.93
External diameter (approx.) mm 2.40
Shield Inner diameter mm 0.1 (Tinplate soft steel cable)

braiding
Density % 90
Thickness mm 0.25
Outer diameter (approx.) mm 2.90
Jacket Material – Vinyl
Color – Black, white, red, green, and blue
thickness mm 0.25
Outer diameter (approx.) mm 3.40
Cabling outer diameter mm 9.2
Press rolling mm 0.25
Sheath Material – Vinyl
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Color – Black
Thickness mm 0.5 Internal
conductor
Finishing outer diameter mm 10.3
Expanded
PE insulator
Maximum Finishing outer diameter mm 11.0
Ω/km
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ External
Conductor resistance (20_C) 110
conductor
Resistance voltage (A.C) V/1 min 1000 Vinyl
Separator
Insulator resistance (20_C) MΩ–km 1000
Characteristic impedance (10MHz)
Static electricity capacity (1kHz)

Ω
nF/km
753
56
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Vinyl sheath
Standard attenuation capacity (10MHz) dB/km 46
583
Detail of cable material of A66L–0001–0041

Conductor Electrical characteristics
g
Finishing
Sheath
Name outer
thickness Dynamic Permissible
Diameter Composition diameter
resistance current
Collective shield 20 core cable

∅0.55mm 7/0.18 1.5mm ∅10.0mm 110Ω/km 1.6A
(10 pairs)
584
M. POSITION CODER
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX SWITCHING CIRCUIT
M POSITION CODER SWITCHING CIRCUIT
585
M. POSITION CODER
SWITCHING CIRCUIT APPENDIX B–61393E/06
M.1 The position coder switching circuit is the circuit which can freely switch
the connections between a maximum of four position coder units and a
OUTLINE maximum of four CNC units.
Switching is performed by giving a 2 bit switching signal indicating

which position coder is to be connected to each CNC.
Therefore, there are a total of 8 switching signals.
WARNING
The switching is performed at such times as when the
spindle stop when the CNC is not using the position coder
signal.
Otherwise, the spindle may run out of control, resulting in
injury or damage to a tool or the machine.
When a cable disconnection has occurred between the switching circuit

and the position coder, the cable disconnection is detected in the CNC by
making the signal between the CNC selected by this position coder and
the switching circuit one of high impedance.
586
M. POSITION CODER
M.2
BLOCK DIAGRAM
Position coder switching circuit CPC1

+5V
J359
CPC2
Position
coder 1 M291 Switching circuit 1 CNC1 CPA5
M295 M27
Spindle J351
motor 1
J355
Switching circuit 2 CNC2

Position M292 M296 M27
coder 2
Spindle J352 J356
motor 2

Position M293 M297 M27
coder 3
Spindle J357
J353
motor 3

M298 M27
Position M294
coder 4 J358
Spindle J354
motor 4 Switching
signal
M290
ÔÔ J350
ÔÔ
Magnetics
cabinet
587
M. POSITION CODER
M.3
CONNECTION
EXPLANATION
M.3.1 (Specifications of connector is printed board side.)

Connection Signal
Arrangement of
Position Coder
M290 : MRH–20RFA(Switching signal)

01 SL1A 14 SL3A
08 0V
02 SL1B 15 SL3B
09 0V
03 SL2A 16 SL4A
10 0V
04 SL2B 17 SL4B
11 0V
05 18
12
06 19
13
07 20
M291 : MRH–20WRMA(Position coder 1) M295 : MRH–20WRMA(CNC1)

14 PCI1 01 0V 14 PC1 01 0V
08 OHI1 08 MOHO1
15 *PCI1 02 0V 15 *PC1 02 0V
09 OHB1 09 OHB1
16 PAI1 03 0V 16 PA1 03 0V
10 C8I1 10 C8O1
17 *PAI1 04 +5V 17 *PA1 04 +5V
11 C4I1 11 C4O1
18 PBI1 05 +5V 18 PB1 05 +5V
12 C2I1 12 C2O1
19 *PBI1 06 +5V 19 *PB1 06 +5V
13 C1I1 13 C1O1
20 OREQ1 07 20 REQI1 07

14 PCI2 01 0V 14 PC2 01 0V
08 OHI2 08 MOHO2
15 *PCI2 02 0V 15 *PC2 02 0V
09 OHB2 09 OHB2
16 PAI2 03 0V 16 PA2 03 0V
10 C8I2 10 C8O2
17 *PAI2 04 +5V 17 *PA2 04
11 C4I2 11 C4O2
18 PBI2 05 +5V 18 PB2 05
12 C2I2 12 C2O2
19 *PBI2 06 +5V 19 *PB2 06
13 C1I2 13 C1O2
20 OREQ2 07 20 REQI2 07
14 PCI3 01 0V 14 PC3 01 0V
08 OHI3 08 MOHO3
15 *PCI3 02 0V 15 *PC3 02 0V
09 OHB3 09 OHB3
16 PAI3 03 0V 16 PA3 03 0V
10 C8I3 10 C8O3
17 *PAI3 04 +5V 17 *PA3 04
11 C4I3 11 C4O3
18 PBI3 05 +5V 18 PB3 05
12 C2I3 12 C2O3
19 *PBI3 06 +5V 19 *PB3 06
13 C1I3 13 C1O3
20 OREQ3 07 20 REQI3 07
588
M. POSITION CODER

14 PCI4 01 0V 14 PC4 01 0V
08 OHI4 08 MOHO4
15 *PCI4 02 0V 15 *PC4 02 0V
09 OHB4 09 OHB4
16 PAI4 03 0V 16 PA4 03 0V
10 C8I4 10 C8O4
17 *PAI4 04 +5V 17 *PA4 04
11 C4I4 11 C4O4
18 PBI4 05 +5V 18 PB4 05
12 C2I4 12 C2O4
19 *PBI4 06 +5V 19 *PB4 06
13 C1I4 13 C1O4
20 OREQ4 07 20 REQI4 07
CPC1 : SMS6RN–3TK2(Power supply) CPC2 : SMS6RN–3TK2(Power supply)
6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1
+24V +24V 0V 0V +5V +5V +24V +24V 0V 0V +5V +5V
589
M. POSITION CODER
M.3.2 The switching signal specifies which position coder is to be connected to

Switching Signal each CNC.
Magnetics cabinet Position coder switching ciucuit

+5V
RSW1 3.3kΩ
J350 M290(01)
1 2 3 4 SEL1A SEL1A
RV
+5V
CNC1 3.3kΩ
SEL1B SEL1B M290(02)
RV
+5V
RSW2 3.3kΩ
1 2 3 4 SEL2A M290(03)
SEL2A
RV
+5V
CNC2 3.3kΩ
RV
+5V
RSW3 3.3kΩ
1 2 3 4 SEL3A SEL3A M290(14)
RV
+5V
CNC3 3.3kΩ
RV
+5V
RSW4 3.3kΩ
1 2 3 4 SEL4A M290(16)
SEL4A
RV
+5V
CNC4 3.3kΩ
RV
0V 0V M290(08, 09, 10, 11)
NOTE
Each the shield casing of the cable using the earth plate.
590
M. POSITION CODER
The relationship between the connection state and the switching signal is
shown in the table below.
CNC Position coder SEL1B SEL1A
Position coder 1
* *
(M291)
Position coder 2
* Ę
(M292)
CNC1
(M295) Position coder 3
Ę *
(M293)
Position coder 4
Ę Ę
(M294)
Position coder 1
* *
(M291)
Position coder 2
* Ę
(M292)
CNC2
Ę *
(M293)
Position coder 4
Ę Ę
(M294)
Position coder 1
* *
(M291)
Position coder 2
* Ę
(M292)
CNC3
Ę *
(M293)
Position coder 4
Ę Ę
(M294)
Position coder 1
* *
(M291)
Position coder 2
* Ę
(M292)
CNC4
Ę *
(M293)
Position coder 4
Ę Ę
(M294)
* : released
Ę : abbreviation of 0V
591
M. POSITION CODER
M.3.3
Connection between
Position Coder and
Switching Circuit
Position coder 1 Switching circuit
(A) PA1 J351 PA1 M291(16)
(N) *PA1 *PA1 M291(17)
(C) PB1 PB1 M291(18)
(R) *PB1 *PB1 M291(19)
(B) PC1 PC1 M291(14)
(P) *PC1 *PC1 M291(15)
(H) +5V +5V M291(04, 05, 06)
(K) 0V 0V M291(01, 02, 03)
NOTE
1 Also connect the position coder 2–4 and the switching circuits M292–M294 in accordance with
the above diagram.
2 Earth the shield casing of the cable using the earth plate.
3 Refer to the precautionary note in item M.5.2 concerning the cable material for +5V and 0V.
592
M. POSITION CODER
M.3.4
Connection between
Switching Circuit and
CNC
Switching circuit CNC1
M295(16) PA1 J355 PA1 M27(16)
M295(17) *PA1 *PA1 M27(17)
M295(18) PB1 PB1 M27(18)
M295(19) *PB1 :PB1 M27(19)
M295(14) PC1 PC1 M27(14)
M295(15) *PC1 *PC1 M27(15)
M295(04, 05, 06) +5V +5V M27(04, 05, 06)
M295(01, 02, 03) 0V 0V M27(01, 02, 03)
NOTE
1 Also connect the position coder 2–4 and the switching circuit M296–M298 in accordance with
the above diagram.
2 Earth the shield casing of the cable using the earth plate.
3 Refer to the precautionary note in item M.5.2 concerning the cable material for +5V and 0V.
593
M. POSITION CODER
M.4
EXTERNAL VIEW
Bind screw M4 17
Spacer details same as updown screw section
Spacer
NOTE
1 The position coder switching circuit is in the form of an option printed board as shown in the
above diagram. Install in the magnetics cabinet using the spacer in the vertical direction.
2 It can be installed in the CNC master printed board and, when other option printed boards which
have vacant slots and cables do not interfere, in master printed boards.
594
M. POSITION CODER
M.5
PRECAUTION
M.5.1 This supplies the +5V power source from the CNC1 (M295) for the
Power Unit position coder switching circuit and the position coders (1–4).
Therefore, specify power supply B2 or power supply C for the CNC1

power unit.
M.5.2 The position coder switching circuit and the potions coder (1–4) +5V
Cable Power Supply power source are supplied from the CNC1 (295).
Voltage Drop Select the cable material such that the voltage drop in the cables
(J351–J355) in the current circulation is under 0.2V.
However, because the conditions for J355 are strict, the +5V supply cable
J359 can also be specially installed.
In this case, connect the connector CPA5 in the CNC1 power unit lower
section master printed card and the CPC1.
The following shows the calculation method for the voltage drops in the
various position coders.
(2 [A] +0.35 [A]N)RJ355 [Ω]
VD=
Items common to position coders 1–4
0.35 [A]RJ [Ω]
+
Items to be calculated for each position coder
VD : Voltage drop [V]
N : Number of position coders
RJ355 : Circulation resistance value for circulation of +5V, 0V of cable
J355, or circulation resistance value of +5V, 0V of cable J359
when installing J359 [Ω]
RJ : Circulation resistance value [Ω] for circulation of +5V, 0V of
cable J351 or J354
595
M. POSITION CODER
M.5.3 As a noise countermeasure, separate the position coder switching circuit

Noise Countermeasure and cables J350–J359 by over 100 mm from the cables with over DC 50V
or in which AC power is impressed, or from the components.
Further, be certain to earth the signal cable shields using the earth plate
as shown in the diagram below.
Earth plate
Cable Cable
cramp
40 mm to 80 mm
596
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX N. MDI DESIGN FOR Series 0
N MDI DESIGN FOR Series 0
597
N. MDI DESIGN FOR Series 0 APPENDIX B–61393E/06
N.1 MDI key sheets, used with the CRT/MDI units of the Series 0–C, are
available in two types: the standard type and that qualifying for CE
OUTLINE marking (machine directive). The two types differ in their colors and
characters. This section summarizes the differences.
NOTE
Some Series 0 models qualify for CE marking while other do
not. The use of an MDI qualifying for CE marking does not,
therefore, always guarantee that the machine tool itself will
qualify for CE marking.
N.2 Both English–language and symbolic key sheets are supported by the
types qualifying for CE marking. See the table below and the figures on
CHARACTERS the subsequent pages.
598
N.3 The colors of those MDI key sheets that qualify for CE marking differ
from those of the standard MDI key sheets. See the table below and the
COLORS figures on the subsequent pages.
Item Reference
Small–size MDI For lathes Standard N1
CE marking English–language N2
Symbolic N3
For machining centers Standard N4
Symbolic N6
Small–size MDI color scheme Standard N7
CE marking N8
Full–key MDI For lathes Standard N9
Symbolic N11
For machining centers Standard N12
Symbolic N14
Full–key MDI color scheme Standard N15
CE marking N16
MDI for 14″ CRT For machining centers Standard N17
Symbolic N19
Color scheme of MDI for 14″ CRT Standard N20
CE marking N21
599
RESET
7 8 9 ALTER
O N G
4 5 6 INSRT
X Z F
CURSOR
1 2 3 DELET
U W R
– 0 /,#
M S T EOB
B K J
A I No. Q CAN
, C Y H V P
PAGE
MENU
POS PRGRM INPUT
OFSET
DGNOS OPR AUX OUTPT

PARAM ALARM GRAPH START
Fig. N1 Standard key sheet for small–size MDI for lathes
7 8 9 ALTER
O N G
4 5 6 INSRT
X Z F
CURSOR
1 2 3 DELET
U W R
– 0 /,#
M S T EOB
B K J
A I No. Q CAN
, C Y H V P
PAGE
MENU
POS PRGRM INPUT
OFSET
DGNOS OPR AUX OUTPT

Fig. N2 English–language key sheet for small–size MDI for lathes
600
7 8 9
O N G
4 5 6
X Z F
1 2 3
U W R
– 0 /,#
M S T EOB
B K J
A I No. Q
, C Y H V P
Fig. N3 Symbolic key sheet for small–size MDI for lathes
601
RESET
7 8 9 ALTER
O N G
4 5 6 INSRT
X Y Z
CURSOR
1 2 3 DELET
H F R
– 0 /,#
M S T EOB
D K L
4TH J No. Q CAN
B I P
PAGE
MENU
POS PRGRM INPUT
OFSET
DGNOS OPR AUX OUTPT

Fig. N4 Standard key sheet for small–size MDI for machining centers
7 8 9 ALTER
O N G
4 5 6 INSRT
X Y Z
CURSOR
1 2 3 DELET
H F R
– 0 /,#
M S T EOB
D K L
4TH J No. Q CAN
B I P
PAGE
MENU
POS PRGRM INPUT
OFSET
DGNOS OPR AUX OUTPT

Fig. N5 English–language key sheet for small–size MDI for machining centers
602
7 8 9
O N G
4 5 6
X Y Z
1 2 3
H F R
– 0 /,#
M S T EOB
D K L
4TH J No. Q
B I P
Fig. N6 Symbolic key sheet for small–size MDI for machining centers
603
MARK KEY TOP TEXT

RED
IVORY
MANSELL
DIC 946
5R4/14
Colors of other than key tops

BLUE IVORY
DIC 102 DIC 946 Base: Black (DIC 514)
Characters: Ivory (DIC 946)
GREEN IVORY
DIC 173 DIC 946
IVORY BLACK
DIC 946 DIC 514
Fig. N7 Small–size MDI color scheme (standard)
604
MARK KEY TOP TEXT
COOL GRAY BLACK

DIC 442 DIC 514
WARM GRAY BLACK Characters: White (Mansell 2.5Y 8.3/0.4)
WHITE
BLACK
MANSELL
DIC 514
2.5Y 8.3/0.4
Fig. N8 Small–size MDI color scheme (CE marking)
605
RESET O N G R 7 8 9 ALTER
( ) B C
X Z U W 4 5 6 INSRT
Y J V H
CURSOR
I K E F 1 2 3 DELET
, @ No.
M S T L – 0
# = : +
P Q D A / EOB CAN INPUT

[ ] SP
PAGE
SHIFT POS PRGRM OFSET MENU
DGNOS OPR AUX OUTPT

MACRO
Fig. N9 Standard key sheet for full–key MDI for lathes
O N G R 7 8 9 ALTER
( ) B C
X Z U W 4 5 6 INSRT
Y J V H
CURSOR
I K E F 1 2 3 DELET
, @ No.
M S T L – 0
# = : +
P Q D A / EOB CAN INPUT

[ ] SP
PAGE
DGNOS OPR AUX OUTPT

MACRO
Fig. N10 English–language key sheet for full–key MDI for lathes
606
O N G R 7 8 9
( ) B C
X Z U W 4 5 6
Y J V H
I K E F 1 2 3
, @ No.
M S T L – 0
# = : +
P Q D A / EOB
[ ] SP
Fig. N11 Symbolic key sheet for full–key MDI for lathes
607
RESET O N G R 7 8 9 ALTER
( ) E C
X Y Z 4TH 4 5 6 INSRT
U V W
CURSOR
I J K F 1 2 3 DELET
, A @ No.
M S T L – 0
# = : +
P Q D B / EOB CAN INPUT

[ ] H SP
PAGE
DGNOS OPR AUX OUTPT

MACRO
Fig. N12 Standard key sheet for full–key MDI for machining centers
O N G R 7 8 9 ALTER
( ) E C
X Y Z 4TH 4 5 6 INSRT
U V W
CURSOR
I J K F 1 2 3 DELET
, A @ No.
M S T L – 0
# = : +
P Q D B / EOB CAN INPUT

[ ] H SP
PAGE
DGNOS OPR AUX OUTPT

MACRO
Fig. N13 English–language key sheet for full–key MDI for machining centers
608
O N G R 7 8 9
( ) E C
X Y Z 4TH 4 5 6
U V W
I J K F 1 2 3
, A @ No.
M S T L – 0
# = : +
P Q D B / EOB
[ ] H SP
Fig. N14 Symbolic key sheet for full–key MDI for machining centers
609
MARK KEY TOP TEXT

RED
IVORY
MANSELL
DIC 946
5R4/14

BLUE IVORY
GREEN IVORY
DIC 173 DIC 946
IVORY BLACK
DIC 946 DIC 514
Fig. N15 Full–key MDI color scheme (standard)
610
MARK KEY TOP TEXT
COOL GRAY BLACK

DIC 442 DIC 514
WARM GRAY BLACK Base: Black (DIC 514)
DIC 518 DIC 514 Characters: White (Mansell 2.5Y 8.3/0.4)
WHITE
BLACK
MANSELL
DIC 514
2.5Y 8.3/0.4
Fig. N16 Full–key MDI color scheme (CE marking)
611
OUTPT
SHIFT
START
O N G R
( ) E C
X Y Z 4TH
U V W
I J K F
, A @ No.
M S T L
# = : +
P Q D B
[ ] H SP
CURSOR
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
PAGE
– 0
/ EOB CAN
ALTER INSRT DELET INPUT
POS PRGRM OFSET MENU
DGNOS OPR AUX

MACRO
PARAM ALARM GRAPH
Fig. N17 MDI for 14″ CRT for machining centers (standard)
612
OUTPT
SHIFT
START
O N G R
( ) E C
X Y Z 4TH
U V W
I J K F
, A @ No.
M S T L
# = : +
P Q D B
[ ] H SP
CURSOR
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
PAGE
– 0
/ EOB CAN
ALTER INSRT DELET INPUT
POS PRGRM OFSET MENU
DGNOS OPR AUX

MACRO
PARAM ALARM GRAPH
Fig. N18 MDI for 14″ CRT for machining centers (English–language)
613
O N G R
( ) E C
X Y Z 4TH
U V W
I J K F
, A @ No.
M S T L
# = : +
P Q D B
[ ] H SP
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
– 0
/ EOB
Fig. N19 MDI for 14″ CRT for machining centers (symbolic)
614
MARK KEY TOP TEXT

RED
IVORY
MANSELL
DIC 946
5R4/14
BLUE IVORY
DIC 102 DIC 946
GREEN IVORY
DIC 173 DIC 946
IVORY BLACK
DIC 946 DIC 514

Base: Black (DIC 514)
Fig. N20 Color scheme for MDI for 14″ CRT (standard)
615
MARK KEY TOP TEXT
COOL GRAY BLACK

DIC 442 DIC 514
WARM GRAY BLACK

DIC 518 DIC 514
WHITE
BLACK
MANSELL
DIC 514
2.5Y 8.3/0.4

Base: Black (DIC 514)
Characters: White (Mansell 2.5Y 8.3/0.4)
Fig. N21 Color scheme for MDI for 14″ CRT (CE marking)
616
O. INSTALLING CRT
B–61393E/06 APPENDIX PROTECTION COVERS
O INSTALLING CRT PROTECTION COVERS
Qualification for CE marking (machine directive) requires the installation

of CRT protection covers for the 9″ monochrome CRT. The top and rear
covers are installed at the factory. This section shows how to install the
bottom and side covers.
617
O. INSTALLING CRT
PROTECTION COVERS APPENDIX B–61393E/06
Bottom cover
Insert under the bracket.
Installing the bottom cover (bottom view)
Insert under the bracket.

Side cover Insert into the bracket.
Installing the side cover (side view)
CRT protection covers
618
B–61393E/06 Index
ƠSymbolsơ Connecting signal cables, 536
Connecting the display unit, 133
α servo amplifier module (type B interface) and β servo Connecting the display unit power supply, 138
amplifier module, 184 Connecting the MDI unit, 146
*0V1–*0V8 (X21.0–21.3) override signal, 368 Connecting the signal ground (SG) of the control unit, 28
*ESP (X21.4) emergency stop, 367 Connecting the soft key cable of a separate display unit, 141
*KEY (X21.7) program protect signal, 368 Connecting with I/O modules, 539
Connection, 245, 363, 434, 453, 546, 567
Connection between machines, 215
ƠAơ Connection between position coder and switching circuit, 592
A/B phase pulse coder (Built–in absolute pulse coder), 190 Connection between switching circuit and CNC, 593
A/B phase pulse coder interface, 186 Connection diagram, 124, 533, 567, 580
A/B phase separate pulse coder (separate absolute pulse coder), Connection drawing, 235
198
Connection explanation, 588
Action against noise, 25
Connection of CRT/MDI unit for Series 00, 544
Adding I/O points, 112
Connection of input unit Built–in type power unit (power
Additional I/O–B3, F3, 448 supply unit AI), 66
Adjusting the LCD, 144 Connection of machine interface I/O, 71
Adjustment method, 572 Connection of machine operator’s panel interface unit, 399
Analog input module, 514 Connection of peripheral equipment, 132
Analog input specifications, 213 Connection of power supply unit when the input unit is used, 59
Analog interface card, 211 Connection of tape reader with reels, 154
Analog output module, 518 Connection of tape reader without reels, 153
Analog spindle interface, 174 Connection of the battery unit for an absolute pulse coder, 206
Arrangement specifications, 579 Connection of the CNC and the CRT/MDI, 548
ASR33, 148 Connection of the control unit and operator’s panel connection
unit C1, 434
Connection of the CRT/MDI and manual pulse generators, 550
Connection of the CRT/MDI and the battery unit, 551
ƠBơ Connection of the FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A, 531
Battery for memory backup, 34 Connection of the input unit built–in power supply unit AI
(qualifying for CE marking), 68
Block diagram, 587
Connection of the internal I/O card, 73
Connection of the power supply unit A, B1, C (input unit
separate type), 57
ƠCơ Connection of the power unit without using input unit, 57
C series servo amplifier and α servo amplifier module (Type A Connection signal arrangement of position coder, 588
interface), 183
Connection to battery unit, 229
Cable clamp and shield processing, 30
Connection using the relay unit, 206
Cable for standard interface, 351
Connection without a relay unit, 207
Cable lead–in diagram, 37
Connections for spindle, 170
Cable power supply voltage drop, 595
Connector, 305
Characters, 598
Connector (on the cable side) specifications, 416
Colors, 599
Connector for interface (attached to cables), 346
Combination of axis cards for serial pulse coders and digital
servo functions, 210 Connector layout drawing, 547
Complete connection diagram, 41 Connector table, 570
Configuration, 4, 372 Control unit, 33
Configuration of the control unit, 33 Cooling by heat exchanger, 10
Configuration of the I/O unit, 468 Cooling fin A/B/C, 12

Correspondence between I/O signals and addresses in a
Connecting an I/O device, 147 module, 542
Connecting cables and connectors, 333 CRT/MDI switching circuit, 553, 554
Connecting input power source, 534
i–1
INDEX B–61393EN/06
ƠDơ ƠHơ
Description of I/O module connection, 466 Half pitch 20–pin interface connectors and cables, 354
Descriptions on signals, 83 Handling of the command connectors of unused axes, 208
Design and installation conditions of the machine tool magnetic Handling of the feedback connectors of unused axes, 209
cabinet, 8 Handling of unused axes (clamping), 208
Detachable CRT/MDI, 577 Heat exchanger for 14” CRT/MDI unit (Series 00), 17
Detailed drawing of connection cable for mode 1 (Multi–point), Heat loss of each unit, 11
237
High–speed DI signal interface, 169
Detailed drawing of connection cable for mode 2 High–speed, high–resolution A/B phase pulse coder (20000P to
(Point–to–point), 240 30000P, 24 m/min) (Built–in incremental pulse coder), 188
Detailed drawing of connector for mode 1 (Multi–point), 236 High–speed, high–resolution A/B phase separate pulse coder
Detailed drawing of connector for mode 2 (Point–to–point), 239 (20000P to 30000P, 24 m/min) (separate incremental pulse
coder), 195
DI/DO addresses, 128
Diagram of cable details, 568, 581
Diagram of material details, 583 ƠI ơ
Digital input module, 479 I/O module data, 128
Digital input/output module, 540 I/O unit power connection diagram, 522
Digital output module, 495 I/O unit signal connection diagram, 522
Dimensions, 465 I/O Unit–MODEL A, 530
DNC1 interface, 230 Input/output signal assignment on FANUC I/O Link, 464
Input/output signal standards, 450
Installation, 6, 545
ƠE ơ Installation condition of CNC and servo unit, 7

Installation diagram, 567
Emergency stop signal, 247 Installation position, 214
Emergency, over–ride, protect key, 362 Installing CRT protection covers, 617
Explanations for operator’s panel, 372 Installing the heat exchanger, 12
External configuration of mounting, 232 Installing to the P.C. board, 221
External configuration of mounting for control section A, 232 Installing to the P.C. board in case of control unit A, 221
External configuration of mounting for control section B, 233 Installing to the P.C. board in case of control unit B, 221
External configuration of tap and terminal resistor unit, 242 Interface, 404
External dimension, 447 Interface cable (our supply), 336

Interface module setting, 528
External dimensions diagram, 579
External dimensions of various units, 251
External environmental requirements of cabinet, 7
ƠKơ
External view, 574, 594
KD0–KD7 (X20.0–20.7) KA0–KA3 (X22.0–22.3), KST
(X22.7) LD0–LD7 (Y51.0–51.7) RSV1–RSV3 (X21.5,
X22.4–22.5), 368
ƠF ơ
Key board address, 370
Key switch signal, 362
F292–F299, G242–G249, 368
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE connection, 152
Function overview, 399 ƠL ơ
Fuse mounting position, 420 LED signal, 362
Low–resolution A/B phase pulse coder (2000P to 3000P)
(Built–in incremental pulse coder), 186
ƠGơ
Low–resolution A/B phase separate pulse coder, 193
Low–speed, high–resolution A/B phase pulse coder (10000P to
General connection diagram, 546 25000P, 12m/min) (Built–in incremental pulse coder), 187
General description of operation, 361
Ground, 27
Grounding, 535
ƠM ơ
Machine interface signal standard, 73
i–2
B–61393E/06 INDEX
Machine operator’s panel, 359 Power supply unit, 55

Machine operator’s panel interface unit dimension diagram Power unit, 595
(including connector locations), 417
PPR connection, 150
Machine operator’s panel interface unit mounting dimension
diagram, 418 Precaution, 595
Major connection precautions, 415 Precautions, 42
Manual pulse generator interface, 166 Printed board for operator’s panel controller (for FANUC I/O
Link), 398
MDI : full key, 575
Printed board mounting, 234
MDI : small, 574
Printed circuit board mounting for control section A, 234
MDI design for Series 0, 597
Printed circuit board mounting for control section B, 234
MDI unit interface, 146
Module addresses, 476
Mounting and dismounting modules, 532
ƠRơ
Mounting of reader/puncher, 385
Reader/punch interface, 147
Remote buffer interface (including FANUC DNC2 interface),
218
ƠNơ Remote buffer interface (RS–232–C), 224
NC and I/O unit connection, 522 Remote buffer interface (RS–422), 226
Noise countermeasure, 596 Restrictions, 244
Noise suppressor, 29 RS–232–C interface specification, 155
Number of points for I/O Unit–MODEL A, 542
ƠS ơ
ƠOơ S series servo amplifier, 182
Selection method, 570
ON/OFF switch on the display unit, 141
Self–diagnostic function, 369
Operation, 361
Separating signal lines, 25
Operator’s panel connection signals, 367
Serial pulse coder A or B, 203
Optical I/O Link adaptor, 129
Serial pulse coder C (model 0S or above) α series motor
Option card 1, 421 (α3/3000 to α150/2000), 204
Order specification, 576 Serial pulse coder C (model 1–0S to 0–0SP) α series motor (α
Order specifications, 231 1/3000, α2/2000, or 2/3000), 205
Outer dimensions, 531 Serial pulse coder interface, 203
Outer view, 552 Serial spindle interface, 172

Series 0–C operator’s panel connection unit C1, 432
Outer view of CRT/MDI unit, 552
Series 0–TTC system, 243
Outline drawing, 222
Servo connections, 176
Outline drawing in case of control unit A, 222
Setting of I/O signals, 433
Outline drawing in case of control unit B, 223
Setting of operator’s panel availability in registering PMC
Overall connection example for mode 1 (Multi–point), 235 ladder program, 371
Overall connection example for mode 2 (Point–to–point), 238 Signal assignment, 401
Signal connection between operator’s panel connection unit C1
and machine side, 435
ƠP ơ Signal connection with power magnetic cabinet, 83

State of the LEDs on the machine operator’s panel interface
Parameters related to the reader/punch interface, 164 unit, 415
PCB for machine operator’s panel control, 387 Status display LED, 369
PDP/MDI switching circuit, 567 Structure of FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A, 531
PMC addresses, 414 Switching signal, 590
Portable tape reader connection, 151 System configuration, 400
Position coder interface, 175 System using FANUC I/O Link, 123
Position coder switching circuit, 585 System using the PMC, 102
Power source, 56 System without FANUC I/O Link, 112
i–3
INDEX B–61393EN/06
System without PMC, 80

ƠUơ
Unit of CNC, 252
ƠT ơ
Table of cable, 334 ƠV ơ
Temperature rise within the cabinet, 10 Video signal interface, 134
Test mode, 369
The heat pipe type heat exchanger, 21
Thermal design of the cabinet, 10 ƠWơ
Turning the power on and off, 127 When connecting one Series 0–C with two CRT/MDI units, 560
Types of I/O modules, 474 When connecting two control unit with one CRT/MDI unit, 554
i–4
Revision Record
Series 0/00/0 Mate CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) (B–61393E)
Addition
06 Sep., ’98 S Series 0–D/0–DII
Correction of errors
03 Sep., ’91 Errors in writing were corrected.
05 Jul., ’97 All pages are changed.
Addition Addition
S APPENDIX 12 CRT/MDI SWITCHING CIRCUIT S 9″ superfine color CRT/MDI unit
S APPENDIX 13 Series 0–C DETACHABLE CRT/MDI S PMC–M with FANUC I/O Link
S APPENDIX 14 PCB FOR MACHINE OPERATOR’S S Additional I/O–B3
PANEL CONTROL S Operator’s panel connection unit C1
S APPENDIX 15 ANALOG INTERFACE S PDP/MDI switching circuit
02 Nov., ’89 S APPENDIX 16 Series 0 REMOTE BUFFER S New cables and connectors
S APPENDIX 17 POSITION CODER SWITCHING S APPENDIX 20 AXIS CONTROL PCBs FOR SERVO
CIRCUIT MOTOR WITH SERIAL PULSE CODER
S APPENDIX 18 HIGH–SPEED CYCLE MACHINING 04 Feb., ’92 S APPENDIX 21 DNC1 CONNECTION
FUNCTION
S APPENDIX 22 REMOTE BUFFER FOR CONTROL
S APPENDIX 19 SERIAL SPINDLE COUPLING UNIT A
EXPLANATION
S APPENDIX 23 SERIES 0–C OPERATOR’S PANEL
CONNECTION UNIT C1
S APPENDIX 24 MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL
CONTROL PCB (DESIGNED FOR USE
WITH A FANUC I/O LINK)
01 Oct., ’88
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

· No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.
· All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

A16b 1310 0010 01 Power Unit Fanuc Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A16b 1310 0010 01 Power Unit Fanuc Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A16b 1310 0010 01 Power Unit Fanuc Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DATASHEET

RGB ELEKTRONIKA AGACIAK CIACIEK

Jana Dlugosza 2-6 Street

Buy this product at RGB AUTOMATYKA BUY ∠

Computer Numerical Control Products

Connection Manual (Hardware)

GFZ-61393E/06 September 1998

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

©Copyright 1998 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

4. COMPLETE CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

6. CONNECTION OF MACHINE INTERFACE I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

6.2.3 Descriptions on Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

7. CONNECTION OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

8. CONNECTIONS FOR SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

9. SERVO CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

10.ANALOG INTERFACE CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

11.REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (INCLUDING FANUC DNC2 INTERFACE) . . . 218

12.DNC1 INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

12.5.3 Detailed Drawing of Connection Cable for Mode 1 (Multi–point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

13.SERIES 0–TTC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

14.EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

B. CONNECTING CABLES AND CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

C. HALF PITCH 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . 354

D. MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

D.7.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

E. PRINTED BOARD FOR OPERATOR’S PANEL CONTROLLER

F. SERIES 0–C OPERATOR’S PANEL CONNECTION UNIT C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

G. ADDITIONAL I/O–B3, F3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

H. DESCRIPTION OF I/O MODULE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

I. I/O UNIT–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

J. CONNECTION OF CRT/MDI UNIT FOR SERIES 00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

K. CRT/MDI SWITCHING CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553

L. DETACHABLE CRT/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

M. POSITION CODER SWITCHING CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

N. MDI DESIGN FOR SERIES 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

O. INSTALLING CRT PROTECTION COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617

This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications required

The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are :

Product Name Abbreviations

FANUC Series 0–TC 0–TC

FANUC Series 0/00/0–Mate DESCRIPTIONS B–61392E

FANUC Series 0–TD/MD DESCRIPTIONS B–62542EN

FANUC Series 0/00/0–Mate CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B–61393E *

The following figure shows the configuration of the electrical system of

Machine tool magnetic cabinet

Operator’s Machine opera-

Relay connector (7.3)

Control unit Power Sensor /

3.2 Room temperature

INSTALLATION In storage or transportation –20°C to +60°C

Power capacity of Depends on servo motor type.

3.4 When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditions

D For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required between

Basic unit 80W Included each printed

Graphic 14W Included manual pulse 2

SUB CPU 14W